diff options
Diffstat (limited to '')
115 files changed, 13711 insertions, 7699 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/3c509.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/3c509.txt deleted file mode 100644 index fbf722e15ac3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/3c509.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,213 +0,0 @@ -Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions -of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file. - -release 1.0 -28 February 2002 -Current maintainer (corrections to): - David Ruggiero <jdr@farfalle.com> - ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -(0) Introduction - -The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series -ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used -card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't -be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905" -(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series. Kernel support for the 3c509 family is -provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following -models: - - 3c509 (original ISA card) - 3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex) - 3c589 (PCMCIA) - 3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex) - 3c579 (EISA) - -Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide -written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master -copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver, -currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/. - - -(1) Special Driver Features - -Overriding card settings - -The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR, -IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be -needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax -for LILO parameters for doing this: - - ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0 - -This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and -transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts -with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is -loaded as a module, only the IRQ may be overridden. For example, -setting two cards to IRQ10 and IRQ11 is done by using the irq module -option: - - options 3c509 irq=10,11 - - -(2) Full-duplex mode - -The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities. -In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions -must be met: - -(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full- -duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are -positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B -(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support -full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original -3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus). - -(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45 -connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces. -AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex -operation. - -(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is -itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full- -duplex-capable Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on -another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable. - -Full-duplex mode can be enabled using 'ethtool'. - -/////Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode///// -Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more -limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although -at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation, -the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way) -spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not -auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any -circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode -of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be -independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty -failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet -collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto- -negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch -would ever be necessary or desirable. - - -(3) Available Transceiver Types - -For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are: - -0 transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex -1 AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector) -2 (undefined) -3 10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector) -4 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode -8 transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings -12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode - -Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note -that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable -full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be. -This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would -never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation; -it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be -activated. - -The transceiver type can be changed using 'ethtool'. - - -(4a) Interpretation of error messages and common problems - -Error Messages - -eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011. -These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much -work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving -packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare -or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are: - - - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no - keyboard activity. - - - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts. - Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick - interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others. - -No received packets -If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never -receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely -have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the -card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not -increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to -use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10 -or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different -interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work, -you have a routing problem. - -Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev -If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors" -field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you -likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected. - -3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS. -While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work -with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied -setup program. - -3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines -Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500, -to an absurdly high value, such as 5000. - - -(4b) Decoding Status and Error Messages - -The bits in the main status register are: - -value description -0x01 Interrupt latch -0x02 Tx overrun, or Rx underrun -0x04 Tx complete -0x08 Tx FIFO room available -0x10 A complete Rx packet has arrived -0x20 A Rx packet has started to arrive -0x40 The driver has requested an interrupt -0x80 Statistics counter nearly full - -The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are: - -value description -0x02 Out-of-window collision. -0x04 Status stack overflow (normally impossible). -0x08 16 collisions. -0x10 Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth). -0x20 Tx jabber. -0x40 Tx interrupt requested. -0x80 Status is valid (this should always be set). - - -When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as - - eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82 - -The two values typically seen here are: - -0x82 -Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet -host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network. - -0x88 -16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy -or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this -error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set -to full duplex (see above). - -Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be -corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction. - - -(5) Revision history (this file) - -28Feb02 v1.0 DR New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 587f3fcfbcae..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,448 +0,0 @@ -Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt -Andrew Morton -30 April 2000 - - -This document describes the usage and errata of the 3Com "Vortex" device -driver for Linux, 3c59x.c. - -The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com> - -Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver. -Please report problems to one or more of: - - Andrew Morton - Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org> - Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> - -Please note the 'Reporting and Diagnosing Problems' section at the end -of this file. - - -Since kernel 2.3.99-pre6, this driver incorporates the support for the -3c575-series Cardbus cards which used to be handled by 3c575_cb.c. - -This driver supports the following hardware: - - 3c590 Vortex 10Mbps - 3c592 EISA 10Mbps Demon/Vortex - 3c597 EISA Fast Demon/Vortex - 3c595 Vortex 100baseTx - 3c595 Vortex 100baseT4 - 3c595 Vortex 100base-MII - 3c900 Boomerang 10baseT - 3c900 Boomerang 10Mbps Combo - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPO - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps Combo - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPC - 3c900B-FL Cyclone 10base-FL - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseTx - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseT4 - 3c905B Cyclone 100baseTx - 3c905B Cyclone 10/100/BNC - 3c905B-FX Cyclone 100baseFx - 3c905C Tornado - 3c920B-EMB-WNM (ATI Radeon 9100 IGP) - 3c980 Cyclone - 3c980C Python-T - 3cSOHO100-TX Hurricane - 3c555 Laptop Hurricane - 3c556 Laptop Tornado - 3c556B Laptop Hurricane - 3c575 [Megahertz] 10/100 LAN CardBus - 3c575 Boomerang CardBus - 3CCFE575BT Cyclone CardBus - 3CCFE575CT Tornado CardBus - 3CCFE656 Cyclone CardBus - 3CCFEM656B Cyclone+Winmodem CardBus - 3CXFEM656C Tornado+Winmodem CardBus - 3c450 HomePNA Tornado - 3c920 Tornado - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port A - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port B - 3c905B-T4 - 3c920B-EMB-WNM Tornado - -Module parameters -================= - -There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when -its module is loaded. These are usually placed in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf -configuration files. Example: - -options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300 - -If you are using the PCMCIA tools (cardmgr) then the options may be -placed in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts: - -module "3c59x" opts "debug=3 rx_copybreak=300" - - -The supported parameters are: - -debug=N - - Where N is a number from 0 to 7. Anything above 3 produces a lot - of output in your system logs. debug=1 is default. - -options=N1,N2,N3,... - - Each number in the list provides an option to the corresponding - network card. So if you have two 3c905's and you wish to provide - them with option 0x204 you would use: - - options=0x204,0x204 - - The individual options are composed of a number of bitfields which - have the following meanings: - - Possible media type settings - 0 10baseT - 1 10Mbs AUI - 2 undefined - 3 10base2 (BNC) - 4 100base-TX - 5 100base-FX - 6 MII (Media Independent Interface) - 7 Use default setting from EEPROM - 8 Autonegotiate - 9 External MII - 10 Use default setting from EEPROM - - When generating a value for the 'options' setting, the above media - selection values may be OR'ed (or added to) the following: - - 0x8000 Set driver debugging level to 7 - 0x4000 Set driver debugging level to 2 - 0x0400 Enable Wake-on-LAN - 0x0200 Force full duplex mode. - 0x0010 Bus-master enable bit (Old Vortex cards only) - - For example: - - insmod 3c59x options=0x204 - - will force full-duplex 100base-TX, rather than allowing the usual - autonegotiation. - -global_options=N - - Sets the `options' parameter for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. - Entries in the `options' array above will override any setting of - this. - -full_duplex=N1,N2,N3... - - Similar to bit 9 of 'options'. Forces the corresponding card into - full-duplex mode. Please use this in preference to the `options' - parameter. - - In fact, please don't use this at all! You're better off getting - autonegotiation working properly. - -global_full_duplex=N1 - - Sets full duplex mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries - in the `full_duplex' array above will override any setting of this. - -flow_ctrl=N1,N2,N3... - - Use 802.3x MAC-layer flow control. The 3com cards only support the - PAUSE command, which means that they will stop sending packets for a - short period if they receive a PAUSE frame from the link partner. - - The driver only allows flow control on a link which is operating in - full duplex mode. - - This feature does not appear to work on the 3c905 - only 3c905B and - 3c905C have been tested. - - The 3com cards appear to only respond to PAUSE frames which are - sent to the reserved destination address of 01:80:c2:00:00:01. They - do not honour PAUSE frames which are sent to the station MAC address. - -rx_copybreak=M - - The driver preallocates 32 full-sized (1536 byte) network buffers - for receiving. When a packet arrives, the driver has to decide - whether to leave the packet in its full-sized buffer, or to allocate - a smaller buffer and copy the packet across into it. - - This is a speed/space tradeoff. - - The value of rx_copybreak is used to decide when to make the copy. - If the packet size is less than rx_copybreak, the packet is copied. - The default value for rx_copybreak is 200 bytes. - -max_interrupt_work=N - - The driver's interrupt service routine can handle many receive and - transmit packets in a single invocation. It does this in a loop. - The value of max_interrupt_work governs how many times the interrupt - service routine will loop. The default value is 32 loops. If this - is exceeded the interrupt service routine gives up and generates a - warning message "eth0: Too much work in interrupt". - -hw_checksums=N1,N2,N3,... - - Recent 3com NICs are able to generate IPv4, TCP and UDP checksums - in hardware. Linux has used the Rx checksumming for a long time. - The "zero copy" patch which is planned for the 2.4 kernel series - allows you to make use of the NIC's DMA scatter/gather and transmit - checksumming as well. - - The driver is set up so that, when the zerocopy patch is applied, - all Tornado and Cyclone devices will use S/G and Tx checksums. - - This module parameter has been provided so you can override this - decision. If you think that Tx checksums are causing a problem, you - may disable the feature with `hw_checksums=0'. - - If you think your NIC should be performing Tx checksumming and the - driver isn't enabling it, you can force the use of hardware Tx - checksumming with `hw_checksums=1'. - - The driver drops a message in the logfiles to indicate whether or - not it is using hardware scatter/gather and hardware Tx checksums. - - Scatter/gather and hardware checksums provide considerable - performance improvement for the sendfile() system call, but a small - decrease in throughput for send(). There is no effect upon receive - efficiency. - -compaq_ioaddr=N -compaq_irq=N -compaq_device_id=N - - "Variables to work-around the Compaq PCI BIOS32 problem".... - -watchdog=N - - Sets the time duration (in milliseconds) after which the kernel - decides that the transmitter has become stuck and needs to be reset. - This is mainly for debugging purposes, although it may be advantageous - to increase this value on LANs which have very high collision rates. - The default value is 5000 (5.0 seconds). - -enable_wol=N1,N2,N3,... - - Enable Wake-on-LAN support for the relevant interface. Donald - Becker's `ether-wake' application may be used to wake suspended - machines. - - Also enables the NIC's power management support. - -global_enable_wol=N - - Sets enable_wol mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries in - the `enable_wol' array above will override any setting of this. - -Media selection ---------------- - -A number of the older NICs such as the 3c590 and 3c900 series have -10base2 and AUI interfaces. - -Prior to January, 2001 this driver would autoeselect the 10base2 or AUI -port if it didn't detect activity on the 10baseT port. It would then -get stuck on the 10base2 port and a driver reload was necessary to -switch back to 10baseT. This behaviour could not be prevented with a -module option override. - -Later (current) versions of the driver _do_ support locking of the -media type. So if you load the driver module with - - modprobe 3c59x options=0 - -it will permanently select the 10baseT port. Automatic selection of -other media types does not occur. - - -Transmit error, Tx status register 82 -------------------------------------- - -This is a common error which is almost always caused by another host on -the same network being in full-duplex mode, while this host is in -half-duplex mode. You need to find that other host and make it run in -half-duplex mode or fix this host to run in full-duplex mode. - -As a last resort, you can force the 3c59x driver into full-duplex mode -with - - options 3c59x full_duplex=1 - -but this has to be viewed as a workaround for broken network gear and -should only really be used for equipment which cannot autonegotiate. - - -Additional resources --------------------- - -Details of the device driver implementation are at the top of the source file. - -Additional documentation is available at Don Becker's Linux Drivers site: - - http://www.scyld.com/vortex.html - -Donald Becker's driver development site: - - http://www.scyld.com/network.html - -Donald's vortex-diag program is useful for inspecting the NIC's state: - - http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html - -Donald's mii-diag program may be used for inspecting and manipulating -the NIC's Media Independent Interface subsystem: - - http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html#mii-diag - -Donald's wake-on-LAN page: - - http://www.scyld.com/wakeonlan.html - -3Com's DOS-based application for setting up the NICs EEPROMs: - - ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe - - -Autonegotiation notes ---------------------- - - The driver uses a one-minute heartbeat for adapting to changes in - the external LAN environment if link is up and 5 seconds if link is down. - This means that when, for example, a machine is unplugged from a hubbed - 10baseT LAN plugged into a switched 100baseT LAN, the throughput - will be quite dreadful for up to sixty seconds. Be patient. - - Cisco interoperability note from Walter Wong <wcw+@CMU.EDU>: - - On a side note, adding HAS_NWAY seems to share a problem with the - Cisco 6509 switch. Specifically, you need to change the spanning - tree parameter for the port the machine is plugged into to 'portfast' - mode. Otherwise, the negotiation fails. This has been an issue - we've noticed for a while but haven't had the time to track down. - - Cisco switches (Jeff Busch <jbusch@deja.com>) - - My "standard config" for ports to which PC's/servers connect directly: - - interface FastEthernet0/N - description machinename - load-interval 30 - spanning-tree portfast - - If autonegotiation is a problem, you may need to specify "speed - 100" and "duplex full" as well (or "speed 10" and "duplex half"). - - WARNING: DO NOT hook up hubs/switches/bridges to these - specially-configured ports! The switch will become very confused. - - -Reporting and diagnosing problems ---------------------------------- - -Maintainers find that accurate and complete problem reports are -invaluable in resolving driver problems. We are frequently not able to -reproduce problems and must rely on your patience and efforts to get to -the bottom of the problem. - -If you believe you have a driver problem here are some of the -steps you should take: - -- Is it really a driver problem? - - Eliminate some variables: try different cards, different - computers, different cables, different ports on the switch/hub, - different versions of the kernel or of the driver, etc. - -- OK, it's a driver problem. - - You need to generate a report. Typically this is an email to the - maintainer and/or netdev@vger.kernel.org. The maintainer's - email address will be in the driver source or in the MAINTAINERS file. - -- The contents of your report will vary a lot depending upon the - problem. If it's a kernel crash then you should refer to the - admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst file. - - But for most problems it is useful to provide the following: - - o Kernel version, driver version - - o A copy of the banner message which the driver generates when - it is initialised. For example: - - eth0: 3Com PCI 3c905C Tornado at 0xa400, 00:50:da:6a:88:f0, IRQ 19 - 8K byte-wide RAM 5:3 Rx:Tx split, autoselect/Autonegotiate interface. - MII transceiver found at address 24, status 782d. - Enabling bus-master transmits and whole-frame receives. - - NOTE: You must provide the `debug=2' modprobe option to generate - a full detection message. Please do this: - - modprobe 3c59x debug=2 - - o If it is a PCI device, the relevant output from 'lspci -vx', eg: - - 00:09.0 Ethernet controller: 3Com Corporation 3c905C-TX [Fast Etherlink] (rev 74) - Subsystem: 3Com Corporation: Unknown device 9200 - Flags: bus master, medium devsel, latency 32, IRQ 19 - I/O ports at a400 [size=128] - Memory at db000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128] - Expansion ROM at <unassigned> [disabled] [size=128K] - Capabilities: [dc] Power Management version 2 - 00: b7 10 00 92 07 00 10 02 74 00 00 02 08 20 00 00 - 10: 01 a4 00 00 00 00 00 db 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 b7 10 00 10 - 30: 00 00 00 00 dc 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 01 0a 0a - - o A description of the environment: 10baseT? 100baseT? - full/half duplex? switched or hubbed? - - o Any additional module parameters which you may be providing to the driver. - - o Any kernel logs which are produced. The more the merrier. - If this is a large file and you are sending your report to a - mailing list, mention that you have the logfile, but don't send - it. If you're reporting direct to the maintainer then just send - it. - - To ensure that all kernel logs are available, add the - following line to /etc/syslog.conf: - - kern.* /var/log/messages - - Then restart syslogd with: - - /etc/rc.d/init.d/syslog restart - - (The above may vary, depending upon which Linux distribution you use). - - o If your problem is reproducible then that's great. Try the - following: - - 1) Increase the debug level. Usually this is done via: - - a) modprobe driver debug=7 - b) In /etc/modprobe.d/driver.conf: - options driver debug=7 - - 2) Recreate the problem with the higher debug level, - send all logs to the maintainer. - - 3) Download you card's diagnostic tool from Donald - Becker's website <http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html>. - Download mii-diag.c as well. Build these. - - a) Run 'vortex-diag -aaee' and 'mii-diag -v' when the card is - working correctly. Save the output. - - b) Run the above commands when the card is malfunctioning. Send - both sets of output. - -Finally, please be patient and be prepared to do some work. You may -end up working on this problem for a week or more as the maintainer -asks more questions, asks for more tests, asks for patches to be -applied, etc. At the end of it all, the problem may even remain -unresolved. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/amazon/ena.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/amazon/ena.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1bb55c7b604c..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/amazon/ena.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,308 +0,0 @@ -Linux kernel driver for Elastic Network Adapter (ENA) family: -============================================================= - -Overview: -========= -ENA is a networking interface designed to make good use of modern CPU -features and system architectures. - -The ENA device exposes a lightweight management interface with a -minimal set of memory mapped registers and extendable command set -through an Admin Queue. - -The driver supports a range of ENA devices, is link-speed independent -(i.e., the same driver is used for 10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc.), and has -a negotiated and extendable feature set. - -Some ENA devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for both the -SR-IOV Physical Function (PF) and Virtual Function (VF) devices. - -ENA devices enable high speed and low overhead network traffic -processing by providing multiple Tx/Rx queue pairs (the maximum number -is advertised by the device via the Admin Queue), a dedicated MSI-X -interrupt vector per Tx/Rx queue pair, adaptive interrupt moderation, -and CPU cacheline optimized data placement. - -The ENA driver supports industry standard TCP/IP offload features such -as checksum offload and TCP transmit segmentation offload (TSO). -Receive-side scaling (RSS) is supported for multi-core scaling. - -The ENA driver and its corresponding devices implement health -monitoring mechanisms such as watchdog, enabling the device and driver -to recover in a manner transparent to the application, as well as -debug logs. - -Some of the ENA devices support a working mode called Low-latency -Queue (LLQ), which saves several more microseconds. - -Supported PCI vendor ID/device IDs: -=================================== -1d0f:0ec2 - ENA PF -1d0f:1ec2 - ENA PF with LLQ support -1d0f:ec20 - ENA VF -1d0f:ec21 - ENA VF with LLQ support - -ENA Source Code Directory Structure: -==================================== -ena_com.[ch] - Management communication layer. This layer is - responsible for the handling all the management - (admin) communication between the device and the - driver. -ena_eth_com.[ch] - Tx/Rx data path. -ena_admin_defs.h - Definition of ENA management interface. -ena_eth_io_defs.h - Definition of ENA data path interface. -ena_common_defs.h - Common definitions for ena_com layer. -ena_regs_defs.h - Definition of ENA PCI memory-mapped (MMIO) registers. -ena_netdev.[ch] - Main Linux kernel driver. -ena_syfsfs.[ch] - Sysfs files. -ena_ethtool.c - ethtool callbacks. -ena_pci_id_tbl.h - Supported device IDs. - -Management Interface: -===================== -ENA management interface is exposed by means of: -- PCIe Configuration Space -- Device Registers -- Admin Queue (AQ) and Admin Completion Queue (ACQ) -- Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) - -ENA device MMIO Registers are accessed only during driver -initialization and are not involved in further normal device -operation. - -AQ is used for submitting management commands, and the -results/responses are reported asynchronously through ACQ. - -ENA introduces a small set of management commands with room for -vendor-specific extensions. Most of the management operations are -framed in a generic Get/Set feature command. - -The following admin queue commands are supported: -- Create I/O submission queue -- Create I/O completion queue -- Destroy I/O submission queue -- Destroy I/O completion queue -- Get feature -- Set feature -- Configure AENQ -- Get statistics - -Refer to ena_admin_defs.h for the list of supported Get/Set Feature -properties. - -The Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) is a uni-directional -queue used by the ENA device to send to the driver events that cannot -be reported using ACQ. AENQ events are subdivided into groups. Each -group may have multiple syndromes, as shown below - -The events are: - Group Syndrome - Link state change - X - - Fatal error - X - - Notification Suspend traffic - Notification Resume traffic - Keep-Alive - X - - -ACQ and AENQ share the same MSI-X vector. - -Keep-Alive is a special mechanism that allows monitoring of the -device's health. The driver maintains a watchdog (WD) handler which, -if fired, logs the current state and statistics then resets and -restarts the ENA device and driver. A Keep-Alive event is delivered by -the device every second. The driver re-arms the WD upon reception of a -Keep-Alive event. A missed Keep-Alive event causes the WD handler to -fire. - -Data Path Interface: -==================== -I/O operations are based on Tx and Rx Submission Queues (Tx SQ and Rx -SQ correspondingly). Each SQ has a completion queue (CQ) associated -with it. - -The SQs and CQs are implemented as descriptor rings in contiguous -physical memory. - -The ENA driver supports two Queue Operation modes for Tx SQs: -- Regular mode - * In this mode the Tx SQs reside in the host's memory. The ENA - device fetches the ENA Tx descriptors and packet data from host - memory. -- Low Latency Queue (LLQ) mode or "push-mode". - * In this mode the driver pushes the transmit descriptors and the - first 128 bytes of the packet directly to the ENA device memory - space. The rest of the packet payload is fetched by the - device. For this operation mode, the driver uses a dedicated PCI - device memory BAR, which is mapped with write-combine capability. - -The Rx SQs support only the regular mode. - -Note: Not all ENA devices support LLQ, and this feature is negotiated - with the device upon initialization. If the ENA device does not - support LLQ mode, the driver falls back to the regular mode. - -The driver supports multi-queue for both Tx and Rx. This has various -benefits: -- Reduced CPU/thread/process contention on a given Ethernet interface. -- Cache miss rate on completion is reduced, particularly for data - cache lines that hold the sk_buff structures. -- Increased process-level parallelism when handling received packets. -- Increased data cache hit rate, by steering kernel processing of - packets to the CPU, where the application thread consuming the - packet is running. -- In hardware interrupt re-direction. - -Interrupt Modes: -================ -The driver assigns a single MSI-X vector per queue pair (for both Tx -and Rx directions). The driver assigns an additional dedicated MSI-X vector -for management (for ACQ and AENQ). - -Management interrupt registration is performed when the Linux kernel -probes the adapter, and it is de-registered when the adapter is -removed. I/O queue interrupt registration is performed when the Linux -interface of the adapter is opened, and it is de-registered when the -interface is closed. - -The management interrupt is named: - ena-mgmnt@pci:<PCI domain:bus:slot.function> -and for each queue pair, an interrupt is named: - <interface name>-Tx-Rx-<queue index> - -The ENA device operates in auto-mask and auto-clear interrupt -modes. That is, once MSI-X is delivered to the host, its Cause bit is -automatically cleared and the interrupt is masked. The interrupt is -unmasked by the driver after NAPI processing is complete. - -Interrupt Moderation: -===================== -ENA driver and device can operate in conventional or adaptive interrupt -moderation mode. - -In conventional mode the driver instructs device to postpone interrupt -posting according to static interrupt delay value. The interrupt delay -value can be configured through ethtool(8). The following ethtool -parameters are supported by the driver: tx-usecs, rx-usecs - -In adaptive interrupt moderation mode the interrupt delay value is -updated by the driver dynamically and adjusted every NAPI cycle -according to the traffic nature. - -By default ENA driver applies adaptive coalescing on Rx traffic and -conventional coalescing on Tx traffic. - -Adaptive coalescing can be switched on/off through ethtool(8) -adaptive_rx on|off parameter. - -The driver chooses interrupt delay value according to the number of -bytes and packets received between interrupt unmasking and interrupt -posting. The driver uses interrupt delay table that subdivides the -range of received bytes/packets into 5 levels and assigns interrupt -delay value to each level. - -The user can enable/disable adaptive moderation, modify the interrupt -delay table and restore its default values through sysfs. - -RX copybreak: -============= -The rx_copybreak is initialized by default to ENA_DEFAULT_RX_COPYBREAK -and can be configured by the ETHTOOL_STUNABLE command of the -SIOCETHTOOL ioctl. - -SKB: -==== -The driver-allocated SKB for frames received from Rx handling using -NAPI context. The allocation method depends on the size of the packet. -If the frame length is larger than rx_copybreak, napi_get_frags() -is used, otherwise netdev_alloc_skb_ip_align() is used, the buffer -content is copied (by CPU) to the SKB, and the buffer is recycled. - -Statistics: -=========== -The user can obtain ENA device and driver statistics using ethtool. -The driver can collect regular or extended statistics (including -per-queue stats) from the device. - -In addition the driver logs the stats to syslog upon device reset. - -MTU: -==== -The driver supports an arbitrarily large MTU with a maximum that is -negotiated with the device. The driver configures MTU using the -SetFeature command (ENA_ADMIN_MTU property). The user can change MTU -via ip(8) and similar legacy tools. - -Stateless Offloads: -=================== -The ENA driver supports: -- TSO over IPv4/IPv6 -- TSO with ECN -- IPv4 header checksum offload -- TCP/UDP over IPv4/IPv6 checksum offloads - -RSS: -==== -- The ENA device supports RSS that allows flexible Rx traffic - steering. -- Toeplitz and CRC32 hash functions are supported. -- Different combinations of L2/L3/L4 fields can be configured as - inputs for hash functions. -- The driver configures RSS settings using the AQ SetFeature command - (ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_FUNCTION, ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_INPUT and - ENA_ADMIN_RSS_REDIRECTION_TABLE_CONFIG properties). -- If the NETIF_F_RXHASH flag is set, the 32-bit result of the hash - function delivered in the Rx CQ descriptor is set in the received - SKB. -- The user can provide a hash key, hash function, and configure the - indirection table through ethtool(8). - -DATA PATH: -========== -Tx: ---- -end_start_xmit() is called by the stack. This function does the following: -- Maps data buffers (skb->data and frags). -- Populates ena_buf for the push buffer (if the driver and device are - in push mode.) -- Prepares ENA bufs for the remaining frags. -- Allocates a new request ID from the empty req_id ring. The request - ID is the index of the packet in the Tx info. This is used for - out-of-order TX completions. -- Adds the packet to the proper place in the Tx ring. -- Calls ena_com_prepare_tx(), an ENA communication layer that converts - the ena_bufs to ENA descriptors (and adds meta ENA descriptors as - needed.) - * This function also copies the ENA descriptors and the push buffer - to the Device memory space (if in push mode.) -- Writes doorbell to the ENA device. -- When the ENA device finishes sending the packet, a completion - interrupt is raised. -- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI. -- The ena_clean_tx_irq() function is called. This function handles the - completion descriptors generated by the ENA, with a single - completion descriptor per completed packet. - * req_id is retrieved from the completion descriptor. The tx_info of - the packet is retrieved via the req_id. The data buffers are - unmapped and req_id is returned to the empty req_id ring. - * The function stops when the completion descriptors are completed or - the budget is reached. - -Rx: ---- -- When a packet is received from the ENA device. -- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI. -- The ena_clean_rx_irq() function is called. This function calls - ena_rx_pkt(), an ENA communication layer function, which returns the - number of descriptors used for a new unhandled packet, and zero if - no new packet is found. -- Then it calls the ena_clean_rx_irq() function. -- ena_eth_rx_skb() checks packet length: - * If the packet is small (len < rx_copybreak), the driver allocates - a SKB for the new packet, and copies the packet payload into the - SKB data buffer. - - In this way the original data buffer is not passed to the stack - and is reused for future Rx packets. - * Otherwise the function unmaps the Rx buffer, then allocates the - new SKB structure and hooks the Rx buffer to the SKB frags. -- The new SKB is updated with the necessary information (protocol, - checksum hw verify result, etc.), and then passed to the network - stack, using the NAPI interface function napi_gro_receive(). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/cops.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/cops.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..964ba80599a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/cops.rst @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======================================== +The COPS LocalTalk Linux driver (cops.c) +======================================== + +By Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org> + +This driver has two modes and they are: Dayna mode and Tangent mode. +Each mode corresponds with the type of card. It has been found +that there are 2 main types of cards and all other cards are +the same and just have different names or only have minor differences +such as more IO ports. As this driver is tested it will +become more clear exactly what cards are supported. + +Right now these cards are known to work with the COPS driver. The +LT-200 cards work in a somewhat more limited capacity than the +DL200 cards, which work very well and are in use by many people. + +TANGENT driver mode: + - Tangent ATB-II, Novell NL-1000, Daystar Digital LT-200 + +DAYNA driver mode: + - Dayna DL2000/DaynaTalk PC (Half Length), COPS LT-95, + - Farallon PhoneNET PC III, Farallon PhoneNET PC II + +Other cards possibly supported mode unknown though: + - Dayna DL2000 (Full length) + +The COPS driver defaults to using Dayna mode. To change the driver's +mode if you built a driver with dual support use board_type=1 or +board_type=2 for Dayna or Tangent with insmod. + +Operation/loading of the driver +=============================== + +Use modprobe like this: /sbin/modprobe cops.o (IO #) (IRQ #) +If you do not specify any options the driver will try and use the IO = 0x240, +IRQ = 5. As of right now I would only use IRQ 5 for the card, if autoprobing. + +To load multiple COPS driver Localtalk cards you can do one of the following:: + + insmod cops io=0x240 irq=5 + insmod -o cops2 cops io=0x260 irq=3 + +Or in lilo.conf put something like this:: + + append="ether=5,0x240,lt0 ether=3,0x260,lt1" + +Then bring up the interface with ifconfig. It will look something like this:: + + lt0 Link encap:UNSPEC HWaddr 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-F7-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00 + inet addr:192.168.1.2 Bcast:192.168.1.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING NOARP MULTICAST MTU:600 Metric:1 + RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 coll:0 + +Netatalk Configuration +====================== + +You will need to configure atalkd with something like the following to make +it work with the cops.c driver. + +* For single LTalk card use:: + + dummy -seed -phase 2 -net 2000 -addr 2000.10 -zone "1033" + lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033" + +* For multiple cards, Ethernet and LocalTalk:: + + eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.20 -zone "1033" + lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033" + +* For multiple LocalTalk cards, and an Ethernet card. + +* Order seems to matter here, Ethernet last:: + + lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.10 -zone "LocalTalk1" + lt1 -seed -phase 1 -net 2000 -addr 2000.20 -zone "LocalTalk2" + eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.30 -zone "EtherTalk" diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c196baeb0856 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +AppleTalk Device Drivers +======================== + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + cops + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/aquantia/atlantic.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/aquantia/atlantic.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 2013fcedc2da..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/aquantia/atlantic.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,479 +0,0 @@ -Marvell(Aquantia) AQtion Driver for the aQuantia Multi-Gigabit PCI Express -Family of Ethernet Adapters -============================================================================= - -Contents -======== - -- Identifying Your Adapter -- Configuration -- Supported ethtool options -- Command Line Parameters -- Config file parameters -- Support -- License - -Identifying Your Adapter -======================== - -The driver in this release is compatible with AQC-100, AQC-107, AQC-108 based ethernet adapters. - - -SFP+ Devices (for AQC-100 based adapters) ----------------------------------- - -This release tested with passive Direct Attach Cables (DAC) and SFP+/LC Optical Transceiver. - -Configuration -========================= - Viewing Link Messages - --------------------- - Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is - restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on - your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following: - - dmesg -n 8 - - NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. - - Jumbo Frames - ------------ - The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is - enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500. - The maximum value for the MTU is 16000. Use the `ip` command to - increase the MTU size. For example: - - ip link set mtu 16000 dev enp1s0 - - ethtool - ------- - The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest - ethtool version is required for this functionality. - - NAPI - ---- - NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the atlantic driver. - -Supported ethtool options -============================ - Viewing adapter settings - --------------------- - ethtool <ethX> - - Output example: - - Settings for enp1s0: - Supported ports: [ TP ] - Supported link modes: 100baseT/Full - 1000baseT/Full - 10000baseT/Full - 2500baseT/Full - 5000baseT/Full - Supported pause frame use: Symmetric - Supports auto-negotiation: Yes - Supported FEC modes: Not reported - Advertised link modes: 100baseT/Full - 1000baseT/Full - 10000baseT/Full - 2500baseT/Full - 5000baseT/Full - Advertised pause frame use: Symmetric - Advertised auto-negotiation: Yes - Advertised FEC modes: Not reported - Speed: 10000Mb/s - Duplex: Full - Port: Twisted Pair - PHYAD: 0 - Transceiver: internal - Auto-negotiation: on - MDI-X: Unknown - Supports Wake-on: g - Wake-on: d - Link detected: yes - - --- - Note: AQrate speeds (2.5/5 Gb/s) will be displayed only with linux kernels > 4.10. - But you can still use these speeds: - ethtool -s eth0 autoneg off speed 2500 - - Viewing adapter information - --------------------- - ethtool -i <ethX> - - Output example: - - driver: atlantic - version: 5.2.0-050200rc5-generic-kern - firmware-version: 3.1.78 - expansion-rom-version: - bus-info: 0000:01:00.0 - supports-statistics: yes - supports-test: no - supports-eeprom-access: no - supports-register-dump: yes - supports-priv-flags: no - - - Viewing Ethernet adapter statistics: - --------------------- - ethtool -S <ethX> - - Output example: - NIC statistics: - InPackets: 13238607 - InUCast: 13293852 - InMCast: 52 - InBCast: 3 - InErrors: 0 - OutPackets: 23703019 - OutUCast: 23704941 - OutMCast: 67 - OutBCast: 11 - InUCastOctects: 213182760 - OutUCastOctects: 22698443 - InMCastOctects: 6600 - OutMCastOctects: 8776 - InBCastOctects: 192 - OutBCastOctects: 704 - InOctects: 2131839552 - OutOctects: 226938073 - InPacketsDma: 95532300 - OutPacketsDma: 59503397 - InOctetsDma: 1137102462 - OutOctetsDma: 2394339518 - InDroppedDma: 0 - Queue[0] InPackets: 23567131 - Queue[0] OutPackets: 20070028 - Queue[0] InJumboPackets: 0 - Queue[0] InLroPackets: 0 - Queue[0] InErrors: 0 - Queue[1] InPackets: 45428967 - Queue[1] OutPackets: 11306178 - Queue[1] InJumboPackets: 0 - Queue[1] InLroPackets: 0 - Queue[1] InErrors: 0 - Queue[2] InPackets: 3187011 - Queue[2] OutPackets: 13080381 - Queue[2] InJumboPackets: 0 - Queue[2] InLroPackets: 0 - Queue[2] InErrors: 0 - Queue[3] InPackets: 23349136 - Queue[3] OutPackets: 15046810 - Queue[3] InJumboPackets: 0 - Queue[3] InLroPackets: 0 - Queue[3] InErrors: 0 - - Interrupt coalescing support - --------------------------------- - ITR mode, TX/RX coalescing timings could be viewed with: - - ethtool -c <ethX> - - and changed with: - - ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs <usecs> rx-usecs <usecs> - - To disable coalescing: - - ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs 0 rx-usecs 0 tx-max-frames 1 tx-max-frames 1 - - Wake on LAN support - --------------------------------- - - WOL support by magic packet: - - ethtool -s <ethX> wol g - - To disable WOL: - - ethtool -s <ethX> wol d - - Set and check the driver message level - --------------------------------- - - Set message level - - ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl <level> - - Level values: - - 0x0001 - general driver status. - 0x0002 - hardware probing. - 0x0004 - link state. - 0x0008 - periodic status check. - 0x0010 - interface being brought down. - 0x0020 - interface being brought up. - 0x0040 - receive error. - 0x0080 - transmit error. - 0x0200 - interrupt handling. - 0x0400 - transmit completion. - 0x0800 - receive completion. - 0x1000 - packet contents. - 0x2000 - hardware status. - 0x4000 - Wake-on-LAN status. - - By default, the level of debugging messages is set 0x0001(general driver status). - - Check message level - - ethtool <ethX> | grep "Current message level" - - If you want to disable the output of messages - - ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl 0 - - RX flow rules (ntuple filters) - --------------------------------- - There are separate rules supported, that applies in that order: - 1. 16 VLAN ID rules - 2. 16 L2 EtherType rules - 3. 8 L3/L4 5-Tuple rules - - - The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for configuring ntuple filters, - via "ethtool -N <device> <filter>". - - To enable or disable the RX flow rules: - - ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off> - - When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programed filters are - flushed from the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must - be re-added when ntuple is re-enabled. - - Because of the fixed order of the rules, the location of filters is also fixed: - - Locations 0 - 15 for VLAN ID filters - - Locations 16 - 31 for L2 EtherType filters - - Locations 32 - 39 for L3/L4 5-tuple filters (locations 32, 36 for IPv6) - - The L3/L4 5-tuple (protocol, source and destination IP address, source and - destination TCP/UDP/SCTP port) is compared against 8 filters. For IPv4, up to - 8 source and destination addresses can be matched. For IPv6, up to 2 pairs of - addresses can be supported. Source and destination ports are only compared for - TCP/UDP/SCTP packets. - - To add a filter that directs packet to queue 5, use <-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple> switch: - - ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.1 dst-ip 10.0.0.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 5 <loc 32> - - - action is the queue number. - - loc is the rule number. - - For "flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6" you must set the loc - number within 32 - 39. - For "flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6" you can set 8 rules - for traffic IPv4 or you can set 2 rules for traffic IPv6. Loc number traffic - IPv6 is 32 and 36. - At the moment you can not use IPv4 and IPv6 filters at the same time. - - Example filter for IPv6 filter traffic: - - sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::1 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 action 1 loc 32 - sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::5 action -1 loc 36 - - Example filter for IPv4 filter traffic: - - sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.4 dst-ip 10.0.0.7 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 32 - sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 10.0.0.3 dst-ip 10.0.0.9 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 33 - sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 src-ip 10.0.0.6 dst-ip 10.0.0.4 loc 34 - - If you set action -1, then all traffic corresponding to the filter will be discarded. - The maximum value action is 31. - - - The VLAN filter (VLAN id) is compared against 16 filters. - VLAN id must be accompanied by mask 0xF000. That is to distinguish VLAN filter - from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both User Priority and VLAN ID - are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter. - - To add a filter that directs packets from VLAN 2001 to queue 5: - ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 vlan 2001 m 0xF000 action 1 loc 0 - - - L2 EtherType filters allows filter packet by EtherType field or both EtherType - and User Priority (PCP) field of 802.1Q. - UserPriority (vlan) parameter must be accompanied by mask 0x1FFF. That is to - distinguish VLAN filter from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both - User Priority and VLAN ID are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter. - - To add a filter that directs IP4 packess of priority 3 to queue 3: - ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ether proto 0x800 vlan 0x600 m 0x1FFF action 3 loc 16 - - - To see the list of filters currently present: - - ethtool <-u|-n|--show-nfc|--show-ntuple> <ethX> - - Rules may be deleted from the table itself. This is done using: - - sudo ethtool <-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple> <ethX> delete <loc> - - - loc is the rule number to be deleted. - - Rx filters is an interface to load the filter table that funnels all flow - into queue 0 unless an alternative queue is specified using "action". In that - case, any flow that matches the filter criteria will be directed to the - appropriate queue. RX filters is supported on all kernels 2.6.30 and later. - - RSS for UDP - --------------------------------- - Currently, NIC does not support RSS for fragmented IP packets, which leads to - incorrect working of RSS for fragmented UDP traffic. To disable RSS for UDP the - RX Flow L3/L4 rule may be used. - - Example: - ethtool -N eth0 flow-type udp4 action 0 loc 32 - - UDP GSO hardware offload - --------------------------------- - UDP GSO allows to boost UDP tx rates by offloading UDP headers allocation - into hardware. A special userspace socket option is required for this, - could be validated with /kernel/tools/testing/selftests/net/ - - udpgso_bench_tx -u -4 -D 10.0.1.1 -s 6300 -S 100 - - Will cause sending out of 100 byte sized UDP packets formed from single - 6300 bytes user buffer. - - UDP GSO is configured by: - - ethtool -K eth0 tx-udp-segmentation on - - Private flags (testing) - --------------------------------- - - Atlantic driver supports private flags for hardware custom features: - - $ ethtool --show-priv-flags ethX - - Private flags for ethX: - DMASystemLoopback : off - PKTSystemLoopback : off - DMANetworkLoopback : off - PHYInternalLoopback: off - PHYExternalLoopback: off - - Example: - - $ ethtool --set-priv-flags ethX DMASystemLoopback on - - DMASystemLoopback: DMA Host loopback. - PKTSystemLoopback: Packet buffer host loopback. - DMANetworkLoopback: Network side loopback on DMA block. - PHYInternalLoopback: Internal loopback on Phy. - PHYExternalLoopback: External loopback on Phy (with loopback ethernet cable). - - -Command Line Parameters -======================= -The following command line parameters are available on atlantic driver: - -aq_itr -Interrupt throttling mode ----------------------------------------- -Accepted values: 0, 1, 0xFFFF -Default value: 0xFFFF -0 - Disable interrupt throttling. -1 - Enable interrupt throttling and use specified tx and rx rates. -0xFFFF - Auto throttling mode. Driver will choose the best RX and TX - interrupt throtting settings based on link speed. - -aq_itr_tx - TX interrupt throttle rate ----------------------------------------- -Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF -Default value: 0 -TX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay -to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value - -aq_itr_rx - RX interrupt throttle rate ----------------------------------------- -Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF -Default value: 0 -RX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay -to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value - -Note: ITR settings could be changed in runtime by ethtool -c means (see below) - -Config file parameters -======================= -For some fine tuning and performance optimizations, -some parameters can be changed in the {source_dir}/aq_cfg.h file. - -AQ_CFG_RX_PAGEORDER ----------------------------------------- -Default value: 0 -RX page order override. Thats a power of 2 number of RX pages allocated for -each descriptor. Received descriptor size is still limited by AQ_CFG_RX_FRAME_MAX. -Increasing pageorder makes page reuse better (actual on iommu enabled systems). - -AQ_CFG_RX_REFILL_THRES ----------------------------------------- -Default value: 32 -RX refill threshold. RX path will not refill freed descriptors until the -specified number of free descriptors is observed. Larger values may help -better page reuse but may lead to packet drops as well. - -AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF ------------------------------------------------------------- -Number of queues -Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_MAX) -Default value: 8 -Notice this value will be capped by the number of cores available on the system. - -AQ_CFG_IS_RSS_DEF ------------------------------------------------------------- -Enable/disable Receive Side Scaling - -This feature allows the adapter to distribute receive processing -across multiple CPU-cores and to prevent from overloading a single CPU core. - -Valid values -0 - disabled -1 - enabled - -Default value: 1 - -AQ_CFG_NUM_RSS_QUEUES_DEF ------------------------------------------------------------- -Number of queues for Receive Side Scaling -Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF) - -Default value: AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF - -AQ_CFG_IS_LRO_DEF ------------------------------------------------------------- -Enable/disable Large Receive Offload - -This offload enables the adapter to coalesce multiple TCP segments and indicate -them as a single coalesced unit to the OS networking subsystem. -The system consumes less energy but it also introduces more latency in packets processing. - -Valid values -0 - disabled -1 - enabled - -Default value: 1 - -AQ_CFG_TX_CLEAN_BUDGET ----------------------------------------- -Maximum descriptors to cleanup on TX at once. -Default value: 256 - -After the aq_cfg.h file changed the driver must be rebuilt to take effect. - -Support -======= - -If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported -kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related -to the issue to aqn_support@marvell.com - -License -======= - -aQuantia Corporation Network Driver -Copyright(c) 2014 - 2019 aQuantia Corporation. - -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it -under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License, -version 2, as published by the Free Software Foundation. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru-cf.py index b41d298398c8..b41d298398c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru-cf.py diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6088af2ffeda --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru.rst @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======================== +ATM cxacru device driver +======================== + +Firmware is required for this device: http://accessrunner.sourceforge.net/ + +While it is capable of managing/maintaining the ADSL connection without the +module loaded, the device will sometimes stop responding after unloading the +driver and it is necessary to unplug/remove power to the device to fix this. + +Note: support for cxacru-cf.bin has been removed. It was not loaded correctly +so it had no effect on the device configuration. Fixing it could have stopped +existing devices working when an invalid configuration is supplied. + +There is a script cxacru-cf.py to convert an existing file to the sysfs form. + +Detected devices will appear as ATM devices named "cxacru". In /sys/class/atm/ +these are directories named cxacruN where N is the device number. A symlink +named device points to the USB interface device's directory which contains +several sysfs attribute files for retrieving device statistics: + +* adsl_controller_version + +* adsl_headend +* adsl_headend_environment + + - Information about the remote headend. + +* adsl_config + + - Configuration writing interface. + - Write parameters in hexadecimal format <index>=<value>, + separated by whitespace, e.g.: + + "1=0 a=5" + + - Up to 7 parameters at a time will be sent and the modem will restart + the ADSL connection when any value is set. These are logged for future + reference. + +* downstream_attenuation (dB) +* downstream_bits_per_frame +* downstream_rate (kbps) +* downstream_snr_margin (dB) + + - Downstream stats. + +* upstream_attenuation (dB) +* upstream_bits_per_frame +* upstream_rate (kbps) +* upstream_snr_margin (dB) +* transmitter_power (dBm/Hz) + + - Upstream stats. + +* downstream_crc_errors +* downstream_fec_errors +* downstream_hec_errors +* upstream_crc_errors +* upstream_fec_errors +* upstream_hec_errors + + - Error counts. + +* line_startable + + - Indicates that ADSL support on the device + is/can be enabled, see adsl_start. + +* line_status + + - "initialising" + - "down" + - "attempting to activate" + - "training" + - "channel analysis" + - "exchange" + - "waiting" + - "up" + + Changes between "down" and "attempting to activate" + if there is no signal. + +* link_status + + - "not connected" + - "connected" + - "lost" + +* mac_address + +* modulation + + - "" (when not connected) + - "ANSI T1.413" + - "ITU-T G.992.1 (G.DMT)" + - "ITU-T G.992.2 (G.LITE)" + +* startup_attempts + + - Count of total attempts to initialise ADSL. + +To enable/disable ADSL, the following can be written to the adsl_state file: + + - "start" + - "stop + - "restart" (stops, waits 1.5s, then starts) + - "poll" (used to resume status polling if it was disabled due to failure) + +Changes in adsl/line state are reported via kernel log messages:: + + [4942145.150704] ATM dev 0: ADSL state: running + [4942243.663766] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: down + [4942249.665075] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: attempting to activate + [4942253.654954] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: training + [4942255.666387] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: channel analysis + [4942259.656262] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: exchange + [2635357.696901] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: up (8128 kb/s down | 832 kb/s up) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/fore200e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/fore200e.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..55df9ec09ac8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/fore200e.rst @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================================= +FORE Systems PCA-200E/SBA-200E ATM NIC driver +============================================= + +This driver adds support for the FORE Systems 200E-series ATM adapters +to the Linux operating system. It is based on the earlier PCA-200E driver +written by Uwe Dannowski. + +The driver simultaneously supports PCA-200E and SBA-200E adapters on +i386, alpha (untested), powerpc, sparc and sparc64 archs. + +The intent is to enable the use of different models of FORE adapters at the +same time, by hosts that have several bus interfaces (such as PCI+SBUS, +or PCI+EISA). + +Only PCI and SBUS devices are currently supported by the driver, but support +for other bus interfaces such as EISA should not be too hard to add. + + +Firmware Copyright Notice +------------------------- + +Please read the fore200e_firmware_copyright file present +in the linux/drivers/atm directory for details and restrictions. + + +Firmware Updates +---------------- + +The FORE Systems 200E-series driver is shipped with firmware data being +uploaded to the ATM adapters at system boot time or at module loading time. +The supplied firmware images should work with all adapters. + +However, if you encounter problems (the firmware doesn't start or the driver +is unable to read the PROM data), you may consider trying another firmware +version. Alternative binary firmware images can be found somewhere on the +ForeThought CD-ROM supplied with your adapter by FORE Systems. + +You can also get the latest firmware images from FORE Systems at +https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/FORE_Systems. Register TACTics Online and go to +the 'software updates' pages. The firmware binaries are part of +the various ForeThought software distributions. + +Notice that different versions of the PCA-200E firmware exist, depending +on the endianness of the host architecture. The driver is shipped with +both little and big endian PCA firmware images. + +Name and location of the new firmware images can be set at kernel +configuration time: + +1. Copy the new firmware binary files (with .bin, .bin1 or .bin2 suffix) + to some directory, such as linux/drivers/atm. + +2. Reconfigure your kernel to set the new firmware name and location. + Expected pathnames are absolute or relative to the drivers/atm directory. + +3. Rebuild and re-install your kernel or your module. + + +Feedback +-------- + +Feedback is welcome. Please send success stories/bug reports/ +patches/improvement/comments/flames to <lizzi@cnam.fr>. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7b593f031a60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Device Drivers +=============================================== + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + cxacru + fore200e + iphase + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/iphase.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/iphase.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..92d9b757d75a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/iphase.rst @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================================== +ATM (i)Chip IA Linux Driver Source +================================== + + READ ME FISRT + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Read This Before You Begin! + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Description +=========== + +This is the README file for the Interphase PCI ATM (i)Chip IA Linux driver +source release. + +The features and limitations of this driver are as follows: + + - A single VPI (VPI value of 0) is supported. + - Supports 4K VCs for the server board (with 512K control memory) and 1K + VCs for the client board (with 128K control memory). + - UBR, ABR and CBR service categories are supported. + - Only AAL5 is supported. + - Supports setting of PCR on the VCs. + - Multiple adapters in a system are supported. + - All variants of Interphase ATM PCI (i)Chip adapter cards are supported, + including x575 (OC3, control memory 128K , 512K and packet memory 128K, + 512K and 1M), x525 (UTP25) and x531 (DS3 and E3). See + http://www.iphase.com/ + for details. + - Only x86 platforms are supported. + - SMP is supported. + + +Before You Start +================ + + +Installation +------------ + +1. Installing the adapters in the system + + To install the ATM adapters in the system, follow the steps below. + + a. Login as root. + b. Shut down the system and power off the system. + c. Install one or more ATM adapters in the system. + d. Connect each adapter to a port on an ATM switch. The green 'Link' + LED on the front panel of the adapter will be on if the adapter is + connected to the switch properly when the system is powered up. + e. Power on and boot the system. + +2. [ Removed ] + +3. Rebuild kernel with ABR support + + [ a. and b. removed ] + + c. Reconfigure the kernel, choose the Interphase ia driver through "make + menuconfig" or "make xconfig". + d. Rebuild the kernel, loadable modules and the atm tools. + e. Install the new built kernel and modules and reboot. + +4. Load the adapter hardware driver (ia driver) if it is built as a module + + a. Login as root. + b. Change directory to /lib/modules/<kernel-version>/atm. + c. Run "insmod suni.o;insmod iphase.o" + The yellow 'status' LED on the front panel of the adapter will blink + while the driver is loaded in the system. + d. To verify that the 'ia' driver is loaded successfully, run the + following command:: + + cat /proc/atm/devices + + If the driver is loaded successfully, the output of the command will + be similar to the following lines:: + + Itf Type ESI/"MAC"addr AAL(TX,err,RX,err,drop) ... + 0 ia xxxxxxxxx 0 ( 0 0 0 0 0 ) 5 ( 0 0 0 0 0 ) + + You can also check the system log file /var/log/messages for messages + related to the ATM driver. + +5. Ia Driver Configuration + +5.1 Configuration of adapter buffers + The (i)Chip boards have 3 different packet RAM size variants: 128K, 512K and + 1M. The RAM size decides the number of buffers and buffer size. The default + size and number of buffers are set as following: + + ========= ======= ====== ====== ====== ====== ====== + Total Rx RAM Tx RAM Rx Buf Tx Buf Rx buf Tx buf + RAM size size size size size cnt cnt + ========= ======= ====== ====== ====== ====== ====== + 128K 64K 64K 10K 10K 6 6 + 512K 256K 256K 10K 10K 25 25 + 1M 512K 512K 10K 10K 51 51 + ========= ======= ====== ====== ====== ====== ====== + + These setting should work well in most environments, but can be + changed by typing the following command:: + + insmod <IA_DIR>/ia.o IA_RX_BUF=<RX_CNT> IA_RX_BUF_SZ=<RX_SIZE> \ + IA_TX_BUF=<TX_CNT> IA_TX_BUF_SZ=<TX_SIZE> + + Where: + + - RX_CNT = number of receive buffers in the range (1-128) + - RX_SIZE = size of receive buffers in the range (48-64K) + - TX_CNT = number of transmit buffers in the range (1-128) + - TX_SIZE = size of transmit buffers in the range (48-64K) + + 1. Transmit and receive buffer size must be a multiple of 4. + 2. Care should be taken so that the memory required for the + transmit and receive buffers is less than or equal to the + total adapter packet memory. + +5.2 Turn on ia debug trace + + When the ia driver is built with the CONFIG_ATM_IA_DEBUG flag, the driver + can provide more debug trace if needed. There is a bit mask variable, + IADebugFlag, which controls the output of the traces. You can find the bit + map of the IADebugFlag in iphase.h. + The debug trace can be turn on through the insmod command line option, for + example, "insmod iphase.o IADebugFlag=0xffffffff" can turn on all the debug + traces together with loading the driver. + +6. Ia Driver Test Using ttcp_atm and PVC + + For the PVC setup, the test machines can either be connected back-to-back or + through a switch. If connected through the switch, the switch must be + configured for the PVC(s). + + a. For UBR test: + + At the test machine intended to receive data, type:: + + ttcp_atm -r -a -s 0.100 + + At the other test machine, type:: + + ttcp_atm -t -a -s 0.100 -n 10000 + + Run "ttcp_atm -h" to display more options of the ttcp_atm tool. + b. For ABR test: + + It is the same as the UBR testing, but with an extra command option:: + + -Pabr:max_pcr=<xxx> + + where: + + xxx = the maximum peak cell rate, from 170 - 353207. + + This option must be set on both the machines. + + c. For CBR test: + + It is the same as the UBR testing, but with an extra command option:: + + -Pcbr:max_pcr=<xxx> + + where: + + xxx = the maximum peak cell rate, from 170 - 353207. + + This option may only be set on the transmit machine. + + +Outstanding Issues +================== + + + +Contact Information +------------------- + +:: + + Customer Support: + United States: Telephone: (214) 654-5555 + Fax: (214) 654-5500 + E-Mail: intouch@iphase.com + Europe: Telephone: 33 (0)1 41 15 44 00 + Fax: 33 (0)1 41 15 12 13 + World Wide Web: http://www.iphase.com + Anonymous FTP: ftp.iphase.com diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cce3c4392972 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Cable Modem Device Drivers +========================== + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + sb1000 + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/sb1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/sb1000.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c8582ca4034d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/sb1000.rst @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=================== +SB100 device driver +=================== + +sb1000 is a module network device driver for the General Instrument (also known +as NextLevel) SURFboard1000 internal cable modem board. This is an ISA card +which is used by a number of cable TV companies to provide cable modem access. +It's a one-way downstream-only cable modem, meaning that your upstream net link +is provided by your regular phone modem. + +This driver was written by Franco Venturi <fventuri@mediaone.net>. He deserves +a great deal of thanks for this wonderful piece of code! + +Needed tools +============ + +Support for this device is now a part of the standard Linux kernel. The +driver source code file is drivers/net/sb1000.c. In addition to this +you will need: + +1. The "cmconfig" program. This is a utility which supplements "ifconfig" + to configure the cable modem and network interface (usually called "cm0"); + +2. Several PPP scripts which live in /etc/ppp to make connecting via your + cable modem easy. + + These utilities can be obtained from: + + http://www.jacksonville.net/~fventuri/ + + in Franco's original source code distribution .tar.gz file. Support for + the sb1000 driver can be found at: + + - http://web.archive.org/web/%2E/http://home.adelphia.net/~siglercm/sb1000.html + - http://web.archive.org/web/%2E/http://linuxpower.cx/~cable/ + + along with these utilities. + +3. The standard isapnp tools. These are necessary to configure your SB1000 + card at boot time (or afterwards by hand) since it's a PnP card. + + If you don't have these installed as a standard part of your Linux + distribution, you can find them at: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/ + + or check your Linux distribution binary CD or their web site. For help with + isapnp, pnpdump, or /etc/isapnp.conf, go to: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/isapnpfaq.html + +Using the driver +================ + +To make the SB1000 card work, follow these steps: + +1. Run ``make config``, or ``make menuconfig``, or ``make xconfig``, whichever + you prefer, in the top kernel tree directory to set up your kernel + configuration. Make sure to say "Y" to "Prompt for development drivers" + and to say "M" to the sb1000 driver. Also say "Y" or "M" to all the standard + networking questions to get TCP/IP and PPP networking support. + +2. **BEFORE** you build the kernel, edit drivers/net/sb1000.c. Make sure + to redefine the value of READ_DATA_PORT to match the I/O address used + by isapnp to access your PnP cards. This is the value of READPORT in + /etc/isapnp.conf or given by the output of pnpdump. + +3. Build and install the kernel and modules as usual. + +4. Boot your new kernel following the usual procedures. + +5. Set up to configure the new SB1000 PnP card by capturing the output + of "pnpdump" to a file and editing this file to set the correct I/O ports, + IRQ, and DMA settings for all your PnP cards. Make sure none of the settings + conflict with one another. Then test this configuration by running the + "isapnp" command with your new config file as the input. Check for + errors and fix as necessary. (As an aside, I use I/O ports 0x110 and + 0x310 and IRQ 11 for my SB1000 card and these work well for me. YMMV.) + Then save the finished config file as /etc/isapnp.conf for proper + configuration on subsequent reboots. + +6. Download the original file sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz from Franco's site or one of + the others referenced above. As root, unpack it into a temporary directory + and do a ``make cmconfig`` and then ``install -c cmconfig /usr/local/sbin``. + Don't do ``make install`` because it expects to find all the utilities built + and ready for installation, not just cmconfig. + +7. As root, copy all the files under the ppp/ subdirectory in Franco's + tar file into /etc/ppp, being careful not to overwrite any files that are + already in there. Then modify ppp@gi-on to set the correct login name, + phone number, and frequency for the cable modem. Also edit pap-secrets + to specify your login name and password and any site-specific information + you need. + +8. Be sure to modify /etc/ppp/firewall to use ipchains instead of + the older ipfwadm commands from the 2.0.x kernels. There's a neat utility to + convert ipfwadm commands to ipchains commands: + + http://users.dhp.com/~whisper/ipfwadm2ipchains/ + + You may also wish to modify the firewall script to implement a different + firewalling scheme. + +9. Start the PPP connection via the script /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on. You must be + root to do this. It's better to use a utility like sudo to execute + frequently used commands like this with root permissions if possible. If you + connect successfully the cable modem interface will come up and you'll see a + driver message like this at the console:: + + cm0: sb1000 at (0x110,0x310), csn 1, S/N 0x2a0d16d8, IRQ 11. + sb1000.c:v1.1.2 6/01/98 (fventuri@mediaone.net) + + The "ifconfig" command should show two new interfaces, ppp0 and cm0. + + The command "cmconfig cm0" will give you information about the cable modem + interface. + +10. Try pinging a site via ``ping -c 5 www.yahoo.com``, for example. You should + see packets received. + +11. If you can't get site names (like www.yahoo.com) to resolve into + IP addresses (like 204.71.200.67), be sure your /etc/resolv.conf file + has no syntax errors and has the right nameserver IP addresses in it. + If this doesn't help, try something like ``ping -c 5 204.71.200.67`` to + see if the networking is running but the DNS resolution is where the + problem lies. + +12. If you still have problems, go to the support web sites mentioned above + and read the information and documentation there. + +Common problems +=============== + +1. Packets go out on the ppp0 interface but don't come back on the cm0 + interface. It looks like I'm connected but I can't even ping any + numerical IP addresses. (This happens predominantly on Debian systems due + to a default boot-time configuration script.) + +Solution + As root ``echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/cm0/rp_filter`` so it + can share the same IP address as the ppp0 interface. Note that this + command should probably be added to the /etc/ppp/cablemodem script + *right*between* the "/sbin/ifconfig" and "/sbin/cmconfig" commands. + You may need to do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/ppp0/rp_filter as well. + If you do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/default/rp_filter on each reboot + (in rc.local or some such) then any interfaces can share the same IP + addresses. + +2. I get "unresolved symbol" error messages on executing ``insmod sb1000.o``. + +Solution + You probably have a non-matching kernel source tree and + /usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm header files. Make sure you + install the correct versions of the header files in these two directories. + Then rebuild and reinstall the kernel. + +3. When isapnp runs it reports an error, and my SB1000 card isn't working. + +Solution + There's a problem with later versions of isapnp using the "(CHECK)" + option in the lines that allocate the two I/O addresses for the SB1000 card. + This first popped up on RH 6.0. Delete "(CHECK)" for the SB1000 I/O addresses. + Make sure they don't conflict with any other pieces of hardware first! Then + rerun isapnp and go from there. + +4. I can't execute the /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on file. + +Solution + As root do ``chmod ug+x /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on``. + +5. The firewall script isn't working (with 2.2.x and higher kernels). + +Solution + Use the ipfwadm2ipchains script referenced above to convert the + /etc/ppp/firewall script from the deprecated ipfwadm commands to ipchains. + +6. I'm getting *tons* of firewall deny messages in the /var/kern.log, + /var/messages, and/or /var/syslog files, and they're filling up my /var + partition!!! + +Solution + First, tell your ISP that you're receiving DoS (Denial of Service) + and/or portscanning (UDP connection attempts) attacks! Look over the deny + messages to figure out what the attack is and where it's coming from. Next, + edit /etc/ppp/cablemodem and make sure the ",nobroadcast" option is turned on + to the "cmconfig" command (uncomment that line). If you're not receiving these + denied packets on your broadcast interface (IP address xxx.yyy.zzz.255 + typically), then someone is attacking your machine in particular. Be careful + out there.... + +7. Everything seems to work fine but my computer locks up after a while + (and typically during a lengthy download through the cable modem)! + +Solution + You may need to add a short delay in the driver to 'slow down' the + SURFboard because your PC might not be able to keep up with the transfer rate + of the SB1000. To do this, it's probably best to download Franco's + sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz archive and build and install sb1000.o manually. You'll + want to edit the 'Makefile' and look for the 'SB1000_DELAY' + define. Uncomment those 'CFLAGS' lines (and comment out the default ones) + and try setting the delay to something like 60 microseconds with: + '-DSB1000_DELAY=60'. Then do ``make`` and as root ``make install`` and try + it out. If it still doesn't work or you like playing with the driver, you may + try other numbers. Remember though that the higher the delay, the slower the + driver (which slows down the rest of the PC too when it is actively + used). Thanks to Ed Daiga for this tip! + +Credits +======= + +This README came from Franco Venturi's original README file which is +still supplied with his driver .tar.gz archive. I and all other sb1000 users +owe Franco a tremendous "Thank you!" Additional thanks goes to Carl Patten +and Ralph Bonnell who are now managing the Linux SB1000 web site, and to +the SB1000 users who reported and helped debug the common problems listed +above. + + + Clemmitt Sigler + csigler@vt.edu diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/can327.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/can327.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b87bfbe5d51c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/can327.rst @@ -0,0 +1,331 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-3-Clause) + +can327: ELM327 driver for Linux SocketCAN +========================================== + +Authors +-------- + +Max Staudt <max@enpas.org> + + + +Motivation +----------- + +This driver aims to lower the initial cost for hackers interested in +working with CAN buses. + +CAN adapters are expensive, few, and far between. +ELM327 interfaces are cheap and plentiful. +Let's use ELM327s as CAN adapters. + + + +Introduction +------------- + +This driver is an effort to turn abundant ELM327 based OBD interfaces +into full fledged (as far as possible) CAN interfaces. + +Since the ELM327 was never meant to be a stand alone CAN controller, +the driver has to switch between its modes as quickly as possible in +order to fake full-duplex operation. + +As such, can327 is a best effort driver. However, this is more than +enough to implement simple request-response protocols (such as OBD II), +and to monitor broadcast messages on a bus (such as in a vehicle). + +Most ELM327s come as nondescript serial devices, attached via USB or +Bluetooth. The driver cannot recognize them by itself, and as such it +is up to the user to attach it in form of a TTY line discipline +(similar to PPP, SLIP, slcan, ...). + +This driver is meant for ELM327 versions 1.4b and up, see below for +known limitations in older controllers and clones. + + + +Data sheet +----------- + +The official data sheets can be found at ELM electronics' home page: + + https://www.elmelectronics.com/ + + + +How to attach the line discipline +---------------------------------- + +Every ELM327 chip is factory programmed to operate at a serial setting +of 38400 baud/s, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stopbit. + +If you have kept this default configuration, the line discipline can +be attached on a command prompt as follows:: + + sudo ldattach \ + --debug \ + --speed 38400 \ + --eightbits \ + --noparity \ + --onestopbit \ + --iflag -ICRNL,INLCR,-IXOFF \ + 30 \ + /dev/ttyUSB0 + +To change the ELM327's serial settings, please refer to its data +sheet. This needs to be done before attaching the line discipline. + +Once the ldisc is attached, the CAN interface starts out unconfigured. +Set the speed before starting it:: + + # The interface needs to be down to change parameters + sudo ip link set can0 down + sudo ip link set can0 type can bitrate 500000 + sudo ip link set can0 up + +500000 bit/s is a common rate for OBD-II diagnostics. +If you're connecting straight to a car's OBD port, this is the speed +that most cars (but not all!) expect. + +After this, you can set out as usual with candump, cansniffer, etc. + + + +How to check the controller version +------------------------------------ + +Use a terminal program to attach to the controller. + +After issuing the "``AT WS``" command, the controller will respond with +its version:: + + >AT WS + + + ELM327 v1.4b + + > + +Note that clones may claim to be any version they like. +It is not indicative of their actual feature set. + + + + +Communication example +---------------------- + +This is a short and incomplete introduction on how to talk to an ELM327. +It is here to guide understanding of the controller's and the driver's +limitation (listed below) as well as manual testing. + + +The ELM327 has two modes: + +- Command mode +- Reception mode + +In command mode, it expects one command per line, terminated by CR. +By default, the prompt is a "``>``", after which a command can be +entered:: + + >ATE1 + OK + > + +The init script in the driver switches off several configuration options +that are only meaningful in the original OBD scenario the chip is meant +for, and are actually a hindrance for can327. + + +When a command is not recognized, such as by an older version of the +ELM327, a question mark is printed as a response instead of OK:: + + >ATUNKNOWN + ? + > + +At present, can327 does not evaluate this response. See the section +below on known limitations for details. + + +When a CAN frame is to be sent, the target address is configured, after +which the frame is sent as a command that consists of the data's hex +dump:: + + >ATSH123 + OK + >DEADBEEF12345678 + OK + > + +The above interaction sends the SFF frame "``DE AD BE EF 12 34 56 78``" +with (11 bit) CAN ID ``0x123``. +For this to function, the controller must be configured for SFF sending +mode (using "``AT PB``", see code or datasheet). + + +Once a frame has been sent and wait-for-reply mode is on (``ATR1``, +configured on ``listen-only=off``), or when the reply timeout expires +and the driver sets the controller into monitoring mode (``ATMA``), +the ELM327 will send one line for each received CAN frame, consisting +of CAN ID, DLC, and data:: + + 123 8 DEADBEEF12345678 + +For EFF (29 bit) CAN frames, the address format is slightly different, +which can327 uses to tell the two apart:: + + 12 34 56 78 8 DEADBEEF12345678 + +The ELM327 will receive both SFF and EFF frames - the current CAN +config (``ATPB``) does not matter. + + +If the ELM327's internal UART sending buffer runs full, it will abort +the monitoring mode, print "BUFFER FULL" and drop back into command +mode. Note that in this case, unlike with other error messages, the +error message may appear on the same line as the last (usually +incomplete) data frame:: + + 12 34 56 78 8 DEADBEEF123 BUFFER FULL + + + +Known limitations of the controller +------------------------------------ + +- Clone devices ("v1.5" and others) + + Sending RTR frames is not supported and will be dropped silently. + + Receiving RTR with DLC 8 will appear to be a regular frame with + the last received frame's DLC and payload. + + "``AT CSM``" (CAN Silent Monitoring, i.e. don't send CAN ACKs) is + not supported, and is hard coded to ON. Thus, frames are not ACKed + while listening: "``AT MA``" (Monitor All) will always be "silent". + However, immediately after sending a frame, the ELM327 will be in + "receive reply" mode, in which it *does* ACK any received frames. + Once the bus goes silent, or an error occurs (such as BUFFER FULL), + or the receive reply timeout runs out, the ELM327 will end reply + reception mode on its own and can327 will fall back to "``AT MA``" + in order to keep monitoring the bus. + + Other limitations may apply, depending on the clone and the quality + of its firmware. + + +- All versions + + No full duplex operation is supported. The driver will switch + between input/output mode as quickly as possible. + + The length of outgoing RTR frames cannot be set. In fact, some + clones (tested with one identifying as "``v1.5``") are unable to + send RTR frames at all. + + We don't have a way to get real-time notifications on CAN errors. + While there is a command (``AT CS``) to retrieve some basic stats, + we don't poll it as it would force us to interrupt reception mode. + + +- Versions prior to 1.4b + + These versions do not send CAN ACKs when in monitoring mode (AT MA). + However, they do send ACKs while waiting for a reply immediately + after sending a frame. The driver maximizes this time to make the + controller as useful as possible. + + Starting with version 1.4b, the ELM327 supports the "``AT CSM``" + command, and the "listen-only" CAN option will take effect. + + +- Versions prior to 1.4 + + These chips do not support the "``AT PB``" command, and thus cannot + change bitrate or SFF/EFF mode on-the-fly. This will have to be + programmed by the user before attaching the line discipline. See the + data sheet for details. + + +- Versions prior to 1.3 + + These chips cannot be used at all with can327. They do not support + the "``AT D1``" command, which is necessary to avoid parsing conflicts + on incoming data, as well as distinction of RTR frame lengths. + + Specifically, this allows for easy distinction of SFF and EFF + frames, and to check whether frames are complete. While it is possible + to deduce the type and length from the length of the line the ELM327 + sends us, this method fails when the ELM327's UART output buffer + overruns. It may abort sending in the middle of the line, which will + then be mistaken for something else. + + + +Known limitations of the driver +-------------------------------- + +- No 8/7 timing. + + ELM327 can only set CAN bitrates that are of the form 500000/n, where + n is an integer divisor. + However there is an exception: With a separate flag, it may set the + speed to be 8/7 of the speed indicated by the divisor. + This mode is not currently implemented. + +- No evaluation of command responses. + + The ELM327 will reply with OK when a command is understood, and with ? + when it is not. The driver does not currently check this, and simply + assumes that the chip understands every command. + The driver is built such that functionality degrades gracefully + nevertheless. See the section on known limitations of the controller. + +- No use of hardware CAN ID filtering + + An ELM327's UART sending buffer will easily overflow on heavy CAN bus + load, resulting in the "``BUFFER FULL``" message. Using the hardware + filters available through "``AT CF xxx``" and "``AT CM xxx``" would be + helpful here, however SocketCAN does not currently provide a facility + to make use of such hardware features. + + + +Rationale behind the chosen configuration +------------------------------------------ + +``AT E1`` + Echo on + + We need this to be able to get a prompt reliably. + +``AT S1`` + Spaces on + + We need this to distinguish 11/29 bit CAN addresses received. + + Note: + We can usually do this using the line length (odd/even), + but this fails if the line is not transmitted fully to + the host (BUFFER FULL). + +``AT D1`` + DLC on + + We need this to tell the "length" of RTR frames. + + + +A note on CAN bus termination +------------------------------ + +Your adapter may have resistors soldered in which are meant to terminate +the bus. This is correct when it is plugged into a OBD-II socket, but +not helpful when trying to tap into the middle of an existing CAN bus. + +If communications don't work with the adapter connected, check for the +termination resistors on its PCB and try removing them. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/ctu/ctucanfd-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/ctu/ctucanfd-driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..40c92ea272af --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/ctu/ctucanfd-driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,639 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-or-later + +CTU CAN FD Driver +================= + +Author: Martin Jerabek <martin.jerabek01@gmail.com> + + +About CTU CAN FD IP Core +------------------------ + +`CTU CAN FD <https://gitlab.fel.cvut.cz/canbus/ctucanfd_ip_core>`_ +is an open source soft core written in VHDL. +It originated in 2015 as Ondrej Ille's project +at the `Department of Measurement <https://meas.fel.cvut.cz/>`_ +of `FEE <http://www.fel.cvut.cz/en/>`_ at `CTU <https://www.cvut.cz/en>`_. + +The SocketCAN driver for Xilinx Zynq SoC based MicroZed board +`Vivado integration <https://gitlab.fel.cvut.cz/canbus/zynq/zynq-can-sja1000-top>`_ +and Intel Cyclone V 5CSEMA4U23C6 based DE0-Nano-SoC Terasic board +`QSys integration <https://gitlab.fel.cvut.cz/canbus/intel-soc-ctucanfd>`_ +has been developed as well as support for +`PCIe integration <https://gitlab.fel.cvut.cz/canbus/pcie-ctucanfd>`_ of the core. + +In the case of Zynq, the core is connected via the APB system bus, which does +not have enumeration support, and the device must be specified in Device Tree. +This kind of devices is called platform device in the kernel and is +handled by a platform device driver. + +The basic functional model of the CTU CAN FD peripheral has been +accepted into QEMU mainline. See QEMU `CAN emulation support <https://www.qemu.org/docs/master/system/devices/can.html>`_ +for CAN FD buses, host connection and CTU CAN FD core emulation. The development +version of emulation support can be cloned from ctu-canfd branch of QEMU local +development `repository <https://gitlab.fel.cvut.cz/canbus/qemu-canbus>`_. + + +About SocketCAN +--------------- + +SocketCAN is a standard common interface for CAN devices in the Linux +kernel. As the name suggests, the bus is accessed via sockets, similarly +to common network devices. The reasoning behind this is in depth +described in `Linux SocketCAN <https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/networking/can.html>`_. +In short, it offers a +natural way to implement and work with higher layer protocols over CAN, +in the same way as, e.g., UDP/IP over Ethernet. + +Device probe +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Before going into detail about the structure of a CAN bus device driver, +let's reiterate how the kernel gets to know about the device at all. +Some buses, like PCI or PCIe, support device enumeration. That is, when +the system boots, it discovers all the devices on the bus and reads +their configuration. The kernel identifies the device via its vendor ID +and device ID, and if there is a driver registered for this identifier +combination, its probe method is invoked to populate the driver's +instance for the given hardware. A similar situation goes with USB, only +it allows for device hot-plug. + +The situation is different for peripherals which are directly embedded +in the SoC and connected to an internal system bus (AXI, APB, Avalon, +and others). These buses do not support enumeration, and thus the kernel +has to learn about the devices from elsewhere. This is exactly what the +Device Tree was made for. + +Device tree +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +An entry in device tree states that a device exists in the system, how +it is reachable (on which bus it resides) and its configuration – +registers address, interrupts and so on. An example of such a device +tree is given in . + +:: + + / { + /* ... */ + amba: amba { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "simple-bus"; + + CTU_CAN_FD_0: CTU_CAN_FD@43c30000 { + compatible = "ctu,ctucanfd"; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <0 30 4>; + clocks = <&clkc 15>; + reg = <0x43c30000 0x10000>; + }; + }; + }; + + +.. _sec:socketcan:drv: + +Driver structure +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The driver can be divided into two parts – platform-dependent device +discovery and set up, and platform-independent CAN network device +implementation. + +.. _sec:socketcan:platdev: + +Platform device driver +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +In the case of Zynq, the core is connected via the AXI system bus, which +does not have enumeration support, and the device must be specified in +Device Tree. This kind of devices is called *platform device* in the +kernel and is handled by a *platform device driver*\ [1]_. + +A platform device driver provides the following things: + +- A *probe* function + +- A *remove* function + +- A table of *compatible* devices that the driver can handle + +The *probe* function is called exactly once when the device appears (or +the driver is loaded, whichever happens later). If there are more +devices handled by the same driver, the *probe* function is called for +each one of them. Its role is to allocate and initialize resources +required for handling the device, as well as set up low-level functions +for the platform-independent layer, e.g., *read_reg* and *write_reg*. +After that, the driver registers the device to a higher layer, in our +case as a *network device*. + +The *remove* function is called when the device disappears, or the +driver is about to be unloaded. It serves to free the resources +allocated in *probe* and to unregister the device from higher layers. + +Finally, the table of *compatible* devices states which devices the +driver can handle. The Device Tree entry ``compatible`` is matched +against the tables of all *platform drivers*. + +.. code:: c + + /* Match table for OF platform binding */ + static const struct of_device_id ctucan_of_match[] = { + { .compatible = "ctu,canfd-2", }, + { .compatible = "ctu,ctucanfd", }, + { /* end of list */ }, + }; + MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, ctucan_of_match); + + static int ctucan_probe(struct platform_device *pdev); + static int ctucan_remove(struct platform_device *pdev); + + static struct platform_driver ctucanfd_driver = { + .probe = ctucan_probe, + .remove = ctucan_remove, + .driver = { + .name = DRIVER_NAME, + .of_match_table = ctucan_of_match, + }, + }; + module_platform_driver(ctucanfd_driver); + + +.. _sec:socketcan:netdev: + +Network device driver +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Each network device must support at least these operations: + +- Bring the device up: ``ndo_open`` + +- Bring the device down: ``ndo_close`` + +- Submit TX frames to the device: ``ndo_start_xmit`` + +- Signal TX completion and errors to the network subsystem: ISR + +- Submit RX frames to the network subsystem: ISR and NAPI + +There are two possible event sources: the device and the network +subsystem. Device events are usually signaled via an interrupt, handled +in an Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). Handlers for the events +originating in the network subsystem are then specified in +``struct net_device_ops``. + +When the device is brought up, e.g., by calling ``ip link set can0 up``, +the driver’s function ``ndo_open`` is called. It should validate the +interface configuration and configure and enable the device. The +analogous opposite is ``ndo_close``, called when the device is being +brought down, be it explicitly or implicitly. + +When the system should transmit a frame, it does so by calling +``ndo_start_xmit``, which enqueues the frame into the device. If the +device HW queue (FIFO, mailboxes or whatever the implementation is) +becomes full, the ``ndo_start_xmit`` implementation informs the network +subsystem that it should stop the TX queue (via ``netif_stop_queue``). +It is then re-enabled later in ISR when the device has some space +available again and is able to enqueue another frame. + +All the device events are handled in ISR, namely: + +#. **TX completion**. When the device successfully finishes transmitting + a frame, the frame is echoed locally. On error, an informative error + frame [2]_ is sent to the network subsystem instead. In both cases, + the software TX queue is resumed so that more frames may be sent. + +#. **Error condition**. If something goes wrong (e.g., the device goes + bus-off or RX overrun happens), error counters are updated, and + informative error frames are enqueued to SW RX queue. + +#. **RX buffer not empty**. In this case, read the RX frames and enqueue + them to SW RX queue. Usually NAPI is used as a middle layer (see ). + +.. _sec:socketcan:napi: + +NAPI +~~~~ + +The frequency of incoming frames can be high and the overhead to invoke +the interrupt service routine for each frame can cause significant +system load. There are multiple mechanisms in the Linux kernel to deal +with this situation. They evolved over the years of Linux kernel +development and enhancements. For network devices, the current standard +is NAPI – *the New API*. It is similar to classical top-half/bottom-half +interrupt handling in that it only acknowledges the interrupt in the ISR +and signals that the rest of the processing should be done in softirq +context. On top of that, it offers the possibility to *poll* for new +frames for a while. This has a potential to avoid the costly round of +enabling interrupts, handling an incoming IRQ in ISR, re-enabling the +softirq and switching context back to softirq. + +More detailed documentation of NAPI may be found on the pages of Linux +Foundation `<https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi>`_. + +Integrating the core to Xilinx Zynq +----------------------------------- + +The core interfaces a simple subset of the Avalon +(search for Intel **Avalon Interface Specifications**) +bus as it was originally used on +Alterra FPGA chips, yet Xilinx natively interfaces with AXI +(search for ARM **AMBA AXI and ACE Protocol Specification AXI3, +AXI4, and AXI4-Lite, ACE and ACE-Lite**). +The most obvious solution would be to use +an Avalon/AXI bridge or implement some simple conversion entity. +However, the core’s interface is half-duplex with no handshake +signaling, whereas AXI is full duplex with two-way signaling. Moreover, +even AXI-Lite slave interface is quite resource-intensive, and the +flexibility and speed of AXI are not required for a CAN core. + +Thus a much simpler bus was chosen – APB (Advanced Peripheral Bus) +(search for ARM **AMBA APB Protocol Specification**). +APB-AXI bridge is directly available in +Xilinx Vivado, and the interface adaptor entity is just a few simple +combinatorial assignments. + +Finally, to be able to include the core in a block diagram as a custom +IP, the core, together with the APB interface, has been packaged as a +Vivado component. + +CTU CAN FD Driver design +------------------------ + +The general structure of a CAN device driver has already been examined +in . The next paragraphs provide a more detailed description of the CTU +CAN FD core driver in particular. + +Low-level driver +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The core is not intended to be used solely with SocketCAN, and thus it +is desirable to have an OS-independent low-level driver. This low-level +driver can then be used in implementations of OS driver or directly +either on bare metal or in a user-space application. Another advantage +is that if the hardware slightly changes, only the low-level driver +needs to be modified. + +The code [3]_ is in part automatically generated and in part written +manually by the core author, with contributions of the thesis’ author. +The low-level driver supports operations such as: set bit timing, set +controller mode, enable/disable, read RX frame, write TX frame, and so +on. + +Configuring bit timing +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +On CAN, each bit is divided into four segments: SYNC, PROP, PHASE1, and +PHASE2. Their duration is expressed in multiples of a Time Quantum +(details in `CAN Specification, Version 2.0 <http://esd.cs.ucr.edu/webres/can20.pdf>`_, chapter 8). +When configuring +bitrate, the durations of all the segments (and time quantum) must be +computed from the bitrate and Sample Point. This is performed +independently for both the Nominal bitrate and Data bitrate for CAN FD. + +SocketCAN is fairly flexible and offers either highly customized +configuration by setting all the segment durations manually, or a +convenient configuration by setting just the bitrate and sample point +(and even that is chosen automatically per Bosch recommendation if not +specified). However, each CAN controller may have different base clock +frequency and different width of segment duration registers. The +algorithm thus needs the minimum and maximum values for the durations +(and clock prescaler) and tries to optimize the numbers to fit both the +constraints and the requested parameters. + +.. code:: c + + struct can_bittiming_const { + char name[16]; /* Name of the CAN controller hardware */ + __u32 tseg1_min; /* Time segment 1 = prop_seg + phase_seg1 */ + __u32 tseg1_max; + __u32 tseg2_min; /* Time segment 2 = phase_seg2 */ + __u32 tseg2_max; + __u32 sjw_max; /* Synchronisation jump width */ + __u32 brp_min; /* Bit-rate prescaler */ + __u32 brp_max; + __u32 brp_inc; + }; + + +[lst:can_bittiming_const] + +A curious reader will notice that the durations of the segments PROP_SEG +and PHASE_SEG1 are not determined separately but rather combined and +then, by default, the resulting TSEG1 is evenly divided between PROP_SEG +and PHASE_SEG1. In practice, this has virtually no consequences as the +sample point is between PHASE_SEG1 and PHASE_SEG2. In CTU CAN FD, +however, the duration registers ``PROP`` and ``PH1`` have different +widths (6 and 7 bits, respectively), so the auto-computed values might +overflow the shorter register and must thus be redistributed among the +two [4]_. + +Handling RX +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Frame reception is handled in NAPI queue, which is enabled from ISR when +the RXNE (RX FIFO Not Empty) bit is set. Frames are read one by one +until either no frame is left in the RX FIFO or the maximum work quota +has been reached for the NAPI poll run (see ). Each frame is then passed +to the network interface RX queue. + +An incoming frame may be either a CAN 2.0 frame or a CAN FD frame. The +way to distinguish between these two in the kernel is to allocate either +``struct can_frame`` or ``struct canfd_frame``, the two having different +sizes. In the controller, the information about the frame type is stored +in the first word of RX FIFO. + +This brings us a chicken-egg problem: we want to allocate the ``skb`` +for the frame, and only if it succeeds, fetch the frame from FIFO; +otherwise keep it there for later. But to be able to allocate the +correct ``skb``, we have to fetch the first work of FIFO. There are +several possible solutions: + +#. Read the word, then allocate. If it fails, discard the rest of the + frame. When the system is low on memory, the situation is bad anyway. + +#. Always allocate ``skb`` big enough for an FD frame beforehand. Then + tweak the ``skb`` internals to look like it has been allocated for + the smaller CAN 2.0 frame. + +#. Add option to peek into the FIFO instead of consuming the word. + +#. If the allocation fails, store the read word into driver’s data. On + the next try, use the stored word instead of reading it again. + +Option 1 is simple enough, but not very satisfying if we could do +better. Option 2 is not acceptable, as it would require modifying the +private state of an integral kernel structure. The slightly higher +memory consumption is just a virtual cherry on top of the “cake”. Option +3 requires non-trivial HW changes and is not ideal from the HW point of +view. + +Option 4 seems like a good compromise, with its disadvantage being that +a partial frame may stay in the FIFO for a prolonged time. Nonetheless, +there may be just one owner of the RX FIFO, and thus no one else should +see the partial frame (disregarding some exotic debugging scenarios). +Basides, the driver resets the core on its initialization, so the +partial frame cannot be “adopted” either. In the end, option 4 was +selected [5]_. + +.. _subsec:ctucanfd:rxtimestamp: + +Timestamping RX frames +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The CTU CAN FD core reports the exact timestamp when the frame has been +received. The timestamp is by default captured at the sample point of +the last bit of EOF but is configurable to be captured at the SOF bit. +The timestamp source is external to the core and may be up to 64 bits +wide. At the time of writing, passing the timestamp from kernel to +userspace is not yet implemented, but is planned in the future. + +Handling TX +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The CTU CAN FD core has 4 independent TX buffers, each with its own +state and priority. When the core wants to transmit, a TX buffer in +Ready state with the highest priority is selected. + +The priorities are 3bit numbers in register TX_PRIORITY +(nibble-aligned). This should be flexible enough for most use cases. +SocketCAN, however, supports only one FIFO queue for outgoing +frames [6]_. The buffer priorities may be used to simulate the FIFO +behavior by assigning each buffer a distinct priority and *rotating* the +priorities after a frame transmission is completed. + +In addition to priority rotation, the SW must maintain head and tail +pointers into the FIFO formed by the TX buffers to be able to determine +which buffer should be used for next frame (``txb_head``) and which +should be the first completed one (``txb_tail``). The actual buffer +indices are (obviously) modulo 4 (number of TX buffers), but the +pointers must be at least one bit wider to be able to distinguish +between FIFO full and FIFO empty – in this situation, +:math:`txb\_head \equiv txb\_tail\ (\textrm{mod}\ 4)`. An example of how +the FIFO is maintained, together with priority rotation, is depicted in + +| + ++------+---+---+---+---+ +| TXB# | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | ++======+===+===+===+===+ +| Seq | A | B | C | | ++------+---+---+---+---+ +| Prio | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | ++------+---+---+---+---+ +| | | T | | H | ++------+---+---+---+---+ + +| + ++------+---+---+---+---+ +| TXB# | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | ++======+===+===+===+===+ +| Seq | | B | C | | ++------+---+---+---+---+ +| Prio | 4 | 7 | 6 | 5 | ++------+---+---+---+---+ +| | | T | | H | ++------+---+---+---+---+ + +| + ++------+---+---+---+---+----+ +| TXB# | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 0’ | ++======+===+===+===+===+====+ +| Seq | E | B | C | D | | ++------+---+---+---+---+----+ +| Prio | 4 | 7 | 6 | 5 | | ++------+---+---+---+---+----+ +| | | T | | | H | ++------+---+---+---+---+----+ + +| + +.. kernel-figure:: fsm_txt_buffer_user.svg + + TX Buffer states with possible transitions + +.. _subsec:ctucanfd:txtimestamp: + +Timestamping TX frames +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +When submitting a frame to a TX buffer, one may specify the timestamp at +which the frame should be transmitted. The frame transmission may start +later, but not sooner. Note that the timestamp does not participate in +buffer prioritization – that is decided solely by the mechanism +described above. + +Support for time-based packet transmission was recently merged to Linux +v4.19 `Time-based packet transmission <https://lwn.net/Articles/748879/>`_, +but it remains yet to be researched +whether this functionality will be practical for CAN. + +Also similarly to retrieving the timestamp of RX frames, the core +supports retrieving the timestamp of TX frames – that is the time when +the frame was successfully delivered. The particulars are very similar +to timestamping RX frames and are described in . + +Handling RX buffer overrun +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +When a received frame does no more fit into the hardware RX FIFO in its +entirety, RX FIFO overrun flag (STATUS[DOR]) is set and Data Overrun +Interrupt (DOI) is triggered. When servicing the interrupt, care must be +taken first to clear the DOR flag (via COMMAND[CDO]) and after that +clear the DOI interrupt flag. Otherwise, the interrupt would be +immediately [7]_ rearmed. + +**Note**: During development, it was discussed whether the internal HW +pipelining cannot disrupt this clear sequence and whether an additional +dummy cycle is necessary between clearing the flag and the interrupt. On +the Avalon interface, it indeed proved to be the case, but APB being +safe because it uses 2-cycle transactions. Essentially, the DOR flag +would be cleared, but DOI register’s Preset input would still be high +the cycle when the DOI clear request would also be applied (by setting +the register’s Reset input high). As Set had higher priority than Reset, +the DOI flag would not be reset. This has been already fixed by swapping +the Set/Reset priority (see issue #187). + +Reporting Error Passive and Bus Off conditions +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +It may be desirable to report when the node reaches *Error Passive*, +*Error Warning*, and *Bus Off* conditions. The driver is notified about +error state change by an interrupt (EPI, EWLI), and then proceeds to +determine the core’s error state by reading its error counters. + +There is, however, a slight race condition here – there is a delay +between the time when the state transition occurs (and the interrupt is +triggered) and when the error counters are read. When EPI is received, +the node may be either *Error Passive* or *Bus Off*. If the node goes +*Bus Off*, it obviously remains in the state until it is reset. +Otherwise, the node is *or was* *Error Passive*. However, it may happen +that the read state is *Error Warning* or even *Error Active*. It may be +unclear whether and what exactly to report in that case, but I +personally entertain the idea that the past error condition should still +be reported. Similarly, when EWLI is received but the state is later +detected to be *Error Passive*, *Error Passive* should be reported. + + +CTU CAN FD Driver Sources Reference +----------------------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/net/can/ctucanfd/ctucanfd.h + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/net/can/ctucanfd/ctucanfd_base.c + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/net/can/ctucanfd/ctucanfd_pci.c + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/net/can/ctucanfd/ctucanfd_platform.c + :internal: + +CTU CAN FD IP Core and Driver Development Acknowledgment +--------------------------------------------------------- + +* Odrej Ille <ondrej.ille@gmail.com> + + * started the project as student at Department of Measurement, FEE, CTU + * invested great amount of personal time and enthusiasm to the project over years + * worked on more funded tasks + +* `Department of Measurement <https://meas.fel.cvut.cz/>`_, + `Faculty of Electrical Engineering <http://www.fel.cvut.cz/en/>`_, + `Czech Technical University <https://www.cvut.cz/en>`_ + + * is the main investor into the project over many years + * uses project in their CAN/CAN FD diagnostics framework for `Skoda Auto <https://www.skoda-auto.cz/>`_ + +* `Digiteq Automotive <https://www.digiteqautomotive.com/en>`_ + + * funding of the project CAN FD Open Cores Support Linux Kernel Based Systems + * negotiated and paid CTU to allow public access to the project + * provided additional funding of the work + +* `Department of Control Engineering <https://control.fel.cvut.cz/en>`_, + `Faculty of Electrical Engineering <http://www.fel.cvut.cz/en/>`_, + `Czech Technical University <https://www.cvut.cz/en>`_ + + * solving the project CAN FD Open Cores Support Linux Kernel Based Systems + * providing GitLab management + * virtual servers and computational power for continuous integration + * providing hardware for HIL continuous integration tests + +* `PiKRON Ltd. <http://pikron.com/>`_ + + * minor funding to initiate preparation of the project open-sourcing + +* Petr Porazil <porazil@pikron.com> + + * design of PCIe transceiver addon board and assembly of boards + * design and assembly of MZ_APO baseboard for MicroZed/Zynq based system + +* Martin Jerabek <martin.jerabek01@gmail.com> + + * Linux driver development + * continuous integration platform architect and GHDL updates + * theses `Open-source and Open-hardware CAN FD Protocol Support <https://dspace.cvut.cz/bitstream/handle/10467/80366/F3-DP-2019-Jerabek-Martin-Jerabek-thesis-2019-canfd.pdf>`_ + +* Jiri Novak <jnovak@fel.cvut.cz> + + * project initiation, management and use at Department of Measurement, FEE, CTU + +* Pavel Pisa <pisa@cmp.felk.cvut.cz> + + * initiate open-sourcing, project coordination, management at Department of Control Engineering, FEE, CTU + +* Jaroslav Beran<jara.beran@gmail.com> + + * system integration for Intel SoC, core and driver testing and updates + +* Carsten Emde (`OSADL <https://www.osadl.org/>`_) + + * provided OSADL expertise to discuss IP core licensing + * pointed to possible deadlock for LGPL and CAN bus possible patent case which lead to relicense IP core design to BSD like license + +* Reiner Zitzmann and Holger Zeltwanger (`CAN in Automation <https://www.can-cia.org/>`_) + + * provided suggestions and help to inform community about the project and invited us to events focused on CAN bus future development directions + +* Jan Charvat + + * implemented CTU CAN FD functional model for QEMU which has been integrated into QEMU mainline (`docs/system/devices/can.rst <https://www.qemu.org/docs/master/system/devices/can.html>`_) + * Bachelor theses Model of CAN FD Communication Controller for QEMU Emulator + +Notes +----- + + +.. [1] + Other buses have their own specific driver interface to set up the + device. + +.. [2] + Not to be mistaken with CAN Error Frame. This is a ``can_frame`` with + ``CAN_ERR_FLAG`` set and some error info in its ``data`` field. + +.. [3] + Available in CTU CAN FD repository + `<https://gitlab.fel.cvut.cz/canbus/ctucanfd_ip_core>`_ + +.. [4] + As is done in the low-level driver functions + ``ctucan_hw_set_nom_bittiming`` and + ``ctucan_hw_set_data_bittiming``. + +.. [5] + At the time of writing this thesis, option 1 is still being used and + the modification is queued in gitlab issue #222 + +.. [6] + Strictly speaking, multiple CAN TX queues are supported since v4.19 + `can: enable multi-queue for SocketCAN devices <https://lore.kernel.org/patchwork/patch/913526/>`_ but no mainline driver is using + them yet. + +.. [7] + Or rather in the next clock cycle diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/ctu/fsm_txt_buffer_user.svg b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/ctu/fsm_txt_buffer_user.svg new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b371650788f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/ctu/fsm_txt_buffer_user.svg @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<svg width="113.611mm" height="86.6873mm" version="1.1" viewBox="0 0 113.611 86.6873" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:cc="http://creativecommons.org/ns#" xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/" xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#"> + <defs> + <marker id="marker3667" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(-.6)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill="#28a4ff" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker3517" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(-.6)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#000" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker3373" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(-.6)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#000" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker3199" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(-.6)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill="#28a4ff" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker3037" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(-.6)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill="#28a4ff" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker2779" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(-.6)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill="#28a4ff" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker2477" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(.6) rotate(180) translate(0)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill="#28a4ff" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker2074" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(.6) rotate(180) translate(0)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#000" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker1964" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(.6) rotate(180) translate(0)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#000" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="marker1856" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(.6) rotate(180) translate(0)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#000" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <marker id="Arrow2Mend" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(.6) rotate(180) translate(0)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#000" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <filter id="filter1204" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <marker id="marker2074-3" overflow="visible" orient="auto"> + <path transform="scale(-.6)" d="m8.71859 4.03374-10.9259-4.01772 10.9259-4.01772c-1.7455 2.37206-1.73544 5.61745-6e-7 8.03544z" fill="#28a4ff" fill-rule="evenodd" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-linejoin="round" stroke-width=".625"/> + </marker> + <filter id="filter1204-6" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <filter id="filter1204-6-9" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <filter id="filter1204-6-2" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <filter id="filter1204-6-2-9" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <filter id="filter1204-6-2-9-4" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <filter id="filter1204-6-2-9-1" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <filter id="filter1204-6-2-9-1-3" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + <filter id="filter1204-6-2-9-1-3-1" x="-4.19953e-6" y="-5.60084e-6" width="1.00001" height="1.00001" color-interpolation-filters="sRGB"> + <feGaussianBlur stdDeviation="0.00018829868"/> + </filter> + </defs> + <metadata> + <rdf:RDF> + <cc:Work rdf:about=""> + <dc:format>image/svg+xml</dc:format> + <dc:type rdf:resource="http://purl.org/dc/dcmitype/StillImage"/> + <dc:title/> + </cc:Work> + </rdf:RDF> + </metadata> + <g transform="translate(-49.0277 -104.823)"> + <g> + <path d="m130.534 165.429h-71.1816v-17.5315" fill="none" marker-end="url(#marker2477)" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-width=".6"/> + <path d="m145.034 122.959v-11.5914h-43.1215" fill="none" marker-end="url(#marker3037)" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-width=".6"/> + <rect x="130.679" y="122.933" width="28.2965" height="45.2319" rx="0" ry="0" fill="#e5e5e5" stroke="#717171" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-width=".499999"/> + <path d="m102.044 116.236h23.3126l-0.13388 18.8185h19.9383v3.66603" fill="none" marker-end="url(#marker3199)" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-width=".6"/> + <path d="m59.5006 138.391v-24.2517h20.6338" fill="none" marker-end="url(#marker2779)" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-width=".6"/> + <rect x="78.1389" y="126.411" width="28.0037" height="35.0443" rx="0" ry="0" fill="#e5e5e5" stroke="#717171" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-width=".5"/> + </g> + <g fill="#ffcb35" stroke="#000" stroke-linecap="square"> + <ellipse cx="92.1408" cy="114.239" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308" stroke-width=".5"/> + <ellipse cx="92.1408" cy="134.185" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308" stroke-width=".499999"/> + <ellipse cx="92.1408" cy="152.199" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308" stroke-width=".499999"/> + </g> + <g fill="#28a4ff" stroke="#000" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-width=".499999"> + <ellipse cx="144.827" cy="143.316" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308"/> + <ellipse cx="144.827" cy="159.143" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308"/> + <ellipse cx="59.4364" cy="142.823" rx="7.36455" ry="4.39308"/> + <ellipse cx="144.827" cy="129.196" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308"/> + <ellipse cx="143.077" cy="180.53" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308"/> + </g> + <ellipse cx="110.386" cy="180.53" rx="10.8866" ry="4.39308" fill="#ffcb35" stroke="#000" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-width=".499999"/> + <text x="110.90907" y="179.42688" font-size="3.175px" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="110.90907" y="179.42688" dy="0.60000002" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Accessible</tspan><tspan x="110.90907" y="183.39563"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">for S</tspan>W</tspan></text> + <text x="143.5869" y="179.52795" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="143.5869" y="179.52795" dy="1 0 0 0 0 0" font-family="sans-serif" font-size="2.82222px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle" style="font-variant-caps:normal;font-variant-east-asian:normal;font-variant-ligatures:normal;font-variant-numeric:normal">Inaccessible</tspan><tspan x="143.5869" y="183.36786" font-size="3.175px"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">for S</tspan>W</tspan></text> + <g font-size="3.175px"> + <text x="91.95018" y="115.29005" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="91.95018" y="115.29005" font-size="3.175px"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Ready</tspan></tspan></text> + <text x="145.25127" y="130.49019" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="145.25127" y="130.49019" font-size="3.175px"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">TX OK</tspan></tspan></text> + <text x="145.31845" y="144.43121" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="145.31845" y="144.43121" font-size="3.175px"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Aborted</tspan></tspan></text> + <text x="145.40399" y="160.36035" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="145.40399" y="160.36035" font-size="3.175px"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">TX failed</tspan></tspan></text> + <text x="91.823967" y="133.53941" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle" style="line-height:0.9" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="91.823967" y="133.53941" text-align="center"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">TX in</tspan></tspan><tspan x="91.823967" y="136.39691" text-align="center">progress</tspan></text> + <text x="91.648918" y="151.84813" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle" style="line-height:0.9" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="91.648918" y="151.84813" text-align="center"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Abort in</tspan></tspan><tspan x="91.648918" y="154.70563" text-align="center">progress</tspan></text> + <text x="59.456043" y="143.91658" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="59.456043" y="143.91658" font-size="3.175px"><tspan font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Empty</tspan></tspan></text> + </g> + <g fill="none"> + <g stroke="#000"> + <rect x="52.3943" y="171.63" width="106.581" height="16.601" rx="0" ry="0" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-width=".499999"/> + <g stroke-width=".6"> + <path d="m106.383 159.046h26.4967" marker-end="url(#Arrow2Mend)"/> + <path d="m103.138 152.268h41.5564v-3.92426" marker-end="url(#marker1856)"/> + <path d="m106.38 129.354h17.7785"/> + <path d="m125.818 129.359h7.2418" marker-end="url(#marker1964)"/> + </g> + <path d="m124.169 129.354a0.959514 0.97091 0 0 1 0.47587-0.84557 0.959514 0.97091 0 0 1 0.96164-3e-3 0.959514 0.97091 0 0 1 0.48149 0.84231" stroke-linecap="square" stroke-width=".600001"/> + <path d="m55.7026 180.832h34.8131" marker-end="url(#marker2074)" stroke-width=".6"/> + </g> + <g> + <path d="m55.6464 185.744h34.8131" marker-end="url(#marker2074-3)" stroke="#28a4ff" stroke-width=".600001"/> + <g stroke-width=".6"> + <path d="m94.0487 129.889v-10.6493" marker-end="url(#marker3373)" stroke="#000"/> + <path d="m89.7534 118.621v10.662" marker-end="url(#marker3517)" stroke="#000"/> + <path d="m92.119 138.812v7.9718" marker-end="url(#marker3667)" stroke="#28a4ff"/> + </g> + </g> + </g> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 91.8919 139.964)" x="26.959213" y="9.11724" fill="#2aa1ff" filter="url(#filter1204-6-2-9-1-3-1)" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="26.959213" y="9.11724" text-align="center">Set</tspan><tspan x="26.959213" y="22.31724" text-align="center">abort</tspan></text> + <text transform="translate(49.0277 104.823)" x="57.620724" y="16.855087" filter="url(#filter1204)" font-size="3.175px" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="57.620724" y="16.855087" text-align="center">Transmission</tspan><tspan x="57.620724" y="20.347588" text-align="center">unsuccesfull</tspan></text> + <g font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-anchor="middle"> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 68.5988 118.913)" x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" filter="url(#filter1204)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" text-align="center">Transmission</tspan><tspan x="38.824219" y="22.317188" text-align="center">starts</tspan></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 106.802 130.509)" x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" filter="url(#filter1204)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" text-align="center">Transmission</tspan><tspan x="38.824219" y="22.317188" text-align="center">succesfull</tspan></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 107.77 145.476)" x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" filter="url(#filter1204)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" text-align="center">Transmission</tspan><tspan x="38.824219" y="22.317188" text-align="center">sborted</tspan></text> + </g> + <g stroke-width="3.77953" text-anchor="middle"> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 107.574 155.948)" x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" filter="url(#filter1204)" font-size="10.6667px" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="38.824219" y="9.1171875" text-align="center">Retransmit</tspan><tspan x="38.824219" y="20.850557" text-align="center">limit reached or</tspan><tspan x="38.824219" y="32.583927" text-align="center">node went bus off</tspan><tspan x="38.824219" y="44.317299" text-align="center"/></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 60.7127 177.384)" x="38.824539" y="9.1173134" filter="url(#filter1204-6)" font-size="12px" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="38.824539" y="9.1173134" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Transmission result</tspan></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 45.6885 173.226)" x="57.727047" y="9.11724" filter="url(#filter1204-6-9)" font-size="12px" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="57.727047" y="9.11724" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Legend:</tspan></text> + </g> + <g fill="#2aa1ff" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-anchor="middle"> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 57.0045 182.079)" x="57.727047" y="9.11724" filter="url(#filter1204-6-2)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="57.727047" y="9.11724" fill="#2aa1ff" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">SW command</tspan></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 57.7865 110.104)" x="40.822609" y="9.11724" filter="url(#filter1204-6-2-9)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="40.822609" y="9.11724" fill="#2aa1ff" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Set ready</tspan></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 116.893 107.491)" x="28.049065" y="9.1172523" filter="url(#filter1204-6-2-9-4)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="28.049065" y="9.1172523" fill="#2aa1ff" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Set ready</tspan></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 87.5687 166.324)" x="28.049065" y="9.1172523" filter="url(#filter1204-6-2-9-1)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="28.049065" y="9.1172523" fill="#2aa1ff" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Set empty</tspan></text> + <text transform="matrix(.264583 0 0 .264583 106.53 113.074)" x="30.228771" y="8.9063139" filter="url(#filter1204-6-2-9-1-3)" text-align="center" style="line-height:1.1" xml:space="preserve"><tspan x="30.228771" y="8.9063139" fill="#2aa1ff" font-size="12px" stroke-width="3.77953" text-align="center" text-anchor="middle">Set abort</tspan></text> + </g> + </g> +</svg> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/freescale/flexcan.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/freescale/flexcan.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..106cd2890135 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/freescale/flexcan.rst @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +============================= +Flexcan CAN Controller driver +============================= + +Authors: Marc Kleine-Budde <mkl@pengutronix.de>, +Dario Binacchi <dario.binacchi@amarulasolutions.com> + +On/off RTR frames reception +=========================== + +For most flexcan IP cores the driver supports 2 RX modes: + +- FIFO +- mailbox + +The older flexcan cores (integrated into the i.MX25, i.MX28, i.MX35 +and i.MX53 SOCs) only receive RTR frames if the controller is +configured for RX-FIFO mode. + +The RX FIFO mode uses a hardware FIFO with a depth of 6 CAN frames, +while the mailbox mode uses a software FIFO with a depth of up to 62 +CAN frames. With the help of the bigger buffer, the mailbox mode +performs better under high system load situations. + +As reception of RTR frames is part of the CAN standard, all flexcan +cores come up in a mode where RTR reception is possible. + +With the "rx-rtr" private flag the ability to receive RTR frames can +be waived at the expense of losing the ability to receive RTR +messages. This trade off is beneficial in certain use cases. + +"rx-rtr" on + Receive RTR frames. (default) + + The CAN controller can and will receive RTR frames. + + On some IP cores the controller cannot receive RTR frames in the + more performant "RX mailbox" mode and will use "RX FIFO" mode + instead. + +"rx-rtr" off + + Waive ability to receive RTR frames. (not supported on all IP cores) + + This mode activates the "RX mailbox mode" for better performance, on + some IP cores RTR frames cannot be received anymore. + +The setting can only be changed if the interface is down:: + + ip link set dev can0 down + ethtool --set-priv-flags can0 rx-rtr {off|on} + ip link set dev can0 up diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6a8a4f74fa26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/can/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Controller Area Network (CAN) Device Drivers +============================================ + +Device drivers for CAN devices. + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + can327 + ctu/ctucanfd-driver + freescale/flexcan + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fc1812d3fc70 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Cellular Modem Device Drivers +============================= + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + qualcomm/rmnet + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/qualcomm/rmnet.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/qualcomm/rmnet.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4118384cf8eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/qualcomm/rmnet.rst @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============ +Rmnet Driver +============ + +1. Introduction +=============== + +rmnet driver is used for supporting the Multiplexing and aggregation +Protocol (MAP). This protocol is used by all recent chipsets using Qualcomm +Technologies, Inc. modems. + +This driver can be used to register onto any physical network device in +IP mode. Physical transports include USB, HSIC, PCIe and IP accelerator. + +Multiplexing allows for creation of logical netdevices (rmnet devices) to +handle multiple private data networks (PDN) like a default internet, tethering, +multimedia messaging service (MMS) or IP media subsystem (IMS). Hardware sends +packets with MAP headers to rmnet. Based on the multiplexer id, rmnet +routes to the appropriate PDN after removing the MAP header. + +Aggregation is required to achieve high data rates. This involves hardware +sending aggregated bunch of MAP frames. rmnet driver will de-aggregate +these MAP frames and send them to appropriate PDN's. + +2. Packet format +================ + +a. MAP packet v1 (data / control) + +MAP header fields are in big endian format. + +Packet format:: + + Bit 0 1 2-7 8-15 16-31 + Function Command / Data Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length + + Bit 32-x + Function Raw bytes + +Command (1)/ Data (0) bit value is to indicate if the packet is a MAP command +or data packet. Command packet is used for transport level flow control. Data +packets are standard IP packets. + +Reserved bits must be zero when sent and ignored when received. + +Padding is the number of bytes to be appended to the payload to +ensure 4 byte alignment. + +Multiplexer ID is to indicate the PDN on which data has to be sent. + +Payload length includes the padding length but does not include MAP header +length. + +b. Map packet v4 (data / control) + +MAP header fields are in big endian format. + +Packet format:: + + Bit 0 1 2-7 8-15 16-31 + Function Command / Data Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length + + Bit 32-(x-33) (x-32)-x + Function Raw bytes Checksum offload header + +Command (1)/ Data (0) bit value is to indicate if the packet is a MAP command +or data packet. Command packet is used for transport level flow control. Data +packets are standard IP packets. + +Reserved bits must be zero when sent and ignored when received. + +Padding is the number of bytes to be appended to the payload to +ensure 4 byte alignment. + +Multiplexer ID is to indicate the PDN on which data has to be sent. + +Payload length includes the padding length but does not include MAP header +length. + +Checksum offload header, has the information about the checksum processing done +by the hardware.Checksum offload header fields are in big endian format. + +Packet format:: + + Bit 0-14 15 16-31 + Function Reserved Valid Checksum start offset + + Bit 31-47 48-64 + Function Checksum length Checksum value + +Reserved bits must be zero when sent and ignored when received. + +Valid bit indicates whether the partial checksum is calculated and is valid. +Set to 1, if its is valid. Set to 0 otherwise. + +Padding is the number of bytes to be appended to the payload to +ensure 4 byte alignment. + +Checksum start offset, Indicates the offset in bytes from the beginning of the +IP header, from which modem computed checksum. + +Checksum length is the Length in bytes starting from CKSUM_START_OFFSET, +over which checksum is computed. + +Checksum value, indicates the checksum computed. + +c. MAP packet v5 (data / control) + +MAP header fields are in big endian format. + +Packet format:: + + Bit 0 1 2-7 8-15 16-31 + Function Command / Data Next header Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length + + Bit 32-x + Function Raw bytes + +Command (1)/ Data (0) bit value is to indicate if the packet is a MAP command +or data packet. Command packet is used for transport level flow control. Data +packets are standard IP packets. + +Next header is used to indicate the presence of another header, currently is +limited to checksum header. + +Padding is the number of bytes to be appended to the payload to +ensure 4 byte alignment. + +Multiplexer ID is to indicate the PDN on which data has to be sent. + +Payload length includes the padding length but does not include MAP header +length. + +d. Checksum offload header v5 + +Checksum offload header fields are in big endian format. + + Bit 0 - 6 7 8-15 16-31 + Function Header Type Next Header Checksum Valid Reserved + +Header Type is to indicate the type of header, this usually is set to CHECKSUM + +Header types += ========================================== +0 Reserved +1 Reserved +2 checksum header + +Checksum Valid is to indicate whether the header checksum is valid. Value of 1 +implies that checksum is calculated on this packet and is valid, value of 0 +indicates that the calculated packet checksum is invalid. + +Reserved bits must be zero when sent and ignored when received. + +e. MAP packet v1/v5 (command specific):: + + Bit 0 1 2-7 8 - 15 16 - 31 + Function Command Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length + Bit 32 - 39 40 - 45 46 - 47 48 - 63 + Function Command name Reserved Command Type Reserved + Bit 64 - 95 + Function Transaction ID + Bit 96 - 127 + Function Command data + +Command 1 indicates disabling flow while 2 is enabling flow + +Command types + += ========================================== +0 for MAP command request +1 is to acknowledge the receipt of a command +2 is for unsupported commands +3 is for error during processing of commands += ========================================== + +f. Aggregation + +Aggregation is multiple MAP packets (can be data or command) delivered to +rmnet in a single linear skb. rmnet will process the individual +packets and either ACK the MAP command or deliver the IP packet to the +network stack as needed + +MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding.... + +MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|Command Packet|Optional pad... + +3. Userspace configuration +========================== + +rmnet userspace configuration is done through netlink library librmnetctl +and command line utility rmnetcli. Utility is hosted in codeaurora forum git. +The driver uses rtnl_link_ops for communication. + +https://source.codeaurora.org/quic/la/platform/vendor/qcom-opensource/dataservices/tree/rmnetctl diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/chelsio/cxgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/chelsio/cxgb.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 20a887615c4a..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/chelsio/cxgb.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,352 +0,0 @@ - Chelsio N210 10Gb Ethernet Network Controller - - Driver Release Notes for Linux - - Version 2.1.1 - - June 20, 2005 - -CONTENTS -======== - INTRODUCTION - FEATURES - PERFORMANCE - DRIVER MESSAGES - KNOWN ISSUES - SUPPORT - - -INTRODUCTION -============ - - This document describes the Linux driver for Chelsio 10Gb Ethernet Network - Controller. This driver supports the Chelsio N210 NIC and is backward - compatible with the Chelsio N110 model 10Gb NICs. - - -FEATURES -======== - - Adaptive Interrupts (adaptive-rx) - --------------------------------- - - This feature provides an adaptive algorithm that adjusts the interrupt - coalescing parameters, allowing the driver to dynamically adapt the latency - settings to achieve the highest performance during various types of network - load. - - The interface used to control this feature is ethtool. Please see the - ethtool manpage for additional usage information. - - By default, adaptive-rx is disabled. - To enable adaptive-rx: - - ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx on - - To disable adaptive-rx, use ethtool: - - ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off - - After disabling adaptive-rx, the timer latency value will be set to 50us. - You may set the timer latency after disabling adaptive-rx: - - ethtool -C <interface> rx-usecs <microseconds> - - An example to set the timer latency value to 100us on eth0: - - ethtool -C eth0 rx-usecs 100 - - You may also provide a timer latency value while disabling adaptive-rx: - - ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off rx-usecs <microseconds> - - If adaptive-rx is disabled and a timer latency value is specified, the timer - will be set to the specified value until changed by the user or until - adaptive-rx is enabled. - - To view the status of the adaptive-rx and timer latency values: - - ethtool -c <interface> - - - TCP Segmentation Offloading (TSO) Support - ----------------------------------------- - - This feature, also known as "large send", enables a system's protocol stack - to offload portions of outbound TCP processing to a network interface card - thereby reducing system CPU utilization and enhancing performance. - - The interface used to control this feature is ethtool version 1.8 or higher. - Please see the ethtool manpage for additional usage information. - - By default, TSO is enabled. - To disable TSO: - - ethtool -K <interface> tso off - - To enable TSO: - - ethtool -K <interface> tso on - - To view the status of TSO: - - ethtool -k <interface> - - -PERFORMANCE -=========== - - The following information is provided as an example of how to change system - parameters for "performance tuning" an what value to use. You may or may not - want to change these system parameters, depending on your server/workstation - application. Doing so is not warranted in any way by Chelsio Communications, - and is done at "YOUR OWN RISK". Chelsio will not be held responsible for loss - of data or damage to equipment. - - Your distribution may have a different way of doing things, or you may prefer - a different method. These commands are shown only to provide an example of - what to do and are by no means definitive. - - Making any of the following system changes will only last until you reboot - your system. You may want to write a script that runs at boot-up which - includes the optimal settings for your system. - - Setting PCI Latency Timer: - setpci -d 1425:* 0x0c.l=0x0000F800 - - Disabling TCP timestamp: - sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps=0 - - Disabling SACK: - sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_sack=0 - - Setting large number of incoming connection requests: - sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_max_syn_backlog=3000 - - Setting maximum receive socket buffer size: - sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=1024000 - - Setting maximum send socket buffer size: - sysctl -w net.core.wmem_max=1024000 - - Set smp_affinity (on a multiprocessor system) to a single CPU: - echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity - - Setting default receive socket buffer size: - sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=524287 - - Setting default send socket buffer size: - sysctl -w net.core.wmem_default=524287 - - Setting maximum option memory buffers: - sysctl -w net.core.optmem_max=524287 - - Setting maximum backlog (# of unprocessed packets before kernel drops): - sysctl -w net.core.netdev_max_backlog=300000 - - Setting TCP read buffers (min/default/max): - sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" - - Setting TCP write buffers (min/pressure/max): - sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" - - Setting TCP buffer space (min/pressure/max): - sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_mem="10000000 10000000 10000000" - - TCP window size for single connections: - The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size must be at least as large as the - Bandwidth-Delay Product of the communication link between the sender and - receiver. Due to the variations of RTT, you may want to increase the buffer - size up to 2 times the Bandwidth-Delay Product. Reference page 289 of - "TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1, The Protocols" by W. Richard Stevens. - At 10Gb speeds, use the following formula: - RX_WINDOW >= 1.25MBytes * RTT(in milliseconds) - Example for RTT with 100us: RX_WINDOW = (1,250,000 * 0.1) = 125,000 - RX_WINDOW sizes of 256KB - 512KB should be sufficient. - Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size: - sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="<min> <default> <max>" - - TCP window size for multiple connections: - The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size may be calculated the same as single - connections, but should be divided by the number of connections. The - smaller window prevents congestion and facilitates better pacing, - especially if/when MAC level flow control does not work well or when it is - not supported on the machine. Experimentation may be necessary to attain - the correct value. This method is provided as a starting point for the - correct receive buffer size. - Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size is - performed in the same manner as single connection. - - -DRIVER MESSAGES -=============== - - The following messages are the most common messages logged by syslog. These - may be found in /var/log/messages. - - Driver up: - Chelsio Network Driver - version 2.1.1 - - NIC detected: - eth#: Chelsio N210 1x10GBaseX NIC (rev #), PCIX 133MHz/64-bit - - Link up: - eth#: link is up at 10 Gbps, full duplex - - Link down: - eth#: link is down - - -KNOWN ISSUES -============ - - These issues have been identified during testing. The following information - is provided as a workaround to the problem. In some cases, this problem is - inherent to Linux or to a particular Linux Distribution and/or hardware - platform. - - 1. Large number of TCP retransmits on a multiprocessor (SMP) system. - - On a system with multiple CPUs, the interrupt (IRQ) for the network - controller may be bound to more than one CPU. This will cause TCP - retransmits if the packet data were to be split across different CPUs - and re-assembled in a different order than expected. - - To eliminate the TCP retransmits, set smp_affinity on the particular - interrupt to a single CPU. You can locate the interrupt (IRQ) used on - the N110/N210 by using ifconfig: - ifconfig <dev_name> | grep Interrupt - Set the smp_affinity to a single CPU: - echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity - - It is highly suggested that you do not run the irqbalance daemon on your - system, as this will change any smp_affinity setting you have applied. - The irqbalance daemon runs on a 10 second interval and binds interrupts - to the least loaded CPU determined by the daemon. To disable this daemon: - chkconfig --level 2345 irqbalance off - - By default, some Linux distributions enable the kernel feature, - irqbalance, which performs the same function as the daemon. To disable - this feature, add the following line to your bootloader: - noirqbalance - - Example using the Grub bootloader: - title Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (2.4.21-27.ELsmp) - root (hd0,0) - kernel /vmlinuz-2.4.21-27.ELsmp ro root=/dev/hda3 noirqbalance - initrd /initrd-2.4.21-27.ELsmp.img - - 2. After running insmod, the driver is loaded and the incorrect network - interface is brought up without running ifup. - - When using 2.4.x kernels, including RHEL kernels, the Linux kernel - invokes a script named "hotplug". This script is primarily used to - automatically bring up USB devices when they are plugged in, however, - the script also attempts to automatically bring up a network interface - after loading the kernel module. The hotplug script does this by scanning - the ifcfg-eth# config files in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts, looking - for HWADDR=<mac_address>. - - If the hotplug script does not find the HWADDRR within any of the - ifcfg-eth# files, it will bring up the device with the next available - interface name. If this interface is already configured for a different - network card, your new interface will have incorrect IP address and - network settings. - - To solve this issue, you can add the HWADDR=<mac_address> key to the - interface config file of your network controller. - - To disable this "hotplug" feature, you may add the driver (module name) - to the "blacklist" file located in /etc/hotplug. It has been noted that - this does not work for network devices because the net.agent script - does not use the blacklist file. Simply remove, or rename, the net.agent - script located in /etc/hotplug to disable this feature. - - 3. Transport Protocol (TP) hangs when running heavy multi-connection traffic - on an AMD Opteron system with HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel chipset. - - If your AMD Opteron system uses the AMD-8131 HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel - chipset, you may experience the "133-Mhz Mode Split Completion Data - Corruption" bug identified by AMD while using a 133Mhz PCI-X card on the - bus PCI-X bus. - - AMD states, "Under highly specific conditions, the AMD-8131 PCI-X Tunnel - can provide stale data via split completion cycles to a PCI-X card that - is operating at 133 Mhz", causing data corruption. - - AMD's provides three workarounds for this problem, however, Chelsio - recommends the first option for best performance with this bug: - - For 133Mhz secondary bus operation, limit the transaction length and - the number of outstanding transactions, via BIOS configuration - programming of the PCI-X card, to the following: - - Data Length (bytes): 1k - Total allowed outstanding transactions: 2 - - Please refer to AMD 8131-HT/PCI-X Errata 26310 Rev 3.08 August 2004, - section 56, "133-MHz Mode Split Completion Data Corruption" for more - details with this bug and workarounds suggested by AMD. - - It may be possible to work outside AMD's recommended PCI-X settings, try - increasing the Data Length to 2k bytes for increased performance. If you - have issues with these settings, please revert to the "safe" settings - and duplicate the problem before submitting a bug or asking for support. - - NOTE: The default setting on most systems is 8 outstanding transactions - and 2k bytes data length. - - 4. On multiprocessor systems, it has been noted that an application which - is handling 10Gb networking can switch between CPUs causing degraded - and/or unstable performance. - - If running on an SMP system and taking performance measurements, it - is suggested you either run the latest netperf-2.4.0+ or use a binding - tool such as Tim Hockin's procstate utilities (runon) - <http://www.hockin.org/~thockin/procstate/>. - - Binding netserver and netperf (or other applications) to particular - CPUs will have a significant difference in performance measurements. - You may need to experiment which CPU to bind the application to in - order to achieve the best performance for your system. - - If you are developing an application designed for 10Gb networking, - please keep in mind you may want to look at kernel functions - sched_setaffinity & sched_getaffinity to bind your application. - - If you are just running user-space applications such as ftp, telnet, - etc., you may want to try the runon tool provided by Tim Hockin's - procstate utility. You could also try binding the interface to a - particular CPU: runon 0 ifup eth0 - - -SUPPORT -======= - - If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our - customer support team via email at support@chelsio.com or check our website - at http://www.chelsio.com - -=============================================================================== - - Chelsio Communications - 370 San Aleso Ave. - Suite 100 - Sunnyvale, CA 94085 - http://www.chelsio.com - -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as -published by the Free Software Foundation. - -You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along -with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., -59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - -THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED -WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF -MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. - - Copyright (c) 2003-2005 Chelsio Communications. All rights reserved. - -=============================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cirrus/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cirrus/cs89x0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 0e190180eec8..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cirrus/cs89x0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,624 +0,0 @@ - -NOTE ----- - -This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version -has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton. - -Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as -described below. In general, you should use the driver version which -comes with your Linux distribution. - - - -CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS -Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 <kernel 2.3.48> -=============================================================================== - - -TABLE OF CONTENTS - -1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS - 1.1 Product Overview - 1.2 Driver Description - 1.2.1 Driver Name - 1.2.2 File in the Driver Package - 1.3 System Requirements - 1.4 Licensing Information - -2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION - 2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration - 2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration - -3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE - -4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER - 4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module - 4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode - 4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA - -5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING - 5.1 Known Defects and Limitations - 5.2 Testing the Adapter - 5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test - 5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test - 5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs - 5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts - -6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT - 6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support - 6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support - 6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version - 6.4 Current maintainer - 6.5 Kernel boot parameters - - -1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS -=============================================================================== - - -1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW - -The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow -IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus -computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks. The adapters are designed for operation -in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in -10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5 -or fiber networks). - -CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional -features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition. As -such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of -adapters. Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on -configuring both types of adapters. - - -1.2 DRIVER DESCRIPTION - -The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux -v2.3.48 or greater kernel. It can be compiled directly into the kernel -or loaded at run-time as a device driver module. - -1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0 - -1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive: - -The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include: - - readme.txt - this file - build - batch file to compile cs89x0.c. - cs89x0.c - driver C code - cs89x0.h - driver header file - cs89x0.o - pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel) - config/Config.in - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. - config/Makefile - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. - config/Space.c - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. - - - -1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - -The following hardware is required: - - * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter - - * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with: - * An 80386 or higher processor - * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h - * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920). - - * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network - topology. - -The following software is required: - -* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher - - * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based) - - * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel) - - * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel - or a module) - - - -1.4 LICENSING INFORMATION - -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under -the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software -Foundation, version 1. - -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT -ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or -FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for -more details. - -For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software -Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - - - -2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION -=============================================================================== - -Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters -stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup -Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM. - -When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's -configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings -or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based -adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE. - -Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install -and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup -Utility before installation in the target LINUX system. (Not required if -installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.) - - -2.1 CS8900-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION - -CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured -with the following "default" settings: - - Operation Mode: Memory Mode - IRQ: 10 - Base I/O Address: 300 - Memory Base Address: D0000 - Optimization: DOS Client - Transmission Mode: Half-duplex - BootProm: None - Media Type: Autodetect (3-media cards) or - 10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter) - -You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with -another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the -CS8900/20 Setup Utility. - - -2.2 CS8920-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION - -CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug -and Play (PnP) enabled. However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT -support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and -run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the -adapter before installation in the target Linux system. Failure to do -this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to -communicate with the adapter. - - - **************************************************************** - * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS: * - * * - * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT. * - * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST * - * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND * - * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER. * - **************************************************************** - - - - -3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE -=============================================================================== - -If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module -with the 'modprobe' command. Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can -be specified as command-line arguments to the load command. This facility -provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface -configuration when an EEPROM is not used. - -Example: - - insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui - -This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base -address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection. The following -configuration options are available on the command line: - -* io=### - specify IO address (200h-360h) -* irq=## - specify interrupt level -* use_dma=1 - Enable DMA -* dma=# - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support - Rx DMA only) -* dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K. Default value is set to 16. -* media=rj45 - specify media type - or media=bnc - or media=aui - or media=auto -* duplex=full - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex - or duplex=half - or duplex=auto -* debug=# - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled - for debugging) - -NOTES: - -a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter - will override the corresponding configuration value stored in - EEPROM. - -b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line. - -c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid - writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0 - card at the written addresses. This could cause problems - with device probing. To avoid this behaviour, add one - to the `io=' module parameter. This doesn't actually change - the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver - to partially initialise the hardware before trying to - identify the card. This could be dangerous if you are - not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address. - - For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300, - specify an IO address of 0x301. - -d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920. - -e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is - not present is: - - io - irq - media type (no autodetect) - -f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values - used with no EEPROM or command-line argument). - - * DMA Burst = enabled - * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled - * UseSA = enabled - * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line - * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line - * Use reset defaults for other config parameters - * dma_mode = 0 - -g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address. - -h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load - modules. This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to - determine configuration information which is passed to a driver - module when it is loaded. All the configuration options which are - described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules. - - For example: - - > cat /etc/conf.modules - ... - alias eth0 cs89x0 - options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1 - ... - - In this example we are telling the module system that the - ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver. We - are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma' - arguments to the driver when it is loaded. - -i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or - 7. You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work. - -j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only. DMA mode is - significantly more efficient. Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine - with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA - mode. With DMA this is reduced to 45%. - -k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play - support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card - with the command - - cat /proc/isapnp - -l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data - corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock. - -m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel - (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by - ISA bus probing. The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined - from the card's EEPROM. - -n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA - mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option - 'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7). - - Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line: - - LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5 - - or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf: - - image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48 - append="cs89x0_dma=5" - label=linux - root=/dev/hda5 - read-only - - The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode. - (64k mode is not available). - - -4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER -=============================================================================== - -The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into -a loadable device driver module. - - -4.1 COMPILING THE DRIVER AS A LOADABLE MODULE - -To compile the driver into a loadable module, use the following command -(single command line, without quotes): - -"gcc -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/include -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall --Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer -DMODULE -DCONFIG_MODVERSIONS --c cs89x0.c" - -4.2 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT MEMORY MODE - -Support for memory mode was not carried over into the 2.3 series kernels. - -4.3 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT Rx DMA - -The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel -series. DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver. It is -enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option. - - -5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING -=============================================================================== - -5.1 KNOWN DEFECTS and LIMITATIONS - -Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of -known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds. - - -5.2 TESTING THE ADAPTER - -Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of -the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the -adapter and its network connection. Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to -test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have -assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the -adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a -CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup -Utility). - - NOTE: The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a - DOS-only operating system environment. DO NOT run the diagnostics - from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT, - OS/2, or other operating system. - -To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter: - - 1.) Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. - - 2.) The adapter's current configuration is displayed. Hit the ENTER key to - get to the main menu. - - 4.) Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu. - * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality. - * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling. - - -5.2.1 DIAGNOSTIC SELF-TEST - -The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as -its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources -assigned during hardware configuration. The following tests are performed: - - * IO Register Read/Write Test - The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be - accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct. - - * Shared Memory Test - The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory - mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict - with other devices in the system. - - * Interrupt Test - The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ - signal. - - * EEPROM Test - The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read. - - * Chip RAM Test - The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is - working properly. - - * Internal Loop-back Test - The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and - receiver are operating properly. If this test fails, make sure the - adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for - example). - - * Boot PROM Test - The Boot PROM test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read. - Failure indicates the Boot PROM was not successfully read due to a - hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address - assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the - Boot PROM option.) - -Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with -another device on the ISA bus. In this case, you should use the Manual Setup -option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system -resource that failed. - - -5.2.2 DIAGNOSTIC NETWORK TEST - -The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by -transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs -on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run -between two nodes across a router.) - -This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter -installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running. The first PC is -configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator. -Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which -returns the frames to the Initiator. - -The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the -Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and -transmitted OK or in error. The test can be terminated anytime by the user at -either PC. - -To setup the Diagnostic Network Test: - - 1.) Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network - connection to act as the Responder. Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility - and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main - menu. Hit ENTER to start the Responder. - - 2.) Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and - start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. - - 3.) From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'. - Hit ENTER to start the test. - -You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder -to continue running. In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test -them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the -Responder. - - - -5.3 USING THE ADAPTER'S LEDs - -The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board -located near the 10Base-T connector. - -Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T -connection. (Only applies to 10Base-T. The green LED has no significance for -a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.) - -TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or -receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.) - - -5.4 RESOLVING I/O CONFLICTS - -An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO -address, memory address or IRQ). You can usually detect an IO conflict in one -of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter: - - 1.) The system does not boot properly (or at all). - - 2.) The driver cannot communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter - not found" error message. - - 3.) You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load. - - 4.) If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver - reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a - memory address conflict. - -If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a -diagnostic self-test. Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the -self-test. If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the -resource in conflict. Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO -conflicts. - -In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove -the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the -CS8900/20 Setup Utility. Once reinstalled in the target system, run the -diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts -before loading the driver again. - -When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system -resource usage as indicated in the tables below. - -I/O Address Device IRQ Device ------------ -------- --- -------- - 200-20F Game I/O adapter 3 COM2, Bus Mouse - 230-23F Bus Mouse 4 COM1 - 270-27F LPT3: third parallel port 5 LPT2 - 2F0-2FF COM2: second serial port 6 Floppy Disk controller - 320-32F Fixed disk controller 7 LPT1 - 8 Real-time Clock - 9 EGA/VGA display adapter - 12 Mouse (PS/2) -Memory Address Device 13 Math Coprocessor --------------- --------------------- 14 Hard Disk controller -A000-BFFF EGA Graphics Adapter -A000-C7FF VGA Graphics Adapter -B000-BFFF Mono Graphics Adapter -B800-BFFF Color Graphics Adapter -E000-FFFF AT BIOS - - - - -6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT -=============================================================================== - -6.1 CONTACTING CIRRUS LOGIC'S TECHNICAL SUPPORT - -Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at: - -Telephone :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada) - :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada) -Fax :(512) 912-3871 -Email :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com -WWW :http://www.cirrus.com - - -6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED BEFORE CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT - -Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as -Much of the following information as possible. - -1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.) - -2.) Adapter configuration - - * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel - * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only) - * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type). - -3.) PC System's Configuration - - * Plug and Play system (yes/no) - * BIOS (make and version) - * System make and model - * CPU (type and speed) - * System RAM - * SCSI Adapter - -4.) Software - - * CS89XX driver and version - * Your network operating system and version - * Your system's OS version - * Version of all protocol support files - -5.) Any Error Message displayed. - - - -6.3 OBTAINING THE LATEST DRIVER VERSION - -You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's -Web site. You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email: -ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic -software-update notification. - -Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the -latest drivers and technical publications. - - -6.4 Current maintainer - -In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew -Morton. - -6.5 Kernel module parameters - -For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot -parameter `cs89x0_media=' has been implemented. Usage is: - - cs89x0_media=rj45 or - cs89x0_media=aui or - cs89x0_media=bnc - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/davicom/dm9000.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/davicom/dm9000.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 5552e2e575c5..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/davicom/dm9000.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,167 +0,0 @@ -DM9000 Network driver -===================== - -Copyright 2008 Simtec Electronics, - Ben Dooks <ben@simtec.co.uk> <ben-linux@fluff.org> - - -Introduction ------------- - -This file describes how to use the DM9000 platform-device based network driver -that is contained in the files drivers/net/dm9000.c and drivers/net/dm9000.h. - -The driver supports three DM9000 variants, the DM9000E which is the first chip -supported as well as the newer DM9000A and DM9000B devices. It is currently -maintained and tested by Ben Dooks, who should be CC: to any patches for this -driver. - - -Defining the platform device ----------------------------- - -The minimum set of resources attached to the platform device are as follows: - - 1) The physical address of the address register - 2) The physical address of the data register - 3) The IRQ line the device's interrupt pin is connected to. - -These resources should be specified in that order, as the ordering of the -two address regions is important (the driver expects these to be address -and then data). - -An example from arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/mach-bast.c is: - -static struct resource bast_dm9k_resource[] = { - [0] = { - .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000, - .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 3, - .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, - }, - [1] = { - .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40, - .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40 + 0x3f, - .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, - }, - [2] = { - .start = IRQ_DM9000, - .end = IRQ_DM9000, - .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ | IORESOURCE_IRQ_HIGHLEVEL, - } -}; - -static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = { - .name = "dm9000", - .id = 0, - .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource), - .resource = bast_dm9k_resource, -}; - -Note the setting of the IRQ trigger flag in bast_dm9k_resource[2].flags, -as this will generate a warning if it is not present. The trigger from -the flags field will be passed to request_irq() when registering the IRQ -handler to ensure that the IRQ is setup correctly. - -This shows a typical platform device, without the optional configuration -platform data supplied. The next example uses the same resources, but adds -the optional platform data to pass extra configuration data: - -static struct dm9000_plat_data bast_dm9k_platdata = { - .flags = DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY, -}; - -static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = { - .name = "dm9000", - .id = 0, - .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource), - .resource = bast_dm9k_resource, - .dev = { - .platform_data = &bast_dm9k_platdata, - } -}; - -The platform data is defined in include/linux/dm9000.h and described below. - - -Platform data -------------- - -Extra platform data for the DM9000 can describe the IO bus width to the -device, whether or not an external PHY is attached to the device and -the availability of an external configuration EEPROM. - -The flags for the platform data .flags field are as follows: - -DM9000_PLATF_8BITONLY - - The IO should be done with 8bit operations. - -DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY - - The IO should be done with 16bit operations. - -DM9000_PLATF_32BITONLY - - The IO should be done with 32bit operations. - -DM9000_PLATF_EXT_PHY - - The chip is connected to an external PHY. - -DM9000_PLATF_NO_EEPROM - - This can be used to signify that the board does not have an - EEPROM, or that the EEPROM should be hidden from the user. - -DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY - - Switch to using the simpler PHY polling method which does not - try and read the MII PHY state regularly. This is only available - when using the internal PHY. See the section on link state polling - for more information. - - The config symbol DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL, Kconfig entry - "Force simple NSR based PHY polling" allows this flag to be - forced on at build time. - - -PHY Link state polling ----------------------- - -The driver keeps track of the link state and informs the network core -about link (carrier) availability. This is managed by several methods -depending on the version of the chip and on which PHY is being used. - -For the internal PHY, the original (and currently default) method is -to read the MII state, either when the status changes if we have the -necessary interrupt support in the chip or every two seconds via a -periodic timer. - -To reduce the overhead for the internal PHY, there is now the option -of using the DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL config, or DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY -platform data option to read the summary information without the -expensive MII accesses. This method is faster, but does not print -as much information. - -When using an external PHY, the driver currently has to poll the MII -link status as there is no method for getting an interrupt on link change. - - -DM9000A / DM9000B ------------------ - -These chips are functionally similar to the DM9000E and are supported easily -by the same driver. The features are: - - 1) Interrupt on internal PHY state change. This means that the periodic - polling of the PHY status may be disabled on these devices when using - the internal PHY. - - 2) TCP/UDP checksum offloading, which the driver does not currently support. - - -ethtool -------- - -The driver supports the ethtool interface for access to the driver -state information, the PHY state and the EEPROM. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/de4x5.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/de4x5.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 452aac58341d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/de4x5.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,178 +0,0 @@ - Originally, this driver was written for the Digital Equipment - Corporation series of EtherWORKS Ethernet cards: - - DE425 TP/COAX EISA - DE434 TP PCI - DE435 TP/COAX/AUI PCI - DE450 TP/COAX/AUI PCI - DE500 10/100 PCI Fasternet - - but it will now attempt to support all cards which conform to the - Digital Semiconductor SROM Specification. The driver currently - recognises the following chips: - - DC21040 (no SROM) - DC21041[A] - DC21140[A] - DC21142 - DC21143 - - So far the driver is known to work with the following cards: - - KINGSTON - Linksys - ZNYX342 - SMC8432 - SMC9332 (w/new SROM) - ZNYX31[45] - ZNYX346 10/100 4 port (can act as a 10/100 bridge!) - - The driver has been tested on a relatively busy network using the DE425, - DE434, DE435 and DE500 cards and benchmarked with 'ttcp': it transferred - 16M of data to a DECstation 5000/200 as follows: - - TCP UDP - TX RX TX RX - DE425 1030k 997k 1170k 1128k - DE434 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k - DE435 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k - DE500 1063k 998k 1170k 1125k in 10Mb/s mode - - All values are typical (in kBytes/sec) from a sample of 4 for each - measurement. Their error is +/-20k on a quiet (private) network and also - depend on what load the CPU has. - - ========================================================================= - - The ability to load this driver as a loadable module has been included - and used extensively during the driver development (to save those long - reboot sequences). Loadable module support under PCI and EISA has been - achieved by letting the driver autoprobe as if it were compiled into the - kernel. Do make sure you're not sharing interrupts with anything that - cannot accommodate interrupt sharing! - - To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things: - - 0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system. - 1) copy de4x5.c from the /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite - temporary directory. - 2) for fixed autoprobes (not recommended), edit the source code near - line 5594 to reflect the I/O address you're using, or assign these when - loading by: - - insmod de4x5 io=0xghh where g = bus number - hh = device number - - NB: autoprobing for modules is now supported by default. You may just - use: - - insmod de4x5 - - to load all available boards. For a specific board, still use - the 'io=?' above. - 3) compile de4x5.c, but include -DMODULE in the command line to ensure - that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code). - 4) if you are wanting to add a new card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a - kernel with the de4x5 configuration turned off and reboot. - 5) insmod de4x5 [io=0xghh] - 6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface(s) manually - (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). - 7) enjoy! - - To unload a module, turn off the associated interface(s) - 'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod de4x5'. - - Automedia detection is included so that in principle you can disconnect - from, e.g. TP, reconnect to BNC and things will still work (after a - pause while the driver figures out where its media went). My tests - using ping showed that it appears to work.... - - By default, the driver will now autodetect any DECchip based card. - Should you have a need to restrict the driver to DIGITAL only cards, you - can compile with a DEC_ONLY define, or if loading as a module, use the - 'dec_only=1' parameter. - - I've changed the timing routines to use the kernel timer and scheduling - functions so that the hangs and other assorted problems that occurred - while autosensing the media should be gone. A bonus for the DC21040 - auto media sense algorithm is that it can now use one that is more in - line with the rest (the DC21040 chip doesn't have a hardware timer). - The downside is the 1 'jiffies' (10ms) resolution. - - IEEE 802.3u MII interface code has been added in anticipation that some - products may use it in the future. - - The SMC9332 card has a non-compliant SROM which needs fixing - I have - patched this driver to detect it because the SROM format used complies - to a previous DEC-STD format. - - I have removed the buffer copies needed for receive on Intels. I cannot - remove them for Alphas since the Tulip hardware only does longword - aligned DMA transfers and the Alphas get alignment traps with non - longword aligned data copies (which makes them really slow). No comment. - - I have added SROM decoding routines to make this driver work with any - card that supports the Digital Semiconductor SROM spec. This will help - all cards running the dc2114x series chips in particular. Cards using - the dc2104x chips should run correctly with the basic driver. I'm in - debt to <mjacob@feral.com> for the testing and feedback that helped get - this feature working. So far we have tested KINGSTON, SMC8432, SMC9332 - (with the latest SROM complying with the SROM spec V3: their first was - broken), ZNYX342 and LinkSys. ZNYX314 (dual 21041 MAC) and ZNYX 315 - (quad 21041 MAC) cards also appear to work despite their incorrectly - wired IRQs. - - I have added a temporary fix for interrupt problems when some SCSI cards - share the same interrupt as the DECchip based cards. The problem occurs - because the SCSI card wants to grab the interrupt as a fast interrupt - (runs the service routine with interrupts turned off) vs. this card - which really needs to run the service routine with interrupts turned on. - This driver will now add the interrupt service routine as a fast - interrupt if it is bounced from the slow interrupt. THIS IS NOT A - RECOMMENDED WAY TO RUN THE DRIVER and has been done for a limited time - until people sort out their compatibility issues and the kernel - interrupt service code is fixed. YOU SHOULD SEPARATE OUT THE FAST - INTERRUPT CARDS FROM THE SLOW INTERRUPT CARDS to ensure that they do not - run on the same interrupt. PCMCIA/CardBus is another can of worms... - - Finally, I think I have really fixed the module loading problem with - more than one DECchip based card. As a side effect, I don't mess with - the device structure any more which means that if more than 1 card in - 2.0.x is installed (4 in 2.1.x), the user will have to edit - linux/drivers/net/Space.c to make room for them. Hence, module loading - is the preferred way to use this driver, since it doesn't have this - limitation. - - Where SROM media detection is used and full duplex is specified in the - SROM, the feature is ignored unless lp->params.fdx is set at compile - time OR during a module load (insmod de4x5 args='eth??:fdx' [see - below]). This is because there is no way to automatically detect full - duplex links except through autonegotiation. When I include the - autonegotiation feature in the SROM autoconf code, this detection will - occur automatically for that case. - - Command line arguments are now allowed, similar to passing arguments - through LILO. This will allow a per adapter board set up of full duplex - and media. The only lexical constraints are: the board name (dev->name) - appears in the list before its parameters. The list of parameters ends - either at the end of the parameter list or with another board name. The - following parameters are allowed: - - fdx for full duplex - autosense to set the media/speed; with the following - sub-parameters: - TP, TP_NW, BNC, AUI, BNC_AUI, 100Mb, 10Mb, AUTO - - Case sensitivity is important for the sub-parameters. They *must* be - upper case. Examples: - - insmod de4x5 args='eth1:fdx autosense=BNC eth0:autosense=100Mb'. - - For a compiled in driver, in linux/drivers/net/CONFIG, place e.g. - DE4X5_OPTS = -DDE4X5_PARM='"eth0:fdx autosense=AUI eth2:autosense=TP"' - - Yes, I know full duplex isn't permissible on BNC or AUI; they're just - examples. By default, full duplex is turned off and AUTO is the default - autosense setting. In reality, I expect only the full duplex option to - be used. Note the use of single quotes in the two examples above and the - lack of commas to separate items. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/dmfe.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 25320bf19c86..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/dmfe.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -Note: This driver doesn't have a maintainer. - -Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. - -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or -modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License -as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 -of the License, or (at your option) any later version. - -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -GNU General Public License for more details. - - -This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET -10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you -didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a -line similar to : - - dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17) - -If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command : - - insmod dmfe - -This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass -a mode= setting to module while loading, like : - - insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex - insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex - insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex - insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex - -Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to : - - ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18 - ^^^^^^^^^^^ - Your IP Address - -Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command : - - route add default eth0 - - -Now your ethernet card should be up and running. - - -TODO: - -Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods. -Check on 64 bit boxes. -Check and fix on big endian boxes. -Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases. - - -Authors: - -Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw > : Original Author - -Contributors: - -Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br> -Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk> -Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> -Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dlink/dl2k.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dlink/dl2k.txt deleted file mode 100644 index cba74f7a3abc..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dlink/dl2k.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,282 +0,0 @@ - - D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation - for Linux - May 23, 2002 - -Contents -======== - - Compatibility List - - Quick Install - - Compiling the Driver - - Installing the Driver - - Option parameter - - Configuration Script Sample - - Troubleshooting - - -Compatibility List -================= -Adapter Support: - -D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. -D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. -D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. - - -The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it -on the environments below. - - . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7) - . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7) - . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7) - . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10) - - -Quick Install -============= -Install linux driver as following command: - -1. make all -2. insmod dl2k.ko -3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0 - ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\ ^^^^^^^^\ - IP NETMASK -Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by -"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step. - -4. cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net -5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.d/dl2k.conf: - alias eth0 dl2k -6. Run depmod to updated module indexes. -7. Run "netconfig" or "netconf" to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0 - located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually. - [see - Configuration Script Sample] -8. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time. - -Compiling the Driver -==================== - In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules. -The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver -can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged. -The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module. -In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the -source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides -better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or -kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation. - -The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and -Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler, -the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux -Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command -to compile and link the driver: - -CD-ROM drive ------------- - -[root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom -[root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom -[root@XXX /] cd root -[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k -[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k -[root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k -[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz -[root@XXX dl2k] make all - -Floppy disc drive ------------------ - -[root@XXX /] cd root -[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k -[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k -[root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k -[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz -[root@XXX dl2k] make all - -Installing the Driver -===================== - - Manual Installation - ------------------- - Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound - to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a - module enter the command: - - insmod dl2k.o - - or - - insmod dl2k.o <optional parameter> ; add parameter - - =============================================================== - example: insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd - or insmod dl2k.o media=3 - or insmod dl2k.o media=3,2 ; for 2 cards - =============================================================== - - Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by - the Linux device driver below. - - The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form - eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state, - it is necessary to issue the following command: - - ifconfig eth0 up - - Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with - Linux), enter the following command: - - ifup eth0 - - Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration - script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be - given in the next paragraph. - - The commands to unload a driver are as follows: - - ifdown eth0 - ifconfig eth0 down - rmmod dl2k.o - - The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and - to see the current network configuration. - - lsmod - ifconfig - - - Automated Installation - ---------------------- - This section describes how to install the driver such that it is - automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description - is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to - other distributions as well. - - Red Hat v6.x/v7.x - ----------------- - 1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically - /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net. - 2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly in the - /etc/modprobe.d/ directory. Add the following lines: - - alias ethx dl2k - options dl2k <optional parameters> - - where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if - one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the - previous section for the list of optional parameters. - 3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the - /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration - script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information. - 4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration - utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2 - and 3 above. - - -Parameter Description -===================== -You can install this driver without any additional parameter. However, if you -are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra -parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the -Linux device -driver. - -mtu=packet_size - Specifies the maximum packet size. default - is 1500. - -media=media_type - Specifies the media type the NIC operates at. - autosense Autosensing active media. - 10mbps_hd 10Mbps half duplex. - 10mbps_fd 10Mbps full duplex. - 100mbps_hd 100Mbps half duplex. - 100mbps_fd 100Mbps full duplex. - 1000mbps_fd 1000Mbps full duplex. - 1000mbps_hd 1000Mbps half duplex. - 0 Autosensing active media. - 1 10Mbps half duplex. - 2 10Mbps full duplex. - 3 100Mbps half duplex. - 4 100Mbps full duplex. - 5 1000Mbps half duplex. - 6 1000Mbps full duplex. - - By default, the NIC operates at autosense. - 1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only - available for fiber adapter. - -vlan=n - Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the - Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is - disable. - -jumbo=[0|1] - Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1, - the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this - function is disabled. - Jumbo frame usually improve the performance - int gigabit. - This feature need jumbo frame compatible - remote. - -rx_coalesce=m - Number of rx frame handled each interrupt. -rx_timeout=n - Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt. - If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert - an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't - assert rx interrupt until m frames received or - reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds. - Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can - reduce congestion collapse and overload which - has been a bottleneck for high speed network. - - For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800. - that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt - for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us. - -tx_coalesce=n - Number of tx frame handled each interrupt. - Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts - congestion usually lower performance of - high speed network card. Default is 16. - -tx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0, - the Tx flow control disable else driver - autodetect. -rx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0, - the Rx flow control enable else driver - autodetect. - - -Configuration Script Sample -=========================== -Here is a sample of a simple configuration script: - -DEVICE=eth0 -USERCTL=no -ONBOOT=yes -POOTPROTO=none -BROADCAST=207.200.5.255 -NETWORK=207.200.5.0 -NETMASK=255.255.255.0 -IPADDR=207.200.5.2 - - -Troubleshooting -=============== -Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line. - Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following - shell command to convert files. - - cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp - mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c - - OR - - cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp - mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c - -Q2: Could not find header files (*.h) ? - To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After - installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in - /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured - in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in - /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the - INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source. - Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include, - including those files will make a wrong version driver. - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..47f706bacdd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst @@ -0,0 +1,249 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================================================================= +Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher) +============================================================================= + +This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions +of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file. + +release 1.0 + +28 February 2002 + +Current maintainer (corrections to): + David Ruggiero <jdr@farfalle.com> + +Introduction +============ + +The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series +ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used +card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't +be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905" +(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series. Kernel support for the 3c509 family is +provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following +models: + + - 3c509 (original ISA card) + - 3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex) + - 3c589 (PCMCIA) + - 3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex) + - 3c579 (EISA) + +Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide +written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master +copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver, +currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/. + + +Special Driver Features +======================= + +Overriding card settings + +The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR, +IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be +needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax +for LILO parameters for doing this:: + + ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0 + +This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and +transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts +with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is +loaded as a module, only the IRQ may be overridden. For example, +setting two cards to IRQ10 and IRQ11 is done by using the irq module +option:: + + options 3c509 irq=10,11 + + +Full-duplex mode +================ + +The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities. +In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions +must be met: + +(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full- +duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are +positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B +(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support +full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original +3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus). + +(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45 +connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces. +AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex +operation. + +(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is +itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full- +duplex-capable Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on +another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable. + +Full-duplex mode can be enabled using 'ethtool'. + +.. warning:: + + Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode + + Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more + limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although + at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation, + the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way) + spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not + auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any + circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode + of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be + independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty + failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet + collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto- + negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch + would ever be necessary or desirable. + + +Available Transceiver Types +=========================== + +For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are: + +== ========================================================================= +0 transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex +1 AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector) +2 (undefined) +3 10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector) +4 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode +8 transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings +12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode +== ========================================================================= + +Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note +that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable +full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be. +This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would +never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation; +it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be +activated. + +The transceiver type can be changed using 'ethtool'. + + +Interpretation of error messages and common problems +---------------------------------------------------- + +Error Messages +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011. +These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much +work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving +packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare +or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are: + + - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no + keyboard activity. + + - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts. + Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick + interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others. + +No received packets +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never +receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely +have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the +card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not +increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to +use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10 +or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different +interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work, +you have a routing problem. + +Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + +If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors" +field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you +likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected. + +3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS. +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work +with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied +setup program. + +3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500, +to an absurdly high value, such as 5000. + + +Decoding Status and Error Messages +---------------------------------- + + +The bits in the main status register are: + +===== ====================================== +value description +===== ====================================== +0x01 Interrupt latch +0x02 Tx overrun, or Rx underrun +0x04 Tx complete +0x08 Tx FIFO room available +0x10 A complete Rx packet has arrived +0x20 A Rx packet has started to arrive +0x40 The driver has requested an interrupt +0x80 Statistics counter nearly full +===== ====================================== + +The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are: + +===== ============================================ +value description +===== ============================================ +0x02 Out-of-window collision. +0x04 Status stack overflow (normally impossible). +0x08 16 collisions. +0x10 Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth). +0x20 Tx jabber. +0x40 Tx interrupt requested. +0x80 Status is valid (this should always be set). +===== ============================================ + + +When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as:: + + eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82 + +The two values typically seen here are: + +0x82 +^^^^ + +Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet +host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network. + +0x88 +^^^^ + +16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy +or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this +error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set +to full duplex (see above). + +Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be +corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction. + + +Revision history (this file) +============================ + +28Feb02 v1.0 DR New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e89e4192af88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst @@ -0,0 +1,459 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +========================= +3Com Vortex device driver +========================= + +Andrew Morton + +30 April 2000 + + +This document describes the usage and errata of the 3Com "Vortex" device +driver for Linux, 3c59x.c. + +The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com> + +Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver. +Please report problems to one or more of: + +- Andrew Morton +- Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org> +- Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> + +Please note the 'Reporting and Diagnosing Problems' section at the end +of this file. + + +Since kernel 2.3.99-pre6, this driver incorporates the support for the +3c575-series Cardbus cards which used to be handled by 3c575_cb.c. + +This driver supports the following hardware: + + - 3c590 Vortex 10Mbps + - 3c592 EISA 10Mbps Demon/Vortex + - 3c597 EISA Fast Demon/Vortex + - 3c595 Vortex 100baseTx + - 3c595 Vortex 100baseT4 + - 3c595 Vortex 100base-MII + - 3c900 Boomerang 10baseT + - 3c900 Boomerang 10Mbps Combo + - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPO + - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps Combo + - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPC + - 3c900B-FL Cyclone 10base-FL + - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseTx + - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseT4 + - 3c905B Cyclone 100baseTx + - 3c905B Cyclone 10/100/BNC + - 3c905B-FX Cyclone 100baseFx + - 3c905C Tornado + - 3c920B-EMB-WNM (ATI Radeon 9100 IGP) + - 3c980 Cyclone + - 3c980C Python-T + - 3cSOHO100-TX Hurricane + - 3c555 Laptop Hurricane + - 3c556 Laptop Tornado + - 3c556B Laptop Hurricane + - 3c575 [Megahertz] 10/100 LAN CardBus + - 3c575 Boomerang CardBus + - 3CCFE575BT Cyclone CardBus + - 3CCFE575CT Tornado CardBus + - 3CCFE656 Cyclone CardBus + - 3CCFEM656B Cyclone+Winmodem CardBus + - 3CXFEM656C Tornado+Winmodem CardBus + - 3c450 HomePNA Tornado + - 3c920 Tornado + - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port A + - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port B + - 3c905B-T4 + - 3c920B-EMB-WNM Tornado + +Module parameters +================= + +There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when +its module is loaded. These are usually placed in ``/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf`` +configuration files. Example:: + + options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300 + +If you are using the PCMCIA tools (cardmgr) then the options may be +placed in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts:: + + module "3c59x" opts "debug=3 rx_copybreak=300" + + +The supported parameters are: + +debug=N + + Where N is a number from 0 to 7. Anything above 3 produces a lot + of output in your system logs. debug=1 is default. + +options=N1,N2,N3,... + + Each number in the list provides an option to the corresponding + network card. So if you have two 3c905's and you wish to provide + them with option 0x204 you would use:: + + options=0x204,0x204 + + The individual options are composed of a number of bitfields which + have the following meanings: + + Possible media type settings + + == ================================= + 0 10baseT + 1 10Mbs AUI + 2 undefined + 3 10base2 (BNC) + 4 100base-TX + 5 100base-FX + 6 MII (Media Independent Interface) + 7 Use default setting from EEPROM + 8 Autonegotiate + 9 External MII + 10 Use default setting from EEPROM + == ================================= + + When generating a value for the 'options' setting, the above media + selection values may be OR'ed (or added to) the following: + + ====== ============================================= + 0x8000 Set driver debugging level to 7 + 0x4000 Set driver debugging level to 2 + 0x0400 Enable Wake-on-LAN + 0x0200 Force full duplex mode. + 0x0010 Bus-master enable bit (Old Vortex cards only) + ====== ============================================= + + For example:: + + insmod 3c59x options=0x204 + + will force full-duplex 100base-TX, rather than allowing the usual + autonegotiation. + +global_options=N + + Sets the ``options`` parameter for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. + Entries in the ``options`` array above will override any setting of + this. + +full_duplex=N1,N2,N3... + + Similar to bit 9 of 'options'. Forces the corresponding card into + full-duplex mode. Please use this in preference to the ``options`` + parameter. + + In fact, please don't use this at all! You're better off getting + autonegotiation working properly. + +global_full_duplex=N1 + + Sets full duplex mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries + in the ``full_duplex`` array above will override any setting of this. + +flow_ctrl=N1,N2,N3... + + Use 802.3x MAC-layer flow control. The 3com cards only support the + PAUSE command, which means that they will stop sending packets for a + short period if they receive a PAUSE frame from the link partner. + + The driver only allows flow control on a link which is operating in + full duplex mode. + + This feature does not appear to work on the 3c905 - only 3c905B and + 3c905C have been tested. + + The 3com cards appear to only respond to PAUSE frames which are + sent to the reserved destination address of 01:80:c2:00:00:01. They + do not honour PAUSE frames which are sent to the station MAC address. + +rx_copybreak=M + + The driver preallocates 32 full-sized (1536 byte) network buffers + for receiving. When a packet arrives, the driver has to decide + whether to leave the packet in its full-sized buffer, or to allocate + a smaller buffer and copy the packet across into it. + + This is a speed/space tradeoff. + + The value of rx_copybreak is used to decide when to make the copy. + If the packet size is less than rx_copybreak, the packet is copied. + The default value for rx_copybreak is 200 bytes. + +max_interrupt_work=N + + The driver's interrupt service routine can handle many receive and + transmit packets in a single invocation. It does this in a loop. + The value of max_interrupt_work governs how many times the interrupt + service routine will loop. The default value is 32 loops. If this + is exceeded the interrupt service routine gives up and generates a + warning message "eth0: Too much work in interrupt". + +hw_checksums=N1,N2,N3,... + + Recent 3com NICs are able to generate IPv4, TCP and UDP checksums + in hardware. Linux has used the Rx checksumming for a long time. + The "zero copy" patch which is planned for the 2.4 kernel series + allows you to make use of the NIC's DMA scatter/gather and transmit + checksumming as well. + + The driver is set up so that, when the zerocopy patch is applied, + all Tornado and Cyclone devices will use S/G and Tx checksums. + + This module parameter has been provided so you can override this + decision. If you think that Tx checksums are causing a problem, you + may disable the feature with ``hw_checksums=0``. + + If you think your NIC should be performing Tx checksumming and the + driver isn't enabling it, you can force the use of hardware Tx + checksumming with ``hw_checksums=1``. + + The driver drops a message in the logfiles to indicate whether or + not it is using hardware scatter/gather and hardware Tx checksums. + + Scatter/gather and hardware checksums provide considerable + performance improvement for the sendfile() system call, but a small + decrease in throughput for send(). There is no effect upon receive + efficiency. + +compaq_ioaddr=N, +compaq_irq=N, +compaq_device_id=N + + "Variables to work-around the Compaq PCI BIOS32 problem".... + +watchdog=N + + Sets the time duration (in milliseconds) after which the kernel + decides that the transmitter has become stuck and needs to be reset. + This is mainly for debugging purposes, although it may be advantageous + to increase this value on LANs which have very high collision rates. + The default value is 5000 (5.0 seconds). + +enable_wol=N1,N2,N3,... + + Enable Wake-on-LAN support for the relevant interface. Donald + Becker's ``ether-wake`` application may be used to wake suspended + machines. + + Also enables the NIC's power management support. + +global_enable_wol=N + + Sets enable_wol mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries in + the ``enable_wol`` array above will override any setting of this. + +Media selection +--------------- + +A number of the older NICs such as the 3c590 and 3c900 series have +10base2 and AUI interfaces. + +Prior to January, 2001 this driver would autoeselect the 10base2 or AUI +port if it didn't detect activity on the 10baseT port. It would then +get stuck on the 10base2 port and a driver reload was necessary to +switch back to 10baseT. This behaviour could not be prevented with a +module option override. + +Later (current) versions of the driver _do_ support locking of the +media type. So if you load the driver module with + + modprobe 3c59x options=0 + +it will permanently select the 10baseT port. Automatic selection of +other media types does not occur. + + +Transmit error, Tx status register 82 +------------------------------------- + +This is a common error which is almost always caused by another host on +the same network being in full-duplex mode, while this host is in +half-duplex mode. You need to find that other host and make it run in +half-duplex mode or fix this host to run in full-duplex mode. + +As a last resort, you can force the 3c59x driver into full-duplex mode +with + + options 3c59x full_duplex=1 + +but this has to be viewed as a workaround for broken network gear and +should only really be used for equipment which cannot autonegotiate. + + +Additional resources +-------------------- + +Details of the device driver implementation are at the top of the source file. + +Additional documentation is available at Don Becker's Linux Drivers site: + + http://www.scyld.com/vortex.html + +Donald Becker's driver development site: + + http://www.scyld.com/network.html + +Donald's vortex-diag program is useful for inspecting the NIC's state: + + http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html + +Donald's mii-diag program may be used for inspecting and manipulating +the NIC's Media Independent Interface subsystem: + + http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html#mii-diag + +Donald's wake-on-LAN page: + + http://www.scyld.com/wakeonlan.html + +3Com's DOS-based application for setting up the NICs EEPROMs: + + ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe + + +Autonegotiation notes +--------------------- + + The driver uses a one-minute heartbeat for adapting to changes in + the external LAN environment if link is up and 5 seconds if link is down. + This means that when, for example, a machine is unplugged from a hubbed + 10baseT LAN plugged into a switched 100baseT LAN, the throughput + will be quite dreadful for up to sixty seconds. Be patient. + + Cisco interoperability note from Walter Wong <wcw+@CMU.EDU>: + + On a side note, adding HAS_NWAY seems to share a problem with the + Cisco 6509 switch. Specifically, you need to change the spanning + tree parameter for the port the machine is plugged into to 'portfast' + mode. Otherwise, the negotiation fails. This has been an issue + we've noticed for a while but haven't had the time to track down. + + Cisco switches (Jeff Busch <jbusch@deja.com>) + + My "standard config" for ports to which PC's/servers connect directly:: + + interface FastEthernet0/N + description machinename + load-interval 30 + spanning-tree portfast + + If autonegotiation is a problem, you may need to specify "speed + 100" and "duplex full" as well (or "speed 10" and "duplex half"). + + WARNING: DO NOT hook up hubs/switches/bridges to these + specially-configured ports! The switch will become very confused. + + +Reporting and diagnosing problems +--------------------------------- + +Maintainers find that accurate and complete problem reports are +invaluable in resolving driver problems. We are frequently not able to +reproduce problems and must rely on your patience and efforts to get to +the bottom of the problem. + +If you believe you have a driver problem here are some of the +steps you should take: + +- Is it really a driver problem? + + Eliminate some variables: try different cards, different + computers, different cables, different ports on the switch/hub, + different versions of the kernel or of the driver, etc. + +- OK, it's a driver problem. + + You need to generate a report. Typically this is an email to the + maintainer and/or netdev@vger.kernel.org. The maintainer's + email address will be in the driver source or in the MAINTAINERS file. + +- The contents of your report will vary a lot depending upon the + problem. If it's a kernel crash then you should refer to + 'Documentation/admin-guide/reporting-issues.rst'. + + But for most problems it is useful to provide the following: + + - Kernel version, driver version + + - A copy of the banner message which the driver generates when + it is initialised. For example: + + eth0: 3Com PCI 3c905C Tornado at 0xa400, 00:50:da:6a:88:f0, IRQ 19 + 8K byte-wide RAM 5:3 Rx:Tx split, autoselect/Autonegotiate interface. + MII transceiver found at address 24, status 782d. + Enabling bus-master transmits and whole-frame receives. + + NOTE: You must provide the ``debug=2`` modprobe option to generate + a full detection message. Please do this:: + + modprobe 3c59x debug=2 + + - If it is a PCI device, the relevant output from 'lspci -vx', eg:: + + 00:09.0 Ethernet controller: 3Com Corporation 3c905C-TX [Fast Etherlink] (rev 74) + Subsystem: 3Com Corporation: Unknown device 9200 + Flags: bus master, medium devsel, latency 32, IRQ 19 + I/O ports at a400 [size=128] + Memory at db000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128] + Expansion ROM at <unassigned> [disabled] [size=128K] + Capabilities: [dc] Power Management version 2 + 00: b7 10 00 92 07 00 10 02 74 00 00 02 08 20 00 00 + 10: 01 a4 00 00 00 00 00 db 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 + 20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 b7 10 00 10 + 30: 00 00 00 00 dc 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 01 0a 0a + + - A description of the environment: 10baseT? 100baseT? + full/half duplex? switched or hubbed? + + - Any additional module parameters which you may be providing to the driver. + + - Any kernel logs which are produced. The more the merrier. + If this is a large file and you are sending your report to a + mailing list, mention that you have the logfile, but don't send + it. If you're reporting direct to the maintainer then just send + it. + + To ensure that all kernel logs are available, add the + following line to /etc/syslog.conf:: + + kern.* /var/log/messages + + Then restart syslogd with:: + + /etc/rc.d/init.d/syslog restart + + (The above may vary, depending upon which Linux distribution you use). + + - If your problem is reproducible then that's great. Try the + following: + + 1) Increase the debug level. Usually this is done via: + + a) modprobe driver debug=7 + b) In /etc/modprobe.d/driver.conf: + options driver debug=7 + + 2) Recreate the problem with the higher debug level, + send all logs to the maintainer. + + 3) Download you card's diagnostic tool from Donald + Becker's website <http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html>. + Download mii-diag.c as well. Build these. + + a) Run 'vortex-diag -aaee' and 'mii-diag -v' when the card is + working correctly. Save the output. + + b) Run the above commands when the card is malfunctioning. Send + both sets of output. + +Finally, please be patient and be prepared to do some work. You may +end up working on this problem for a week or more as the maintainer +asks more questions, asks for more tests, asks for patches to be +applied, etc. At the end of it all, the problem may even remain +unresolved. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7a7040072e58 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst @@ -0,0 +1,286 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +======================================= +Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet MAC driver +======================================= + +Copyright |copy| 2008-2014 Altera Corporation + +This is the driver for the Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet (TSE) controllers +using the SGDMA and MSGDMA soft DMA IP components. The driver uses the +platform bus to obtain component resources. The designs used to test this +driver were built for a Cyclone(R) V SOC FPGA board, a Cyclone(R) V FPGA board, +and tested with ARM and NIOS processor hosts separately. The anticipated use +cases are simple communications between an embedded system and an external peer +for status and simple configuration of the embedded system. + +For more information visit www.altera.com and www.rocketboards.org. Support +forums for the driver may be found on www.rocketboards.org, and a design used +to test this driver may be found there as well. Support is also available from +the maintainer of this driver, found in MAINTAINERS. + +The Triple-Speed Ethernet, SGDMA, and MSGDMA components are all soft IP +components that can be assembled and built into an FPGA using the Altera +Quartus toolchain. Quartus 13.1 and 14.0 were used to build the design that +this driver was tested against. The sopc2dts tool is used to create the +device tree for the driver, and may be found at rocketboards.org. + +The driver probe function examines the device tree and determines if the +Triple-Speed Ethernet instance is using an SGDMA or MSGDMA component. The +probe function then installs the appropriate set of DMA routines to +initialize, setup transmits, receives, and interrupt handling primitives for +the respective configurations. + +The SGDMA component is to be deprecated in the near future (over the next 1-2 +years as of this writing in early 2014) in favor of the MSGDMA component. +SGDMA support is included for existing designs and reference in case a +developer wishes to support their own soft DMA logic and driver support. Any +new designs should not use the SGDMA. + +The SGDMA supports only a single transmit or receive operation at a time, and +therefore will not perform as well compared to the MSGDMA soft IP. Please +visit www.altera.com for known, documented SGDMA errata. + +Scatter-gather DMA is not supported by the SGDMA or MSGDMA at this time. +Scatter-gather DMA will be added to a future maintenance update to this +driver. + +Jumbo frames are not supported at this time. + +The driver limits PHY operations to 10/100Mbps, and has not yet been fully +tested for 1Gbps. This support will be added in a future maintenance update. + +1. Kernel Configuration +======================= + +The kernel configuration option is ALTERA_TSE: + + Device Drivers ---> Network device support ---> Ethernet driver support ---> + Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet MAC support (ALTERA_TSE) + +2. Driver parameters list +========================= + + - debug: message level (0: no output, 16: all); + - dma_rx_num: Number of descriptors in the RX list (default is 64); + - dma_tx_num: Number of descriptors in the TX list (default is 64). + +3. Command line options +======================= + +Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using:: + + altera_tse=dma_rx_num:128,dma_tx_num:512 + +4. Driver information and notes +=============================== + +4.1. Transmit process +--------------------- +When the driver's transmit routine is called by the kernel, it sets up a +transmit descriptor by calling the underlying DMA transmit routine (SGDMA or +MSGDMA), and initiates a transmit operation. Once the transmit is complete, an +interrupt is driven by the transmit DMA logic. The driver handles the transmit +completion in the context of the interrupt handling chain by recycling +resource required to send and track the requested transmit operation. + +4.2. Receive process +-------------------- +The driver will post receive buffers to the receive DMA logic during driver +initialization. Receive buffers may or may not be queued depending upon the +underlying DMA logic (MSGDMA is able queue receive buffers, SGDMA is not able +to queue receive buffers to the SGDMA receive logic). When a packet is +received, the DMA logic generates an interrupt. The driver handles a receive +interrupt by obtaining the DMA receive logic status, reaping receive +completions until no more receive completions are available. + +4.3. Interrupt Mitigation +------------------------- +The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts +using NAPI for receive operations. Interrupt mitigation is not yet supported +for transmit operations, but will be added in a future maintenance release. + +4.4) Ethtool support +-------------------- +Ethtool is supported. Driver statistics and internal errors can be taken using: +ethtool -S ethX command. It is possible to dump registers etc. + +4.5) PHY Support +---------------- +The driver is compatible with PAL to work with PHY and GPHY devices. + +4.7) List of source files: +-------------------------- + - Kconfig + - Makefile + - altera_tse_main.c: main network device driver + - altera_tse_ethtool.c: ethtool support + - altera_tse.h: private driver structure and common definitions + - altera_msgdma.h: MSGDMA implementation function definitions + - altera_sgdma.h: SGDMA implementation function definitions + - altera_msgdma.c: MSGDMA implementation + - altera_sgdma.c: SGDMA implementation + - altera_sgdmahw.h: SGDMA register and descriptor definitions + - altera_msgdmahw.h: MSGDMA register and descriptor definitions + - altera_utils.c: Driver utility functions + - altera_utils.h: Driver utility function definitions + +5. Debug Information +==================== + +The driver exports debug information such as internal statistics, +debug information, MAC and DMA registers etc. + +A user may use the ethtool support to get statistics: +e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX (that shows the statistics counters) +or sees the MAC registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX + +The developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get +further debug information. + +6. Statistics Support +===================== + +The controller and driver support a mix of IEEE standard defined statistics, +RFC defined statistics, and driver or Altera defined statistics. The four +specifications containing the standard definitions for these statistics are +as follows: + + - IEEE 802.3-2012 - IEEE Standard for Ethernet. + - RFC 2863 found at http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2863.txt. + - RFC 2819 found at http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2819.txt. + - Altera Triple Speed Ethernet User Guide, found at http://www.altera.com + +The statistics supported by the TSE and the device driver are as follows: + +"tx_packets" is equivalent to aFramesTransmittedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012, +Section 5.2.2.1.2. This statistics is the count of frames that are successfully +transmitted. + +"rx_packets" is equivalent to aFramesReceivedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012, +Section 5.2.2.1.5. This statistic is the count of frames that are successfully +received. This count does not include any error packets such as CRC errors, +length errors, or alignment errors. + +"rx_crc_errors" is equivalent to aFrameCheckSequenceErrors defined in IEEE +802.3-2012, Section 5.2.2.1.6. This statistic is the count of frames that are +an integral number of bytes in length and do not pass the CRC test as the frame +is received. + +"rx_align_errors" is equivalent to aAlignmentErrors defined in IEEE 802.3-2012, +Section 5.2.2.1.7. This statistic is the count of frames that are not an +integral number of bytes in length and do not pass the CRC test as the frame is +received. + +"tx_bytes" is equivalent to aOctetsTransmittedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012, +Section 5.2.2.1.8. This statistic is the count of data and pad bytes +successfully transmitted from the interface. + +"rx_bytes" is equivalent to aOctetsReceivedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012, +Section 5.2.2.1.14. This statistic is the count of data and pad bytes +successfully received by the controller. + +"tx_pause" is equivalent to aPAUSEMACCtrlFramesTransmitted defined in IEEE +802.3-2012, Section 30.3.4.2. This statistic is a count of PAUSE frames +transmitted from the network controller. + +"rx_pause" is equivalent to aPAUSEMACCtrlFramesReceived defined in IEEE +802.3-2012, Section 30.3.4.3. This statistic is a count of PAUSE frames +received by the network controller. + +"rx_errors" is equivalent to ifInErrors defined in RFC 2863. This statistic is +a count of the number of packets received containing errors that prevented the +packet from being delivered to a higher level protocol. + +"tx_errors" is equivalent to ifOutErrors defined in RFC 2863. This statistic +is a count of the number of packets that could not be transmitted due to errors. + +"rx_unicast" is equivalent to ifInUcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This +statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were not addressed +to the broadcast address or a multicast group. + +"rx_multicast" is equivalent to ifInMulticastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This +statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were addressed to +a multicast address group. + +"rx_broadcast" is equivalent to ifInBroadcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This +statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were addressed to +the broadcast address. + +"tx_discards" is equivalent to ifOutDiscards defined in RFC 2863. This +statistic is the number of outbound packets not transmitted even though an +error was not detected. An example of a reason this might occur is to free up +internal buffer space. + +"tx_unicast" is equivalent to ifOutUcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This +statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were not addressed to +a multicast group or broadcast address. + +"tx_multicast" is equivalent to ifOutMulticastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This +statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were addressed to a +multicast group. + +"tx_broadcast" is equivalent to ifOutBroadcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This +statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were addressed to a +broadcast address. + +"ether_drops" is equivalent to etherStatsDropEvents defined in RFC 2819. +This statistic counts the number of packets dropped due to lack of internal +controller resources. + +"rx_total_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsOctets defined in RFC 2819. +This statistic counts the total number of bytes received by the controller, +including error and discarded packets. + +"rx_total_packets" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts defined in RFC 2819. +This statistic counts the total number of packets received by the controller, +including error, discarded, unicast, multicast, and broadcast packets. + +"rx_undersize" is equivalent to etherStatsUndersizePkts defined in RFC 2819. +This statistic counts the number of correctly formed packets received less +than 64 bytes long. + +"rx_oversize" is equivalent to etherStatsOversizePkts defined in RFC 2819. +This statistic counts the number of correctly formed packets greater than 1518 +bytes long. + +"rx_64_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts64Octets defined in RFC 2819. +This statistic counts the total number of packets received that were 64 octets +in length. + +"rx_65_127_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts65to127Octets defined in RFC +2819. This statistic counts the total number of packets received that were +between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive. + +"rx_128_255_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts128to255Octets defined in +RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were +between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive. + +"rx_256_511_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts256to511Octets defined in +RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were +between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive. + +"rx_512_1023_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets defined in +RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were +between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive. + +"rx_1024_1518_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets define +in RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were +between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive. + +"rx_gte_1519_bytes" is a statistic defined specific to the behavior of the +Altera TSE. This statistics counts the number of received good and errored +frames between the length of 1519 and the maximum frame length configured +in the frm_length register. See the Altera TSE User Guide for More details. + +"rx_jabbers" is equivalent to etherStatsJabbers defined in RFC 2819. This +statistic is the total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 +octets, and had either a bad CRC with an integral number of octets (CRC Error) +or a bad CRC with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). + +"rx_runts" is equivalent to etherStatsFragments defined in RFC 2819. This +statistic is the total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets +in length and had either a bad CRC with an integral number of octets (CRC +error) or a bad CRC with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8bcb173e0353 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst @@ -0,0 +1,317 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================================================ +Linux kernel driver for Elastic Network Adapter (ENA) family +============================================================ + +Overview +======== + +ENA is a networking interface designed to make good use of modern CPU +features and system architectures. + +The ENA device exposes a lightweight management interface with a +minimal set of memory mapped registers and extendible command set +through an Admin Queue. + +The driver supports a range of ENA devices, is link-speed independent +(i.e., the same driver is used for 10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc), and has +a negotiated and extendible feature set. + +Some ENA devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for both the +SR-IOV Physical Function (PF) and Virtual Function (VF) devices. + +ENA devices enable high speed and low overhead network traffic +processing by providing multiple Tx/Rx queue pairs (the maximum number +is advertised by the device via the Admin Queue), a dedicated MSI-X +interrupt vector per Tx/Rx queue pair, adaptive interrupt moderation, +and CPU cacheline optimized data placement. + +The ENA driver supports industry standard TCP/IP offload features such as +checksum offload. Receive-side scaling (RSS) is supported for multi-core +scaling. + +The ENA driver and its corresponding devices implement health +monitoring mechanisms such as watchdog, enabling the device and driver +to recover in a manner transparent to the application, as well as +debug logs. + +Some of the ENA devices support a working mode called Low-latency +Queue (LLQ), which saves several more microseconds. +ENA Source Code Directory Structure +=================================== + +================= ====================================================== +ena_com.[ch] Management communication layer. This layer is + responsible for the handling all the management + (admin) communication between the device and the + driver. +ena_eth_com.[ch] Tx/Rx data path. +ena_admin_defs.h Definition of ENA management interface. +ena_eth_io_defs.h Definition of ENA data path interface. +ena_common_defs.h Common definitions for ena_com layer. +ena_regs_defs.h Definition of ENA PCI memory-mapped (MMIO) registers. +ena_netdev.[ch] Main Linux kernel driver. +ena_ethtool.c ethtool callbacks. +ena_pci_id_tbl.h Supported device IDs. +================= ====================================================== + +Management Interface: +===================== + +ENA management interface is exposed by means of: + +- PCIe Configuration Space +- Device Registers +- Admin Queue (AQ) and Admin Completion Queue (ACQ) +- Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) + +ENA device MMIO Registers are accessed only during driver +initialization and are not used during further normal device +operation. + +AQ is used for submitting management commands, and the +results/responses are reported asynchronously through ACQ. + +ENA introduces a small set of management commands with room for +vendor-specific extensions. Most of the management operations are +framed in a generic Get/Set feature command. + +The following admin queue commands are supported: + +- Create I/O submission queue +- Create I/O completion queue +- Destroy I/O submission queue +- Destroy I/O completion queue +- Get feature +- Set feature +- Configure AENQ +- Get statistics + +Refer to ena_admin_defs.h for the list of supported Get/Set Feature +properties. + +The Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) is a uni-directional +queue used by the ENA device to send to the driver events that cannot +be reported using ACQ. AENQ events are subdivided into groups. Each +group may have multiple syndromes, as shown below + +The events are: + +==================== =============== +Group Syndrome +==================== =============== +Link state change **X** +Fatal error **X** +Notification Suspend traffic +Notification Resume traffic +Keep-Alive **X** +==================== =============== + +ACQ and AENQ share the same MSI-X vector. + +Keep-Alive is a special mechanism that allows monitoring the device's health. +A Keep-Alive event is delivered by the device every second. +The driver maintains a watchdog (WD) handler which logs the current state and +statistics. If the keep-alive events aren't delivered as expected the WD resets +the device and the driver. + +Data Path Interface +=================== + +I/O operations are based on Tx and Rx Submission Queues (Tx SQ and Rx +SQ correspondingly). Each SQ has a completion queue (CQ) associated +with it. + +The SQs and CQs are implemented as descriptor rings in contiguous +physical memory. + +The ENA driver supports two Queue Operation modes for Tx SQs: + +- **Regular mode:** + In this mode the Tx SQs reside in the host's memory. The ENA + device fetches the ENA Tx descriptors and packet data from host + memory. + +- **Low Latency Queue (LLQ) mode or "push-mode":** + In this mode the driver pushes the transmit descriptors and the + first 96 bytes of the packet directly to the ENA device memory + space. The rest of the packet payload is fetched by the + device. For this operation mode, the driver uses a dedicated PCI + device memory BAR, which is mapped with write-combine capability. + + **Note that** not all ENA devices support LLQ, and this feature is negotiated + with the device upon initialization. If the ENA device does not + support LLQ mode, the driver falls back to the regular mode. + +The Rx SQs support only the regular mode. + +The driver supports multi-queue for both Tx and Rx. This has various +benefits: + +- Reduced CPU/thread/process contention on a given Ethernet interface. +- Cache miss rate on completion is reduced, particularly for data + cache lines that hold the sk_buff structures. +- Increased process-level parallelism when handling received packets. +- Increased data cache hit rate, by steering kernel processing of + packets to the CPU, where the application thread consuming the + packet is running. +- In hardware interrupt re-direction. + +Interrupt Modes +=============== + +The driver assigns a single MSI-X vector per queue pair (for both Tx +and Rx directions). The driver assigns an additional dedicated MSI-X vector +for management (for ACQ and AENQ). + +Management interrupt registration is performed when the Linux kernel +probes the adapter, and it is de-registered when the adapter is +removed. I/O queue interrupt registration is performed when the Linux +interface of the adapter is opened, and it is de-registered when the +interface is closed. + +The management interrupt is named:: + + ena-mgmnt@pci:<PCI domain:bus:slot.function> + +and for each queue pair, an interrupt is named:: + + <interface name>-Tx-Rx-<queue index> + +The ENA device operates in auto-mask and auto-clear interrupt +modes. That is, once MSI-X is delivered to the host, its Cause bit is +automatically cleared and the interrupt is masked. The interrupt is +unmasked by the driver after NAPI processing is complete. + +Interrupt Moderation +==================== + +ENA driver and device can operate in conventional or adaptive interrupt +moderation mode. + +**In conventional mode** the driver instructs device to postpone interrupt +posting according to static interrupt delay value. The interrupt delay +value can be configured through `ethtool(8)`. The following `ethtool` +parameters are supported by the driver: ``tx-usecs``, ``rx-usecs`` + +**In adaptive interrupt** moderation mode the interrupt delay value is +updated by the driver dynamically and adjusted every NAPI cycle +according to the traffic nature. + +Adaptive coalescing can be switched on/off through `ethtool(8)`'s +:code:`adaptive_rx on|off` parameter. + +More information about Adaptive Interrupt Moderation (DIM) can be found in +Documentation/networking/net_dim.rst + +RX copybreak +============ +The rx_copybreak is initialized by default to ENA_DEFAULT_RX_COPYBREAK +and can be configured by the ETHTOOL_STUNABLE command of the +SIOCETHTOOL ioctl. + +Statistics +========== + +The user can obtain ENA device and driver statistics using `ethtool`. +The driver can collect regular or extended statistics (including +per-queue stats) from the device. + +In addition the driver logs the stats to syslog upon device reset. + +MTU +=== + +The driver supports an arbitrarily large MTU with a maximum that is +negotiated with the device. The driver configures MTU using the +SetFeature command (ENA_ADMIN_MTU property). The user can change MTU +via `ip(8)` and similar legacy tools. + +Stateless Offloads +================== + +The ENA driver supports: + +- IPv4 header checksum offload +- TCP/UDP over IPv4/IPv6 checksum offloads + +RSS +=== + +- The ENA device supports RSS that allows flexible Rx traffic + steering. +- Toeplitz and CRC32 hash functions are supported. +- Different combinations of L2/L3/L4 fields can be configured as + inputs for hash functions. +- The driver configures RSS settings using the AQ SetFeature command + (ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_FUNCTION, ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_INPUT and + ENA_ADMIN_RSS_INDIRECTION_TABLE_CONFIG properties). +- If the NETIF_F_RXHASH flag is set, the 32-bit result of the hash + function delivered in the Rx CQ descriptor is set in the received + SKB. +- The user can provide a hash key, hash function, and configure the + indirection table through `ethtool(8)`. + +DATA PATH +========= + +Tx +-- + +:code:`ena_start_xmit()` is called by the stack. This function does the following: + +- Maps data buffers (``skb->data`` and frags). +- Populates ``ena_buf`` for the push buffer (if the driver and device are + in push mode). +- Prepares ENA bufs for the remaining frags. +- Allocates a new request ID from the empty ``req_id`` ring. The request + ID is the index of the packet in the Tx info. This is used for + out-of-order Tx completions. +- Adds the packet to the proper place in the Tx ring. +- Calls :code:`ena_com_prepare_tx()`, an ENA communication layer that converts + the ``ena_bufs`` to ENA descriptors (and adds meta ENA descriptors as + needed). + + * This function also copies the ENA descriptors and the push buffer + to the Device memory space (if in push mode). + +- Writes a doorbell to the ENA device. +- When the ENA device finishes sending the packet, a completion + interrupt is raised. +- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI. +- The :code:`ena_clean_tx_irq()` function is called. This function handles the + completion descriptors generated by the ENA, with a single + completion descriptor per completed packet. + + * ``req_id`` is retrieved from the completion descriptor. The ``tx_info`` of + the packet is retrieved via the ``req_id``. The data buffers are + unmapped and ``req_id`` is returned to the empty ``req_id`` ring. + * The function stops when the completion descriptors are completed or + the budget is reached. + +Rx +-- + +- When a packet is received from the ENA device. +- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI. +- The :code:`ena_clean_rx_irq()` function is called. This function calls + :code:`ena_com_rx_pkt()`, an ENA communication layer function, which returns the + number of descriptors used for a new packet, and zero if + no new packet is found. +- :code:`ena_rx_skb()` checks packet length: + + * If the packet is small (len < rx_copybreak), the driver allocates + a SKB for the new packet, and copies the packet payload into the + SKB data buffer. + + - In this way the original data buffer is not passed to the stack + and is reused for future Rx packets. + + * Otherwise the function unmaps the Rx buffer, sets the first + descriptor as `skb`'s linear part and the other descriptors as the + `skb`'s frags. + +- The new SKB is updated with the necessary information (protocol, + checksum hw verify result, etc), and then passed to the network + stack, using the NAPI interface function :code:`napi_gro_receive()`. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..595ddef1c8b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst @@ -0,0 +1,556 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +=============================== +Marvell(Aquantia) AQtion Driver +=============================== + +For the aQuantia Multi-Gigabit PCI Express Family of Ethernet Adapters + +.. Contents + + - Identifying Your Adapter + - Configuration + - Supported ethtool options + - Command Line Parameters + - Config file parameters + - Support + - License + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +The driver in this release is compatible with AQC-100, AQC-107, AQC-108 +based ethernet adapters. + + +SFP+ Devices (for AQC-100 based adapters) +----------------------------------------- + +This release tested with passive Direct Attach Cables (DAC) and SFP+/LC +Optical Transceiver. + +Configuration +============= + +Viewing Link Messages +--------------------- + Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is + restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on + your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following:: + + dmesg -n 8 + + .. note:: + + This setting is not saved across reboots. + +Jumbo Frames +------------ + The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is + enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500. + The maximum value for the MTU is 16000. Use the `ip` command to + increase the MTU size. For example:: + + ip link set mtu 16000 dev enp1s0 + +ethtool +------- + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + ethtool version is required for this functionality. + +NAPI +---- + NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the atlantic driver. + +Supported ethtool options +========================= + +Viewing adapter settings +------------------------ + + :: + + ethtool <ethX> + + Output example:: + + Settings for enp1s0: + Supported ports: [ TP ] + Supported link modes: 100baseT/Full + 1000baseT/Full + 10000baseT/Full + 2500baseT/Full + 5000baseT/Full + Supported pause frame use: Symmetric + Supports auto-negotiation: Yes + Supported FEC modes: Not reported + Advertised link modes: 100baseT/Full + 1000baseT/Full + 10000baseT/Full + 2500baseT/Full + 5000baseT/Full + Advertised pause frame use: Symmetric + Advertised auto-negotiation: Yes + Advertised FEC modes: Not reported + Speed: 10000Mb/s + Duplex: Full + Port: Twisted Pair + PHYAD: 0 + Transceiver: internal + Auto-negotiation: on + MDI-X: Unknown + Supports Wake-on: g + Wake-on: d + Link detected: yes + + + .. note:: + + AQrate speeds (2.5/5 Gb/s) will be displayed only with linux kernels > 4.10. + But you can still use these speeds:: + + ethtool -s eth0 autoneg off speed 2500 + +Viewing adapter information +--------------------------- + + :: + + ethtool -i <ethX> + + Output example:: + + driver: atlantic + version: 5.2.0-050200rc5-generic-kern + firmware-version: 3.1.78 + expansion-rom-version: + bus-info: 0000:01:00.0 + supports-statistics: yes + supports-test: no + supports-eeprom-access: no + supports-register-dump: yes + supports-priv-flags: no + + +Viewing Ethernet adapter statistics +----------------------------------- + + :: + + ethtool -S <ethX> + + Output example:: + + NIC statistics: + InPackets: 13238607 + InUCast: 13293852 + InMCast: 52 + InBCast: 3 + InErrors: 0 + OutPackets: 23703019 + OutUCast: 23704941 + OutMCast: 67 + OutBCast: 11 + InUCastOctects: 213182760 + OutUCastOctects: 22698443 + InMCastOctects: 6600 + OutMCastOctects: 8776 + InBCastOctects: 192 + OutBCastOctects: 704 + InOctects: 2131839552 + OutOctects: 226938073 + InPacketsDma: 95532300 + OutPacketsDma: 59503397 + InOctetsDma: 1137102462 + OutOctetsDma: 2394339518 + InDroppedDma: 0 + Queue[0] InPackets: 23567131 + Queue[0] OutPackets: 20070028 + Queue[0] InJumboPackets: 0 + Queue[0] InLroPackets: 0 + Queue[0] InErrors: 0 + Queue[1] InPackets: 45428967 + Queue[1] OutPackets: 11306178 + Queue[1] InJumboPackets: 0 + Queue[1] InLroPackets: 0 + Queue[1] InErrors: 0 + Queue[2] InPackets: 3187011 + Queue[2] OutPackets: 13080381 + Queue[2] InJumboPackets: 0 + Queue[2] InLroPackets: 0 + Queue[2] InErrors: 0 + Queue[3] InPackets: 23349136 + Queue[3] OutPackets: 15046810 + Queue[3] InJumboPackets: 0 + Queue[3] InLroPackets: 0 + Queue[3] InErrors: 0 + +Interrupt coalescing support +---------------------------- + + ITR mode, TX/RX coalescing timings could be viewed with:: + + ethtool -c <ethX> + + and changed with:: + + ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs <usecs> rx-usecs <usecs> + + To disable coalescing:: + + ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs 0 rx-usecs 0 tx-max-frames 1 tx-max-frames 1 + +Wake on LAN support +------------------- + + WOL support by magic packet:: + + ethtool -s <ethX> wol g + + To disable WOL:: + + ethtool -s <ethX> wol d + +Set and check the driver message level +-------------------------------------- + + Set message level + + :: + + ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl <level> + + Level values: + + ====== ============================= + 0x0001 general driver status. + 0x0002 hardware probing. + 0x0004 link state. + 0x0008 periodic status check. + 0x0010 interface being brought down. + 0x0020 interface being brought up. + 0x0040 receive error. + 0x0080 transmit error. + 0x0200 interrupt handling. + 0x0400 transmit completion. + 0x0800 receive completion. + 0x1000 packet contents. + 0x2000 hardware status. + 0x4000 Wake-on-LAN status. + ====== ============================= + + By default, the level of debugging messages is set 0x0001(general driver status). + + Check message level + + :: + + ethtool <ethX> | grep "Current message level" + + If you want to disable the output of messages:: + + ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl 0 + +RX flow rules (ntuple filters) +------------------------------ + + There are separate rules supported, that applies in that order: + + 1. 16 VLAN ID rules + 2. 16 L2 EtherType rules + 3. 8 L3/L4 5-Tuple rules + + + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for configuring ntuple filters, + via ``ethtool -N <device> <filter>``. + + To enable or disable the RX flow rules:: + + ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off> + + When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programed filters are + flushed from the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must + be re-added when ntuple is re-enabled. + + Because of the fixed order of the rules, the location of filters is also fixed: + + - Locations 0 - 15 for VLAN ID filters + - Locations 16 - 31 for L2 EtherType filters + - Locations 32 - 39 for L3/L4 5-tuple filters (locations 32, 36 for IPv6) + + The L3/L4 5-tuple (protocol, source and destination IP address, source and + destination TCP/UDP/SCTP port) is compared against 8 filters. For IPv4, up to + 8 source and destination addresses can be matched. For IPv6, up to 2 pairs of + addresses can be supported. Source and destination ports are only compared for + TCP/UDP/SCTP packets. + + To add a filter that directs packet to queue 5, use + ``<-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple>`` switch:: + + ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.1 dst-ip 10.0.0.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 5 <loc 32> + + - action is the queue number. + - loc is the rule number. + + For ``flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6`` you must set the loc + number within 32 - 39. + For ``flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6`` you can set 8 rules + for traffic IPv4 or you can set 2 rules for traffic IPv6. Loc number traffic + IPv6 is 32 and 36. + At the moment you can not use IPv4 and IPv6 filters at the same time. + + Example filter for IPv6 filter traffic:: + + sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::1 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 action 1 loc 32 + sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::5 action -1 loc 36 + + Example filter for IPv4 filter traffic:: + + sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.4 dst-ip 10.0.0.7 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 32 + sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 10.0.0.3 dst-ip 10.0.0.9 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 33 + sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 src-ip 10.0.0.6 dst-ip 10.0.0.4 loc 34 + + If you set action -1, then all traffic corresponding to the filter will be discarded. + + The maximum value action is 31. + + + The VLAN filter (VLAN id) is compared against 16 filters. + VLAN id must be accompanied by mask 0xF000. That is to distinguish VLAN filter + from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both User Priority and VLAN ID + are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter. + + To add a filter that directs packets from VLAN 2001 to queue 5:: + + ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 vlan 2001 m 0xF000 action 1 loc 0 + + + L2 EtherType filters allows filter packet by EtherType field or both EtherType + and User Priority (PCP) field of 802.1Q. + UserPriority (vlan) parameter must be accompanied by mask 0x1FFF. That is to + distinguish VLAN filter from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both + User Priority and VLAN ID are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter. + + To add a filter that directs IP4 packess of priority 3 to queue 3:: + + ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ether proto 0x800 vlan 0x600 m 0x1FFF action 3 loc 16 + + To see the list of filters currently present:: + + ethtool <-u|-n|--show-nfc|--show-ntuple> <ethX> + + Rules may be deleted from the table itself. This is done using:: + + sudo ethtool <-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple> <ethX> delete <loc> + + - loc is the rule number to be deleted. + + Rx filters is an interface to load the filter table that funnels all flow + into queue 0 unless an alternative queue is specified using "action". In that + case, any flow that matches the filter criteria will be directed to the + appropriate queue. RX filters is supported on all kernels 2.6.30 and later. + +RSS for UDP +----------- + + Currently, NIC does not support RSS for fragmented IP packets, which leads to + incorrect working of RSS for fragmented UDP traffic. To disable RSS for UDP the + RX Flow L3/L4 rule may be used. + + Example:: + + ethtool -N eth0 flow-type udp4 action 0 loc 32 + +UDP GSO hardware offload +------------------------ + + UDP GSO allows to boost UDP tx rates by offloading UDP headers allocation + into hardware. A special userspace socket option is required for this, + could be validated with /kernel/tools/testing/selftests/net/:: + + udpgso_bench_tx -u -4 -D 10.0.1.1 -s 6300 -S 100 + + Will cause sending out of 100 byte sized UDP packets formed from single + 6300 bytes user buffer. + + UDP GSO is configured by:: + + ethtool -K eth0 tx-udp-segmentation on + +Private flags (testing) +----------------------- + + Atlantic driver supports private flags for hardware custom features:: + + $ ethtool --show-priv-flags ethX + + Private flags for ethX: + DMASystemLoopback : off + PKTSystemLoopback : off + DMANetworkLoopback : off + PHYInternalLoopback: off + PHYExternalLoopback: off + + Example:: + + $ ethtool --set-priv-flags ethX DMASystemLoopback on + + DMASystemLoopback: DMA Host loopback. + PKTSystemLoopback: Packet buffer host loopback. + DMANetworkLoopback: Network side loopback on DMA block. + PHYInternalLoopback: Internal loopback on Phy. + PHYExternalLoopback: External loopback on Phy (with loopback ethernet cable). + + +Command Line Parameters +======================= +The following command line parameters are available on atlantic driver: + +aq_itr -Interrupt throttling mode +--------------------------------- +Accepted values: 0, 1, 0xFFFF + +Default value: 0xFFFF + +====== ============================================================== +0 Disable interrupt throttling. +1 Enable interrupt throttling and use specified tx and rx rates. +0xFFFF Auto throttling mode. Driver will choose the best RX and TX + interrupt throtting settings based on link speed. +====== ============================================================== + +aq_itr_tx - TX interrupt throttle rate +-------------------------------------- + +Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF + +Default value: 0 + +TX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay +to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value + +aq_itr_rx - RX interrupt throttle rate +-------------------------------------- + +Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF + +Default value: 0 + +RX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay +to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value + +.. note:: + + ITR settings could be changed in runtime by ethtool -c means (see below) + +Config file parameters +====================== + +For some fine tuning and performance optimizations, +some parameters can be changed in the {source_dir}/aq_cfg.h file. + +AQ_CFG_RX_PAGEORDER +------------------- + +Default value: 0 + +RX page order override. Thats a power of 2 number of RX pages allocated for +each descriptor. Received descriptor size is still limited by +AQ_CFG_RX_FRAME_MAX. + +Increasing pageorder makes page reuse better (actual on iommu enabled systems). + +AQ_CFG_RX_REFILL_THRES +---------------------- + +Default value: 32 + +RX refill threshold. RX path will not refill freed descriptors until the +specified number of free descriptors is observed. Larger values may help +better page reuse but may lead to packet drops as well. + +AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF +--------------- + +Number of queues + +Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_MAX) + +Default value: 8 + +Notice this value will be capped by the number of cores available on the system. + +AQ_CFG_IS_RSS_DEF +----------------- + +Enable/disable Receive Side Scaling + +This feature allows the adapter to distribute receive processing +across multiple CPU-cores and to prevent from overloading a single CPU core. + +Valid values + +== ======== +0 disabled +1 enabled +== ======== + +Default value: 1 + +AQ_CFG_NUM_RSS_QUEUES_DEF +------------------------- + +Number of queues for Receive Side Scaling + +Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF) + +Default value: AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF + +AQ_CFG_IS_LRO_DEF +----------------- + +Enable/disable Large Receive Offload + +This offload enables the adapter to coalesce multiple TCP segments and indicate +them as a single coalesced unit to the OS networking subsystem. + +The system consumes less energy but it also introduces more latency in packets +processing. + +Valid values + +== ======== +0 disabled +1 enabled +== ======== + +Default value: 1 + +AQ_CFG_TX_CLEAN_BUDGET +---------------------- + +Maximum descriptors to cleanup on TX at once. + +Default value: 256 + +After the aq_cfg.h file changed the driver must be rebuilt to take effect. + +Support +======= + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related +to the issue to aqn_support@marvell.com + +License +======= + +aQuantia Corporation Network Driver + +Copyright |copy| 2014 - 2019 aQuantia Corporation. + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License, +version 2, as published by the Free Software Foundation. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..435dce5fa2c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst @@ -0,0 +1,393 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +============================================= +Chelsio N210 10Gb Ethernet Network Controller +============================================= + +Driver Release Notes for Linux + +Version 2.1.1 + +June 20, 2005 + +.. Contents + + INTRODUCTION + FEATURES + PERFORMANCE + DRIVER MESSAGES + KNOWN ISSUES + SUPPORT + + +Introduction +============ + + This document describes the Linux driver for Chelsio 10Gb Ethernet Network + Controller. This driver supports the Chelsio N210 NIC and is backward + compatible with the Chelsio N110 model 10Gb NICs. + + +Features +======== + +Adaptive Interrupts (adaptive-rx) +--------------------------------- + + This feature provides an adaptive algorithm that adjusts the interrupt + coalescing parameters, allowing the driver to dynamically adapt the latency + settings to achieve the highest performance during various types of network + load. + + The interface used to control this feature is ethtool. Please see the + ethtool manpage for additional usage information. + + By default, adaptive-rx is disabled. + To enable adaptive-rx:: + + ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx on + + To disable adaptive-rx, use ethtool:: + + ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off + + After disabling adaptive-rx, the timer latency value will be set to 50us. + You may set the timer latency after disabling adaptive-rx:: + + ethtool -C <interface> rx-usecs <microseconds> + + An example to set the timer latency value to 100us on eth0:: + + ethtool -C eth0 rx-usecs 100 + + You may also provide a timer latency value while disabling adaptive-rx:: + + ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off rx-usecs <microseconds> + + If adaptive-rx is disabled and a timer latency value is specified, the timer + will be set to the specified value until changed by the user or until + adaptive-rx is enabled. + + To view the status of the adaptive-rx and timer latency values:: + + ethtool -c <interface> + + +TCP Segmentation Offloading (TSO) Support +----------------------------------------- + + This feature, also known as "large send", enables a system's protocol stack + to offload portions of outbound TCP processing to a network interface card + thereby reducing system CPU utilization and enhancing performance. + + The interface used to control this feature is ethtool version 1.8 or higher. + Please see the ethtool manpage for additional usage information. + + By default, TSO is enabled. + To disable TSO:: + + ethtool -K <interface> tso off + + To enable TSO:: + + ethtool -K <interface> tso on + + To view the status of TSO:: + + ethtool -k <interface> + + +Performance +=========== + + The following information is provided as an example of how to change system + parameters for "performance tuning" an what value to use. You may or may not + want to change these system parameters, depending on your server/workstation + application. Doing so is not warranted in any way by Chelsio Communications, + and is done at "YOUR OWN RISK". Chelsio will not be held responsible for loss + of data or damage to equipment. + + Your distribution may have a different way of doing things, or you may prefer + a different method. These commands are shown only to provide an example of + what to do and are by no means definitive. + + Making any of the following system changes will only last until you reboot + your system. You may want to write a script that runs at boot-up which + includes the optimal settings for your system. + + Setting PCI Latency Timer:: + + setpci -d 1425:: + +* 0x0c.l=0x0000F800 + + Disabling TCP timestamp:: + + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps=0 + + Disabling SACK:: + + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_sack=0 + + Setting large number of incoming connection requests:: + + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_max_syn_backlog=3000 + + Setting maximum receive socket buffer size:: + + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=1024000 + + Setting maximum send socket buffer size:: + + sysctl -w net.core.wmem_max=1024000 + + Set smp_affinity (on a multiprocessor system) to a single CPU:: + + echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity + + Setting default receive socket buffer size:: + + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=524287 + + Setting default send socket buffer size:: + + sysctl -w net.core.wmem_default=524287 + + Setting maximum option memory buffers:: + + sysctl -w net.core.optmem_max=524287 + + Setting maximum backlog (# of unprocessed packets before kernel drops):: + + sysctl -w net.core.netdev_max_backlog=300000 + + Setting TCP read buffers (min/default/max):: + + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + + Setting TCP write buffers (min/pressure/max):: + + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + + Setting TCP buffer space (min/pressure/max):: + + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_mem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + + TCP window size for single connections: + + The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size must be at least as large as the + Bandwidth-Delay Product of the communication link between the sender and + receiver. Due to the variations of RTT, you may want to increase the buffer + size up to 2 times the Bandwidth-Delay Product. Reference page 289 of + "TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1, The Protocols" by W. Richard Stevens. + + At 10Gb speeds, use the following formula:: + + RX_WINDOW >= 1.25MBytes * RTT(in milliseconds) + Example for RTT with 100us: RX_WINDOW = (1,250,000 * 0.1) = 125,000 + + RX_WINDOW sizes of 256KB - 512KB should be sufficient. + + Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size:: + + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="<min> <default> <max>" + + TCP window size for multiple connections: + The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size may be calculated the same as single + connections, but should be divided by the number of connections. The + smaller window prevents congestion and facilitates better pacing, + especially if/when MAC level flow control does not work well or when it is + not supported on the machine. Experimentation may be necessary to attain + the correct value. This method is provided as a starting point for the + correct receive buffer size. + + Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size is + performed in the same manner as single connection. + + +Driver Messages +=============== + + The following messages are the most common messages logged by syslog. These + may be found in /var/log/messages. + + Driver up:: + + Chelsio Network Driver - version 2.1.1 + + NIC detected:: + + eth#: Chelsio N210 1x10GBaseX NIC (rev #), PCIX 133MHz/64-bit + + Link up:: + + eth#: link is up at 10 Gbps, full duplex + + Link down:: + + eth#: link is down + + +Known Issues +============ + + These issues have been identified during testing. The following information + is provided as a workaround to the problem. In some cases, this problem is + inherent to Linux or to a particular Linux Distribution and/or hardware + platform. + + 1. Large number of TCP retransmits on a multiprocessor (SMP) system. + + On a system with multiple CPUs, the interrupt (IRQ) for the network + controller may be bound to more than one CPU. This will cause TCP + retransmits if the packet data were to be split across different CPUs + and re-assembled in a different order than expected. + + To eliminate the TCP retransmits, set smp_affinity on the particular + interrupt to a single CPU. You can locate the interrupt (IRQ) used on + the N110/N210 by using ifconfig:: + + ifconfig <dev_name> | grep Interrupt + + Set the smp_affinity to a single CPU:: + + echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity + + It is highly suggested that you do not run the irqbalance daemon on your + system, as this will change any smp_affinity setting you have applied. + The irqbalance daemon runs on a 10 second interval and binds interrupts + to the least loaded CPU determined by the daemon. To disable this daemon:: + + chkconfig --level 2345 irqbalance off + + By default, some Linux distributions enable the kernel feature, + irqbalance, which performs the same function as the daemon. To disable + this feature, add the following line to your bootloader:: + + noirqbalance + + Example using the Grub bootloader:: + + title Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (2.4.21-27.ELsmp) + root (hd0,0) + kernel /vmlinuz-2.4.21-27.ELsmp ro root=/dev/hda3 noirqbalance + initrd /initrd-2.4.21-27.ELsmp.img + + 2. After running insmod, the driver is loaded and the incorrect network + interface is brought up without running ifup. + + When using 2.4.x kernels, including RHEL kernels, the Linux kernel + invokes a script named "hotplug". This script is primarily used to + automatically bring up USB devices when they are plugged in, however, + the script also attempts to automatically bring up a network interface + after loading the kernel module. The hotplug script does this by scanning + the ifcfg-eth# config files in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts, looking + for HWADDR=<mac_address>. + + If the hotplug script does not find the HWADDRR within any of the + ifcfg-eth# files, it will bring up the device with the next available + interface name. If this interface is already configured for a different + network card, your new interface will have incorrect IP address and + network settings. + + To solve this issue, you can add the HWADDR=<mac_address> key to the + interface config file of your network controller. + + To disable this "hotplug" feature, you may add the driver (module name) + to the "blacklist" file located in /etc/hotplug. It has been noted that + this does not work for network devices because the net.agent script + does not use the blacklist file. Simply remove, or rename, the net.agent + script located in /etc/hotplug to disable this feature. + + 3. Transport Protocol (TP) hangs when running heavy multi-connection traffic + on an AMD Opteron system with HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel chipset. + + If your AMD Opteron system uses the AMD-8131 HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel + chipset, you may experience the "133-Mhz Mode Split Completion Data + Corruption" bug identified by AMD while using a 133Mhz PCI-X card on the + bus PCI-X bus. + + AMD states, "Under highly specific conditions, the AMD-8131 PCI-X Tunnel + can provide stale data via split completion cycles to a PCI-X card that + is operating at 133 Mhz", causing data corruption. + + AMD's provides three workarounds for this problem, however, Chelsio + recommends the first option for best performance with this bug: + + For 133Mhz secondary bus operation, limit the transaction length and + the number of outstanding transactions, via BIOS configuration + programming of the PCI-X card, to the following: + + Data Length (bytes): 1k + + Total allowed outstanding transactions: 2 + + Please refer to AMD 8131-HT/PCI-X Errata 26310 Rev 3.08 August 2004, + section 56, "133-MHz Mode Split Completion Data Corruption" for more + details with this bug and workarounds suggested by AMD. + + It may be possible to work outside AMD's recommended PCI-X settings, try + increasing the Data Length to 2k bytes for increased performance. If you + have issues with these settings, please revert to the "safe" settings + and duplicate the problem before submitting a bug or asking for support. + + .. note:: + + The default setting on most systems is 8 outstanding transactions + and 2k bytes data length. + + 4. On multiprocessor systems, it has been noted that an application which + is handling 10Gb networking can switch between CPUs causing degraded + and/or unstable performance. + + If running on an SMP system and taking performance measurements, it + is suggested you either run the latest netperf-2.4.0+ or use a binding + tool such as Tim Hockin's procstate utilities (runon) + <http://www.hockin.org/~thockin/procstate/>. + + Binding netserver and netperf (or other applications) to particular + CPUs will have a significant difference in performance measurements. + You may need to experiment which CPU to bind the application to in + order to achieve the best performance for your system. + + If you are developing an application designed for 10Gb networking, + please keep in mind you may want to look at kernel functions + sched_setaffinity & sched_getaffinity to bind your application. + + If you are just running user-space applications such as ftp, telnet, + etc., you may want to try the runon tool provided by Tim Hockin's + procstate utility. You could also try binding the interface to a + particular CPU: runon 0 ifup eth0 + + +Support +======= + + If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our + customer support team via email at support@chelsio.com or check our website + at http://www.chelsio.com + +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +:: + + Chelsio Communications + 370 San Aleso Ave. + Suite 100 + Sunnyvale, CA 94085 + http://www.chelsio.com + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as +published by the Free Software Foundation. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., +59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS`` AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED +WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Copyright |copy| 2003-2005 Chelsio Communications. All rights reserved. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e5c283940ac5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst @@ -0,0 +1,647 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================================================ +Cirrus Logic LAN CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapters +================================================ + +.. note:: + + This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version + has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton. + + Still, this is too outdated! A major cleanup is needed here. + +Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as +described below. In general, you should use the driver version which +comes with your Linux distribution. + + +Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 <kernel 2.3.48> + + +.. TABLE OF CONTENTS + + 1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS + 1.1 Product Overview + 1.2 Driver Description + 1.2.1 Driver Name + 1.2.2 File in the Driver Package + 1.3 System Requirements + 1.4 Licensing Information + + 2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION + 2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration + 2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration + + 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE + + 4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER + 4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module + 4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode + 4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA + + 5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING + 5.1 Known Defects and Limitations + 5.2 Testing the Adapter + 5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test + 5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test + 5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs + 5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts + + 6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT + 6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support + 6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support + 6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version + 6.4 Current maintainer + 6.5 Kernel boot parameters + + +1. Cirrus Logic LAN CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapters +=================================================== + + +1.1. Product Overview +===================== + +The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow +IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus +computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks. The adapters are designed for operation +in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in +10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5 +or fiber networks). + +CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional +features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition. As +such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of +adapters. Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on +configuring both types of adapters. + + +1.2. Driver Description +======================= + +The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux +v2.3.48 or greater kernel. It can be compiled directly into the kernel +or loaded at run-time as a device driver module. + +1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0 + +1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive: + +The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include: + + =================== ==================================================== + readme.txt this file + build batch file to compile cs89x0.c. + cs89x0.c driver C code + cs89x0.h driver header file + cs89x0.o pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel) + config/Config.in sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Makefile sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Space.c sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + =================== ==================================================== + + + +1.3. System Requirements +------------------------ + +The following hardware is required: + + * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter + + * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with: + * An 80386 or higher processor + * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h + * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920). + + * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network + topology. + +The following software is required: + +* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher + + * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based) + + * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel) + + * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel + or a module) + + + +1.4. Licensing Information +-------------------------- + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation, version 1. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +more details. + +For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + + +2. Adapter Installation and Configuration +========================================= + +Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters +stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup +Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM. + +When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's +configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings +or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based +adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE. + +Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install +and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility before installation in the target LINUX system. (Not required if +installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.) + + +2.1. CS8900-based Adapter Configuration +--------------------------------------- + +CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured +with the following "default" settings:: + + Operation Mode: Memory Mode + IRQ: 10 + Base I/O Address: 300 + Memory Base Address: D0000 + Optimization: DOS Client + Transmission Mode: Half-duplex + BootProm: None + Media Type: Autodetect (3-media cards) or + 10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter) + +You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with +another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + +2.2. CS8920-based Adapter Configuration +--------------------------------------- + +CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug +and Play (PnP) enabled. However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT +support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and +run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the +adapter before installation in the target Linux system. Failure to do +this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to +communicate with the adapter. + +:: + + **************************************************************** + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS: * + * * + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT. * + * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST * + * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND * + * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER. * + **************************************************************** + + + + +3. Loading the Driver as a Module +================================= + +If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module +with the 'modprobe' command. Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can +be specified as command-line arguments to the load command. This facility +provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface +configuration when an EEPROM is not used. + +Example:: + + insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui + +This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base +address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection. The following +configuration options are available on the command line:: + + io=### - specify IO address (200h-360h) + irq=## - specify interrupt level + use_dma=1 - Enable DMA + dma=# - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support + Rx DMA only) + dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K. Default value is set to 16. + media=rj45 - specify media type + or media=bnc + or media=aui + or media=auto + duplex=full - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex + or duplex=half + or duplex=auto + debug=# - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled + for debugging) + +**Notes:** + +a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter + will override the corresponding configuration value stored in + EEPROM. + +b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line. + +c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid + writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0 + card at the written addresses. This could cause problems + with device probing. To avoid this behaviour, add one + to the ``io=`` module parameter. This doesn't actually change + the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver + to partially initialise the hardware before trying to + identify the card. This could be dangerous if you are + not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address. + + For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300, + specify an IO address of 0x301. + +d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920. + +e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is + not present is: + + io + irq + media type (no autodetect) + +f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values + used with no EEPROM or command-line argument). + + * DMA Burst = enabled + * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled + * UseSA = enabled + * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line + * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line + * Use reset defaults for other config parameters + * dma_mode = 0 + +g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address. + +h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load + modules. This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to + determine configuration information which is passed to a driver + module when it is loaded. All the configuration options which are + described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules. + + For example:: + + > cat /etc/conf.modules + ... + alias eth0 cs89x0 + options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1 + ... + + In this example we are telling the module system that the + ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver. We + are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma' + arguments to the driver when it is loaded. + +i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or + 7. You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work. + +j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only. DMA mode is + significantly more efficient. Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine + with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA + mode. With DMA this is reduced to 45%. + +k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play + support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card + with the command:: + + cat /proc/isapnp + +l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data + corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock. + +m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel + (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by + ISA bus probing. The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined + from the card's EEPROM. + +n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA + mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option + 'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7). + + Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line:: + + LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5 + + or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf:: + + image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48 + append="cs89x0_dma=5" + label=linux + root=/dev/hda5 + read-only + + The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode. + (64k mode is not available). + + +4. Compiling the Driver +======================= + +The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into +a loadable device driver module. + +Just use the standard way to configure the driver and compile the Kernel. + + +4.1. Compiling the Driver to Support Rx DMA +------------------------------------------- + +The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel +series. DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver. It is +enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option. + + +5. Testing and Troubleshooting +============================== + +5.1. Known Defects and Limitations +---------------------------------- + +Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of +known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds. + + +5.2. Testing the Adapter +------------------------ + +Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of +the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the +adapter and its network connection. Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to +test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have +assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the +adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a +CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility). + +.. note:: + + The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a + DOS-only operating system environment. DO NOT run the diagnostics + from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT, + OS/2, or other operating system. + +To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter: + + 1. Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 2. The adapter's current configuration is displayed. Hit the ENTER key to + get to the main menu. + + 4. Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu. + * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality. + * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling. + + +5.2.1. Diagnostic Self-test +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as +its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources +assigned during hardware configuration. The following tests are performed: + + * IO Register Read/Write Test + + The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be + accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct. + + * Shared Memory Test + + The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory + mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict + with other devices in the system. + + * Interrupt Test + + The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ + signal. + + * EEPROM Test + + The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read. + + * Chip RAM Test + + The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is + working properly. + + * Internal Loop-back Test + + The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and + receiver are operating properly. If this test fails, make sure the + adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for + example). + + * Boot PROM Test + + The Boot PROM test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read. + Failure indicates the Boot PROM was not successfully read due to a + hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address + assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the + Boot PROM option.) + +Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with +another device on the ISA bus. In this case, you should use the Manual Setup +option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system +resource that failed. + + +5.2.2. Diagnostic Network Test +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by +transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs +on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run +between two nodes across a router.) + +This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter +installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running. The first PC is +configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator. +Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which +returns the frames to the Initiator. + +The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the +Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and +transmitted OK or in error. The test can be terminated anytime by the user at +either PC. + +To setup the Diagnostic Network Test: + + 1. Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network + connection to act as the Responder. Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility + and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main + menu. Hit ENTER to start the Responder. + + 2. Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and + start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 3. From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'. + Hit ENTER to start the test. + +You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder +to continue running. In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test +them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the +Responder. + + + +5.3. Using the Adapter's LEDs +----------------------------- + +The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board +located near the 10Base-T connector. + +Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T +connection. (Only applies to 10Base-T. The green LED has no significance for +a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.) + +TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or +receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.) + + +5.4. Resolving I/O Conflicts +---------------------------- + +An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO +address, memory address or IRQ). You can usually detect an IO conflict in one +of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter: + + 1. The system does not boot properly (or at all). + + 2. The driver cannot communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter + not found" error message. + + 3. You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load. + + 4. If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver + reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a + memory address conflict. + +If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a +diagnostic self-test. Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the +self-test. If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the +resource in conflict. Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO +conflicts. + +In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove +the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. Once reinstalled in the target system, run the +diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts +before loading the driver again. + +When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system +resource usage as indicated in the tables below. + +:: + + I/O Address Device IRQ Device + ----------- -------- --- -------- + 200-20F Game I/O adapter 3 COM2, Bus Mouse + 230-23F Bus Mouse 4 COM1 + 270-27F LPT3: third parallel port 5 LPT2 + 2F0-2FF COM2: second serial port 6 Floppy Disk controller + 320-32F Fixed disk controller 7 LPT1 + 8 Real-time Clock + 9 EGA/VGA display adapter + 12 Mouse (PS/2) + Memory Address Device 13 Math Coprocessor + -------------- --------------------- 14 Hard Disk controller + A000-BFFF EGA Graphics Adapter + A000-C7FF VGA Graphics Adapter + B000-BFFF Mono Graphics Adapter + B800-BFFF Color Graphics Adapter + E000-FFFF AT BIOS + + + + +6. Technical Support +==================== + +6.1. Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support +------------------------------------------------ + +Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at:: + + Telephone :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada) + :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada) + Fax :(512) 912-3871 + Email :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com + WWW :http://www.cirrus.com + + +6.2. Information Required before Contacting Technical Support +------------------------------------------------------------- + +Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as +Much of the following information as possible. + +1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.) + +2.) Adapter configuration + + * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel + * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only) + * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type). + +3.) PC System's Configuration + + * Plug and Play system (yes/no) + * BIOS (make and version) + * System make and model + * CPU (type and speed) + * System RAM + * SCSI Adapter + +4.) Software + + * CS89XX driver and version + * Your network operating system and version + * Your system's OS version + * Version of all protocol support files + +5.) Any Error Message displayed. + + + +6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version +--------------------------------------- + +You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's +Web site. You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email: +ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic +software-update notification. + +Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the +latest drivers and technical publications. + + +6.4. Current maintainer +----------------------- + +In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew +Morton. + +6.5 Kernel module parameters +---------------------------- + +For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot +parameter ``cs89x0_media=`` has been implemented. Usage is:: + + cs89x0_media=rj45 or + cs89x0_media=aui or + cs89x0_media=bnc diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..14eb0a4d4e4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================== +DM9000 Network driver +===================== + +Copyright 2008 Simtec Electronics, + + Ben Dooks <ben@simtec.co.uk> <ben-linux@fluff.org> + + +Introduction +------------ + +This file describes how to use the DM9000 platform-device based network driver +that is contained in the files drivers/net/dm9000.c and drivers/net/dm9000.h. + +The driver supports three DM9000 variants, the DM9000E which is the first chip +supported as well as the newer DM9000A and DM9000B devices. It is currently +maintained and tested by Ben Dooks, who should be CC: to any patches for this +driver. + + +Defining the platform device +---------------------------- + +The minimum set of resources attached to the platform device are as follows: + + 1) The physical address of the address register + 2) The physical address of the data register + 3) The IRQ line the device's interrupt pin is connected to. + +These resources should be specified in that order, as the ordering of the +two address regions is important (the driver expects these to be address +and then data). + +An example from arch/arm/mach-s3c/mach-bast.c is:: + + static struct resource bast_dm9k_resource[] = { + [0] = { + .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000, + .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 3, + .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, + }, + [1] = { + .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40, + .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40 + 0x3f, + .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, + }, + [2] = { + .start = IRQ_DM9000, + .end = IRQ_DM9000, + .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ | IORESOURCE_IRQ_HIGHLEVEL, + } + }; + + static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = { + .name = "dm9000", + .id = 0, + .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource), + .resource = bast_dm9k_resource, + }; + +Note the setting of the IRQ trigger flag in bast_dm9k_resource[2].flags, +as this will generate a warning if it is not present. The trigger from +the flags field will be passed to request_irq() when registering the IRQ +handler to ensure that the IRQ is setup correctly. + +This shows a typical platform device, without the optional configuration +platform data supplied. The next example uses the same resources, but adds +the optional platform data to pass extra configuration data:: + + static struct dm9000_plat_data bast_dm9k_platdata = { + .flags = DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY, + }; + + static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = { + .name = "dm9000", + .id = 0, + .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource), + .resource = bast_dm9k_resource, + .dev = { + .platform_data = &bast_dm9k_platdata, + } + }; + +The platform data is defined in include/linux/dm9000.h and described below. + + +Platform data +------------- + +Extra platform data for the DM9000 can describe the IO bus width to the +device, whether or not an external PHY is attached to the device and +the availability of an external configuration EEPROM. + +The flags for the platform data .flags field are as follows: + +DM9000_PLATF_8BITONLY + + The IO should be done with 8bit operations. + +DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY + + The IO should be done with 16bit operations. + +DM9000_PLATF_32BITONLY + + The IO should be done with 32bit operations. + +DM9000_PLATF_EXT_PHY + + The chip is connected to an external PHY. + +DM9000_PLATF_NO_EEPROM + + This can be used to signify that the board does not have an + EEPROM, or that the EEPROM should be hidden from the user. + +DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY + + Switch to using the simpler PHY polling method which does not + try and read the MII PHY state regularly. This is only available + when using the internal PHY. See the section on link state polling + for more information. + + The config symbol DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL, Kconfig entry + "Force simple NSR based PHY polling" allows this flag to be + forced on at build time. + + +PHY Link state polling +---------------------- + +The driver keeps track of the link state and informs the network core +about link (carrier) availability. This is managed by several methods +depending on the version of the chip and on which PHY is being used. + +For the internal PHY, the original (and currently default) method is +to read the MII state, either when the status changes if we have the +necessary interrupt support in the chip or every two seconds via a +periodic timer. + +To reduce the overhead for the internal PHY, there is now the option +of using the DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL config, or DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY +platform data option to read the summary information without the +expensive MII accesses. This method is faster, but does not print +as much information. + +When using an external PHY, the driver currently has to poll the MII +link status as there is no method for getting an interrupt on link change. + + +DM9000A / DM9000B +----------------- + +These chips are functionally similar to the DM9000E and are supported easily +by the same driver. The features are: + + 1) Interrupt on internal PHY state change. This means that the periodic + polling of the PHY status may be disabled on these devices when using + the internal PHY. + + 2) TCP/UDP checksum offloading, which the driver does not currently support. + + +ethtool +------- + +The driver supports the ethtool interface for access to the driver +state information, the PHY state and the EEPROM. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c4cf809cad84 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================================================== +Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux +============================================================== + +Note: This driver doesn't have a maintainer. + + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License +as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 +of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +GNU General Public License for more details. + + +This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET +10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you +didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a +line similar to:: + + dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17) + +If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command:: + + insmod dmfe + +This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass +a mode= setting to module while loading, like:: + + insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex + +Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to:: + + ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18 + ^^^^^^^^^^^ + Your IP Address + +Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command:: + + route add default eth0 + + +Now your ethernet card should be up and running. + + +TODO: + +- Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods. +- Check on 64 bit boxes. +- Check and fix on big endian boxes. +- Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases. + + +Authors: + +Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw > : Original Author + +Contributors: + +- Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br> +- Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk> +- Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> +- Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ccdb5d0d7460 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +========================================================= +D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation +========================================================= + +May 23, 2002 + +.. Contents + + - Compatibility List + - Quick Install + - Compiling the Driver + - Installing the Driver + - Option parameter + - Configuration Script Sample + - Troubleshooting + + +Compatibility List +================== + +Adapter Support: + +- D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +- D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +- D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. + + +The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it +on the environments below. + + . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10) + + +Quick Install +============= +Install linux driver as following command:: + + 1. make all + 2. insmod dl2k.ko + 3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0 + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\ ^^^^^^^^\ + IP NETMASK + +Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by +"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step. + +4. ``cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net`` +5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.d/dl2k.conf:: + + alias eth0 dl2k + +6. Run ``depmod`` to updated module indexes. +7. Run ``netconfig`` or ``netconf`` to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0 + located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually. + + [see - Configuration Script Sample] +8. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time. + +Compiling the Driver +==================== +In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules. +The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver +can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged. +The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module. +In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the +source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides +better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or +kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation. + +The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and +Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler, +the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux +Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command +to compile and link the driver: + +CD-ROM drive +------------ + +:: + + [root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom + [root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom + [root@XXX /] cd root + [root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k + [root@XXX /root] cd dl2k + [root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k + [root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz + [root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Floppy disc drive +----------------- + +:: + + [root@XXX /] cd root + [root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k + [root@XXX /root] cd dl2k + [root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k + [root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz + [root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Installing the Driver +===================== + +Manual Installation +------------------- + + Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound + to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a + module enter the command:: + + insmod dl2k.o + + or:: + + insmod dl2k.o <optional parameter> ; add parameter + +--------------------------------------------------------- + + example:: + + insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd + + or:: + + insmod dl2k.o media=3 + + or:: + + insmod dl2k.o media=3,2 ; for 2 cards + +--------------------------------------------------------- + + Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by + the Linux device driver below. + + The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form + eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state, + it is necessary to issue the following command:: + + ifconfig eth0 up + + Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with + Linux), enter the following command:: + + ifup eth0 + + Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration + script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be + given in the next paragraph. + + The commands to unload a driver are as follows:: + + ifdown eth0 + ifconfig eth0 down + rmmod dl2k.o + + The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and + to see the current network configuration:: + + lsmod + ifconfig + + +Automated Installation +---------------------- + This section describes how to install the driver such that it is + automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description + is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to + other distributions as well. + +Red Hat v6.x/v7.x +----------------- + 1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically + /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net. + 2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly in the + /etc/modprobe.d/ directory. Add the following lines:: + + alias ethx dl2k + options dl2k <optional parameters> + + where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if + one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the + previous section for the list of optional parameters. + 3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the + /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration + script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information. + 4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration + utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2 + and 3 above. + + +Parameter Description +===================== +You can install this driver without any additional parameter. However, if you +are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra +parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the +Linux device +driver. + + +=============================== ============================================== +mtu=packet_size Specifies the maximum packet size. default + is 1500. + +media=media_type Specifies the media type the NIC operates at. + autosense Autosensing active media. + + =========== ========================= + 10mbps_hd 10Mbps half duplex. + 10mbps_fd 10Mbps full duplex. + 100mbps_hd 100Mbps half duplex. + 100mbps_fd 100Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_fd 1000Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_hd 1000Mbps half duplex. + 0 Autosensing active media. + 1 10Mbps half duplex. + 2 10Mbps full duplex. + 3 100Mbps half duplex. + 4 100Mbps full duplex. + 5 1000Mbps half duplex. + 6 1000Mbps full duplex. + =========== ========================= + + By default, the NIC operates at autosense. + 1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only + available for fiber adapter. + +vlan=n Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the + Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is + disable. + +jumbo=[0|1] Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1, + the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this + function is disabled. + Jumbo frame usually improve the performance + int gigabit. + This feature need jumbo frame compatible + remote. + +rx_coalesce=m Number of rx frame handled each interrupt. +rx_timeout=n Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt. + If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert + an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't + assert rx interrupt until m frames received or + reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds. + Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can + reduce congestion collapse and overload which + has been a bottleneck for high speed network. + + For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800. + that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt + for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us. + +tx_coalesce=n Number of tx frame handled each interrupt. + Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts + congestion usually lower performance of + high speed network card. Default is 16. + +tx_flow=[1|0] Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0, + the Tx flow control disable else driver + autodetect. +rx_flow=[1|0] Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0, + the Rx flow control enable else driver + autodetect. +=============================== ============================================== + + +Configuration Script Sample +=========================== +Here is a sample of a simple configuration script:: + + DEVICE=eth0 + USERCTL=no + ONBOOT=yes + POOTPROTO=none + BROADCAST=207.200.5.255 + NETWORK=207.200.5.0 + NETMASK=255.255.255.0 + IPADDR=207.200.5.2 + + +Troubleshooting +=============== +Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line. + + Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following + shell command to convert files:: + + cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + + OR:: + + cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + +Q2: Could not find header files (``*.h``)? + + To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After + installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in + /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured + in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in + /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the + INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source. + + Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include, + including those files will make a wrong version driver. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..241c6c6f6e68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst @@ -0,0 +1,269 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================== +The QorIQ DPAA Ethernet Driver +============================== + +Authors: +- Madalin Bucur <madalin.bucur@nxp.com> +- Camelia Groza <camelia.groza@nxp.com> + +.. Contents + + - DPAA Ethernet Overview + - DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs + - Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel + - DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing + - DPAA Ethernet Features + - DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling + - Debugging + +DPAA Ethernet Overview +====================== + +DPAA stands for Data Path Acceleration Architecture and it is a +set of networking acceleration IPs that are available on several +generations of SoCs, both on PowerPC and ARM64. + +The Freescale DPAA architecture consists of a series of hardware blocks +that support Ethernet connectivity. The Ethernet driver depends upon the +following drivers in the Linux kernel: + + - Peripheral Access Memory Unit (PAMU) (* needed only for PPC platforms) + drivers/iommu/fsl_* + - Frame Manager (FMan) + drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fman + - Queue Manager (QMan), Buffer Manager (BMan) + drivers/soc/fsl/qbman + +A simplified view of the dpaa_eth interfaces mapped to FMan MACs:: + + dpaa_eth /eth0\ ... /ethN\ + driver | | | | + ------------- ---- ----------- ---- ------------- + -Ports / Tx Rx \ ... / Tx Rx \ + FMan | | | | + -MACs | MAC0 | | MACN | + / dtsec0 \ ... / dtsecN \ (or tgec) + / \ / \(or memac) + --------- -------------- --- -------------- --------- + FMan, FMan Port, FMan SP, FMan MURAM drivers + --------------------------------------------------------- + FMan HW blocks: MURAM, MACs, Ports, SP + --------------------------------------------------------- + +The dpaa_eth relation to the QMan, BMan and FMan:: + + ________________________________ + dpaa_eth / eth0 \ + driver / \ + --------- -^- -^- -^- --- --------- + QMan driver / \ / \ / \ \ / | BMan | + |Rx | |Rx | |Tx | |Tx | | driver | + --------- |Dfl| |Err| |Cnf| |FQs| | | + QMan HW |FQ | |FQ | |FQs| | | | | + / \ / \ / \ \ / | | + --------- --- --- --- -v- --------- + | FMan QMI | | + | FMan HW FMan BMI | BMan HW | + ----------------------- -------- + +where the acronyms used above (and in the code) are: + +=============== =========================================================== +DPAA Data Path Acceleration Architecture +FMan DPAA Frame Manager +QMan DPAA Queue Manager +BMan DPAA Buffers Manager +QMI QMan interface in FMan +BMI BMan interface in FMan +FMan SP FMan Storage Profiles +MURAM Multi-user RAM in FMan +FQ QMan Frame Queue +Rx Dfl FQ default reception FQ +Rx Err FQ Rx error frames FQ +Tx Cnf FQ Tx confirmation FQs +Tx FQs transmission frame queues +dtsec datapath three speed Ethernet controller (10/100/1000 Mbps) +tgec ten gigabit Ethernet controller (10 Gbps) +memac multirate Ethernet MAC (10/100/1000/10000) +=============== =========================================================== + +DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs +============================ + +The DPAA drivers enable the Ethernet controllers present on the following SoCs: + +PPC +- P1023 +- P2041 +- P3041 +- P4080 +- P5020 +- P5040 +- T1023 +- T1024 +- T1040 +- T1042 +- T2080 +- T4240 +- B4860 + +ARM +- LS1043A +- LS1046A + +Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel +======================================== + +To enable the DPAA Ethernet driver, the following Kconfig options are required:: + + # common for arch/arm64 and arch/powerpc platforms + CONFIG_FSL_DPAA=y + CONFIG_FSL_FMAN=y + CONFIG_FSL_DPAA_ETH=y + CONFIG_FSL_XGMAC_MDIO=y + + # for arch/powerpc only + CONFIG_FSL_PAMU=y + + # common options needed for the PHYs used on the RDBs + CONFIG_VITESSE_PHY=y + CONFIG_REALTEK_PHY=y + CONFIG_AQUANTIA_PHY=y + +DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing +============================== + +On Rx, buffers for the incoming frames are retrieved from the buffers found +in the dedicated interface buffer pool. The driver initializes and seeds these +with one page buffers. + +On Tx, all transmitted frames are returned to the driver through Tx +confirmation frame queues. The driver is then responsible for freeing the +buffers. In order to do this properly, a backpointer is added to the buffer +before transmission that points to the skb. When the buffer returns to the +driver on a confirmation FQ, the skb can be correctly consumed. + +DPAA Ethernet Features +====================== + +Currently the DPAA Ethernet driver enables the basic features required for +a Linux Ethernet driver. The support for advanced features will be added +gradually. + +The driver has Rx and Tx checksum offloading for UDP and TCP. Currently the Rx +checksum offload feature is enabled by default and cannot be controlled through +ethtool. Also, rx-flow-hash and rx-hashing was added. The addition of RSS +provides a big performance boost for the forwarding scenarios, allowing +different traffic flows received by one interface to be processed by different +CPUs in parallel. + +The driver has support for multiple prioritized Tx traffic classes. Priorities +range from 0 (lowest) to 3 (highest). These are mapped to HW workqueues with +strict priority levels. Each traffic class contains NR_CPU TX queues. By +default, only one traffic class is enabled and the lowest priority Tx queues +are used. Higher priority traffic classes can be enabled with the mqprio +qdisc. For example, all four traffic classes are enabled on an interface with +the following command. Furthermore, skb priority levels are mapped to traffic +classes as follows: + + * priorities 0 to 3 - traffic class 0 (low priority) + * priorities 4 to 7 - traffic class 1 (medium-low priority) + * priorities 8 to 11 - traffic class 2 (medium-high priority) + * priorities 12 to 15 - traffic class 3 (high priority) + +:: + + tc qdisc add dev <int> root handle 1: \ + mqprio num_tc 4 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 hw 1 + +DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling +========================================== + +Traffic coming on the DPAA Rx queues or on the DPAA Tx confirmation +queues is seen by the CPU as ingress traffic on a certain portal. +The DPAA QMan portal interrupts are affined each to a certain CPU. +The same portal interrupt services all the QMan portal consumers. + +By default the DPAA Ethernet driver enables RSS, making use of the +DPAA FMan Parser and Keygen blocks to distribute traffic on 128 +hardware frame queues using a hash on IP v4/v6 source and destination +and L4 source and destination ports, in present in the received frame. +When RSS is disabled, all traffic received by a certain interface is +received on the default Rx frame queue. The default DPAA Rx frame +queues are configured to put the received traffic into a pool channel +that allows any available CPU portal to dequeue the ingress traffic. +The default frame queues have the HOLDACTIVE option set, ensuring that +traffic bursts from a certain queue are serviced by the same CPU. +This ensures a very low rate of frame reordering. A drawback of this +is that only one CPU at a time can service the traffic received by a +certain interface when RSS is not enabled. + +To implement RSS, the DPAA Ethernet driver allocates an extra set of +128 Rx frame queues that are configured to dedicated channels, in a +round-robin manner. The mapping of the frame queues to CPUs is now +hardcoded, there is no indirection table to move traffic for a certain +FQ (hash result) to another CPU. The ingress traffic arriving on one +of these frame queues will arrive at the same portal and will always +be processed by the same CPU. This ensures intra-flow order preservation +and workload distribution for multiple traffic flows. + +RSS can be turned off for a certain interface using ethtool, i.e.:: + + # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash tcp4 "" + +To turn it back on, one needs to set rx-flow-hash for tcp4/6 or udp4/6:: + + # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash udp4 sfdn + +There is no independent control for individual protocols, any command +run for one of tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 is +going to control the rx-flow-hashing for all protocols on that interface. + +Besides using the FMan Keygen computed hash for spreading traffic on the +128 Rx FQs, the DPAA Ethernet driver also sets the skb hash value when +the NETIF_F_RXHASH feature is on (active by default). This can be turned +on or off through ethtool, i.e.:: + + # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing off + # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash + receive-hashing: off + # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing on + Actual changes: + receive-hashing: on + # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash + receive-hashing: on + +Please note that Rx hashing depends upon the rx-flow-hashing being on +for that interface - turning off rx-flow-hashing will also disable the +rx-hashing (without ethtool reporting it as off as that depends on the +NETIF_F_RXHASH feature flag). + +Debugging +========= + +The following statistics are exported for each interface through ethtool: + + - interrupt count per CPU + - Rx packets count per CPU + - Tx packets count per CPU + - Tx confirmed packets count per CPU + - Tx S/G frames count per CPU + - Tx error count per CPU + - Rx error count per CPU + - Rx error count per type + - congestion related statistics: + + - congestion status + - time spent in congestion + - number of time the device entered congestion + - dropped packets count per cause + +The driver also exports the following information in sysfs: + + - the FQ IDs for each FQ type + /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/fqids + + - the ID of the buffer pool in use + /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/bpids diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst index 17dbee1ac53e..e4ebfe62a183 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. include:: <isonum.txt> +=================================== DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) Overview =================================== @@ -19,8 +20,10 @@ pool management for network interfaces. This document provides an overview the Linux DPIO driver, its subcomponents, and its APIs. -See Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst for -a general overview of DPAA2 and the general DPAA2 driver architecture in Linux. +See +Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst +for a general overview of DPAA2 and the general DPAA2 driver architecture +in Linux. Driver Overview --------------- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst index cb4c9a0c5a17..682f3986c15b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst @@ -33,7 +33,8 @@ hardware resources, like queues, do not have a corresponding MC object and are treated as internal resources of other objects. For a more detailed description of the DPAA2 architecture and its object -abstractions see *Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst*. +abstractions see +*Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst*. Each Linux net device is built on top of a Datapath Network Interface (DPNI) object and uses Buffer Pools (DPBPs), I/O Portals (DPIOs) and Concentrators diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..62f4a4aff6ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +=================== +DPAA2 Documentation +=================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + overview + dpio-driver + ethernet-driver + mac-phy-support + switch-driver diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst index 51e6624fb774..51e6624fb774 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..199647729251 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst @@ -0,0 +1,406 @@ +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +========================================================= +DPAA2 (Data Path Acceleration Architecture Gen2) Overview +========================================================= + +:Copyright: |copy| 2015 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. +:Copyright: |copy| 2018 NXP + +This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 architecture +and how it is integrated into the Linux kernel. + +Introduction +============ + +DPAA2 is a hardware architecture designed for high-speeed network +packet processing. DPAA2 consists of sophisticated mechanisms for +processing Ethernet packets, queue management, buffer management, +autonomous L2 switching, virtual Ethernet bridging, and accelerator +(e.g. crypto) sharing. + +A DPAA2 hardware component called the Management Complex (or MC) manages the +DPAA2 hardware resources. The MC provides an object-based abstraction for +software drivers to use the DPAA2 hardware. +The MC uses DPAA2 hardware resources such as queues, buffer pools, and +network ports to create functional objects/devices such as network +interfaces, an L2 switch, or accelerator instances. +The MC provides memory-mapped I/O command interfaces (MC portals) +which DPAA2 software drivers use to operate on DPAA2 objects. + +The diagram below shows an overview of the DPAA2 resource management +architecture:: + + +--------------------------------------+ + | OS | + | DPAA2 drivers | + | | | + +-----------------------------|--------+ + | + | (create,discover,connect + | config,use,destroy) + | + DPAA2 | + +------------------------| mc portal |-+ + | | | + | +- - - - - - - - - - - - -V- - -+ | + | | | | + | | Management Complex (MC) | | + | | | | + | +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -+ | + | | + | Hardware Hardware | + | Resources Objects | + | --------- ------- | + | -queues -DPRC | + | -buffer pools -DPMCP | + | -Eth MACs/ports -DPIO | + | -network interface -DPNI | + | profiles -DPMAC | + | -queue portals -DPBP | + | -MC portals ... | + | ... | + | | + +--------------------------------------+ + + +The MC mediates operations such as create, discover, +connect, configuration, and destroy. Fast-path operations +on data, such as packet transmit/receive, are not mediated by +the MC and are done directly using memory mapped regions in +DPIO objects. + +Overview of DPAA2 Objects +========================= + +The section provides a brief overview of some key DPAA2 objects. +A simple scenario is described illustrating the objects involved +in creating a network interfaces. + +DPRC (Datapath Resource Container) +---------------------------------- + +A DPRC is a container object that holds all the other +types of DPAA2 objects. In the example diagram below there +are 8 objects of 5 types (DPMCP, DPIO, DPBP, DPNI, and DPMAC) +in the container. + +:: + + +---------------------------------------------------------+ + | DPRC | + | | + | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ | + | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPMAC | | + | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +---+---+ +---+---+ | + | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | + | +-------+ +-------+ | + | | DPMCP | | + | +-------+ | + | | + +---------------------------------------------------------+ + +From the point of view of an OS, a DPRC behaves similar to a plug and +play bus, like PCI. DPRC commands can be used to enumerate the contents +of the DPRC, discover the hardware objects present (including mappable +regions and interrupts). + +:: + + DPRC.1 (bus) + | + +--+--------+-------+-------+-------+ + | | | | | + DPMCP.1 DPIO.1 DPBP.1 DPNI.1 DPMAC.1 + DPMCP.2 DPIO.2 + DPMCP.3 + +Hardware objects can be created and destroyed dynamically, providing +the ability to hot plug/unplug objects in and out of the DPRC. + +A DPRC has a mappable MMIO region (an MC portal) that can be used +to send MC commands. It has an interrupt for status events (like +hotplug). +All objects in a container share the same hardware "isolation context". +This means that with respect to an IOMMU the isolation granularity +is at the DPRC (container) level, not at the individual object +level. + +DPRCs can be defined statically and populated with objects +via a config file passed to the MC when firmware starts it. + +DPAA2 Objects for an Ethernet Network Interface +----------------------------------------------- + +A typical Ethernet NIC is monolithic-- the NIC device contains TX/RX +queuing mechanisms, configuration mechanisms, buffer management, +physical ports, and interrupts. DPAA2 uses a more granular approach +utilizing multiple hardware objects. Each object provides specialized +functions. Groups of these objects are used by software to provide +Ethernet network interface functionality. This approach provides +efficient use of finite hardware resources, flexibility, and +performance advantages. + +The diagram below shows the objects needed for a simple +network interface configuration on a system with 2 CPUs. + +:: + + +---+---+ +---+---+ + CPU0 CPU1 + +---+---+ +---+---+ + | | + +---+---+ +---+---+ + DPIO DPIO + +---+---+ +---+---+ + \ / + \ / + \ / + +---+---+ + DPNI --- DPBP,DPMCP + +---+---+ + | + | + +---+---+ + DPMAC + +---+---+ + | + port/PHY + +Below the objects are described. For each object a brief description +is provided along with a summary of the kinds of operations the object +supports and a summary of key resources of the object (MMIO regions +and IRQs). + +DPMAC (Datapath Ethernet MAC) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Represents an Ethernet MAC, a hardware device that connects to an Ethernet +PHY and allows physical transmission and reception of Ethernet frames. + +- MMIO regions: none +- IRQs: DPNI link change +- commands: set link up/down, link config, get stats, + IRQ config, enable, reset + +DPNI (Datapath Network Interface) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Contains TX/RX queues, network interface configuration, and RX buffer pool +configuration mechanisms. The TX/RX queues are in memory and are identified +by queue number. + +- MMIO regions: none +- IRQs: link state +- commands: port config, offload config, queue config, + parse/classify config, IRQ config, enable, reset + +DPIO (Datapath I/O) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Provides interfaces to enqueue and dequeue +packets and do hardware buffer pool management operations. The DPAA2 +architecture separates the mechanism to access queues (the DPIO object) +from the queues themselves. The DPIO provides an MMIO interface to +enqueue/dequeue packets. To enqueue something a descriptor is written +to the DPIO MMIO region, which includes the target queue number. +There will typically be one DPIO assigned to each CPU. This allows all +CPUs to simultaneously perform enqueue/dequeued operations. DPIOs are +expected to be shared by different DPAA2 drivers. + +- MMIO regions: queue operations, buffer management +- IRQs: data availability, congestion notification, buffer + pool depletion +- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset + +DPBP (Datapath Buffer Pool) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Represents a hardware buffer pool. + +- MMIO regions: none +- IRQs: none +- commands: enable, reset + +DPMCP (Datapath MC Portal) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Provides an MC command portal. +Used by drivers to send commands to the MC to manage +objects. + +- MMIO regions: MC command portal +- IRQs: command completion +- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset + +Object Connections +================== +Some objects have explicit relationships that must +be configured: + +- DPNI <--> DPMAC +- DPNI <--> DPNI +- DPNI <--> L2-switch-port + + A DPNI must be connected to something such as a DPMAC, + another DPNI, or L2 switch port. The DPNI connection + is made via a DPRC command. + +:: + + +-------+ +-------+ + | DPNI | | DPMAC | + +---+---+ +---+---+ + | | + +==========+ + +- DPNI <--> DPBP + + A network interface requires a 'buffer pool' (DPBP + object) which provides a list of pointers to memory + where received Ethernet data is to be copied. The + Ethernet driver configures the DPBPs associated with + the network interface. + +Interrupts +========== +All interrupts generated by DPAA2 objects are message +interrupts. At the hardware level message interrupts +generated by devices will normally have 3 components-- +1) a non-spoofable 'device-id' expressed on the hardware +bus, 2) an address, 3) a data value. + +In the case of DPAA2 devices/objects, all objects in the +same container/DPRC share the same 'device-id'. +For ARM-based SoC this is the same as the stream ID. + + +DPAA2 Linux Drivers Overview +============================ + +This section provides an overview of the Linux kernel drivers for +DPAA2-- 1) the bus driver and associated "DPAA2 infrastructure" +drivers and 2) functional object drivers (such as Ethernet). + +As described previously, a DPRC is a container that holds the other +types of DPAA2 objects. It is functionally similar to a plug-and-play +bus controller. +Each object in the DPRC is a Linux "device" and is bound to a driver. +The diagram below shows the Linux drivers involved in a networking +scenario and the objects bound to each driver. A brief description +of each driver follows. + +:: + + +------------+ + | OS Network | + | Stack | + +------------+ +------------+ + | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet | + |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) | + +-.----------+ +---+---+----+ + . . ^ | + . . <data avail, | | <enqueue, + . . tx confirm> | | dequeue> + +-------------+ . | | + | DPRC driver | . +---+---V----+ +---------+ + | (DPRC) | . . . . . .| DPIO driver| | MAC | + +----------+--+ | (DPIO) | | (DPMAC) | + | +------+-----+ +-----+---+ + |<dev add/remove> | | + | | | + +--------+----------+ | +--+---+ + | MC-bus driver | | | PHY | + | | | |driver| + | /bus/fsl-mc | | +--+---+ + +-------------------+ | | + | | + ========================= HARDWARE =========|=================|====== + DPIO | + | | + DPNI---DPBP | + | | + DPMAC | + | | + PHY ---------------+ + ============================================|======================== + +A brief description of each driver is provided below. + +MC-bus driver +------------- +The MC-bus driver is a platform driver and is probed from a +node in the device tree (compatible "fsl,qoriq-mc") passed in by boot +firmware. It is responsible for bootstrapping the DPAA2 kernel +infrastructure. +Key functions include: + +- registering a new bus type named "fsl-mc" with the kernel, + and implementing bus call-backs (e.g. match/uevent/dev_groups) +- implementing APIs for DPAA2 driver registration and for device + add/remove +- creates an MSI IRQ domain +- doing a 'device add' to expose the 'root' DPRC, in turn triggering + a bind of the root DPRC to the DPRC driver + +The binding for the MC-bus device-tree node can be consulted at +*Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/fsl,qoriq-mc.txt*. +The sysfs bind/unbind interfaces for the MC-bus can be consulted at +*Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fsl-mc*. + +DPRC driver +----------- +The DPRC driver is bound to DPRC objects and does runtime management +of a bus instance. It performs the initial bus scan of the DPRC +and handles interrupts for container events such as hot plug by +re-scanning the DPRC. + +Allocator +--------- +Certain objects such as DPMCP and DPBP are generic and fungible, +and are intended to be used by other drivers. For example, +the DPAA2 Ethernet driver needs: + +- DPMCPs to send MC commands, to configure network interfaces +- DPBPs for network buffer pools + +The allocator driver registers for these allocatable object types +and those objects are bound to the allocator when the bus is probed. +The allocator maintains a pool of objects that are available for +allocation by other DPAA2 drivers. + +DPIO driver +----------- +The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects and provides services that allow +other drivers such as the Ethernet driver to enqueue and dequeue data for +their respective objects. +Key services include: + +- data availability notifications +- hardware queuing operations (enqueue and dequeue of data) +- hardware buffer pool management + +To transmit a packet the Ethernet driver puts data on a queue and +invokes a DPIO API. For receive, the Ethernet driver registers +a data availability notification callback. To dequeue a packet +a DPIO API is used. +There is typically one DPIO object per physical CPU for optimum +performance, allowing different CPUs to simultaneously enqueue +and dequeue data. + +The DPIO driver operates on behalf of all DPAA2 drivers +active in the kernel-- Ethernet, crypto, compression, +etc. + +Ethernet driver +--------------- +The Ethernet driver is bound to a DPNI and implements the kernel +interfaces needed to connect the DPAA2 network interface to +the network stack. +Each DPNI corresponds to a Linux network interface. + +MAC driver +---------- +An Ethernet PHY is an off-chip, board specific component and is managed +by the appropriate PHY driver via an mdio bus. The MAC driver +plays a role of being a proxy between the PHY driver and the +MC. It does this proxy via the MC commands to a DPMAC object. +If the PHY driver signals a link change, the MAC driver notifies +the MC via a DPMAC command. If a network interface is brought +up or down, the MC notifies the DPMAC driver via an interrupt and +the driver can take appropriate action. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/switch-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/switch-driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8bf411b857d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/switch-driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +=================== +DPAA2 Switch driver +=================== + +:Copyright: |copy| 2021 NXP + +The DPAA2 Switch driver probes on the Datapath Switch (DPSW) object which can +be instantiated on the following DPAA2 SoCs and their variants: LS2088A and +LX2160A. + +The driver uses the switch device driver model and exposes each switch port as +a network interface, which can be included in a bridge or used as a standalone +interface. Traffic switched between ports is offloaded into the hardware. + +The DPSW can have ports connected to DPNIs or to DPMACs for external access. +:: + + [ethA] [ethB] [ethC] [ethD] [ethE] [ethF] + : : : : : : + : : : : : : + [dpaa2-eth] [dpaa2-eth] [ dpaa2-switch ] + : : : : : : kernel + ============================================================================= + : : : : : : hardware + [DPNI] [DPNI] [============= DPSW =================] + | | | | | | + | ---------- | [DPMAC] [DPMAC] + ------------------------------- | | + | | + [PHY] [PHY] + +Creating an Ethernet Switch +=========================== + +The dpaa2-switch driver probes on DPSW devices found on the fsl-mc bus. These +devices can be either created statically through the boot time configuration +file - DataPath Layout (DPL) - or at runtime using the DPAA2 object APIs +(incorporated already into the restool userspace tool). + +At the moment, the dpaa2-switch driver imposes the following restrictions on +the DPSW object that it will probe: + + * The minimum number of FDBs should be at least equal to the number of switch + interfaces. This is necessary so that separation of switch ports can be + done, ie when not under a bridge, each switch port will have its own FDB. + :: + + fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: The number of FDBs is lower than the number of ports, cannot probe + + * Both the broadcast and flooding configuration should be per FDB. This + enables the driver to restrict the broadcast and flooding domains of each + FDB depending on the switch ports that are sharing it (aka are under the + same bridge). + :: + + fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: Flooding domain is not per FDB, cannot probe + fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: Broadcast domain is not per FDB, cannot probe + + * The control interface of the switch should not be disabled + (DPSW_OPT_CTRL_IF_DIS not passed as a create time option). Without the + control interface, the driver is not capable to provide proper Rx/Tx traffic + support on the switch port netdevices. + :: + + fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: Control Interface is disabled, cannot probe + +Besides the configuration of the actual DPSW object, the dpaa2-switch driver +will need the following DPAA2 objects: + + * 1 DPMCP - A Management Command Portal object is needed for any interraction + with the MC firmware. + + * 1 DPBP - A Buffer Pool is used for seeding buffers intended for the Rx path + on the control interface. + + * Access to at least one DPIO object (Software Portal) is needed for any + enqueue/dequeue operation to be performed on the control interface queues. + The DPIO object will be shared, no need for a private one. + +Switching features +================== + +The driver supports the configuration of L2 forwarding rules in hardware for +port bridging as well as standalone usage of the independent switch interfaces. + +The hardware is not configurable with respect to VLAN awareness, thus any DPAA2 +switch port should be used only in usecases with a VLAN aware bridge:: + + $ ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 + + $ ip link add dev br1 type bridge + $ ip link set dev ethX master br1 + Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Cannot join a VLAN-unaware bridge + +Topology and loop detection through STP is supported when ``stp_state 1`` is +used at bridge create :: + + $ ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 stp_state 1 + +L2 FDB manipulation (add/delete/dump) is supported. + +HW FDB learning can be configured on each switch port independently through +bridge commands. When the HW learning is disabled, a fast age procedure will be +run and any previously learnt addresses will be removed. +:: + + $ bridge link set dev ethX learning off + $ bridge link set dev ethX learning on + +Restricting the unknown unicast and multicast flooding domain is supported, but +not independently of each other:: + + $ ip link set dev ethX type bridge_slave flood off mcast_flood off + $ ip link set dev ethX type bridge_slave flood off mcast_flood on + Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Cannot configure multicast flooding independently of unicast. + +Broadcast flooding on a switch port can be disabled/enabled through the brport sysfs:: + + $ echo 0 > /sys/bus/fsl-mc/devices/dpsw.Y/net/ethX/brport/broadcast_flood + +Offloads +======== + +Routing actions (redirect, trap, drop) +-------------------------------------- + +The DPAA2 switch is able to offload flow-based redirection of packets making +use of ACL tables. Shared filter blocks are supported by sharing a single ACL +table between multiple ports. + +The following flow keys are supported: + + * Ethernet: dst_mac/src_mac + * IPv4: dst_ip/src_ip/ip_proto/tos + * VLAN: vlan_id/vlan_prio/vlan_tpid/vlan_dei + * L4: dst_port/src_port + +Also, the matchall filter can be used to redirect the entire traffic received +on a port. + +As per flow actions, the following are supported: + + * drop + * mirred egress redirect + * trap + +Each ACL entry (filter) can be setup with only one of the listed +actions. + +Example 1: send frames received on eth4 with a SA of 00:01:02:03:04:05 to the +CPU:: + + $ tc qdisc add dev eth4 clsact + $ tc filter add dev eth4 ingress flower src_mac 00:01:02:03:04:05 skip_sw action trap + +Example 2: drop frames received on eth4 with VID 100 and PCP of 3:: + + $ tc filter add dev eth4 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 100 vlan_prio 3 action drop + +Example 3: redirect all frames received on eth4 to eth1:: + + $ tc filter add dev eth4 ingress matchall action mirred egress redirect dev eth1 + +Example 4: Use a single shared filter block on both eth5 and eth6:: + + $ tc qdisc add dev eth5 ingress_block 1 clsact + $ tc qdisc add dev eth6 ingress_block 1 clsact + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress flower dst_mac 00:01:02:03:04:04 skip_sw \ + action trap + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol ipv4 flower src_ip 192.168.1.1 skip_sw \ + action mirred egress redirect dev eth3 + +Mirroring +~~~~~~~~~ + +The DPAA2 switch supports only per port mirroring and per VLAN mirroring. +Adding mirroring filters in shared blocks is also supported. + +When using the tc-flower classifier with the 802.1q protocol, only the +''vlan_id'' key will be accepted. Mirroring based on any other fields from the +802.1q protocol will be rejected:: + + $ tc qdisc add dev eth8 ingress_block 1 clsact + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_prio 3 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6 + Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Only matching on VLAN ID supported. + We have an error talking to the kernel + +If a mirroring VLAN filter is requested on a port, the VLAN must to be +installed on the switch port in question either using ''bridge'' or by creating +a VLAN upper device if the switch port is used as a standalone interface:: + + $ tc qdisc add dev eth8 ingress_block 1 clsact + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6 + Error: VLAN must be installed on the switch port. + We have an error talking to the kernel + + $ bridge vlan add vid 200 dev eth8 + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6 + + $ ip link add link eth8 name eth8.200 type vlan id 200 + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6 + +Also, it should be noted that the mirrored traffic will be subject to the same +egress restrictions as any other traffic. This means that when a mirrored +packet will reach the mirror port, if the VLAN found in the packet is not +installed on the port it will get dropped. + +The DPAA2 switch supports only a single mirroring destination, thus multiple +mirror rules can be installed but their ''to'' port has to be the same:: + + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6 + $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 100 action mirred egress mirror dev eth7 + Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Multiple mirror ports not supported. + We have an error talking to the kernel diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9c4a91d3824b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=========================== +The Gianfar Ethernet Driver +=========================== + +:Author: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com> +:Updated: 2005-07-28 + + +Checksum Offloading +=================== + +The eTSEC controller (first included in parts from late 2005 like +the 8548) has the ability to perform TCP, UDP, and IP checksums +in hardware. The Linux kernel only offloads the TCP and UDP +checksums (and always performs the pseudo header checksums), so +the driver only supports checksumming for TCP/IP and UDP/IP +packets. Use ethtool to enable or disable this feature for RX +and TX. + +VLAN +==== + +In order to use VLAN, please consult Linux documentation on +configuring VLANs. The gianfar driver supports hardware insertion and +extraction of VLAN headers, but not filtering. Filtering will be +done by the kernel. + +Multicasting +============ + +The gianfar driver supports using the group hash table on the +TSEC (and the extended hash table on the eTSEC) for multicast +filtering. On the eTSEC, the exact-match MAC registers are used +before the hash tables. See Linux documentation on how to join +multicast groups. + +Padding +======= + +The gianfar driver supports padding received frames with 2 bytes +to align the IP header to a 16-byte boundary, when supported by +hardware. + +Ethtool +======= + +The gianfar driver supports the use of ethtool for many +configuration options. You must run ethtool only on currently +open interfaces. See ethtool documentation for details. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6d73ee78f3d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +============================================================== +Linux kernel driver for Compute Engine Virtual Ethernet (gve): +============================================================== + +Supported Hardware +=================== +The GVE driver binds to a single PCI device id used by the virtual +Ethernet device found in some Compute Engine VMs. + ++--------------+----------+---------+ +|Field | Value | Comments| ++==============+==========+=========+ +|Vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google | ++--------------+----------+---------+ +|Device ID | `0x0042` | | ++--------------+----------+---------+ +|Sub-vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google | ++--------------+----------+---------+ +|Sub-device ID | `0x0058` | | ++--------------+----------+---------+ +|Revision ID | `0x0` | | ++--------------+----------+---------+ +|Device Class | `0x200` | Ethernet| ++--------------+----------+---------+ + +PCI Bars +======== +The gVNIC PCI device exposes three 32-bit memory BARS: +- Bar0 - Device configuration and status registers. +- Bar1 - MSI-X vector table +- Bar2 - IRQ, RX and TX doorbells + +Device Interactions +=================== +The driver interacts with the device in the following ways: + - Registers + - A block of MMIO registers + - See gve_register.h for more detail + - Admin Queue + - See description below + - Reset + - At any time the device can be reset + - Interrupts + - See supported interrupts below + - Transmit and Receive Queues + - See description below + +Descriptor Formats +------------------ +GVE supports two descriptor formats: GQI and DQO. These two formats have +entirely different descriptors, which will be described below. + +Registers +--------- +All registers are MMIO. + +The registers are used for initializing and configuring the device as well as +querying device status in response to management interrupts. + +Endianness +---------- +- Admin Queue messages and registers are all Big Endian. +- GQI descriptors and datapath registers are Big Endian. +- DQO descriptors and datapath registers are Little Endian. + +Admin Queue (AQ) +---------------- +The Admin Queue is a PAGE_SIZE memory block, treated as an array of AQ +commands, used by the driver to issue commands to the device and set up +resources.The driver and the device maintain a count of how many commands +have been submitted and executed. To issue AQ commands, the driver must do +the following (with proper locking): + +1) Copy new commands into next available slots in the AQ array +2) Increment its counter by he number of new commands +3) Write the counter into the GVE_ADMIN_QUEUE_DOORBELL register +4) Poll the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register until it equals + the value written to the doorbell, or until a timeout. + +The device will update the status field in each AQ command reported as +executed through the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register. + +Device Resets +------------- +A device reset is triggered by writing 0x0 to the AQ PFN register. +This causes the device to release all resources allocated by the +driver, including the AQ itself. + +Interrupts +---------- +The following interrupts are supported by the driver: + +Management Interrupt +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The management interrupt is used by the device to tell the driver to +look at the GVE_DEVICE_STATUS register. + +The handler for the management irq simply queues the service task in +the workqueue to check the register and acks the irq. + +Notification Block Interrupts +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The notification block interrupts are used to tell the driver to poll +the queues associated with that interrupt. + +The handler for these irqs schedule the napi for that block to run +and poll the queues. + +GQI Traffic Queues +------------------ +GQI queues are composed of a descriptor ring and a buffer and are assigned to a +notification block. + +The descriptor rings are power-of-two-sized ring buffers consisting of +fixed-size descriptors. They advance their head pointer using a __be32 +doorbell located in Bar2. The tail pointers are advanced by consuming +descriptors in-order and updating a __be32 counter. Both the doorbell +and the counter overflow to zero. + +Each queue's buffers must be registered in advance with the device as a +queue page list, and packet data can only be put in those pages. + +Transmit +~~~~~~~~ +gve maps the buffers for transmit rings into a FIFO and copies the packets +into the FIFO before sending them to the NIC. + +Receive +~~~~~~~ +The buffers for receive rings are put into a data ring that is the same +length as the descriptor ring and the head and tail pointers advance over +the rings together. + +DQO Traffic Queues +------------------ +- Every TX and RX queue is assigned a notification block. + +- TX and RX buffers queues, which send descriptors to the device, use MMIO + doorbells to notify the device of new descriptors. + +- RX and TX completion queues, which receive descriptors from the device, use a + "generation bit" to know when a descriptor was populated by the device. The + driver initializes all bits with the "current generation". The device will + populate received descriptors with the "next generation" which is inverted + from the current generation. When the ring wraps, the current/next generation + are swapped. + +- It's the driver's responsibility to ensure that the RX and TX completion + queues are not overrun. This can be accomplished by limiting the number of + descriptors posted to HW. + +- TX packets have a 16 bit completion_tag and RX buffers have a 16 bit + buffer_id. These will be returned on the TX completion and RX queues + respectively to let the driver know which packet/buffer was completed. + +Transmit +~~~~~~~~ +A packet's buffers are DMA mapped for the device to access before transmission. +After the packet was successfully transmitted, the buffers are unmapped. + +Receive +~~~~~~~ +The driver posts fixed sized buffers to HW on the RX buffer queue. The packet +received on the associated RX queue may span multiple descriptors. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..867ac8f4e04a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================================================ +Linux Kernel Driver for Huawei Intelligent NIC(HiNIC) family +============================================================ + +Overview: +========= +HiNIC is a network interface card for the Data Center Area. + +The driver supports a range of link-speed devices (10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc.). +The driver supports also a negotiated and extendable feature set. + +Some HiNIC devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for Physical Function +(PF). + +HiNIC devices support MSI-X interrupt vector for each Tx/Rx queue and +adaptive interrupt moderation. + +HiNIC devices support also various offload features such as checksum offload, +TCP Transmit Segmentation Offload(TSO), Receive-Side Scaling(RSS) and +LRO(Large Receive Offload). + + +Supported PCI vendor ID/device IDs: +=================================== + +19e5:1822 - HiNIC PF + + +Driver Architecture and Source Code: +==================================== + +hinic_dev - Implement a Logical Network device that is independent from +specific HW details about HW data structure formats. + +hinic_hwdev - Implement the HW details of the device and include the components +for accessing the PCI NIC. + +hinic_hwdev contains the following components: +=============================================== + +HW Interface: +============= + +The interface for accessing the pci device (DMA memory and PCI BARs). +(hinic_hw_if.c, hinic_hw_if.h) + +Configuration Status Registers Area that describes the HW Registers on the +configuration and status BAR0. (hinic_hw_csr.h) + +MGMT components: +================ + +Asynchronous Event Queues(AEQs) - The event queues for receiving messages from +the MGMT modules on the cards. (hinic_hw_eqs.c, hinic_hw_eqs.h) + +Application Programmable Interface commands(API CMD) - Interface for sending +MGMT commands to the card. (hinic_hw_api_cmd.c, hinic_hw_api_cmd.h) + +Management (MGMT) - the PF to MGMT channel that uses API CMD for sending MGMT +commands to the card and receives notifications from the MGMT modules on the +card by AEQs. Also set the addresses of the IO CMDQs in HW. +(hinic_hw_mgmt.c, hinic_hw_mgmt.h) + +IO components: +============== + +Completion Event Queues(CEQs) - The completion Event Queues that describe IO +tasks that are finished. (hinic_hw_eqs.c, hinic_hw_eqs.h) + +Work Queues(WQ) - Contain the memory and operations for use by CMD queues and +the Queue Pairs. The WQ is a Memory Block in a Page. The Block contains +pointers to Memory Areas that are the Memory for the Work Queue Elements(WQEs). +(hinic_hw_wq.c, hinic_hw_wq.h) + +Command Queues(CMDQ) - The queues for sending commands for IO management and is +used to set the QPs addresses in HW. The commands completion events are +accumulated on the CEQ that is configured to receive the CMDQ completion events. +(hinic_hw_cmdq.c, hinic_hw_cmdq.h) + +Queue Pairs(QPs) - The HW Receive and Send queues for Receiving and Transmitting +Data. (hinic_hw_qp.c, hinic_hw_qp.h, hinic_hw_qp_ctxt.h) + +IO - de/constructs all the IO components. (hinic_hw_io.c, hinic_hw_io.h) + +HW device: +========== + +HW device - de/constructs the HW Interface, the MGMT components on the +initialization of the driver and the IO components on the case of Interface +UP/DOWN Events. (hinic_hw_dev.c, hinic_hw_dev.h) + + +hinic_dev contains the following components: +=============================================== + +PCI ID table - Contains the supported PCI Vendor/Device IDs. +(hinic_pci_tbl.h) + +Port Commands - Send commands to the HW device for port management +(MAC, Vlan, MTU, ...). (hinic_port.c, hinic_port.h) + +Tx Queues - Logical Tx Queues that use the HW Send Queues for transmit. +The Logical Tx queue is not dependent on the format of the HW Send Queue. +(hinic_tx.c, hinic_tx.h) + +Rx Queues - Logical Rx Queues that use the HW Receive Queues for receive. +The Logical Rx queue is not dependent on the format of the HW Receive Queue. +(hinic_rx.c, hinic_rx.h) + +hinic_dev - de/constructs the Logical Tx and Rx Queues. +(hinic_main.c, hinic_dev.h) + + +Miscellaneous +============= + +Common functions that are used by HW and Logical Device. +(hinic_common.c, hinic_common.h) + + +Support +======= + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue to +aviad.krawczyk@huawei.com. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5196905582c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Ethernet Device Drivers +======================= + +Device drivers for Ethernet and Ethernet-based virtual function devices. + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + 3com/3c509 + 3com/vortex + amazon/ena + altera/altera_tse + aquantia/atlantic + chelsio/cxgb + cirrus/cs89x0 + dlink/dl2k + davicom/dm9000 + dec/dmfe + freescale/dpaa + freescale/dpaa2/index + freescale/gianfar + google/gve + huawei/hinic + intel/e100 + intel/e1000 + intel/e1000e + intel/fm10k + intel/igb + intel/igbvf + intel/ixgb + intel/ixgbe + intel/ixgbevf + intel/i40e + intel/iavf + intel/ice + marvell/octeontx2 + marvell/octeon_ep + mellanox/mlx5 + microsoft/netvsc + neterion/s2io + netronome/nfp + pensando/ionic + smsc/smc9 + stmicro/stmmac + ti/cpsw + ti/cpsw_switchdev + ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev + ti/tlan + toshiba/spider_net + wangxun/txgbe + wangxun/ngbe + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst index caf023cc88de..3d4a9ba21946 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ The following features are now available in supported kernels: - SNMP Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: -/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +/Documentation/networking/bonding.rst Identifying Your Adapter @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Identifying Your Adapter For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: -http://www.intel.com/support +https://www.intel.com/support Driver Configuration Parameters =============================== @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ filtering by Support ======= For general information, go to the Intel support website at: -http://www.intel.com/support/ +https://www.intel.com/support/ or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst index 4aaae0f7d6ba..4aaae0f7d6ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst index f49cd370e7bf..f49cd370e7bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst index 4d279e64e221..9258ef6f515c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Ethernet Multi-host Controller. For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: -http://www.intel.com/support +https://www.intel.com/support Flow Control diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst index 8a9b18573688..ac35bd472bdc 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Director rule is added from ethtool (Sideband filter), ATR is turned off by the driver. To re-enable ATR, the sideband can be disabled with the ethtool -K option. For example:: - ethtool –K [adapter] ntuple [off|on] + ethtool -K [adapter] ntuple [off|on] If sideband is re-enabled after ATR is re-enabled, ATR remains enabled until a TCP-IP flow is added. When all TCP-IP sideband rules are deleted, ATR is @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ network. PTP support varies among Intel devices that support this driver. Use "ethtool -T <netdev name>" to get a definitive list of PTP capabilities supported by the device. -IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support +IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support --------------------------- The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as @@ -523,8 +523,8 @@ of a port's bandwidth (should it be available). The sum of all the values for Maximum Bandwidth is not restricted, because no more than 100% of a port's bandwidth can ever be used. -NOTE: X710/XXV710 devices fail to enable Max VFs (64) when Multiple Functions -per Port (MFP) and SR-IOV are enabled. An error from i40e is logged that says +NOTE: X710/XXV710 devices fail to enable Max VFs (64) when Multiple Functions +per Port (MFP) and SR-IOV are enabled. An error from i40e is logged that says "add vsi failed for VF N, aq_err 16". To workaround the issue, enable less than 64 virtual functions (VFs). @@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates. Totals must be equal or less than port speed. For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network -monitoring tools such as ifstat or sar –n DEV [interval] [number of samples] +monitoring tools such as `ifstat` or `sar -n DEV [interval] [number of samples]` 2. Enable HW TC offload on interface:: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst index 84ac7e75f363..151af0a8da9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ device. For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest NVM/FW images and Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: -http://www.intel.com/support +https://www.intel.com/support Additional Features and Configurations @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ which the AVF is associated. The following are base mode features: - AVF device ID - HW mailbox is used for VF to PF communications (including on Windows) -IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support +IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support --------------------------- The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates. Totals must be equal or less than port speed. For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network -monitoring tools such as ifstat or sar –n DEV [interval] [number of samples] +monitoring tools such as ``ifstat`` or ``sar -n DEV [interval] [number of samples]`` NOTE: Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dc2e60ced927 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst @@ -0,0 +1,1040 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +================================================================= +Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 800 Series +================================================================= + +Intel ice Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 2018-2021 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Overview +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Important Notes +- Additional Features & Configurations +- Performance Optimization + + +The associated Virtual Function (VF) driver for this driver is iavf. + +Driver information can be obtained using ethtool and lspci. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use +with Linux. + +This driver supports XDP (Express Data Path) and AF_XDP zero-copy. Note that +XDP is blocked for frame sizes larger than 3KB. + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +https://www.intel.com/support + + +Important Notes +=============== + +Packet drops may occur under receive stress +------------------------------------------- +Devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 800 Series are designed to +tolerate a limited amount of system latency during PCIe and DMA transactions. +If these transactions take longer than the tolerated latency, it can impact the +length of time the packets are buffered in the device and associated memory, +which may result in dropped packets. These packets drops typically do not have +a noticeable impact on throughput and performance under standard workloads. + +If these packet drops appear to affect your workload, the following may improve +the situation: + +1) Make sure that your system's physical memory is in a high-performance + configuration, as recommended by the platform vendor. A common + recommendation is for all channels to be populated with a single DIMM + module. +2) In your system's BIOS/UEFI settings, select the "Performance" profile. +3) Your distribution may provide tools like "tuned," which can help tweak + kernel settings to achieve better standard settings for different workloads. + + +Configuring SR-IOV for improved network security +------------------------------------------------ +In a virtualized environment, on Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapters that +support SR-IOV, the virtual function (VF) may be subject to malicious behavior. +Software-generated layer two frames, like IEEE 802.3x (link flow control), IEEE +802.1Qbb (priority based flow-control), and others of this type, are not +expected and can throttle traffic between the host and the virtual switch, +reducing performance. To resolve this issue, and to ensure isolation from +unintended traffic streams, configure all SR-IOV enabled ports for VLAN tagging +from the administrative interface on the PF. This configuration allows +unexpected, and potentially malicious, frames to be dropped. + +See "Configuring VLAN Tagging on SR-IOV Enabled Adapter Ports" later in this +README for configuration instructions. + + +Do not unload port driver if VF with active VM is bound to it +------------------------------------------------------------- +Do not unload a port's driver if a Virtual Function (VF) with an active Virtual +Machine (VM) is bound to it. Doing so will cause the port to appear to hang. +Once the VM shuts down, or otherwise releases the VF, the command will +complete. + + +Important notes for SR-IOV and Link Aggregation +----------------------------------------------- +Link Aggregation is mutually exclusive with SR-IOV. + +- If Link Aggregation is active, SR-IOV VFs cannot be created on the PF. +- If SR-IOV is active, you cannot set up Link Aggregation on the interface. + +Bridging and MACVLAN are also affected by this. If you wish to use bridging or +MACVLAN with SR-IOV, you must set up bridging or MACVLAN before enabling +SR-IOV. If you are using bridging or MACVLAN in conjunction with SR-IOV, and +you want to remove the interface from the bridge or MACVLAN, you must follow +these steps: + +1. Destroy SR-IOV VFs if they exist +2. Remove the interface from the bridge or MACVLAN +3. Recreate SRIOV VFs as needed + + +Additional Features and Configurations +====================================== + +ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool +version is required for this functionality. Download it at: +https://kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +NOTE: The rx_bytes value of ethtool does not match the rx_bytes value of +Netdev, due to the 4-byte CRC being stripped by the device. The difference +between the two rx_bytes values will be 4 x the number of Rx packets. For +example, if Rx packets are 10 and Netdev (software statistics) displays +rx_bytes as "X", then ethtool (hardware statistics) will display rx_bytes as +"X+40" (4 bytes CRC x 10 packets). + + +Viewing Link Messages +--------------------- +Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is +restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on +your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following:: + + # dmesg -n 8 + +NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + + +Dynamic Device Personalization +------------------------------ +Dynamic Device Personalization (DDP) allows you to change the packet processing +pipeline of a device by applying a profile package to the device at runtime. +Profiles can be used to, for example, add support for new protocols, change +existing protocols, or change default settings. DDP profiles can also be rolled +back without rebooting the system. + +The DDP package loads during device initialization. The driver looks for +``intel/ice/ddp/ice.pkg`` in your firmware root (typically ``/lib/firmware/`` +or ``/lib/firmware/updates/``) and checks that it contains a valid DDP package +file. + +NOTE: Your distribution should likely have provided the latest DDP file, but if +ice.pkg is missing, you can find it in the linux-firmware repository or from +intel.com. + +If the driver is unable to load the DDP package, the device will enter Safe +Mode. Safe Mode disables advanced and performance features and supports only +basic traffic and minimal functionality, such as updating the NVM or +downloading a new driver or DDP package. Safe Mode only applies to the affected +physical function and does not impact any other PFs. See the "Intel(R) Ethernet +Adapters and Devices User Guide" for more details on DDP and Safe Mode. + +NOTES: + +- If you encounter issues with the DDP package file, you may need to download + an updated driver or DDP package file. See the log messages for more + information. + +- The ice.pkg file is a symbolic link to the default DDP package file. + +- You cannot update the DDP package if any PF drivers are already loaded. To + overwrite a package, unload all PFs and then reload the driver with the new + package. + +- Only the first loaded PF per device can download a package for that device. + +You can install specific DDP package files for different physical devices in +the same system. To install a specific DDP package file: + +1. Download the DDP package file you want for your device. + +2. Rename the file ice-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.pkg, where 'xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx' is the + unique 64-bit PCI Express device serial number (in hex) of the device you + want the package downloaded on. The filename must include the complete + serial number (including leading zeros) and be all lowercase. For example, + if the 64-bit serial number is b887a3ffffca0568, then the file name would be + ice-b887a3ffffca0568.pkg. + + To find the serial number from the PCI bus address, you can use the + following command:: + + # lspci -vv -s af:00.0 | grep -i Serial + Capabilities: [150 v1] Device Serial Number b8-87-a3-ff-ff-ca-05-68 + + You can use the following command to format the serial number without the + dashes:: + + # lspci -vv -s af:00.0 | grep -i Serial | awk '{print $7}' | sed s/-//g + b887a3ffffca0568 + +3. Copy the renamed DDP package file to + ``/lib/firmware/updates/intel/ice/ddp/``. If the directory does not yet + exist, create it before copying the file. + +4. Unload all of the PFs on the device. + +5. Reload the driver with the new package. + +NOTE: The presence of a device-specific DDP package file overrides the loading +of the default DDP package file (ice.pkg). + + +Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director +------------------------------- +The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks: + +- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues +- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform +- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity + +NOTE: This driver supports the following flow types: + +- IPv4 +- TCPv4 +- UDPv4 +- SCTPv4 +- IPv6 +- TCPv6 +- UDPv6 +- SCTPv6 + +Each flow type supports valid combinations of IP addresses (source or +destination) and UDP/TCP/SCTP ports (source and destination). You can supply +only a source IP address, a source IP address and a destination port, or any +combination of one or more of these four parameters. + +NOTE: This driver allows you to filter traffic based on a user-defined flexible +two-byte pattern and offset by using the ethtool user-def and mask fields. Only +L3 and L4 flow types are supported for user-defined flexible filters. For a +given flow type, you must clear all Intel Ethernet Flow Director filters before +changing the input set (for that flow type). + + +Flow Director Filters +--------------------- +Flow Director filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified +characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To enable +or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director and these filters:: + + # ethtool -K <ethX> ntuple <off|on> + +NOTE: When you disable ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are +flushed from the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added +when ntuple is re-enabled. + +To display all of the active filters:: + + # ethtool -u <ethX> + +To add a new filter:: + + # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> [m <ip_mask>] dst-ip <ip> + [m <ip_mask>] src-port <port> [m <port_mask>] dst-port <port> [m <port_mask>] + action <queue> + + Where: + <ethX> - the Ethernet device to program + <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, sctp4, ip6, tcp6, udp6, sctp6 + <ip> - the IP address to match on + <ip_mask> - the IPv4 address to mask on + NOTE: These filters use inverted masks. + <port> - the port number to match on + <port_mask> - the 16-bit integer for masking + NOTE: These filters use inverted masks. + <queue> - the queue to direct traffic toward (-1 discards the + matched traffic) + +To delete a filter:: + + # ethtool -U <ethX> delete <N> + + Where <N> is the filter ID displayed when printing all the active filters, + and may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter. + +EXAMPLES: + +To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2:: + + # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \ + 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1] + +To set a filter using only the source and destination IP address:: + + # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \ + 192.168.10.2 action 2 [loc 1] + +To set a filter based on a user-defined pattern and offset:: + + # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \ + 192.168.10.2 user-def 0x4FFFF action 2 [loc 1] + + where the value of the user-def field contains the offset (4 bytes) and + the pattern (0xffff). + +To match TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300, directed to 192.168.0.5, +port 80, and then send it to queue 7:: + + # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 + src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7 + +To add a TCPv4 filter with a partial mask for a source IP subnet:: + + # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.0 m 0.255.255.255 dst-ip + 192.168.5.12 src-port 12600 dst-port 31 action 12 + +NOTES: + +For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching +input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable:: + + # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7 + # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10 + +Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first +specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip:: + + # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7 + # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10 + +The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters +with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not +program two tcp4 filters with different matching fields. + +The ice driver does not support matching on a subportion of a field, thus +partial mask fields are not supported. + + +Flex Byte Flow Director Filters +------------------------------- +The driver also supports matching user-defined data within the packet payload. +This flexible data is specified using the "user-def" field of the ethtool +command in the following way: + +.. table:: + + ============================== ============================ + ``31 28 24 20 16`` ``15 12 8 4 0`` + ``offset into packet payload`` ``2 bytes of flexible data`` + ============================== ============================ + +For example, + +:: + + ... user-def 0x4FFFF ... + +tells the filter to look 4 bytes into the payload and match that value against +0xFFFF. The offset is based on the beginning of the payload, and not the +beginning of the packet. Thus + +:: + + flow-type tcp4 ... user-def 0x8BEAF ... + +would match TCP/IPv4 packets which have the value 0xBEAF 8 bytes into the +TCP/IPv4 payload. + +Note that ICMP headers are parsed as 4 bytes of header and 4 bytes of payload. +Thus to match the first byte of the payload, you must actually add 4 bytes to +the offset. Also note that ip4 filters match both ICMP frames as well as raw +(unknown) ip4 frames, where the payload will be the L3 payload of the IP4 +frame. + +The maximum offset is 64. The hardware will only read up to 64 bytes of data +from the payload. The offset must be even because the flexible data is 2 bytes +long and must be aligned to byte 0 of the packet payload. + +The user-defined flexible offset is also considered part of the input set and +cannot be programmed separately for multiple filters of the same type. However, +the flexible data is not part of the input set and multiple filters may use the +same offset but match against different data. + + +RSS Hash Flow +------------- +Allows you to set the hash bytes per flow type and any combination of one or +more options for Receive Side Scaling (RSS) hash byte configuration. + +:: + + # ethtool -N <ethX> rx-flow-hash <type> <option> + + Where <type> is: + tcp4 signifying TCP over IPv4 + udp4 signifying UDP over IPv4 + tcp6 signifying TCP over IPv6 + udp6 signifying UDP over IPv6 + And <option> is one or more of: + s Hash on the IP source address of the Rx packet. + d Hash on the IP destination address of the Rx packet. + f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet. + n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet. + + +Accelerated Receive Flow Steering (aRFS) +---------------------------------------- +Devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 800 Series support +Accelerated Receive Flow Steering (aRFS) on the PF. aRFS is a load-balancing +mechanism that allows you to direct packets to the same CPU where an +application is running or consuming the packets in that flow. + +NOTES: + +- aRFS requires that ntuple filtering is enabled via ethtool. +- aRFS support is limited to the following packet types: + + - TCP over IPv4 and IPv6 + - UDP over IPv4 and IPv6 + - Nonfragmented packets + +- aRFS only supports Flow Director filters, which consist of the + source/destination IP addresses and source/destination ports. +- aRFS and ethtool's ntuple interface both use the device's Flow Director. aRFS + and ntuple features can coexist, but you may encounter unexpected results if + there's a conflict between aRFS and ntuple requests. See "Intel(R) Ethernet + Flow Director" for additional information. + +To set up aRFS: + +1. Enable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director and ntuple filters using ethtool. + +:: + + # ethtool -K <ethX> ntuple on + +2. Set up the number of entries in the global flow table. For example: + +:: + + # NUM_RPS_ENTRIES=16384 + # echo $NUM_RPS_ENTRIES > /proc/sys/net/core/rps_sock_flow_entries + +3. Set up the number of entries in the per-queue flow table. For example: + +:: + + # NUM_RX_QUEUES=64 + # for file in /sys/class/net/$IFACE/queues/rx-*/rps_flow_cnt; do + # echo $(($NUM_RPS_ENTRIES/$NUM_RX_QUEUES)) > $file; + # done + +4. Disable the IRQ balance daemon (this is only a temporary stop of the service + until the next reboot). + +:: + + # systemctl stop irqbalance + +5. Configure the interrupt affinity. + + See ``/Documentation/core-api/irq/irq-affinity.rst`` + + +To disable aRFS using ethtool:: + + # ethtool -K <ethX> ntuple off + +NOTE: This command will disable ntuple filters and clear any aRFS filters in +software and hardware. + +Example Use Case: + +1. Set the server application on the desired CPU (e.g., CPU 4). + +:: + + # taskset -c 4 netserver + +2. Use netperf to route traffic from the client to CPU 4 on the server with + aRFS configured. This example uses TCP over IPv4. + +:: + + # netperf -H <Host IPv4 Address> -t TCP_STREAM + + +Enabling Virtual Functions (VFs) +-------------------------------- +Use sysfs to enable virtual functions (VF). + +For example, you can create 4 VFs as follows:: + + # echo 4 > /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/sriov_numvfs + +To disable VFs, write 0 to the same file:: + + # echo 0 > /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/sriov_numvfs + +The maximum number of VFs for the ice driver is 256 total (all ports). To check +how many VFs each PF supports, use the following command:: + + # cat /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/sriov_totalvfs + +Note: You cannot use SR-IOV when link aggregation (LAG)/bonding is active, and +vice versa. To enforce this, the driver checks for this mutual exclusion. + + +Displaying VF Statistics on the PF +---------------------------------- +Use the following command to display the statistics for the PF and its VFs:: + + # ip -s link show dev <ethX> + +NOTE: The output of this command can be very large due to the maximum number of +possible VFs. + +The PF driver will display a subset of the statistics for the PF and for all +VFs that are configured. The PF will always print a statistics block for each +of the possible VFs, and it will show zero for all unconfigured VFs. + + +Configuring VLAN Tagging on SR-IOV Enabled Adapter Ports +-------------------------------------------------------- +To configure VLAN tagging for the ports on an SR-IOV enabled adapter, use the +following command. The VLAN configuration should be done before the VF driver +is loaded or the VM is booted. The VF is not aware of the VLAN tag being +inserted on transmit and removed on received frames (sometimes called "port +VLAN" mode). + +:: + + # ip link set dev <ethX> vf <id> vlan <vlan id> + +For example, the following will configure PF eth0 and the first VF on VLAN 10:: + + # ip link set dev eth0 vf 0 vlan 10 + + +Enabling a VF link if the port is disconnected +---------------------------------------------- +If the physical function (PF) link is down, you can force link up (from the +host PF) on any virtual functions (VF) bound to the PF. + +For example, to force link up on VF 0 bound to PF eth0:: + + # ip link set eth0 vf 0 state enable + +Note: If the command does not work, it may not be supported by your system. + + +Setting the MAC Address for a VF +-------------------------------- +To change the MAC address for the specified VF:: + + # ip link set <ethX> vf 0 mac <address> + +For example:: + + # ip link set <ethX> vf 0 mac 00:01:02:03:04:05 + +This setting lasts until the PF is reloaded. + +NOTE: Assigning a MAC address for a VF from the host will disable any +subsequent requests to change the MAC address from within the VM. This is a +security feature. The VM is not aware of this restriction, so if this is +attempted in the VM, it will trigger MDD events. + + +Trusted VFs and VF Promiscuous Mode +----------------------------------- +This feature allows you to designate a particular VF as trusted and allows that +trusted VF to request selective promiscuous mode on the Physical Function (PF). + +To set a VF as trusted or untrusted, enter the following command in the +Hypervisor:: + + # ip link set dev <ethX> vf 1 trust [on|off] + +NOTE: It's important to set the VF to trusted before setting promiscuous mode. +If the VM is not trusted, the PF will ignore promiscuous mode requests from the +VF. If the VM becomes trusted after the VF driver is loaded, you must make a +new request to set the VF to promiscuous. + +Once the VF is designated as trusted, use the following commands in the VM to +set the VF to promiscuous mode. + +For promiscuous all:: + + # ip link set <ethX> promisc on + Where <ethX> is a VF interface in the VM + +For promiscuous Multicast:: + + # ip link set <ethX> allmulticast on + Where <ethX> is a VF interface in the VM + +NOTE: By default, the ethtool private flag vf-true-promisc-support is set to +"off," meaning that promiscuous mode for the VF will be limited. To set the +promiscuous mode for the VF to true promiscuous and allow the VF to see all +ingress traffic, use the following command:: + + # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> vf-true-promisc-support on + +The vf-true-promisc-support private flag does not enable promiscuous mode; +rather, it designates which type of promiscuous mode (limited or true) you will +get when you enable promiscuous mode using the ip link commands above. Note +that this is a global setting that affects the entire device. However, the +vf-true-promisc-support private flag is only exposed to the first PF of the +device. The PF remains in limited promiscuous mode regardless of the +vf-true-promisc-support setting. + +Next, add a VLAN interface on the VF interface. For example:: + + # ip link add link eth2 name eth2.100 type vlan id 100 + +Note that the order in which you set the VF to promiscuous mode and add the +VLAN interface does not matter (you can do either first). The result in this +example is that the VF will get all traffic that is tagged with VLAN 100. + + +Malicious Driver Detection (MDD) for VFs +---------------------------------------- +Some Intel Ethernet devices use Malicious Driver Detection (MDD) to detect +malicious traffic from the VF and disable Tx/Rx queues or drop the offending +packet until a VF driver reset occurs. You can view MDD messages in the PF's +system log using the dmesg command. + +- If the PF driver logs MDD events from the VF, confirm that the correct VF + driver is installed. +- To restore functionality, you can manually reload the VF or VM or enable + automatic VF resets. +- When automatic VF resets are enabled, the PF driver will immediately reset + the VF and reenable queues when it detects MDD events on the receive path. +- If automatic VF resets are disabled, the PF will not automatically reset the + VF when it detects MDD events. + +To enable or disable automatic VF resets, use the following command:: + + # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> mdd-auto-reset-vf on|off + + +MAC and VLAN Anti-Spoofing Feature for VFs +------------------------------------------ +When a malicious driver on a Virtual Function (VF) interface attempts to send a +spoofed packet, it is dropped by the hardware and not transmitted. + +NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific VF:: + + # ip link set <ethX> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on} + + +Jumbo Frames +------------ +Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) +to a value larger than the default value of 1500. + +Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the +following where <ethX> is the interface number:: + + # ifconfig <ethX> mtu 9000 up + +Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows:: + + # ip link set mtu 9000 dev <ethX> + # ip link set up dev <ethX> + +This setting is not saved across reboots. + + +NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for jumbo frames is 9702. This corresponds to the +maximum jumbo frame size of 9728 bytes. + +NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive +each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when +allocating receive packets. + +NOTE: Packet loss may have a greater impact on throughput when you use jumbo +frames. If you observe a drop in performance after enabling jumbo frames, +enabling flow control may mitigate the issue. + + +Speed and Duplex Configuration +------------------------------ +In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish +between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters. + +In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper +connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine +the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner +using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link +partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should +only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not +support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or +duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds +and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to +manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher. + +Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the +ethtool utility. For the latest version, download and install ethtool from the +following website: + + https://kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +To see the speed configurations your device supports, run the following:: + + # ethtool <ethX> + +Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex +or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must +always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your +adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your +switch. + + +Data Center Bridging (DCB) +-------------------------- +NOTE: The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow +Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is +enabled when setting up DCB on your switch. + +DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses +the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8 +different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables +priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of +dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of +these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz). + +DCB is normally configured on the network using the DCBX protocol (802.1Qaz), a +specialization of LLDP (802.1AB). The ice driver supports the following +mutually exclusive variants of DCBX support: + +1) Firmware-based LLDP Agent +2) Software-based LLDP Agent + +In firmware-based mode, firmware intercepts all LLDP traffic and handles DCBX +negotiation transparently for the user. In this mode, the adapter operates in +"willing" DCBX mode, receiving DCB settings from the link partner (typically a +switch). The local user can only query the negotiated DCB configuration. For +information on configuring DCBX parameters on a switch, please consult the +switch manufacturer's documentation. + +In software-based mode, LLDP traffic is forwarded to the network stack and user +space, where a software agent can handle it. In this mode, the adapter can +operate in either "willing" or "nonwilling" DCBX mode and DCB configuration can +be both queried and set locally. This mode requires the FW-based LLDP Agent to +be disabled. + +NOTE: + +- You can enable and disable the firmware-based LLDP Agent using an ethtool + private flag. Refer to the "FW-LLDP (Firmware Link Layer Discovery Protocol)" + section in this README for more information. +- In software-based DCBX mode, you can configure DCB parameters using software + LLDP/DCBX agents that interface with the Linux kernel's DCB Netlink API. We + recommend using OpenLLDP as the DCBX agent when running in software mode. For + more information, see the OpenLLDP man pages and + https://github.com/intel/openlldp. +- The driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow the user space + to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port. +- iSCSI with DCB is not supported. + + +FW-LLDP (Firmware Link Layer Discovery Protocol) +------------------------------------------------ +Use ethtool to change FW-LLDP settings. The FW-LLDP setting is per port and +persists across boots. + +To enable LLDP:: + + # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> fw-lldp-agent on + +To disable LLDP:: + + # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> fw-lldp-agent off + +To check the current LLDP setting:: + + # ethtool --show-priv-flags <ethX> + +NOTE: You must enable the UEFI HII "LLDP Agent" attribute for this setting to +take effect. If "LLDP AGENT" is set to disabled, you cannot enable it from the +OS. + + +Flow Control +------------ +Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable +receiving and transmitting pause frames for ice. When transmit is enabled, +pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined +threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time +delay specified when a pause frame is received. + +NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner. + +Flow Control is disabled by default. + +Use ethtool to change the flow control settings. + +To enable or disable Rx or Tx Flow Control:: + + # ethtool -A <ethX> rx <on|off> tx <on|off> + +Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is +disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters +used for auto-negotiation with the link partner. + +Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending +on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting. + +NOTE: + +- The ice driver requires flow control on both the port and link partner. If + flow control is disabled on one of the sides, the port may appear to hang on + heavy traffic. +- You may encounter issues with link-level flow control (LFC) after disabling + DCB. The LFC status may show as enabled but traffic is not paused. To resolve + this issue, disable and reenable LFC using ethtool:: + + # ethtool -A <ethX> rx off tx off + # ethtool -A <ethX> rx on tx on + + +NAPI +---- +This driver supports NAPI (Rx polling mode). +For more information on NAPI, see +https://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/napi + + +MACVLAN +------- +This driver supports MACVLAN. Kernel support for MACVLAN can be tested by +checking if the MACVLAN driver is loaded. You can run 'lsmod | grep macvlan' to +see if the MACVLAN driver is loaded or run 'modprobe macvlan' to try to load +the MACVLAN driver. + +NOTE: + +- In passthru mode, you can only set up one MACVLAN device. It will inherit the + MAC address of the underlying PF (Physical Function) device. + + +IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support +--------------------------- +The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN +IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as +"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks +allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular +VLAN ID, among other uses. + +NOTES: + +- Receive checksum offloads and VLAN acceleration are not supported for 802.1ad + (QinQ) packets. + +- 0x88A8 traffic will not be received unless VLAN stripping is disabled with + the following command:: + + # ethtool -K <ethX> rxvlan off + +- 0x88A8/0x8100 double VLANs cannot be used with 0x8100 or 0x8100/0x8100 VLANS + configured on the same port. 0x88a8/0x8100 traffic will not be received if + 0x8100 VLANs are configured. + +- The VF can only transmit 0x88A8/0x8100 (i.e., 802.1ad/802.1Q) traffic if: + + 1) The VF is not assigned a port VLAN. + 2) spoofchk is disabled from the PF. If you enable spoofchk, the VF will + not transmit 0x88A8/0x8100 traffic. + +- The VF may not receive all network traffic based on the Inner VLAN header + when VF true promiscuous mode (vf-true-promisc-support) and double VLANs are + enabled in SR-IOV mode. + +The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ):: + + # ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24 + # ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371 + + Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs. + + +Tunnel/Overlay Stateless Offloads +--------------------------------- +Supported tunnels and overlays include VXLAN, GENEVE, and others depending on +hardware and software configuration. Stateless offloads are enabled by default. + +To view the current state of all offloads:: + + # ethtool -k <ethX> + + +UDP Segmentation Offload +------------------------ +Allows the adapter to offload transmit segmentation of UDP packets with +payloads up to 64K into valid Ethernet frames. Because the adapter hardware is +able to complete data segmentation much faster than operating system software, +this feature may improve transmission performance. +In addition, the adapter may use fewer CPU resources. + +NOTE: + +- The application sending UDP packets must support UDP segmentation offload. + +To enable/disable UDP Segmentation Offload, issue the following command:: + + # ethtool -K <ethX> tx-udp-segmentation [off|on] + +GNSS module +----------- +Allows user to read messages from the GNSS module and write supported commands. +If the module is physically present, driver creates 2 TTYs for each supported +device in /dev, ttyGNSS_<device>:<function>_0 and _1. First one (_0) is RW and +the second one is RO. +The protocol of write commands is dependent on the GNSS module as the driver +writes raw bytes from the TTY to the GNSS i2c. Please refer to the module +documentation for details. + +Performance Optimization +======================== +Driver defaults are meant to fit a wide variety of workloads, but if further +optimization is required, we recommend experimenting with the following +settings. + + +Rx Descriptor Ring Size +----------------------- +To reduce the number of Rx packet discards, increase the number of Rx +descriptors for each Rx ring using ethtool. + + Check if the interface is dropping Rx packets due to buffers being full + (rx_dropped.nic can mean that there is no PCIe bandwidth):: + + # ethtool -S <ethX> | grep "rx_dropped" + + If the previous command shows drops on queues, it may help to increase + the number of descriptors using 'ethtool -G':: + + # ethtool -G <ethX> rx <N> + Where <N> is the desired number of ring entries/descriptors + + This can provide temporary buffering for issues that create latency while + the CPUs process descriptors. + + +Interrupt Rate Limiting +----------------------- +This driver supports an adaptive interrupt throttle rate (ITR) mechanism that +is tuned for general workloads. The user can customize the interrupt rate +control for specific workloads, via ethtool, adjusting the number of +microseconds between interrupts. + +To set the interrupt rate manually, you must disable adaptive mode:: + + # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off + +For lower CPU utilization: + + Disable adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts. The examples below + affect every queue of the specified interface. + + Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 80 will limit interrupts to about + 12,500 interrupts per second per queue:: + + # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 80 tx-usecs 80 + +For reduced latency: + + Disable adaptive ITR and ITR by setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 0 + using ethtool:: + + # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 0 tx-usecs 0 + +Per-queue interrupt rate settings: + + The following examples are for queues 1 and 3, but you can adjust other + queues. + + To disable Rx adaptive ITR and set static Rx ITR to 10 microseconds or + about 100,000 interrupts/second, for queues 1 and 3:: + + # ethtool --per-queue <ethX> queue_mask 0xa --coalesce adaptive-rx off + rx-usecs 10 + + To show the current coalesce settings for queues 1 and 3:: + + # ethtool --per-queue <ethX> queue_mask 0xa --show-coalesce + +Bounding interrupt rates using rx-usecs-high: + + :Valid Range: 0-236 (0=no limit) + + The range of 0-236 microseconds provides an effective range of 4,237 to + 250,000 interrupts per second. The value of rx-usecs-high can be set + independently of rx-usecs and tx-usecs in the same ethtool command, and is + also independent of the adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm. The + underlying hardware supports granularity in 4-microsecond intervals, so + adjacent values may result in the same interrupt rate. + + The following command would disable adaptive interrupt moderation, and allow + a maximum of 5 microseconds before indicating a receive or transmit was + complete. However, instead of resulting in as many as 200,000 interrupts per + second, it limits total interrupts per second to 50,000 via the rx-usecs-high + parameter. + + :: + + # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs-high 20 + rx-usecs 5 tx-usecs 5 + + +Virtualized Environments +------------------------ +In addition to the other suggestions in this section, the following may be +helpful to optimize performance in VMs. + + Using the appropriate mechanism (vcpupin) in the VM, pin the CPUs to + individual LCPUs, making sure to use a set of CPUs included in the + device's local_cpulist: ``/sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/local_cpulist``. + + Configure as many Rx/Tx queues in the VM as available. (See the iavf driver + documentation for the number of queues supported.) For example:: + + # ethtool -L <virt_interface> rx <max> tx <max> + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. + + +Trademarks +========== +Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its +subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. + +* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst index 87e560fe5eaa..d46289e182cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Identifying Your Adapter ======================== For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: -http://www.intel.com/support +https://www.intel.com/support Command Line Parameters diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst index 557fc020ef31..40fa210c5e14 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ Identifying Your Adapter ======================== For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: -http://www.intel.com/support +https://www.intel.com/support Additional Features and Configurations diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst index 945018207a92..c6a233e68ad6 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ The following features are available in this kernel: - SNMP Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: -/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +/Documentation/networking/bonding.rst The driver information previously displayed in the /proc filesystem is not supported in this release. Alternatively, you can use ethtool (version 1.6 @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ With the 10 Gigabit server adapters, the default Linux configuration will very likely limit the total available throughput artificially. There is a set of configuration changes that, when applied together, will increase the ability of Linux to transmit and receive data. The following enhancements were -originally acquired from settings published at http://www.spec.org/web99/ for +originally acquired from settings published at https://www.spec.org/web99/ for various submitted results using Linux. NOTE: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst index f1d5233e5e51..0a233b17c664 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst @@ -440,6 +440,22 @@ NOTE: For 82599-based network connections, if you are enabling jumbo frames in a virtual function (VF), jumbo frames must first be enabled in the physical function (PF). The VF MTU setting cannot be larger than the PF MTU. +NBASE-T Support +--------------- +The ixgbe driver supports NBASE-T on some devices. However, the advertisement +of NBASE-T speeds is suppressed by default, to accommodate broken network +switches which cannot cope with advertised NBASE-T speeds. Use the ethtool +command to enable advertising NBASE-T speeds on devices which support it:: + + ethtool -s eth? advertise 0x1800000001028 + +On Linux systems with INTERFACES(5), this can be specified as a pre-up command +in /etc/network/interfaces so that the interface is always brought up with +NBASE-T support, e.g.:: + + iface eth? inet dhcp + pre-up ethtool -s eth? advertise 0x1800000001028 || true + Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO -------------------------------- The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst index 76bbde736f21..76bbde736f21 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeon_ep.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeon_ep.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bc562c49011b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeon_ep.rst @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +==================================================================== +Linux kernel networking driver for Marvell's Octeon PCI Endpoint NIC +==================================================================== + +Network driver for Marvell's Octeon PCI EndPoint NIC. +Copyright (c) 2020 Marvell International Ltd. + +Contents +======== + +- `Overview`_ +- `Supported Devices`_ +- `Interface Control`_ + +Overview +======== +This driver implements networking functionality of Marvell's Octeon PCI +EndPoint NIC. + +Supported Devices +================= +Currently, this driver support following devices: + * Network controller: Cavium, Inc. Device b200 + +Interface Control +================= +Network Interface control like changing mtu, link speed, link down/up are +done by writing command to mailbox command queue, a mailbox interface +implemented through a reserved region in BAR4. +This driver writes the commands into the mailbox and the firmware on the +Octeon device processes them. The firmware also sends unsolicited notifications +to driver for events suchs as link change, through notification queue +implemented as part of mailbox interface. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dd5cd69467be --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst @@ -0,0 +1,289 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +==================================== +Marvell OcteonTx2 RVU Kernel Drivers +==================================== + +Copyright (c) 2020 Marvell International Ltd. + +Contents +======== + +- `Overview`_ +- `Drivers`_ +- `Basic packet flow`_ +- `Devlink health reporters`_ + +Overview +======== + +Resource virtualization unit (RVU) on Marvell's OcteonTX2 SOC maps HW +resources from the network, crypto and other functional blocks into +PCI-compatible physical and virtual functions. Each functional block +again has multiple local functions (LFs) for provisioning to PCI devices. +RVU supports multiple PCIe SRIOV physical functions (PFs) and virtual +functions (VFs). PF0 is called the administrative / admin function (AF) +and has privileges to provision RVU functional block's LFs to each of the +PF/VF. + +RVU managed networking functional blocks + - Network pool or buffer allocator (NPA) + - Network interface controller (NIX) + - Network parser CAM (NPC) + - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO) + - Loopback interface (LBK) + +RVU managed non-networking functional blocks + - Crypto accelerator (CPT) + - Scheduled timers unit (TIM) + - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO) + Used for both networking and non networking usecases + +Resource provisioning examples + - A PF/VF with NIX-LF & NPA-LF resources works as a pure network device + - A PF/VF with CPT-LF resource works as a pure crypto offload device. + +RVU functional blocks are highly configurable as per software requirements. + +Firmware setups following stuff before kernel boots + - Enables required number of RVU PFs based on number of physical links. + - Number of VFs per PF are either static or configurable at compile time. + Based on config, firmware assigns VFs to each of the PFs. + - Also assigns MSIX vectors to each of PF and VFs. + - These are not changed after kernel boot. + +Drivers +======= + +Linux kernel will have multiple drivers registering to different PF and VFs +of RVU. Wrt networking there will be 3 flavours of drivers. + +Admin Function driver +--------------------- + +As mentioned above RVU PF0 is called the admin function (AF), this driver +supports resource provisioning and configuration of functional blocks. +Doesn't handle any I/O. It sets up few basic stuff but most of the +funcionality is achieved via configuration requests from PFs and VFs. + +PF/VFs communicates with AF via a shared memory region (mailbox). Upon +receiving requests AF does resource provisioning and other HW configuration. +AF is always attached to host kernel, but PFs and their VFs may be used by host +kernel itself, or attached to VMs or to userspace applications like +DPDK etc. So AF has to handle provisioning/configuration requests sent +by any device from any domain. + +AF driver also interacts with underlying firmware to + - Manage physical ethernet links ie CGX LMACs. + - Retrieve information like speed, duplex, autoneg etc + - Retrieve PHY EEPROM and stats. + - Configure FEC, PAM modes + - etc + +From pure networking side AF driver supports following functionality. + - Map a physical link to a RVU PF to which a netdev is registered. + - Attach NIX and NPA block LFs to RVU PF/VF which provide buffer pools, RQs, SQs + for regular networking functionality. + - Flow control (pause frames) enable/disable/config. + - HW PTP timestamping related config. + - NPC parser profile config, basically how to parse pkt and what info to extract. + - NPC extract profile config, what to extract from the pkt to match data in MCAM entries. + - Manage NPC MCAM entries, upon request can frame and install requested packet forwarding rules. + - Defines receive side scaling (RSS) algorithms. + - Defines segmentation offload algorithms (eg TSO) + - VLAN stripping, capture and insertion config. + - SSO and TIM blocks config which provide packet scheduling support. + - Debugfs support, to check current resource provising, current status of + NPA pools, NIX RQ, SQ and CQs, various stats etc which helps in debugging issues. + - And many more. + +Physical Function driver +------------------------ + +This RVU PF handles IO, is mapped to a physical ethernet link and this +driver registers a netdev. This supports SR-IOV. As said above this driver +communicates with AF with a mailbox. To retrieve information from physical +links this driver talks to AF and AF gets that info from firmware and responds +back ie cannot talk to firmware directly. + +Supports ethtool for configuring links, RSS, queue count, queue size, +flow control, ntuple filters, dump PHY EEPROM, config FEC etc. + +Virtual Function driver +----------------------- + +There are two types VFs, VFs that share the physical link with their parent +SR-IOV PF and the VFs which work in pairs using internal HW loopback channels (LBK). + +Type1: + - These VFs and their parent PF share a physical link and used for outside communication. + - VFs cannot communicate with AF directly, they send mbox message to PF and PF + forwards that to AF. AF after processing, responds back to PF and PF forwards + the reply to VF. + - From functionality point of view there is no difference between PF and VF as same type + HW resources are attached to both. But user would be able to configure few stuff only + from PF as PF is treated as owner/admin of the link. + +Type2: + - RVU PF0 ie admin function creates these VFs and maps them to loopback block's channels. + - A set of two VFs (VF0 & VF1, VF2 & VF3 .. so on) works as a pair ie pkts sent out of + VF0 will be received by VF1 and viceversa. + - These VFs can be used by applications or virtual machines to communicate between them + without sending traffic outside. There is no switch present in HW, hence the support + for loopback VFs. + - These communicate directly with AF (PF0) via mbox. + +Except for the IO channels or links used for packet reception and transmission there is +no other difference between these VF types. AF driver takes care of IO channel mapping, +hence same VF driver works for both types of devices. + +Basic packet flow +================= + +Ingress +------- + +1. CGX LMAC receives packet. +2. Forwards the packet to the NIX block. +3. Then submitted to NPC block for parsing and then MCAM lookup to get the destination RVU device. +4. NIX LF attached to the destination RVU device allocates a buffer from RQ mapped buffer pool of NPA block LF. +5. RQ may be selected by RSS or by configuring MCAM rule with a RQ number. +6. Packet is DMA'ed and driver is notified. + +Egress +------ + +1. Driver prepares a send descriptor and submits to SQ for transmission. +2. The SQ is already configured (by AF) to transmit on a specific link/channel. +3. The SQ descriptor ring is maintained in buffers allocated from SQ mapped pool of NPA block LF. +4. NIX block transmits the pkt on the designated channel. +5. NPC MCAM entries can be installed to divert pkt onto a different channel. + +Devlink health reporters +======================== + +NPA Reporters +------------- +The NPA reporters are responsible for reporting and recovering the following group of errors: + +1. GENERAL events + + - Error due to operation of unmapped PF. + - Error due to disabled alloc/free for other HW blocks (NIX, SSO, TIM, DPI and AURA). + +2. ERROR events + + - Fault due to NPA_AQ_INST_S read or NPA_AQ_RES_S write. + - AQ Doorbell Error. + +3. RAS events + + - RAS Error Reporting for NPA_AQ_INST_S/NPA_AQ_RES_S. + +4. RVU events + + - Error due to unmapped slot. + +Sample Output:: + + ~# devlink health + pci/0002:01:00.0: + reporter hw_npa_intr + state healthy error 2872 recover 2872 last_dump_date 2020-12-10 last_dump_time 09:39:09 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_npa_gen + state healthy error 2872 recover 2872 last_dump_date 2020-12-11 last_dump_time 04:43:04 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_npa_err + state healthy error 2871 recover 2871 last_dump_date 2020-12-10 last_dump_time 09:39:17 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_npa_ras + state healthy error 0 recover 0 last_dump_date 2020-12-10 last_dump_time 09:32:40 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + +Each reporter dumps the + + - Error Type + - Error Register value + - Reason in words + +For example:: + + ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_npa_gen + NPA_AF_GENERAL: + NPA General Interrupt Reg : 1 + NIX0: free disabled RX + ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_npa_intr + NPA_AF_RVU: + NPA RVU Interrupt Reg : 1 + Unmap Slot Error + ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_npa_err + NPA_AF_ERR: + NPA Error Interrupt Reg : 4096 + AQ Doorbell Error + + +NIX Reporters +------------- +The NIX reporters are responsible for reporting and recovering the following group of errors: + +1. GENERAL events + + - Receive mirror/multicast packet drop due to insufficient buffer. + - SMQ Flush operation. + +2. ERROR events + + - Memory Fault due to WQE read/write from multicast/mirror buffer. + - Receive multicast/mirror replication list error. + - Receive packet on an unmapped PF. + - Fault due to NIX_AQ_INST_S read or NIX_AQ_RES_S write. + - AQ Doorbell Error. + +3. RAS events + + - RAS Error Reporting for NIX Receive Multicast/Mirror Entry Structure. + - RAS Error Reporting for WQE/Packet Data read from Multicast/Mirror Buffer.. + - RAS Error Reporting for NIX_AQ_INST_S/NIX_AQ_RES_S. + +4. RVU events + + - Error due to unmapped slot. + +Sample Output:: + + ~# ./devlink health + pci/0002:01:00.0: + reporter hw_npa_intr + state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_npa_gen + state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_npa_err + state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_npa_ras + state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_nix_intr + state healthy error 1121 recover 1121 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:42:26 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_nix_gen + state healthy error 949 recover 949 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:42:43 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_nix_err + state healthy error 1147 recover 1147 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:42:59 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + reporter hw_nix_ras + state healthy error 409 recover 409 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:43:16 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true + +Each reporter dumps the + + - Error Type + - Error Register value + - Reason in words + +For example:: + + ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_nix_intr + NIX_AF_RVU: + NIX RVU Interrupt Reg : 1 + Unmap Slot Error + ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_nix_gen + NIX_AF_GENERAL: + NIX General Interrupt Reg : 1 + Rx multicast pkt drop + ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_nix_err + NIX_AF_ERR: + NIX Error Interrupt Reg : 64 + Rx on unmapped PF_FUNC diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5edf50d7dbd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst @@ -0,0 +1,762 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR Linux-OpenIB + +================================================= +Mellanox ConnectX(R) mlx5 core VPI Network Driver +================================================= + +Copyright (c) 2019, Mellanox Technologies LTD. + +Contents +======== + +- `Enabling the driver and kconfig options`_ +- `Devlink info`_ +- `Devlink parameters`_ +- `Bridge offload`_ +- `mlx5 subfunction`_ +- `mlx5 function attributes`_ +- `Devlink health reporters`_ +- `mlx5 tracepoints`_ + +Enabling the driver and kconfig options +======================================= + +| mlx5 core is modular and most of the major mlx5 core driver features can be selected (compiled in/out) +| at build time via kernel Kconfig flags. +| Basic features, ethernet net device rx/tx offloads and XDP, are available with the most basic flags +| CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m and CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=y. +| For the list of advanced features please see below. + +**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=(y/m/n)** (module mlx5_core.ko) + +| The driver can be enabled by choosing CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m in kernel config. +| This will provide mlx5 core driver for mlx5 ulps to interface with (mlx5e, mlx5_ib). + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=(y/n)** + +| Choosing this option will allow basic ethernet netdevice support with all of the standard rx/tx offloads. +| mlx5e is the mlx5 ulp driver which provides netdevice kernel interface, when chosen, mlx5e will be +| built-in into mlx5_core.ko. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_ARFS=(y/n)** + +| Enables Hardware-accelerated receive flow steering (arfs) support, and ntuple filtering. +| https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-arfs-on-connectx-4 + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_RXNFC=(y/n)** + +| Enables ethtool receive network flow classification, which allows user defined +| flow rules to direct traffic into arbitrary rx queue via ethtool set/get_rxnfc API. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN_DCB=(y/n)**: + +| Enables `Data Center Bridging (DCB) Support <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-auto-config-pfc-and-ets-on-connectx-4-via-lldp-dcbx>`_. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_MPFS=(y/n)** + +| Ethernet Multi-Physical Function Switch (MPFS) support in ConnectX NIC. +| MPFs is required for when `Multi-Host <http://www.mellanox.com/page/multihost>`_ configuration is enabled to allow passing +| user configured unicast MAC addresses to the requesting PF. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_ESWITCH=(y/n)** + +| Ethernet SRIOV E-Switch support in ConnectX NIC. E-Switch provides internal SRIOV packet steering +| and switching for the enabled VFs and PF in two available modes: +| 1) `Legacy SRIOV mode (L2 mac vlan steering based) <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-sr-iov-for-connectx-4-connectx-5-with-kvm--ethernet-x>`_. +| 2) `Switchdev mode (eswitch offloads) <https://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/ASAP2_Hardware_Offloading_for_vSwitches_User_Manual_v4.4.pdf>`_. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_IPOIB=(y/n)** + +| IPoIB offloads & acceleration support. +| Requires CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN to provide an accelerated interface for the rdma +| IPoIB ulp netdevice. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_FPGA=(y/n)** + +| Build support for the Innova family of network cards by Mellanox Technologies. +| Innova network cards are comprised of a ConnectX chip and an FPGA chip on one board. +| If you select this option, the mlx5_core driver will include the Innova FPGA core and allow +| building sandbox-specific client drivers. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_IPSEC=(y/n)** + +| Enables `IPSec XFRM cryptography-offload accelaration <http://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/Mellanox_Innova_IPsec_Ethernet_Adapter_Card_User_Manual.pdf>`_. + +**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_TLS=(y/n)** + +| TLS cryptography-offload accelaration. + + +**CONFIG_MLX5_INFINIBAND=(y/n/m)** (module mlx5_ib.ko) + +| Provides low-level InfiniBand/RDMA and `RoCE <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/recommended-network-configuration-examples-for-roce-deployment>`_ support. + +**CONFIG_MLX5_SF=(y/n)** + +| Build support for subfunction. +| Subfunctons are more light weight than PCI SRIOV VFs. Choosing this option +| will enable support for creating subfunction devices. + +**External options** ( Choose if the corresponding mlx5 feature is required ) + +- CONFIG_PTP_1588_CLOCK: When chosen, mlx5 ptp support will be enabled +- CONFIG_VXLAN: When chosen, mlx5 vxlan support will be enabled. +- CONFIG_MLXFW: When chosen, mlx5 firmware flashing support will be enabled (via devlink and ethtool). + +Devlink info +============ + +The devlink info reports the running and stored firmware versions on device. +It also prints the device PSID which represents the HCA board type ID. + +User command example:: + + $ devlink dev info pci/0000:00:06.0 + pci/0000:00:06.0: + driver mlx5_core + versions: + fixed: + fw.psid MT_0000000009 + running: + fw.version 16.26.0100 + stored: + fw.version 16.26.0100 + +Devlink parameters +================== + +flow_steering_mode: Device flow steering mode +--------------------------------------------- +The flow steering mode parameter controls the flow steering mode of the driver. +Two modes are supported: +1. 'dmfs' - Device managed flow steering. +2. 'smfs - Software/Driver managed flow steering. + +In DMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed through the +Firmware. +In SMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed though by +the driver directly into Hardware without firmware intervention. + +SMFS mode is faster and provides better rule inserstion rate compared to default DMFS mode. + +User command examples: + +- Set SMFS flow steering mode:: + + $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode value "smfs" cmode runtime + +- Read device flow steering mode:: + + $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode + pci/0000:06:00.0: + name flow_steering_mode type driver-specific + values: + cmode runtime value smfs + +enable_roce: RoCE enablement state +---------------------------------- +RoCE enablement state controls driver support for RoCE traffic. +When RoCE is disabled, there is no gid table, only raw ethernet QPs are supported and traffic on the well known UDP RoCE port is handled as raw ethernet traffic. + +To change RoCE enablement state a user must change the driverinit cmode value and run devlink reload. + +User command examples: + +- Disable RoCE:: + + $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce value false cmode driverinit + $ devlink dev reload pci/0000:06:00.0 + +- Read RoCE enablement state:: + + $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce + pci/0000:06:00.0: + name enable_roce type generic + values: + cmode driverinit value true + +esw_port_metadata: Eswitch port metadata state +---------------------------------------------- +When applicable, disabling Eswitch metadata can increase packet rate +up to 20% depending on the use case and packet sizes. + +Eswitch port metadata state controls whether to internally tag packets with +metadata. Metadata tagging must be enabled for multi-port RoCE, failover +between representors and stacked devices. +By default metadata is enabled on the supported devices in E-switch. +Metadata is applicable only for E-switch in switchdev mode and +users may disable it when NONE of the below use cases will be in use: +1. HCA is in Dual/multi-port RoCE mode. +2. VF/SF representor bonding (Usually used for Live migration) +3. Stacked devices + +When metadata is disabled, the above use cases will fail to initialize if +users try to enable them. + +- Show eswitch port metadata:: + + $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name esw_port_metadata + pci/0000:06:00.0: + name esw_port_metadata type driver-specific + values: + cmode runtime value true + +- Disable eswitch port metadata:: + + $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name esw_port_metadata value false cmode runtime + +- Change eswitch mode to switchdev mode where after choosing the metadata value:: + + $ devlink dev eswitch set pci/0000:06:00.0 mode switchdev + +Bridge offload +============== +The mlx5 driver implements support for offloading bridge rules when in switchdev +mode. Linux bridge FDBs are automatically offloaded when mlx5 switchdev +representor is attached to bridge. + +- Change device to switchdev mode:: + + $ devlink dev eswitch set pci/0000:06:00.0 mode switchdev + +- Attach mlx5 switchdev representor 'enp8s0f0' to bridge netdev 'bridge1':: + + $ ip link set enp8s0f0 master bridge1 + +VLANs +----- +Following bridge VLAN functions are supported by mlx5: + +- VLAN filtering (including multiple VLANs per port):: + + $ ip link set bridge1 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 + $ bridge vlan add dev enp8s0f0 vid 2-3 + +- VLAN push on bridge ingress:: + + $ bridge vlan add dev enp8s0f0 vid 3 pvid + +- VLAN pop on bridge egress:: + + $ bridge vlan add dev enp8s0f0 vid 3 untagged + +mlx5 subfunction +================ +mlx5 supports subfunction management using devlink port (see :ref:`Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-port.rst <devlink_port>`) interface. + +A Subfunction has its own function capabilities and its own resources. This +means a subfunction has its own dedicated queues (txq, rxq, cq, eq). These +queues are neither shared nor stolen from the parent PCI function. + +When a subfunction is RDMA capable, it has its own QP1, GID table and rdma +resources neither shared nor stolen from the parent PCI function. + +A subfunction has a dedicated window in PCI BAR space that is not shared +with ther other subfunctions or the parent PCI function. This ensures that all +devices (netdev, rdma, vdpa etc.) of the subfunction accesses only assigned +PCI BAR space. + +A Subfunction supports eswitch representation through which it supports tc +offloads. The user configures eswitch to send/receive packets from/to +the subfunction port. + +Subfunctions share PCI level resources such as PCI MSI-X IRQs with +other subfunctions and/or with its parent PCI function. + +Example mlx5 software, system and device view:: + + _______ + | admin | + | user |---------- + |_______| | + | | + ____|____ __|______ _________________ + | | | | | | + | devlink | | tc tool | | user | + | tool | |_________| | applications | + |_________| | |_________________| + | | | | + | | | | Userspace + +---------|-------------|-------------------|----------|--------------------+ + | | +----------+ +----------+ Kernel + | | | netdev | | rdma dev | + | | +----------+ +----------+ + (devlink port add/del | ^ ^ + port function set) | | | + | | +---------------| + _____|___ | | _______|_______ + | | | | | mlx5 class | + | devlink | +------------+ | | drivers | + | kernel | | rep netdev | | |(mlx5_core,ib) | + |_________| +------------+ | |_______________| + | | | ^ + (devlink ops) | | (probe/remove) + _________|________ | | ____|________ + | subfunction | | +---------------+ | subfunction | + | management driver|----- | subfunction |---| driver | + | (mlx5_core) | | auxiliary dev | | (mlx5_core) | + |__________________| +---------------+ |_____________| + | ^ + (sf add/del, vhca events) | + | (device add/del) + _____|____ ____|________ + | | | subfunction | + | PCI NIC |---- activate/deactive events---->| host driver | + |__________| | (mlx5_core) | + |_____________| + +Subfunction is created using devlink port interface. + +- Change device to switchdev mode:: + + $ devlink dev eswitch set pci/0000:06:00.0 mode switchdev + +- Add a devlink port of subfunction flaovur:: + + $ devlink port add pci/0000:06:00.0 flavour pcisf pfnum 0 sfnum 88 + pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev eth6 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00 state inactive opstate detached + +- Show a devlink port of the subfunction:: + + $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/32768 + pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0sf88 flavour pcisf pfnum 0 sfnum 88 + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00 state inactive opstate detached + +- Delete a devlink port of subfunction after use:: + + $ devlink port del pci/0000:06:00.0/32768 + +mlx5 function attributes +======================== +The mlx5 driver provides a mechanism to setup PCI VF/SF function attributes in +a unified way for SmartNIC and non-SmartNIC. + +This is supported only when the eswitch mode is set to switchdev. Port function +configuration of the PCI VF/SF is supported through devlink eswitch port. + +Port function attributes should be set before PCI VF/SF is enumerated by the +driver. + +MAC address setup +----------------- +mlx5 driver provides mechanism to setup the MAC address of the PCI VF/SF. + +The configured MAC address of the PCI VF/SF will be used by netdevice and rdma +device created for the PCI VF/SF. + +- Get the MAC address of the VF identified by its unique devlink port index:: + + $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/2 + pci/0000:06:00.0/2: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0vf1 flavour pcivf pfnum 0 vfnum 1 + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00 + +- Set the MAC address of the VF identified by its unique devlink port index:: + + $ devlink port function set pci/0000:06:00.0/2 hw_addr 00:11:22:33:44:55 + + $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/2 + pci/0000:06:00.0/2: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0vf1 flavour pcivf pfnum 0 vfnum 1 + function: + hw_addr 00:11:22:33:44:55 + +- Get the MAC address of the SF identified by its unique devlink port index:: + + $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/32768 + pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0sf88 flavour pcisf pfnum 0 sfnum 88 + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00 + +- Set the MAC address of the VF identified by its unique devlink port index:: + + $ devlink port function set pci/0000:06:00.0/32768 hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 + + $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/32768 + pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0sf88 flavour pcivf pfnum 0 sfnum 88 + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 + +SF state setup +-------------- +To use the SF, the user must active the SF using the SF function state +attribute. + +- Get the state of the SF identified by its unique devlink port index:: + + $ devlink port show ens2f0npf0sf88 + pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev ens2f0npf0sf88 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 state inactive opstate detached + +- Activate the function and verify its state is active:: + + $ devlink port function set ens2f0npf0sf88 state active + + $ devlink port show ens2f0npf0sf88 + pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev ens2f0npf0sf88 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 state active opstate detached + +Upon function activation, the PF driver instance gets the event from the device +that a particular SF was activated. It's the cue to put the device on bus, probe +it and instantiate the devlink instance and class specific auxiliary devices +for it. + +- Show the auxiliary device and port of the subfunction:: + + $ devlink dev show + devlink dev show auxiliary/mlx5_core.sf.4 + + $ devlink port show auxiliary/mlx5_core.sf.4/1 + auxiliary/mlx5_core.sf.4/1: type eth netdev p0sf88 flavour virtual port 0 splittable false + + $ rdma link show mlx5_0/1 + link mlx5_0/1 state ACTIVE physical_state LINK_UP netdev p0sf88 + + $ rdma dev show + 8: rocep6s0f1: node_type ca fw 16.29.0550 node_guid 248a:0703:00b3:d113 sys_image_guid 248a:0703:00b3:d112 + 13: mlx5_0: node_type ca fw 16.29.0550 node_guid 0000:00ff:fe00:8888 sys_image_guid 248a:0703:00b3:d112 + +- Subfunction auxiliary device and class device hierarchy:: + + mlx5_core.sf.4 + (subfunction auxiliary device) + /\ + / \ + / \ + / \ + / \ + mlx5_core.eth.4 mlx5_core.rdma.4 + (sf eth aux dev) (sf rdma aux dev) + | | + | | + p0sf88 mlx5_0 + (sf netdev) (sf rdma device) + +Additionally, the SF port also gets the event when the driver attaches to the +auxiliary device of the subfunction. This results in changing the operational +state of the function. This provides visiblity to the user to decide when is it +safe to delete the SF port for graceful termination of the subfunction. + +- Show the SF port operational state:: + + $ devlink port show ens2f0npf0sf88 + pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev ens2f0npf0sf88 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false + function: + hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 state active opstate attached + +Devlink health reporters +======================== + +tx reporter +----------- +The tx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios: + +- TX timeout + Report on kernel tx timeout detection. + Recover by searching lost interrupts. +- TX error completion + Report on error tx completion. + Recover by flushing the TX queue and reset it. + +TX reporter also support on demand diagnose callback, on which it provides +real time information of its send queues status. + +User commands examples: + +- Diagnose send queues status:: + + $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx + +NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output. + +- Show number of tx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully, + is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover:: + + $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx + +rx reporter +----------- +The rx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios: + +- RX queues initialization (population) timeout + RX queues descriptors population on ring initialization is done in + napi context via triggering an irq, in case of a failure to get + the minimum amount of descriptors, a timeout would occur and it + could be recoverable by polling the EQ (Event Queue). +- RX completions with errors (reported by HW on interrupt context) + Report on rx completion error. + Recover (if needed) by flushing the related queue and reset it. + +RX reporter also supports on demand diagnose callback, on which it +provides real time information of its receive queues status. + +- Diagnose rx queues status, and corresponding completion queue:: + + $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx + +NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output. + +- Show number of rx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully, + is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover:: + + $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx + +fw reporter +----------- +The fw reporter implements diagnose and dump callbacks. +It follows symptoms of fw error such as fw syndrome by triggering +fw core dump and storing it into the dump buffer. +The fw reporter diagnose command can be triggered any time by the user to check +current fw status. + +User commands examples: + +- Check fw heath status:: + + $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw + +- Read FW core dump if already stored or trigger new one:: + + $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw + +NOTE: This command can run only on the PF which has fw tracer ownership, +running it on other PF or any VF will return "Operation not permitted". + +fw fatal reporter +----------------- +The fw fatal reporter implements dump and recover callbacks. +It follows fatal errors indications by CR-space dump and recover flow. +The CR-space dump uses vsc interface which is valid even if the FW command +interface is not functional, which is the case in most FW fatal errors. +The recover function runs recover flow which reloads the driver and triggers fw +reset if needed. +On firmware error, the health buffer is dumped into the dmesg. The log +level is derived from the error's severity (given in health buffer). + +User commands examples: + +- Run fw recover flow manually:: + + $ devlink health recover pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw_fatal + +- Read FW CR-space dump if already strored or trigger new one:: + + $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.1 reporter fw_fatal + +NOTE: This command can run only on PF. + +mlx5 tracepoints +================ + +mlx5 driver provides internal trace points for tracking and debugging using +kernel tracepoints interfaces (refer to Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst). + +For the list of support mlx5 events check /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/mlx5/ + +tc and eswitch offloads tracepoints: + +- mlx5e_configure_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies offloaded to mlx5:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_configure_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + tc-6535 [019] ...1 2672.404466: mlx5e_configure_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= REDIRECT + +- mlx5e_delete_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies deleted from mlx5:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_delete_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + tc-6569 [010] .N.1 2686.379075: mlx5e_delete_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= NULL + +- mlx5e_stats_flower: trace flower stats request:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_stats_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + tc-6546 [010] ...1 2679.704889: mlx5e_stats_flower: cookie=0000000060eb3d6a bytes=0 packets=0 lastused=4295560217 + +- mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: trace tunnel rule neigh update value offloaded to mlx5:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u48:4-8806 [009] ...1 55117.882428: mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: netdev: ens1f0 IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_used=1 + +- mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: trace neigh update tasks scheduled due to neigh state change events:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_rep_neigh_update >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u48:7-2221 [009] ...1 1475.387435: mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: netdev: ens1f0 MAC: 24:8a:07:9a:17:9a IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_connected=1 + +Bridge offloads tracepoints: + +- mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_init: trace bridge FDB entry offloaded to mlx5:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_init >> set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u20:9-2217 [003] ...1 318.582243: mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_init: net_device=enp8s0f0_0 addr=e4:fd:05:08:00:02 vid=0 flags=0 used=0 + +- mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_cleanup: trace bridge FDB entry deleted from mlx5:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_cleanup >> set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + ip-2581 [005] ...1 318.629871: mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_cleanup: net_device=enp8s0f0_1 addr=e4:fd:05:08:00:03 vid=0 flags=0 used=16 + +- mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_refresh: trace bridge FDB entry offload refreshed in + mlx5:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_refresh >> set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u20:8-3849 [003] ...1 466716: mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_refresh: net_device=enp8s0f0_0 addr=e4:fd:05:08:00:02 vid=3 flags=0 used=0 + +- mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_create: trace bridge VLAN object add on mlx5 + representor:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_create >> set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + ip-2560 [007] ...1 318.460258: mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_create: vid=1 flags=6 + +- mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_cleanup: trace bridge VLAN object delete from mlx5 + representor:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_cleanup >> set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + bridge-2582 [007] ...1 318.653496: mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_cleanup: vid=2 flags=8 + +- mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_init: trace mlx5 vport assigned with bridge upper + device:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_init >> set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + ip-2560 [007] ...1 318.458915: mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_init: vport_num=1 + +- mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_cleanup: trace mlx5 vport removed from bridge upper + device:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_cleanup >> set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + ip-5387 [000] ...1 573713: mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_cleanup: vport_num=1 + +Eswitch QoS tracepoints: + +- mlx5_esw_vport_qos_create: trace creation of transmit scheduler arbiter for vport:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_vport_qos_create >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + <...>-23496 [018] .... 73136.838831: mlx5_esw_vport_qos_create: (0000:82:00.0) vport=2 tsar_ix=4 bw_share=0, max_rate=0 group=000000007b576bb3 + +- mlx5_esw_vport_qos_config: trace configuration of transmit scheduler arbiter for vport:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_vport_qos_config >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + <...>-26548 [023] .... 75754.223823: mlx5_esw_vport_qos_config: (0000:82:00.0) vport=1 tsar_ix=3 bw_share=34, max_rate=10000 group=000000007b576bb3 + +- mlx5_esw_vport_qos_destroy: trace deletion of transmit scheduler arbiter for vport:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_vport_qos_destroy >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + <...>-27418 [004] .... 76546.680901: mlx5_esw_vport_qos_destroy: (0000:82:00.0) vport=1 tsar_ix=3 + +- mlx5_esw_group_qos_create: trace creation of transmit scheduler arbiter for rate group:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_group_qos_create >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + <...>-26578 [008] .... 75776.022112: mlx5_esw_group_qos_create: (0000:82:00.0) group=000000008dac63ea tsar_ix=5 + +- mlx5_esw_group_qos_config: trace configuration of transmit scheduler arbiter for rate group:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_group_qos_config >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + <...>-27303 [020] .... 76461.455356: mlx5_esw_group_qos_config: (0000:82:00.0) group=000000008dac63ea tsar_ix=5 bw_share=100 max_rate=20000 + +- mlx5_esw_group_qos_destroy: trace deletion of transmit scheduler arbiter for group:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_group_qos_destroy >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + <...>-27418 [006] .... 76547.187258: mlx5_esw_group_qos_destroy: (0000:82:00.0) group=000000007b576bb3 tsar_ix=1 + +SF tracepoints: + +- mlx5_sf_add: trace addition of the SF port:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_add >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + devlink-9363 [031] ..... 24610.188722: mlx5_sf_add: (0000:06:00.0) port_index=32768 controller=0 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88 + +- mlx5_sf_free: trace freeing of the SF port:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_free >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + devlink-9830 [038] ..... 26300.404749: mlx5_sf_free: (0000:06:00.0) port_index=32768 controller=0 hw_id=0x8000 + +- mlx5_sf_hwc_alloc: trace allocating of the hardware SF context:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_hwc_alloc >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + devlink-9775 [031] ..... 26296.385259: mlx5_sf_hwc_alloc: (0000:06:00.0) controller=0 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88 + +- mlx5_sf_hwc_free: trace freeing of the hardware SF context:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_hwc_free >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u128:3-9093 [046] ..... 24625.365771: mlx5_sf_hwc_free: (0000:06:00.0) hw_id=0x8000 + +- mlx5_sf_hwc_deferred_free : trace deferred freeing of the hardware SF context:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_hwc_deferred_free >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + devlink-9519 [046] ..... 24624.400271: mlx5_sf_hwc_deferred_free: (0000:06:00.0) hw_id=0x8000 + +- mlx5_sf_vhca_event: trace SF vhca event and state:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_vhca_event >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u128:3-9093 [046] ..... 24625.365525: mlx5_sf_vhca_event: (0000:06:00.0) hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88 vhca_state=1 + +- mlx5_sf_dev_add : trace SF device add event:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_dev_add>> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u128:3-9093 [000] ..... 24616.524495: mlx5_sf_dev_add: (0000:06:00.0) sfdev=00000000fc5d96fd aux_id=4 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88 + +- mlx5_sf_dev_del : trace SF device delete event:: + + $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_dev_del >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + ... + kworker/u128:3-9093 [044] ..... 24624.400749: mlx5_sf_dev_del: (0000:06:00.0) sfdev=00000000fc5d96fd aux_id=4 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fc5acd427a5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +====================== +Hyper-V network driver +====================== + +Compatibility +============= + +This driver is compatible with Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 and +Windows 10. + +Features +======== + +Checksum offload +---------------- + The netvsc driver supports checksum offload as long as the + Hyper-V host version does. Windows Server 2016 and Azure + support checksum offload for TCP and UDP for both IPv4 and + IPv6. Windows Server 2012 only supports checksum offload for TCP. + +Receive Side Scaling +-------------------- + Hyper-V supports receive side scaling. For TCP & UDP, packets can + be distributed among available queues based on IP address and port + number. + + For TCP & UDP, we can switch hash level between L3 and L4 by ethtool + command. TCP/UDP over IPv4 and v6 can be set differently. The default + hash level is L4. We currently only allow switching TX hash level + from within the guests. + + On Azure, fragmented UDP packets have high loss rate with L4 + hashing. Using L3 hashing is recommended in this case. + + For example, for UDP over IPv4 on eth0: + + To include UDP port numbers in hashing:: + + ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sdfn + + To exclude UDP port numbers in hashing:: + + ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sd + + To show UDP hash level:: + + ethtool -n eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 + +Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO +-------------------------------- + The driver supports GRO and it is enabled by default. GRO coalesces + like packets and significantly reduces CPU usage under heavy Rx + load. + +Large Receive Offload (LRO), or Receive Side Coalescing (RSC) +------------------------------------------------------------- + The driver supports LRO/RSC in the vSwitch feature. It reduces the per packet + processing overhead by coalescing multiple TCP segments when possible. The + feature is enabled by default on VMs running on Windows Server 2019 and + later. It may be changed by ethtool command:: + + ethtool -K eth0 lro on + ethtool -K eth0 lro off + +SR-IOV support +-------------- + Hyper-V supports SR-IOV as a hardware acceleration option. If SR-IOV + is enabled in both the vSwitch and the guest configuration, then the + Virtual Function (VF) device is passed to the guest as a PCI + device. In this case, both a synthetic (netvsc) and VF device are + visible in the guest OS and both NIC's have the same MAC address. + + The VF is enslaved by netvsc device. The netvsc driver will transparently + switch the data path to the VF when it is available and up. + Network state (addresses, firewall, etc) should be applied only to the + netvsc device; the slave device should not be accessed directly in + most cases. The exceptions are if some special queue discipline or + flow direction is desired, these should be applied directly to the + VF slave device. + +Receive Buffer +-------------- + Packets are received into a receive area which is created when device + is probed. The receive area is broken into MTU sized chunks and each may + contain one or more packets. The number of receive sections may be changed + via ethtool Rx ring parameters. + + There is a similar send buffer which is used to aggregate packets + for sending. The send area is broken into chunks, typically of 6144 + bytes, each of section may contain one or more packets. Small + packets are usually transmitted via copy to the send buffer. However, + if the buffer is temporarily exhausted, or the packet to be transmitted is + an LSO packet, the driver will provide the host with pointers to the data + from the SKB. This attempts to achieve a balance between the overhead of + data copy and the impact of remapping VM memory to be accessible by the + host. + +XDP support +----------- + XDP (eXpress Data Path) is a feature that runs eBPF bytecode at the early + stage when packets arrive at a NIC card. The goal is to increase performance + for packet processing, reducing the overhead of SKB allocation and other + upper network layers. + + hv_netvsc supports XDP in native mode, and transparently sets the XDP + program on the associated VF NIC as well. + + Setting / unsetting XDP program on synthetic NIC (netvsc) propagates to + VF NIC automatically. Setting / unsetting XDP program on VF NIC directly + is not recommended, also not propagated to synthetic NIC, and may be + overwritten by setting of synthetic NIC. + + XDP program cannot run with LRO (RSC) enabled, so you need to disable LRO + before running XDP:: + + ethtool -K eth0 lro off + + XDP_REDIRECT action is not yet supported. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c5673ec4559b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +========================================================= +Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver +========================================================= + +Release notes for Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver. + +.. Contents + - 1. Introduction + - 2. Identifying the adapter/interface + - 3. Features supported + - 4. Command line parameters + - 5. Performance suggestions + - 6. Available Downloads + + +1. Introduction +=============== +This Linux driver supports Neterion's Xframe I PCI-X 1.0 and +Xframe II PCI-X 2.0 adapters. It supports several features +such as jumbo frames, MSI/MSI-X, checksum offloads, TSO, UFO and so on. +See below for complete list of features. + +All features are supported for both IPv4 and IPv6. + +2. Identifying the adapter/interface +==================================== + +a. Insert the adapter(s) in your system. +b. Build and load driver:: + + # insmod s2io.ko + +c. View log messages:: + + # dmesg | tail -40 + +You will see messages similar to:: + + eth3: Neterion Xframe I 10GbE adapter (rev 3), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA + eth4: Neterion Xframe II 10GbE adapter (rev 2), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA + eth4: Device is on 64 bit 133MHz PCIX(M1) bus + +The above messages identify the adapter type(Xframe I/II), adapter revision, +driver version, interface name(eth3, eth4), Interrupt type(INTA, MSI, MSI-X). +In case of Xframe II, the PCI/PCI-X bus width and frequency are displayed +as well. + +To associate an interface with a physical adapter use "ethtool -p <ethX>". +The corresponding adapter's LED will blink multiple times. + +3. Features supported +===================== +a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, + modifiable using ip command. + +b. Offloads. Supports checksum offload(TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit + and receive, TSO. + +c. Multi-buffer receive mode. Scattering of packet across multiple + buffers. Currently driver supports 2-buffer mode which yields + significant performance improvement on certain platforms(SGI Altix, + IBM xSeries). + +d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature + (IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(up to 7% + on certain platforms). + +e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed + using "ethtool -S" option. + +f. Multi-FIFO/Ring. Supports up to 8 transmit queues and receive rings, + with multiple steering options. + +4. Command line parameters +========================== + +a. tx_fifo_num + Number of transmit queues + +Valid range: 1-8 + +Default: 1 + +b. rx_ring_num + Number of receive rings + +Valid range: 1-8 + +Default: 1 + +c. tx_fifo_len + Size of each transmit queue + +Valid range: Total length of all queues should not exceed 8192 + +Default: 4096 + +d. rx_ring_sz + Size of each receive ring(in 4K blocks) + +Valid range: Limited by memory on system + +Default: 30 + +e. intr_type + Specifies interrupt type. Possible values 0(INTA), 2(MSI-X) + +Valid values: 0, 2 + +Default: 2 + +5. Performance suggestions +========================== + +General: + +a. Set MTU to maximum(9000 for switch setup, 9600 in back-to-back configuration) +b. Set TCP windows size to optimal value. + +For instance, for MTU=1500 a value of 210K has been observed to result in +good performance:: + + # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="210000 210000 210000" + # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="210000 210000 210000" + +For MTU=9000, TCP window size of 10 MB is recommended:: + + # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + +Transmit performance: + +a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters. + However, you may want to experiment with PCI bus parameters + max-split-transactions(MOST) and MMRBC (use setpci command). + + A MOST value of 2 has been found optimal for Opterons and 3 for Itanium. + + It could be different for your hardware. + + Set MMRBC to 4K**. + + For example you can set + + For opteron:: + + #setpci -d 17d5:* 62=1d + + For Itanium:: + + #setpci -d 17d5:* 62=3d + + For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide. + +b. Ensure Transmit Checksum offload is enabled. Use ethtool to set/verify this + parameter. + +c. Turn on TSO(using "ethtool -K"):: + + # ethtool -K <ethX> tso on + +Receive performance: + +a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters. + However, you may want to set PCI latency timer to 248:: + + #setpci -d 17d5:* LATENCY_TIMER=f8 + + For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide. + +b. Use 2-buffer mode. This results in large performance boost on + certain platforms(eg. SGI Altix, IBM xSeries). + +c. Ensure Receive Checksum offload is enabled. Use "ethtool -K ethX" command to + set/verify this option. + +d. Enable NAPI feature(in kernel configuration Device Drivers ---> Network + device support ---> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) ---> S2IO 10Gbe Xframe NIC) to + bring down CPU utilization. + +.. note:: + + For AMD opteron platforms with 8131 chipset, MMRBC=1 and MOST=1 are + recommended as safe parameters. + +For more information, please review the AMD8131 errata at +http://vip.amd.com/us-en/assets/content_type/white_papers_and_tech_docs/ +26310_AMD-8131_HyperTransport_PCI-X_Tunnel_Revision_Guide_rev_3_18.pdf + +6. Support +========== + +For further support please contact either your 10GbE Xframe NIC vendor (IBM, +HP, SGI etc.) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/netronome/nfp.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst index ada611fb427c..ada611fb427c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/netronome/nfp.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0eabbc347d6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +======================================================== +Linux Driver for the Pensando(R) Ethernet adapter family +======================================================== + +Pensando Linux Ethernet driver. +Copyright(c) 2019 Pensando Systems, Inc + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying the Adapter +- Enabling the driver +- Configuring the driver +- Statistics +- Support + +Identifying the Adapter +======================= + +To find if one or more Pensando PCI Ethernet devices are installed on the +host, check for the PCI devices:: + + $ lspci -d 1dd8: + b5:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002 + b6:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002 + +If such devices are listed as above, then the ionic.ko driver should find +and configure them for use. There should be log entries in the kernel +messages such as these:: + + $ dmesg | grep ionic + ionic 0000:b5:00.0: 126.016 Gb/s available PCIe bandwidth (8.0 GT/s PCIe x16 link) + ionic 0000:b5:00.0 enp181s0: renamed from eth0 + ionic 0000:b5:00.0 enp181s0: Link up - 100 Gbps + ionic 0000:b6:00.0: 126.016 Gb/s available PCIe bandwidth (8.0 GT/s PCIe x16 link) + ionic 0000:b6:00.0 enp182s0: renamed from eth0 + ionic 0000:b6:00.0 enp182s0: Link up - 100 Gbps + +Driver and firmware version information can be gathered with either of +ethtool or devlink tools:: + + $ ethtool -i enp181s0 + driver: ionic + version: 5.7.0 + firmware-version: 1.8.0-28 + ... + + $ devlink dev info pci/0000:b5:00.0 + pci/0000:b5:00.0: + driver ionic + serial_number FLM18420073 + versions: + fixed: + asic.id 0x0 + asic.rev 0x0 + running: + fw 1.8.0-28 + +See Documentation/networking/devlink/ionic.rst for more information +on the devlink dev info data. + +Enabling the driver +=================== + +The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system, +using the make command:: + + make oldconfig/menuconfig/etc. + +The driver is located in the menu structure at: + + -> Device Drivers + -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y]) + -> Ethernet driver support + -> Pensando devices + -> Pensando Ethernet IONIC Support + +Configuring the Driver +====================== + +MTU +--- + +Jumbo frame support is available with a maximim size of 9194 bytes. + +Interrupt coalescing +-------------------- + +Interrupt coalescing can be configured by changing the rx-usecs value with +the "ethtool -C" command. The rx-usecs range is 0-190. The tx-usecs value +reflects the rx-usecs value as they are tied together on the same interrupt. + +SR-IOV +------ + +Minimal SR-IOV support is currently offered and can be enabled by setting +the sysfs 'sriov_numvfs' value, if supported by your particular firmware +configuration. + +Statistics +========== + +Basic hardware stats +-------------------- + +The commands ``netstat -i``, ``ip -s link show``, and ``ifconfig`` show +a limited set of statistics taken directly from firmware. For example:: + + $ ip -s link show enp181s0 + 7: enp181s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc mq state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 00:ae:cd:00:07:68 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + RX: bytes packets errors dropped overrun mcast + 414 5 0 0 0 0 + TX: bytes packets errors dropped carrier collsns + 1384 18 0 0 0 0 + +ethtool -S +---------- + +The statistics shown from the ``ethtool -S`` command includes a combination of +driver counters and firmware counters, including port and queue specific values. +The driver values are counters computed by the driver, and the firmware values +are gathered by the firmware from the port hardware and passed through the +driver with no further interpretation. + +Driver port specific:: + + tx_packets: 12 + tx_bytes: 964 + rx_packets: 5 + rx_bytes: 414 + tx_tso: 0 + tx_tso_bytes: 0 + tx_csum_none: 12 + tx_csum: 0 + rx_csum_none: 0 + rx_csum_complete: 3 + rx_csum_error: 0 + +Driver queue specific:: + + tx_0_pkts: 3 + tx_0_bytes: 294 + tx_0_clean: 3 + tx_0_dma_map_err: 0 + tx_0_linearize: 0 + tx_0_frags: 0 + tx_0_tso: 0 + tx_0_tso_bytes: 0 + tx_0_csum_none: 3 + tx_0_csum: 0 + tx_0_vlan_inserted: 0 + rx_0_pkts: 2 + rx_0_bytes: 120 + rx_0_dma_map_err: 0 + rx_0_alloc_err: 0 + rx_0_csum_none: 0 + rx_0_csum_complete: 0 + rx_0_csum_error: 0 + rx_0_dropped: 0 + rx_0_vlan_stripped: 0 + +Firmware port specific:: + + hw_tx_dropped: 0 + hw_rx_dropped: 0 + hw_rx_over_errors: 0 + hw_rx_missed_errors: 0 + hw_tx_aborted_errors: 0 + frames_rx_ok: 15 + frames_rx_all: 15 + frames_rx_bad_fcs: 0 + frames_rx_bad_all: 0 + octets_rx_ok: 1290 + octets_rx_all: 1290 + frames_rx_unicast: 10 + frames_rx_multicast: 5 + frames_rx_broadcast: 0 + frames_rx_pause: 0 + frames_rx_bad_length: 0 + frames_rx_undersized: 0 + frames_rx_oversized: 0 + frames_rx_fragments: 0 + frames_rx_jabber: 0 + frames_rx_pripause: 0 + frames_rx_stomped_crc: 0 + frames_rx_too_long: 0 + frames_rx_vlan_good: 3 + frames_rx_dropped: 0 + frames_rx_less_than_64b: 0 + frames_rx_64b: 4 + frames_rx_65b_127b: 11 + frames_rx_128b_255b: 0 + frames_rx_256b_511b: 0 + frames_rx_512b_1023b: 0 + frames_rx_1024b_1518b: 0 + frames_rx_1519b_2047b: 0 + frames_rx_2048b_4095b: 0 + frames_rx_4096b_8191b: 0 + frames_rx_8192b_9215b: 0 + frames_rx_other: 0 + frames_tx_ok: 31 + frames_tx_all: 31 + frames_tx_bad: 0 + octets_tx_ok: 2614 + octets_tx_total: 2614 + frames_tx_unicast: 8 + frames_tx_multicast: 21 + frames_tx_broadcast: 2 + frames_tx_pause: 0 + frames_tx_pripause: 0 + frames_tx_vlan: 0 + frames_tx_less_than_64b: 0 + frames_tx_64b: 4 + frames_tx_65b_127b: 27 + frames_tx_128b_255b: 0 + frames_tx_256b_511b: 0 + frames_tx_512b_1023b: 0 + frames_tx_1024b_1518b: 0 + frames_tx_1519b_2047b: 0 + frames_tx_2048b_4095b: 0 + frames_tx_4096b_8191b: 0 + frames_tx_8192b_9215b: 0 + frames_tx_other: 0 + frames_tx_pri_0: 0 + frames_tx_pri_1: 0 + frames_tx_pri_2: 0 + frames_tx_pri_3: 0 + frames_tx_pri_4: 0 + frames_tx_pri_5: 0 + frames_tx_pri_6: 0 + frames_tx_pri_7: 0 + frames_rx_pri_0: 0 + frames_rx_pri_1: 0 + frames_rx_pri_2: 0 + frames_rx_pri_3: 0 + frames_rx_pri_4: 0 + frames_rx_pri_5: 0 + frames_rx_pri_6: 0 + frames_rx_pri_7: 0 + tx_pripause_0_1us_count: 0 + tx_pripause_1_1us_count: 0 + tx_pripause_2_1us_count: 0 + tx_pripause_3_1us_count: 0 + tx_pripause_4_1us_count: 0 + tx_pripause_5_1us_count: 0 + tx_pripause_6_1us_count: 0 + tx_pripause_7_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_0_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_1_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_2_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_3_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_4_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_5_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_6_1us_count: 0 + rx_pripause_7_1us_count: 0 + rx_pause_1us_count: 0 + frames_tx_truncated: 0 + + +Support +======= + +For general Linux networking support, please use the netdev mailing +list, which is monitored by Pensando personnel:: + + netdev@vger.kernel.org + +For more specific support needs, please use the Pensando driver support +email:: + + drivers@pensando.io diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e5eac896a631 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================ +SMC 9xxxx Driver +================ + +Revision 0.12 + +3/5/96 + +Copyright 1996 Erik Stahlman + +Released under terms of the GNU General Public License. + +This file contains the instructions and caveats for my SMC9xxx driver. You +should not be using the driver without reading this file. + +Things to note about installation: + + 1. The driver should work on all kernels from 1.2.13 until 1.3.71. + (A kernel patch is supplied for 1.3.71 ) + + 2. If you include this into the kernel, you might need to change some + options, such as for forcing IRQ. + + + 3. To compile as a module, run 'make'. + Make will give you the appropriate options for various kernel support. + + 4. Loading the driver as a module:: + + use: insmod smc9194.o + optional parameters: + io=xxxx : your base address + irq=xx : your irq + ifport=x : 0 for whatever is default + 1 for twisted pair + 2 for AUI ( or BNC on some cards ) + +How to obtain the latest version? + +FTP: + ftp://fenris.campus.vt.edu/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz + ftp://sfbox.vt.edu/filebox/F/fenris/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz + + +Contacting me: + erik@mail.vt.edu diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst index c34bab3d2df0..5d46e5036129 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst @@ -32,7 +32,8 @@ is also supported. DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.70a (and older) and DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet Quality-of-Service version 4.0 (and upper) have been used for developing this driver as well as -DesignWare(R) Cores XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC. +DesignWare(R) Cores XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC and DesignWare(R) Cores +Enterprise MAC - 100G Ethernet MAC. This driver supports both the platform bus and PCI. @@ -48,6 +49,8 @@ Cores Ethernet Controllers and corresponding minimum and maximum versions: +-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ | XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC | 2.10a | N/A | XGMAC2+ | +-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ +| XLGMAC - 100G Ethernet MAC | 2.00a | N/A | XLGMAC2+ | ++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation supplied with your Ethernet adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply @@ -57,7 +60,7 @@ Feature List ============ The following features are available in this driver: - - GMII/MII/RGMII/SGMII/RMII/XGMII Interface + - GMII/MII/RGMII/SGMII/RMII/XGMII/XLGMII Interface - Half-Duplex / Full-Duplex Operation - Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) - IEEE 802.3x PAUSE Packets (Flow Control) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f24adfab6a1b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev.rst @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=================================================================== +Texas Instruments K3 AM65 CPSW NUSS switchdev based ethernet driver +=================================================================== + +:Version: 1.0 + +Port renaming +============= + +In order to rename via udev:: + + ip -d link show dev sw0p1 | grep switchid + + SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", ATTR{phys_switch_id}==<switchid>, \ + ATTR{phys_port_name}!="", NAME="sw0$attr{phys_port_name}" + + +Multi mac mode +============== + +- The driver is operating in multi-mac mode by default, thus + working as N individual network interfaces. + +Devlink configuration parameters +================================ + +See Documentation/networking/devlink/am65-nuss-cpsw-switch.rst + +Enabling "switch" +================= + +The Switch mode can be enabled by configuring devlink driver parameter +"switch_mode" to 1/true:: + + devlink dev param set platform/c000000.ethernet \ + name switch_mode value true cmode runtime + +This can be done regardless of the state of Port's netdev devices - UP/DOWN, but +Port's netdev devices have to be in UP before joining to the bridge to avoid +overwriting of bridge configuration as CPSW switch driver completely reloads its +configuration when first port changes its state to UP. + +When the both interfaces joined the bridge - CPSW switch driver will enable +marking packets with offload_fwd_mark flag. + +All configuration is implemented via switchdev API. + +Bridge setup +============ + +:: + + devlink dev param set platform/c000000.ethernet \ + name switch_mode value true cmode runtime + + ip link add name br0 type bridge + ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000 + ip link set dev sw0p1 up + ip link set dev sw0p2 up + ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 + ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 + + [*] bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self + + [*] if vlan_filtering=1. where default_pvid=1 + + Note. Steps [*] are mandatory. + + +On/off STP +========== + +:: + + ip link set dev BRDEV type bridge stp_state 1/0 + +VLAN configuration +================== + +:: + + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self <---- add cpu port to VLAN 1 + +Note. This step is mandatory for bridge/default_pvid. + +Add extra VLANs +=============== + + 1. untagged:: + + bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master + bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 pvid untagged master + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid untagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100 + + 2. tagged:: + + bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 master + bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid tagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100 + +FDBs +---- + +FDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection + +Manually adding FDBs:: + + bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff dev sw0p1 master vlan 100 + bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:fe dev sw0p2 master <---- Add on all VLANs + +MDBs +---- + +MDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection + +Manually adding MDBs:: + + bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent vid 100 + bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent <---- Add on all VLANs + +Multicast flooding +================== +CPU port mcast_flooding is always on + +Turning flooding on/off on swithch ports: +bridge link set dev sw0p1 mcast_flood on/off + +Access and Trunk port +===================== + +:: + + bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master + bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master + + + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 self + ip link add link br0 name br0.100 type vlan id 100 + +Note. Setting PVID on Bridge device itself works only for +default VLAN (default_pvid). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a88946bd188b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst @@ -0,0 +1,587 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +====================================== +Texas Instruments CPSW ethernet driver +====================================== + +Multiqueue & CBS & MQPRIO +========================= + + +The cpsw has 3 CBS shapers for each external ports. This document +describes MQPRIO and CBS Qdisc offload configuration for cpsw driver +based on examples. It potentially can be used in audio video bridging +(AVB) and time sensitive networking (TSN). + +The following examples were tested on AM572x EVM and BBB boards. + +Test setup +========== + +Under consideration two examples with AM572x EVM running cpsw driver +in dual_emac mode. + +Several prerequisites: + +- TX queues must be rated starting from txq0 that has highest priority +- Traffic classes are used starting from 0, that has highest priority +- CBS shapers should be used with rated queues +- The bandwidth for CBS shapers has to be set a little bit more then + potential incoming rate, thus, rate of all incoming tx queues has + to be a little less +- Real rates can differ, due to discreetness +- Map skb-priority to txq is not enough, also skb-priority to l2 prio + map has to be created with ip or vconfig tool +- Any l2/socket prio (0 - 7) for classes can be used, but for + simplicity default values are used: 3 and 2 +- only 2 classes tested: A and B, but checked and can work with more, + maximum allowed 4, but only for 3 rate can be set. + +Test setup for examples +======================= + +:: + + +-------------------------------+ + |--+ | + | | Workstation0 | + |E | MAC 18:03:73:66:87:42 | + +-----------------------------+ +--|t | | + | | 1 | E | | |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | + | Target board: | 0 | t |--+ |0 | 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0 \| + | AM572x EVM | 0 | h | | | -s 1500 | + | | 0 | 0 | |--+ | + | Only 2 classes: |Mb +---| +-------------------------------+ + | class A, class B | | + | | +---| +-------------------------------+ + | | 1 | E | |--+ | + | | 0 | t | | | Workstation1 | + | | 0 | h |--+ |E | MAC 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd | + | |Mb | 1 | +--|t | | + +-----------------------------+ |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | + |0 | 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth0 \| + | | -s 1500 | + |--+ | + +-------------------------------+ + + +Example 1: One port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board +---------------------------------------------------------------- + +(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, applicable for single port boards) + +- tc - traffic class +- txq - transmit queue +- p - priority +- f - fifo (cpsw fifo) +- S - shaper configured + +:: + + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ u + | +---------------+ +---------------+ +------+ +------+ | s + | | | | | | | | | | e + | | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | Apps | | r + | | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Rest | | + | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth1 | | s + | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | | | | p + | | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | | | | a + | | SO_PRIORITY=3 | | SO_PRIORITY=2 | | | | | | | | c + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e + | +---|-----------+ +---|-----------+ +---|--+ +---|--+ | + +-----|------------------|------------------|--------|-------------+ + +-+ +------------+ | | + | | +-----------------+ +--+ + | | | | + +---|-------|-------------|-----------------------|----------------+ + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | + | | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | k + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r + | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n + | | | | | | e + | | | +-----+ | | l + | | | | | | + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s + | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc0 | | p + | \ / \ / \ / \ / | a + | \ / \ / \ / \ / | c + | \/ \/ \/ \/ | e + | | | +-----+ | | + | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | + | |txq0| |txq1| |txq2| |txq3| |txq4| | + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | + | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | + | +-|------|------|------|--+ +--|--------------+ | + | | | | | | | Eth0.100 | | Eth1 | | + +---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ + | | | | | + p p p p | + 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <- L2 priority | + | | | | | + | | | | | + +---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ + | | | | | |----------+ | + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | + | |dma7| |dma6| |dma5| |dma4| |dma3| | + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c + | \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / | p + | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s + | | | | +----- | | w + | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | d + | +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ | r + | | | | | | |o o| | | i + | | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r r| f0 | | v + | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | | e + | \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / | r + | \S / \S / \ / \ / | + | \/ \/ \/ \/ | + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + +1) :: + + + // Add 4 tx queues, for interface Eth0, and 1 tx queue for Eth1 + $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 5 + rx unmodified, ignoring + +2) :: + + // Check if num of queues is set correctly: + $ ethtool -l eth0 + Channel parameters for eth0: + Pre-set maximums: + RX: 8 + TX: 8 + Other: 0 + Combined: 0 + Current hardware settings: + RX: 1 + TX: 5 + Other: 0 + Combined: 0 + +3) :: + + // TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 + // Set rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately. + // Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness. + // Leave last 2 tx queues not rated. + $ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate + $ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate + +4) :: + + // Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: + $ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate + 40 + 20 + 0 + 0 + 0 + +5) :: + + // Map skb->priority to traffic class: + // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 + // Map traffic class to transmit queue: + // tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq2, txq3) + $ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ + map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@2 hw 1 + +5a) :: + + // As two interface sharing same set of tx queues, assign all traffic + // coming to interface Eth1 to separate queue in order to not mix it + // with traffic from interface Eth0, so use separate txq to send + // packets to Eth1, so all prio -> tc0 and tc0 -> txq4 + // Here hw 0, so here still default configuration for eth1 in hw + $ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 1 \ + map 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 queues 1@4 hw 0 + +6) :: + + // Check classes settings + $ tc -g class show dev eth0 + +---(100:ffe2) mqprio + | +---(100:3) mqprio + | +---(100:4) mqprio + | + +---(100:ffe1) mqprio + | +---(100:2) mqprio + | + +---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:1) mqprio + + $ tc -g class show dev eth1 + +---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:5) mqprio + +7) :: + + // Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc + // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) + // here only idle slope is important, others arg are ignored + // Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness + $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1438 \ + hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 + net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 + +8) :: + + // Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc: + // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) + $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1468 \ + hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 + net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 + +9) :: + + // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos + $ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 + 8021q: 802.1Q VLAN Support v1.8 + 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth0 + 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth1 + net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +10) :: + + // Map skb->priority to L2 prio, 1 to 1 + $ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ + egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +11) :: + + // Check egress map for vlan 100 + $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 + [...] + INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 + EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +12) :: + + // Run your appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" + // to 3 for class A and/or to 2 for class B + // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) + ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& + ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& + +13) :: + + // run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) + // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) + ./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps + +14) :: + + // Restore default configuration if needed + $ ip link del eth0.100 + $ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root + $ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root + net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped + net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 + net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 + $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 + +Example 2: Two port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board +---------------------------------------------------------------- + +(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, for dual emac boards only) + +:: + + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ u + | +----------+ +----------+ +------+ +----------+ +----------+ | s + | | | | | | | | | | | | e + | | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | App 3 | | App 4 | | r + | | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Class B | | Class A | | + | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | | | | Eth1 | | Eth1 | | s + | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | p + | | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | 10 Mb/s | | 30 Mb/s | | a + | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | | | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | c + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e + | +---|------+ +---|------+ +---|--+ +---|------+ +---|------+ | + +-----|-------------|-------------|---------|-------------|--------+ + +-+ +-------+ | +----------+ +----+ + | | +-------+------+ | | + | | | | | | + +---|-------|-------------|--------------|-------------|-------|---+ + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | + | | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | p1 | | p2 | | p3 | | k + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r + | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n + | | | | | | | | e + | | | +----+ +----+ | | | l + | | | | | | | | + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s + | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc2 | |tc1 | |tc0 | | p + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | a + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c + | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | e + | | | +-----+ +-----+ | | | + | | | | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | | | | + | | | | | E E | | | | | + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ t t +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | + | |txq0| |txq1| |txq4| |txq5| h h |txq6| |txq7| |txq3| |txq2| | + | \ / \ / \ / \ / 0 1 \ / \ / \ / \ / | + | \ / \ / \ / \ / . . \ / \ / \ / \ / | + | \/ \/ \/ \/ 1 1 \/ \/ \/ \/ | + | +-|------|------|------|--+ 0 0 +-|------|------|------|--+ | + | | | | | | | 0 0 | | | | | | | + +---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ + | | | | | | | | + p p p p p p p p + 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <-L2 pri-> 0-1, 4-7 2 3 + | | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | | + +---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ + | | | | | | | | | | + | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | + | |dma7| |dma6| |dma3| |dma2| |dma1| |dma0| |dma4| |dma5| | + | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c + | \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / \ / \S / \S / | p + | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s + | | | | +----- | | | | | w + | | | | | +----+ | | | | + | | | | | | | | | | d + | +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ +----+ +----+ | r + | | | | | | |o o| | | | | | | i + | | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r CPSW r| f3 | | f2 | | f0 | | v + | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | | e + | \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / \CBS / \CBS / | r + | \S / \S / \ / \S / \S / \ / | + | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ + ========================================Eth==========================> + +1) :: + + // Add 8 tx queues, for interface Eth0, but they are common, so are accessed + // by two interfaces Eth0 and Eth1. + $ ethtool -L eth1 rx 1 tx 8 + rx unmodified, ignoring + +2) :: + + // Check if num of queues is set correctly: + $ ethtool -l eth0 + Channel parameters for eth0: + Pre-set maximums: + RX: 8 + TX: 8 + Other: 0 + Combined: 0 + Current hardware settings: + RX: 1 + TX: 8 + Other: 0 + Combined: 0 + +3) :: + + // TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 for Eth0 + // and for tx2 and tx3 for Eth1. That is, rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately + // for Eth0 and 30 and 10 Mb/s for Eth1. + // Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness + // Leave last 4 tx queues as not rated + $ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate + $ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate + $ echo 30 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-2/tx_maxrate + $ echo 10 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-3/tx_maxrate + +4) :: + + // Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: + $ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate + 40 + 20 + 30 + 10 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + +5) :: + + // Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth0: + // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 + // Map traffic class to transmit queue: + // tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq4, txq5) + $ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ + map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@4 hw 1 + +6) :: + + // Check classes settings + $ tc -g class show dev eth0 + +---(100:ffe2) mqprio + | +---(100:5) mqprio + | +---(100:6) mqprio + | + +---(100:ffe1) mqprio + | +---(100:2) mqprio + | + +---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:1) mqprio + +7) :: + + // Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 + // here only idle slope is important, others ignored + // Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness + $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1470 \ + hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 + net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 + +8) :: + + // Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 + $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1470 \ + hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 + net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 + +9) :: + + // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth0 + $ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 + net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +10) :: + + // Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth0.100, one to one + $ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ + egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +11) :: + + // Check egress map for vlan 100 + $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 + [...] + INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 + EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +12) :: + + // Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth1: + // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 + // Map traffic class to transmit queue: + // tc0 -> txq2, tc1 -> txq3, tc2 -> (txq6, txq7) + $ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ + map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@2 1@3 2@6 hw 1 + +13) :: + + // Check classes settings + $ tc -g class show dev eth1 + +---(100:ffe2) mqprio + | +---(100:7) mqprio + | +---(100:8) mqprio + | + +---(100:ffe1) mqprio + | +---(100:4) mqprio + | + +---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:3) mqprio + +14) :: + + // Set rate for class A - 31 Mbit (tc0, txq2) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 + // here only idle slope is important, others ignored, but calculated + // for interface speed - 100Mb for eth1 port. + // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) + $ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:3 cbs locredit -1035 \ + hicredit 465 sendslope -69000 idleslope 31000 offload 1 + net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 31 + +15) :: + + // Set rate for class B - 11 Mbit (tc1, txq3) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 + // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) + $ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:4 cbs locredit -1335 \ + hicredit 405 sendslope -89000 idleslope 11000 offload 1 + net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 11 + +16) :: + + // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth1 + $ ip link add link eth1 name eth1.100 type vlan id 100 + net eth1: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +17) :: + + // Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth1.100, one to one + $ ip link set eth1.100 type vlan \ + egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +18) :: + + // Check egress map for vlan 100 + $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth1.100 + [...] + INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 + EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +19) :: + + // Run appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" to 3 + // for class A and to 2 for class B. For both interfaces + ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& + ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& + ./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p2 -s 1500& + ./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p3 -s 1500& + +20) :: + + // run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) + // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) + ./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps + Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps + +21) :: + + // Restore default configuration if needed + $ ip link del eth1.100 + $ ip link del eth0.100 + $ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root + net eth1: Prev FIFO2 is shaped + net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 0 + net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 0 + $ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root + net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped + net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 + net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 + $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1241ecac73bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst @@ -0,0 +1,242 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +====================================================== +Texas Instruments CPSW switchdev based ethernet driver +====================================================== + +:Version: 2.0 + +Port renaming +============= + +On older udev versions renaming of ethX to swXpY will not be automatically +supported + +In order to rename via udev:: + + ip -d link show dev sw0p1 | grep switchid + + SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", ATTR{phys_switch_id}==<switchid>, \ + ATTR{phys_port_name}!="", NAME="sw0$attr{phys_port_name}" + + +Dual mac mode +============= + +- The new (cpsw_new.c) driver is operating in dual-emac mode by default, thus + working as 2 individual network interfaces. Main differences from legacy CPSW + driver are: + + - optimized promiscuous mode: The P0_UNI_FLOOD (both ports) is enabled in + addition to ALLMULTI (current port) instead of ALE_BYPASS. + So, Ports in promiscuous mode will keep possibility of mcast and vlan + filtering, which is provides significant benefits when ports are joined + to the same bridge, but without enabling "switch" mode, or to different + bridges. + - learning disabled on ports as it make not too much sense for + segregated ports - no forwarding in HW. + - enabled basic support for devlink. + + :: + + devlink dev show + platform/48484000.switch + + devlink dev param show + platform/48484000.switch: + name switch_mode type driver-specific + values: + cmode runtime value false + name ale_bypass type driver-specific + values: + cmode runtime value false + +Devlink configuration parameters +================================ + +See Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst + +Bridging in dual mac mode +========================= + +The dual_mac mode requires two vids to be reserved for internal purposes, +which, by default, equal CPSW Port numbers. As result, bridge has to be +configured in vlan unaware mode or default_pvid has to be adjusted:: + + ip link add name br0 type bridge + ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 + echo 0 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid + ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 + ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 + +or:: + + ip link add name br0 type bridge + ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 + echo 100 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid + ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 + ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 + ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 + +Enabling "switch" +================= + +The Switch mode can be enabled by configuring devlink driver parameter +"switch_mode" to 1/true:: + + devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \ + name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime + +This can be done regardless of the state of Port's netdev devices - UP/DOWN, but +Port's netdev devices have to be in UP before joining to the bridge to avoid +overwriting of bridge configuration as CPSW switch driver copletly reloads its +configuration when first Port changes its state to UP. + +When the both interfaces joined the bridge - CPSW switch driver will enable +marking packets with offload_fwd_mark flag unless "ale_bypass=0" + +All configuration is implemented via switchdev API. + +Bridge setup +============ + +:: + + devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \ + name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime + + ip link add name br0 type bridge + ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000 + ip link set dev sw0p1 up + ip link set dev sw0p2 up + ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 + ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 + + [*] bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self + + [*] if vlan_filtering=1. where default_pvid=1 + + Note. Steps [*] are mandatory. + + +On/off STP +========== + +:: + + ip link set dev BRDEV type bridge stp_state 1/0 + +VLAN configuration +================== + +:: + + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self <---- add cpu port to VLAN 1 + +Note. This step is mandatory for bridge/default_pvid. + +Add extra VLANs +=============== + + 1. untagged:: + + bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master + bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 pvid untagged master + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid untagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100 + + 2. tagged:: + + bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 master + bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid tagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100 + +FDBs +---- + +FDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection + +Manually adding FDBs:: + + bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff dev sw0p1 master vlan 100 + bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:fe dev sw0p2 master <---- Add on all VLANs + +MDBs +---- + +MDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection + +Manually adding MDBs:: + + bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent vid 100 + bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent <---- Add on all VLANs + +Multicast flooding +================== +CPU port mcast_flooding is always on + +Turning flooding on/off on swithch ports: +bridge link set dev sw0p1 mcast_flood on/off + +Access and Trunk port +===================== + +:: + + bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master + bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master + + + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 self + ip link add link br0 name br0.100 type vlan id 100 + +Note. Setting PVID on Bridge device itself working only for +default VLAN (default_pvid). + +NFS +=== + +The only way for NFS to work is by chrooting to a minimal environment when +switch configuration that will affect connectivity is needed. +Assuming you are booting NFS with eth1 interface(the script is hacky and +it's just there to prove NFS is doable). + +setup.sh:: + + #!/bin/sh + mkdir proc + mount -t proc none /proc + ifconfig br0 > /dev/null + if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then + echo "Setting up bridge" + ip link add name br0 type bridge + ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000 + ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 + + ip link set eth1 down + ip link set eth1 name sw0p1 + ip link set dev sw0p1 up + ip link set dev sw0p2 up + ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 + ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 + bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self + ifconfig sw0p1 0.0.0.0 + udhchc -i br0 + fi + umount /proc + +run_nfs.sh::: + + #!/bin/sh + mkdir /tmp/root/bin -p + mkdir /tmp/root/lib -p + + cp -r /lib/ /tmp/root/ + cp -r /bin/ /tmp/root/ + cp /sbin/ip /tmp/root/bin + cp /sbin/bridge /tmp/root/bin + cp /sbin/ifconfig /tmp/root/bin + cp /sbin/udhcpc /tmp/root/bin + cp /path/to/setup.sh /tmp/root/bin + chroot /tmp/root/ busybox sh /bin/setup.sh + + run ./run_nfs.sh diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4fdc0907f4fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================== +TLAN driver for Linux +===================== + +:Version: 1.14a + +(C) 1997-1998 Caldera, Inc. + +(C) 1998 James Banks + +(C) 1999-2001 Torben Mathiasen <tmm@image.dk, torben.mathiasen@compaq.com> + +For driver information/updates visit http://www.compaq.com + + + + + +I. Supported Devices +==================== + + Only PCI devices will work with this driver. + + Supported: + + ========= ========= =========================================== + Vendor ID Device ID Name + ========= ========= =========================================== + 0e11 ae32 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX PCI UTP + 0e11 ae34 Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP + 0e11 ae35 Compaq Integrated NetFlex 3/P + 0e11 ae40 Compaq Netelligent Dual 10/100 TX PCI UTP + 0e11 ae43 Compaq Netelligent Integrated 10/100 TX UTP + 0e11 b011 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX Embedded UTP + 0e11 b012 Compaq Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax + 0e11 b030 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX UTP + 0e11 f130 Compaq NetFlex 3/P + 0e11 f150 Compaq NetFlex 3/P + 108d 0012 Olicom OC-2325 + 108d 0013 Olicom OC-2183 + 108d 0014 Olicom OC-2326 + ========= ========= =========================================== + + + Caveats: + + I am not sure if 100BaseTX daughterboards (for those cards which + support such things) will work. I haven't had any solid evidence + either way. + + However, if a card supports 100BaseTx without requiring an add + on daughterboard, it should work with 100BaseTx. + + The "Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax" (b012) device is untested, + but I do not expect any problems. + + +II. Driver Options +================== + + 1. You can append debug=x to the end of the insmod line to get + debug messages, where x is a bit field where the bits mean + the following: + + ==== ===================================== + 0x01 Turn on general debugging messages. + 0x02 Turn on receive debugging messages. + 0x04 Turn on transmit debugging messages. + 0x08 Turn on list debugging messages. + ==== ===================================== + + 2. You can append aui=1 to the end of the insmod line to cause + the adapter to use the AUI interface instead of the 10 Base T + interface. This is also what to do if you want to use the BNC + connector on a TLAN based device. (Setting this option on a + device that does not have an AUI/BNC connector will probably + cause it to not function correctly.) + + 3. You can set duplex=1 to force half duplex, and duplex=2 to + force full duplex. + + 4. You can set speed=10 to force 10Mbs operation, and speed=100 + to force 100Mbs operation. (I'm not sure what will happen + if a card which only supports 10Mbs is forced into 100Mbs + mode.) + + 5. You have to use speed=X duplex=Y together now. If you just + do "insmod tlan.o speed=100" the driver will do Auto-Neg. + To force a 10Mbps Half-Duplex link do "insmod tlan.o speed=10 + duplex=1". + + 6. If the driver is built into the kernel, you can use the 3rd + and 4th parameters to set aui and debug respectively. For + example:: + + ether=0,0,0x1,0x7,eth0 + + This sets aui to 0x1 and debug to 0x7, assuming eth0 is a + supported TLAN device. + + The bits in the third byte are assigned as follows: + + ==== =============== + 0x01 aui + 0x02 use half duplex + 0x04 use full duplex + 0x08 use 10BaseT + 0x10 use 100BaseTx + ==== =============== + + You also need to set both speed and duplex settings when forcing + speeds with kernel-parameters. + ether=0,0,0x12,0,eth0 will force link to 100Mbps Half-Duplex. + + 7. If you have more than one tlan adapter in your system, you can + use the above options on a per adapter basis. To force a 100Mbit/HD + link with your eth1 adapter use:: + + insmod tlan speed=0,100 duplex=0,1 + + Now eth0 will use auto-neg and eth1 will be forced to 100Mbit/HD. + Note that the tlan driver supports a maximum of 8 adapters. + + +III. Things to try if you have problems +======================================= + + 1. Make sure your card's PCI id is among those listed in + section I, above. + 2. Make sure routing is correct. + 3. Try forcing different speed/duplex settings + + +There is also a tlan mailing list which you can join by sending "subscribe tlan" +in the body of an email to majordomo@vuser.vu.union.edu. + +There is also a tlan website at http://www.compaq.com + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fe5b32be15cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=========================== +The Spidernet Device Driver +=========================== + +Written by Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com> + +Version of 7 June 2007 + +Abstract +======== +This document sketches the structure of portions of the spidernet +device driver in the Linux kernel tree. The spidernet is a gigabit +ethernet device built into the Toshiba southbridge commonly used +in the SONY Playstation 3 and the IBM QS20 Cell blade. + +The Structure of the RX Ring. +============================= +The receive (RX) ring is a circular linked list of RX descriptors, +together with three pointers into the ring that are used to manage its +contents. + +The elements of the ring are called "descriptors" or "descrs"; they +describe the received data. This includes a pointer to a buffer +containing the received data, the buffer size, and various status bits. + +There are three primary states that a descriptor can be in: "empty", +"full" and "not-in-use". An "empty" or "ready" descriptor is ready +to receive data from the hardware. A "full" descriptor has data in it, +and is waiting to be emptied and processed by the OS. A "not-in-use" +descriptor is neither empty or full; it is simply not ready. It may +not even have a data buffer in it, or is otherwise unusable. + +During normal operation, on device startup, the OS (specifically, the +spidernet device driver) allocates a set of RX descriptors and RX +buffers. These are all marked "empty", ready to receive data. This +ring is handed off to the hardware, which sequentially fills in the +buffers, and marks them "full". The OS follows up, taking the full +buffers, processing them, and re-marking them empty. + +This filling and emptying is managed by three pointers, the "head" +and "tail" pointers, managed by the OS, and a hardware current +descriptor pointer (GDACTDPA). The GDACTDPA points at the descr +currently being filled. When this descr is filled, the hardware +marks it full, and advances the GDACTDPA by one. Thus, when there is +flowing RX traffic, every descr behind it should be marked "full", +and everything in front of it should be "empty". If the hardware +discovers that the current descr is not empty, it will signal an +interrupt, and halt processing. + +The tail pointer tails or trails the hardware pointer. When the +hardware is ahead, the tail pointer will be pointing at a "full" +descr. The OS will process this descr, and then mark it "not-in-use", +and advance the tail pointer. Thus, when there is flowing RX traffic, +all of the descrs in front of the tail pointer should be "full", and +all of those behind it should be "not-in-use". When RX traffic is not +flowing, then the tail pointer can catch up to the hardware pointer. +The OS will then note that the current tail is "empty", and halt +processing. + +The head pointer (somewhat mis-named) follows after the tail pointer. +When traffic is flowing, then the head pointer will be pointing at +a "not-in-use" descr. The OS will perform various housekeeping duties +on this descr. This includes allocating a new data buffer and +dma-mapping it so as to make it visible to the hardware. The OS will +then mark the descr as "empty", ready to receive data. Thus, when there +is flowing RX traffic, everything in front of the head pointer should +be "not-in-use", and everything behind it should be "empty". If no +RX traffic is flowing, then the head pointer can catch up to the tail +pointer, at which point the OS will notice that the head descr is +"empty", and it will halt processing. + +Thus, in an idle system, the GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers will +all be pointing at the same descr, which should be "empty". All of the +other descrs in the ring should be "empty" as well. + +The show_rx_chain() routine will print out the locations of the +GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers. It will also summarize the contents +of the ring, starting at the tail pointer, and listing the status +of the descrs that follow. + +A typical example of the output, for a nearly idle system, might be:: + + net eth1: Total number of descrs=256 + net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=20 + net eth1: Chain head is at 20 + net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 21 + net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800101 + net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 22 + net eth1: Last 255 descrs with stat=xa0800000 + +In the above, the hardware has filled in one descr, number 20. Both +head and tail are pointing at 20, because it has not yet been emptied. +Meanwhile, hw is pointing at 21, which is free. + +The "Have nnn decrs" refers to the descr starting at the tail: in this +case, nnn=1 descr, starting at descr 20. The "Last nnn descrs" refers +to all of the rest of the descrs, from the last status change. The "nnn" +is a count of how many descrs have exactly the same status. + +The status x4... corresponds to "full" and status xa... corresponds +to "empty". The actual value printed is RXCOMST_A. + +In the device driver source code, a different set of names are +used for these same concepts, so that:: + + "empty" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_CARDOWNED == 0xa + "full" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_FRAME_END == 0x4 + "not in use" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_NOT_IN_USE == 0xf + + +The RX RAM full bug/feature +=========================== + +As long as the OS can empty out the RX buffers at a rate faster than +the hardware can fill them, there is no problem. If, for some reason, +the OS fails to empty the RX ring fast enough, the hardware GDACTDPA +pointer will catch up to the head, notice the not-empty condition, +ad stop. However, RX packets may still continue arriving on the wire. +The spidernet chip can save some limited number of these in local RAM. +When this local ram fills up, the spider chip will issue an interrupt +indicating this (GHIINT0STS will show ERRINT, and the GRMFLLINT bit +will be set in GHIINT1STS). When the RX ram full condition occurs, +a certain bug/feature is triggered that has to be specially handled. +This section describes the special handling for this condition. + +When the OS finally has a chance to run, it will empty out the RX ring. +In particular, it will clear the descriptor on which the hardware had +stopped. However, once the hardware has decided that a certain +descriptor is invalid, it will not restart at that descriptor; instead +it will restart at the next descr. This potentially will lead to a +deadlock condition, as the tail pointer will be pointing at this descr, +which, from the OS point of view, is empty; the OS will be waiting for +this descr to be filled. However, the hardware has skipped this descr, +and is filling the next descrs. Since the OS doesn't see this, there +is a potential deadlock, with the OS waiting for one descr to fill, +while the hardware is waiting for a different set of descrs to become +empty. + +A call to show_rx_chain() at this point indicates the nature of the +problem. A typical print when the network is hung shows the following:: + + net eth1: Spider RX RAM full, incoming packets might be discarded! + net eth1: Total number of descrs=256 + net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=255 + net eth1: Chain head is at 255 + net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 0 + net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000 + net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 1 + net eth1: Have 127 descrs with stat=x40800101 + net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800001 + net eth1: Have 126 descrs with stat=x40800101 + net eth1: Last 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000 + +Both the tail and head pointers are pointing at descr 255, which is +marked xa... which is "empty". Thus, from the OS point of view, there +is nothing to be done. In particular, there is the implicit assumption +that everything in front of the "empty" descr must surely also be empty, +as explained in the last section. The OS is waiting for descr 255 to +become non-empty, which, in this case, will never happen. + +The HW pointer is at descr 0. This descr is marked 0x4.. or "full". +Since its already full, the hardware can do nothing more, and thus has +halted processing. Notice that descrs 0 through 254 are all marked +"full", while descr 254 and 255 are empty. (The "Last 1 descrs" is +descr 254, since tail was at 255.) Thus, the system is deadlocked, +and there can be no forward progress; the OS thinks there's nothing +to do, and the hardware has nowhere to put incoming data. + +This bug/feature is worked around with the spider_net_resync_head_ptr() +routine. When the driver receives RX interrupts, but an examination +of the RX chain seems to show it is empty, then it is probable that +the hardware has skipped a descr or two (sometimes dozens under heavy +network conditions). The spider_net_resync_head_ptr() subroutine will +search the ring for the next full descr, and the driver will resume +operations there. Since this will leave "holes" in the ring, there +is also a spider_net_resync_tail_ptr() that will skip over such holes. + +As of this writing, the spider_net_resync() strategy seems to work very +well, even under heavy network loads. + + +The TX ring +=========== +The TX ring uses a low-watermark interrupt scheme to make sure that +the TX queue is appropriately serviced for large packet sizes. + +For packet sizes greater than about 1KBytes, the kernel can fill +the TX ring quicker than the device can drain it. Once the ring +is full, the netdev is stopped. When there is room in the ring, +the netdev needs to be reawakened, so that more TX packets are placed +in the ring. The hardware can empty the ring about four times per jiffy, +so its not appropriate to wait for the poll routine to refill, since +the poll routine runs only once per jiffy. The low-watermark mechanism +marks a descr about 1/4th of the way from the bottom of the queue, so +that an interrupt is generated when the descr is processed. This +interrupt wakes up the netdev, which can then refill the queue. +For large packets, this mechanism generates a relatively small number +of interrupts, about 1K/sec. For smaller packets, this will drop to zero +interrupts, as the hardware can empty the queue faster than the kernel +can fill it. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/ngbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/ngbe.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..43a02f9943e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/ngbe.rst @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================================================= +Linux Base Driver for WangXun(R) Gigabit PCI Express Adapters +============================================================= + +WangXun Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright (c) 2019 - 2022 Beijing WangXun Technology Co., Ltd. + +Support +======= + If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our + customer support team via email at nic-support@net-swift.com or check our website + at https://www.net-swift.com diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/txgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/txgbe.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eaa87dbe8848 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/txgbe.rst @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================================================================ +Linux Base Driver for WangXun(R) 10 Gigabit PCI Express Adapters +================================================================ + +WangXun 10 Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright (c) 2015 - 2022 Beijing WangXun Technology Co., Ltd. + + +Contents +======== + +- Support + + +Support +======= +If you got any problem, contact Wangxun support team via support@trustnetic.com +and Cc: netdev. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/defza.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/defza.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7393f33ea705 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/defza.rst @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================================================== +Notes on the DEC FDDIcontroller 700 (DEFZA-xx) driver +===================================================== + +:Version: v.1.1.4 + + +DEC FDDIcontroller 700 is DEC's first-generation TURBOchannel FDDI +network card, designed in 1990 specifically for the DECstation 5000 +model 200 workstation. The board is a single attachment station and +it was manufactured in two variations, both of which are supported. + +First is the SAS MMF DEFZA-AA option, the original design implementing +the standard MMF-PMD, however with a pair of ST connectors rather than +the usual MIC connector. The other one is the SAS ThinWire/STP DEFZA-CA +option, denoted 700-C, with the network medium selectable by a switch +between the DEC proprietary ThinWire-PMD using a BNC connector and the +standard STP-PMD using a DE-9F connector. This option can interface to +a DECconcentrator 500 device and, in the case of the STP-PMD, also other +FDDI equipment and was designed to make it easier to transition from +existing IEEE 802.3 10BASE2 Ethernet and IEEE 802.5 Token Ring networks +by providing means to reuse existing cabling. + +This driver handles any number of cards installed in a single system. +They get fddi0, fddi1, etc. interface names assigned in the order of +increasing TURBOchannel slot numbers. + +The board only supports DMA on the receive side. Transmission involves +the use of PIO. As a result under a heavy transmission load there will +be a significant impact on system performance. + +The board supports a 64-entry CAM for matching destination addresses. +Two entries are preoccupied by the Directed Beacon and Ring Purger +multicast addresses and the rest is used as a multicast filter. An +all-multi mode is also supported for LLC frames and it is used if +requested explicitly or if the CAM overflows. The promiscuous mode +supports separate enables for LLC and SMT frames, but this driver +doesn't support changing them individually. + + +Known problems: + +None. + + +To do: + +5. MAC address change. The card does not support changing the Media + Access Controller's address registers but a similar effect can be + achieved by adding an alias to the CAM. There is no way to disable + matching against the original address though. + +7. Queueing incoming/outgoing SMT frames in the driver if the SMT + receive/RMC transmit ring is full. (?) + +8. Retrieving/reporting FDDI/SNMP stats. + + +Both success and failure reports are welcome. + +Maciej W. Rozycki <macro@orcam.me.uk> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0b75294e6c8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Device Drivers +====================================================== + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + defza + skfp + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/skfp.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/skfp.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..58f548105c1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/skfp.rst @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +======================== +SysKonnect driver - SKFP +======================== + +|copy| Copyright 1998-2000 SysKonnect, + +skfp.txt created 11-May-2000 + +Readme File for skfp.o v2.06 + + +.. This file contains + + (1) OVERVIEW + (2) SUPPORTED ADAPTERS + (3) GENERAL INFORMATION + (4) INSTALLATION + (5) INCLUSION OF THE ADAPTER IN SYSTEM START + (6) TROUBLESHOOTING + (7) FUNCTION OF THE ADAPTER LEDS + (8) HISTORY + + +1. Overview +=========== + +This README explains how to use the driver 'skfp' for Linux with your +network adapter. + +Chapter 2: Contains a list of all network adapters that are supported by +this driver. + +Chapter 3: + Gives some general information. + +Chapter 4: Describes common problems and solutions. + +Chapter 5: Shows the changed functionality of the adapter LEDs. + +Chapter 6: History of development. + + +2. Supported adapters +===================== + +The network driver 'skfp' supports the following network adapters: +SysKonnect adapters: + + - SK-5521 (SK-NET FDDI-UP) + - SK-5522 (SK-NET FDDI-UP DAS) + - SK-5541 (SK-NET FDDI-FP) + - SK-5543 (SK-NET FDDI-LP) + - SK-5544 (SK-NET FDDI-LP DAS) + - SK-5821 (SK-NET FDDI-UP64) + - SK-5822 (SK-NET FDDI-UP64 DAS) + - SK-5841 (SK-NET FDDI-FP64) + - SK-5843 (SK-NET FDDI-LP64) + - SK-5844 (SK-NET FDDI-LP64 DAS) + +Compaq adapters (not tested): + + - Netelligent 100 FDDI DAS Fibre SC + - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS Fibre SC + - Netelligent 100 FDDI DAS UTP + - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS UTP + - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS Fibre MIC + + +3. General Information +====================== + +From v2.01 on, the driver is integrated in the linux kernel sources. +Therefore, the installation is the same as for any other adapter +supported by the kernel. + +Refer to the manual of your distribution about the installation +of network adapters. + +Makes my life much easier :-) + +4. Troubleshooting +================== + +If you run into problems during installation, check those items: + +Problem: + The FDDI adapter cannot be found by the driver. + +Reason: + Look in /proc/pci for the following entry: + + 'FDDI network controller: SysKonnect SK-FDDI-PCI ...' + + If this entry exists, then the FDDI adapter has been + found by the system and should be able to be used. + + If this entry does not exist or if the file '/proc/pci' + is not there, then you may have a hardware problem or PCI + support may not be enabled in your kernel. + + The adapter can be checked using the diagnostic program + which is available from the SysKonnect web site: + + www.syskonnect.de + + Some COMPAQ machines have a problem with PCI under + Linux. This is described in the 'PCI howto' document + (included in some distributions or available from the + www, e.g. at 'www.linux.org') and no workaround is available. + +Problem: + You want to use your computer as a router between + multiple IP subnetworks (using multiple adapters), but + you cannot reach computers in other subnetworks. + +Reason: + Either the router's kernel is not configured for IP + forwarding or there is a problem with the routing table + and gateway configuration in at least one of the + computers. + +If your problem is not listed here, please contact our +technical support for help. + +You can send email to: linux@syskonnect.de + +When contacting our technical support, +please ensure that the following information is available: + +- System Manufacturer and Model +- Boards in your system +- Distribution +- Kernel version + + +5. Function of the Adapter LEDs +=============================== + + The functionality of the LED's on the FDDI network adapters was + changed in SMT version v2.82. With this new SMT version, the yellow + LED works as a ring operational indicator. An active yellow LED + indicates that the ring is down. The green LED on the adapter now + works as a link indicator where an active GREEN LED indicates that + the respective port has a physical connection. + + With versions of SMT prior to v2.82 a ring up was indicated if the + yellow LED was off while the green LED(s) showed the connection + status of the adapter. During a ring down the green LED was off and + the yellow LED was on. + + All implementations indicate that a driver is not loaded if + all LEDs are off. + + +6. History +========== + +v2.06 (20000511) (In-Kernel version) + New features: + + - 64 bit support + - new pci dma interface + - in kernel 2.3.99 + +v2.05 (20000217) (In-Kernel version) + New features: + + - Changes for 2.3.45 kernel + +v2.04 (20000207) (Standalone version) + New features: + + - Added rx/tx byte counter + +v2.03 (20000111) (Standalone version) + Problems fixed: + + - Fixed printk statements from v2.02 + +v2.02 (991215) (Standalone version) + Problems fixed: + + - Removed unnecessary output + - Fixed path for "printver.sh" in makefile + +v2.01 (991122) (In-Kernel version) + New features: + + - Integration in Linux kernel sources + - Support for memory mapped I/O. + +v2.00 (991112) + New features: + + - Full source released under GPL + +v1.05 (991023) + Problems fixed: + + - Compilation with kernel version 2.2.13 failed + +v1.04 (990427) + Changes: + + - New SMT module included, changing LED functionality + + Problems fixed: + + - Synchronization on SMP machines was buggy + +v1.03 (990325) + Problems fixed: + + - Interrupt routing on SMP machines could be incorrect + +v1.02 (990310) + New features: + + - Support for kernel versions 2.2.x added + - Kernel patch instead of private duplicate of kernel functions + +v1.01 (980812) + Problems fixed: + + Connection hangup with telnet + Slow telnet connection + +v1.00 beta 01 (980507) + New features: + + None. + + Problems fixed: + + None. + + Known limitations: + + - tar archive instead of standard package format (rpm). + - FDDI statistic is empty. + - not tested with 2.1.xx kernels + - integration in kernel not tested + - not tested simultaneously with FDDI adapters from other vendors. + - only X86 processors supported. + - SBA (Synchronous Bandwidth Allocator) parameters can + not be configured. + - does not work on some COMPAQ machines. See the PCI howto + document for details about this problem. + - data corruption with kernel versions below 2.0.33. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa.txt deleted file mode 100644 index b06601ff9200..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,260 +0,0 @@ -The QorIQ DPAA Ethernet Driver -============================== - -Authors: -Madalin Bucur <madalin.bucur@nxp.com> -Camelia Groza <camelia.groza@nxp.com> - -Contents -======== - - - DPAA Ethernet Overview - - DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs - - Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel - - DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing - - DPAA Ethernet Features - - DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling - - Debugging - -DPAA Ethernet Overview -====================== - -DPAA stands for Data Path Acceleration Architecture and it is a -set of networking acceleration IPs that are available on several -generations of SoCs, both on PowerPC and ARM64. - -The Freescale DPAA architecture consists of a series of hardware blocks -that support Ethernet connectivity. The Ethernet driver depends upon the -following drivers in the Linux kernel: - - - Peripheral Access Memory Unit (PAMU) (* needed only for PPC platforms) - drivers/iommu/fsl_* - - Frame Manager (FMan) - drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fman - - Queue Manager (QMan), Buffer Manager (BMan) - drivers/soc/fsl/qbman - -A simplified view of the dpaa_eth interfaces mapped to FMan MACs: - - dpaa_eth /eth0\ ... /ethN\ - driver | | | | - ------------- ---- ----------- ---- ------------- - -Ports / Tx Rx \ ... / Tx Rx \ - FMan | | | | - -MACs | MAC0 | | MACN | - / dtsec0 \ ... / dtsecN \ (or tgec) - / \ / \(or memac) - --------- -------------- --- -------------- --------- - FMan, FMan Port, FMan SP, FMan MURAM drivers - --------------------------------------------------------- - FMan HW blocks: MURAM, MACs, Ports, SP - --------------------------------------------------------- - -The dpaa_eth relation to the QMan, BMan and FMan: - ________________________________ - dpaa_eth / eth0 \ - driver / \ - --------- -^- -^- -^- --- --------- - QMan driver / \ / \ / \ \ / | BMan | - |Rx | |Rx | |Tx | |Tx | | driver | - --------- |Dfl| |Err| |Cnf| |FQs| | | - QMan HW |FQ | |FQ | |FQs| | | | | - / \ / \ / \ \ / | | - --------- --- --- --- -v- --------- - | FMan QMI | | - | FMan HW FMan BMI | BMan HW | - ----------------------- -------- - -where the acronyms used above (and in the code) are: -DPAA = Data Path Acceleration Architecture -FMan = DPAA Frame Manager -QMan = DPAA Queue Manager -BMan = DPAA Buffers Manager -QMI = QMan interface in FMan -BMI = BMan interface in FMan -FMan SP = FMan Storage Profiles -MURAM = Multi-user RAM in FMan -FQ = QMan Frame Queue -Rx Dfl FQ = default reception FQ -Rx Err FQ = Rx error frames FQ -Tx Cnf FQ = Tx confirmation FQs -Tx FQs = transmission frame queues -dtsec = datapath three speed Ethernet controller (10/100/1000 Mbps) -tgec = ten gigabit Ethernet controller (10 Gbps) -memac = multirate Ethernet MAC (10/100/1000/10000) - -DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs -============================ - -The DPAA drivers enable the Ethernet controllers present on the following SoCs: - -# PPC -P1023 -P2041 -P3041 -P4080 -P5020 -P5040 -T1023 -T1024 -T1040 -T1042 -T2080 -T4240 -B4860 - -# ARM -LS1043A -LS1046A - -Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel -======================================== - -To enable the DPAA Ethernet driver, the following Kconfig options are required: - -# common for arch/arm64 and arch/powerpc platforms -CONFIG_FSL_DPAA=y -CONFIG_FSL_FMAN=y -CONFIG_FSL_DPAA_ETH=y -CONFIG_FSL_XGMAC_MDIO=y - -# for arch/powerpc only -CONFIG_FSL_PAMU=y - -# common options needed for the PHYs used on the RDBs -CONFIG_VITESSE_PHY=y -CONFIG_REALTEK_PHY=y -CONFIG_AQUANTIA_PHY=y - -DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing -============================== - -On Rx, buffers for the incoming frames are retrieved from the buffers found -in the dedicated interface buffer pool. The driver initializes and seeds these -with one page buffers. - -On Tx, all transmitted frames are returned to the driver through Tx -confirmation frame queues. The driver is then responsible for freeing the -buffers. In order to do this properly, a backpointer is added to the buffer -before transmission that points to the skb. When the buffer returns to the -driver on a confirmation FQ, the skb can be correctly consumed. - -DPAA Ethernet Features -====================== - -Currently the DPAA Ethernet driver enables the basic features required for -a Linux Ethernet driver. The support for advanced features will be added -gradually. - -The driver has Rx and Tx checksum offloading for UDP and TCP. Currently the Rx -checksum offload feature is enabled by default and cannot be controlled through -ethtool. Also, rx-flow-hash and rx-hashing was added. The addition of RSS -provides a big performance boost for the forwarding scenarios, allowing -different traffic flows received by one interface to be processed by different -CPUs in parallel. - -The driver has support for multiple prioritized Tx traffic classes. Priorities -range from 0 (lowest) to 3 (highest). These are mapped to HW workqueues with -strict priority levels. Each traffic class contains NR_CPU TX queues. By -default, only one traffic class is enabled and the lowest priority Tx queues -are used. Higher priority traffic classes can be enabled with the mqprio -qdisc. For example, all four traffic classes are enabled on an interface with -the following command. Furthermore, skb priority levels are mapped to traffic -classes as follows: - - * priorities 0 to 3 - traffic class 0 (low priority) - * priorities 4 to 7 - traffic class 1 (medium-low priority) - * priorities 8 to 11 - traffic class 2 (medium-high priority) - * priorities 12 to 15 - traffic class 3 (high priority) - -tc qdisc add dev <int> root handle 1: \ - mqprio num_tc 4 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 hw 1 - -DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling -========================================== - -Traffic coming on the DPAA Rx queues or on the DPAA Tx confirmation -queues is seen by the CPU as ingress traffic on a certain portal. -The DPAA QMan portal interrupts are affined each to a certain CPU. -The same portal interrupt services all the QMan portal consumers. - -By default the DPAA Ethernet driver enables RSS, making use of the -DPAA FMan Parser and Keygen blocks to distribute traffic on 128 -hardware frame queues using a hash on IP v4/v6 source and destination -and L4 source and destination ports, in present in the received frame. -When RSS is disabled, all traffic received by a certain interface is -received on the default Rx frame queue. The default DPAA Rx frame -queues are configured to put the received traffic into a pool channel -that allows any available CPU portal to dequeue the ingress traffic. -The default frame queues have the HOLDACTIVE option set, ensuring that -traffic bursts from a certain queue are serviced by the same CPU. -This ensures a very low rate of frame reordering. A drawback of this -is that only one CPU at a time can service the traffic received by a -certain interface when RSS is not enabled. - -To implement RSS, the DPAA Ethernet driver allocates an extra set of -128 Rx frame queues that are configured to dedicated channels, in a -round-robin manner. The mapping of the frame queues to CPUs is now -hardcoded, there is no indirection table to move traffic for a certain -FQ (hash result) to another CPU. The ingress traffic arriving on one -of these frame queues will arrive at the same portal and will always -be processed by the same CPU. This ensures intra-flow order preservation -and workload distribution for multiple traffic flows. - -RSS can be turned off for a certain interface using ethtool, i.e. - - # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash tcp4 "" - -To turn it back on, one needs to set rx-flow-hash for tcp4/6 or udp4/6: - - # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash udp4 sfdn - -There is no independent control for individual protocols, any command -run for one of tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 is -going to control the rx-flow-hashing for all protocols on that interface. - -Besides using the FMan Keygen computed hash for spreading traffic on the -128 Rx FQs, the DPAA Ethernet driver also sets the skb hash value when -the NETIF_F_RXHASH feature is on (active by default). This can be turned -on or off through ethtool, i.e.: - - # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing off - # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash - receive-hashing: off - # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing on - Actual changes: - receive-hashing: on - # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash - receive-hashing: on - -Please note that Rx hashing depends upon the rx-flow-hashing being on -for that interface - turning off rx-flow-hashing will also disable the -rx-hashing (without ethtool reporting it as off as that depends on the -NETIF_F_RXHASH feature flag). - -Debugging -========= - -The following statistics are exported for each interface through ethtool: - - - interrupt count per CPU - - Rx packets count per CPU - - Tx packets count per CPU - - Tx confirmed packets count per CPU - - Tx S/G frames count per CPU - - Tx error count per CPU - - Rx error count per CPU - - Rx error count per type - - congestion related statistics: - - congestion status - - time spent in congestion - - number of time the device entered congestion - - dropped packets count per cause - -The driver also exports the following information in sysfs: - - - the FQ IDs for each FQ type - /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/fqids - - - the ID of the buffer pool in use - /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/bpids diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst deleted file mode 100644 index ee40fcc5ddff..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,11 +0,0 @@ -=================== -DPAA2 Documentation -=================== - -.. toctree:: - :maxdepth: 1 - - overview - dpio-driver - ethernet-driver - mac-phy-support diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst deleted file mode 100644 index d638b5a8aadd..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,405 +0,0 @@ -.. include:: <isonum.txt> - -========================================================= -DPAA2 (Data Path Acceleration Architecture Gen2) Overview -========================================================= - -:Copyright: |copy| 2015 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. -:Copyright: |copy| 2018 NXP - -This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 architecture -and how it is integrated into the Linux kernel. - -Introduction -============ - -DPAA2 is a hardware architecture designed for high-speeed network -packet processing. DPAA2 consists of sophisticated mechanisms for -processing Ethernet packets, queue management, buffer management, -autonomous L2 switching, virtual Ethernet bridging, and accelerator -(e.g. crypto) sharing. - -A DPAA2 hardware component called the Management Complex (or MC) manages the -DPAA2 hardware resources. The MC provides an object-based abstraction for -software drivers to use the DPAA2 hardware. -The MC uses DPAA2 hardware resources such as queues, buffer pools, and -network ports to create functional objects/devices such as network -interfaces, an L2 switch, or accelerator instances. -The MC provides memory-mapped I/O command interfaces (MC portals) -which DPAA2 software drivers use to operate on DPAA2 objects. - -The diagram below shows an overview of the DPAA2 resource management -architecture:: - - +--------------------------------------+ - | OS | - | DPAA2 drivers | - | | | - +-----------------------------|--------+ - | - | (create,discover,connect - | config,use,destroy) - | - DPAA2 | - +------------------------| mc portal |-+ - | | | - | +- - - - - - - - - - - - -V- - -+ | - | | | | - | | Management Complex (MC) | | - | | | | - | +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -+ | - | | - | Hardware Hardware | - | Resources Objects | - | --------- ------- | - | -queues -DPRC | - | -buffer pools -DPMCP | - | -Eth MACs/ports -DPIO | - | -network interface -DPNI | - | profiles -DPMAC | - | -queue portals -DPBP | - | -MC portals ... | - | ... | - | | - +--------------------------------------+ - - -The MC mediates operations such as create, discover, -connect, configuration, and destroy. Fast-path operations -on data, such as packet transmit/receive, are not mediated by -the MC and are done directly using memory mapped regions in -DPIO objects. - -Overview of DPAA2 Objects -========================= - -The section provides a brief overview of some key DPAA2 objects. -A simple scenario is described illustrating the objects involved -in creating a network interfaces. - -DPRC (Datapath Resource Container) ----------------------------------- - -A DPRC is a container object that holds all the other -types of DPAA2 objects. In the example diagram below there -are 8 objects of 5 types (DPMCP, DPIO, DPBP, DPNI, and DPMAC) -in the container. - -:: - - +---------------------------------------------------------+ - | DPRC | - | | - | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ | - | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPMAC | | - | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +---+---+ +---+---+ | - | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | - | +-------+ +-------+ | - | | DPMCP | | - | +-------+ | - | | - +---------------------------------------------------------+ - -From the point of view of an OS, a DPRC behaves similar to a plug and -play bus, like PCI. DPRC commands can be used to enumerate the contents -of the DPRC, discover the hardware objects present (including mappable -regions and interrupts). - -:: - - DPRC.1 (bus) - | - +--+--------+-------+-------+-------+ - | | | | | - DPMCP.1 DPIO.1 DPBP.1 DPNI.1 DPMAC.1 - DPMCP.2 DPIO.2 - DPMCP.3 - -Hardware objects can be created and destroyed dynamically, providing -the ability to hot plug/unplug objects in and out of the DPRC. - -A DPRC has a mappable MMIO region (an MC portal) that can be used -to send MC commands. It has an interrupt for status events (like -hotplug). -All objects in a container share the same hardware "isolation context". -This means that with respect to an IOMMU the isolation granularity -is at the DPRC (container) level, not at the individual object -level. - -DPRCs can be defined statically and populated with objects -via a config file passed to the MC when firmware starts it. - -DPAA2 Objects for an Ethernet Network Interface ------------------------------------------------ - -A typical Ethernet NIC is monolithic-- the NIC device contains TX/RX -queuing mechanisms, configuration mechanisms, buffer management, -physical ports, and interrupts. DPAA2 uses a more granular approach -utilizing multiple hardware objects. Each object provides specialized -functions. Groups of these objects are used by software to provide -Ethernet network interface functionality. This approach provides -efficient use of finite hardware resources, flexibility, and -performance advantages. - -The diagram below shows the objects needed for a simple -network interface configuration on a system with 2 CPUs. - -:: - - +---+---+ +---+---+ - CPU0 CPU1 - +---+---+ +---+---+ - | | - +---+---+ +---+---+ - DPIO DPIO - +---+---+ +---+---+ - \ / - \ / - \ / - +---+---+ - DPNI --- DPBP,DPMCP - +---+---+ - | - | - +---+---+ - DPMAC - +---+---+ - | - port/PHY - -Below the objects are described. For each object a brief description -is provided along with a summary of the kinds of operations the object -supports and a summary of key resources of the object (MMIO regions -and IRQs). - -DPMAC (Datapath Ethernet MAC) -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -Represents an Ethernet MAC, a hardware device that connects to an Ethernet -PHY and allows physical transmission and reception of Ethernet frames. - -- MMIO regions: none -- IRQs: DPNI link change -- commands: set link up/down, link config, get stats, - IRQ config, enable, reset - -DPNI (Datapath Network Interface) -Contains TX/RX queues, network interface configuration, and RX buffer pool -configuration mechanisms. The TX/RX queues are in memory and are identified -by queue number. - -- MMIO regions: none -- IRQs: link state -- commands: port config, offload config, queue config, - parse/classify config, IRQ config, enable, reset - -DPIO (Datapath I/O) -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -Provides interfaces to enqueue and dequeue -packets and do hardware buffer pool management operations. The DPAA2 -architecture separates the mechanism to access queues (the DPIO object) -from the queues themselves. The DPIO provides an MMIO interface to -enqueue/dequeue packets. To enqueue something a descriptor is written -to the DPIO MMIO region, which includes the target queue number. -There will typically be one DPIO assigned to each CPU. This allows all -CPUs to simultaneously perform enqueue/dequeued operations. DPIOs are -expected to be shared by different DPAA2 drivers. - -- MMIO regions: queue operations, buffer management -- IRQs: data availability, congestion notification, buffer - pool depletion -- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset - -DPBP (Datapath Buffer Pool) -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -Represents a hardware buffer pool. - -- MMIO regions: none -- IRQs: none -- commands: enable, reset - -DPMCP (Datapath MC Portal) -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -Provides an MC command portal. -Used by drivers to send commands to the MC to manage -objects. - -- MMIO regions: MC command portal -- IRQs: command completion -- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset - -Object Connections -================== -Some objects have explicit relationships that must -be configured: - -- DPNI <--> DPMAC -- DPNI <--> DPNI -- DPNI <--> L2-switch-port - - A DPNI must be connected to something such as a DPMAC, - another DPNI, or L2 switch port. The DPNI connection - is made via a DPRC command. - -:: - - +-------+ +-------+ - | DPNI | | DPMAC | - +---+---+ +---+---+ - | | - +==========+ - -- DPNI <--> DPBP - - A network interface requires a 'buffer pool' (DPBP - object) which provides a list of pointers to memory - where received Ethernet data is to be copied. The - Ethernet driver configures the DPBPs associated with - the network interface. - -Interrupts -========== -All interrupts generated by DPAA2 objects are message -interrupts. At the hardware level message interrupts -generated by devices will normally have 3 components-- -1) a non-spoofable 'device-id' expressed on the hardware -bus, 2) an address, 3) a data value. - -In the case of DPAA2 devices/objects, all objects in the -same container/DPRC share the same 'device-id'. -For ARM-based SoC this is the same as the stream ID. - - -DPAA2 Linux Drivers Overview -============================ - -This section provides an overview of the Linux kernel drivers for -DPAA2-- 1) the bus driver and associated "DPAA2 infrastructure" -drivers and 2) functional object drivers (such as Ethernet). - -As described previously, a DPRC is a container that holds the other -types of DPAA2 objects. It is functionally similar to a plug-and-play -bus controller. -Each object in the DPRC is a Linux "device" and is bound to a driver. -The diagram below shows the Linux drivers involved in a networking -scenario and the objects bound to each driver. A brief description -of each driver follows. - -:: - - +------------+ - | OS Network | - | Stack | - +------------+ +------------+ - | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet | - |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) | - +-.----------+ +---+---+----+ - . . ^ | - . . <data avail, | | <enqueue, - . . tx confirm> | | dequeue> - +-------------+ . | | - | DPRC driver | . +---+---V----+ +---------+ - | (DPRC) | . . . . . .| DPIO driver| | MAC | - +----------+--+ | (DPIO) | | (DPMAC) | - | +------+-----+ +-----+---+ - |<dev add/remove> | | - | | | - +--------+----------+ | +--+---+ - | MC-bus driver | | | PHY | - | | | |driver| - | /bus/fsl-mc | | +--+---+ - +-------------------+ | | - | | - ========================= HARDWARE =========|=================|====== - DPIO | - | | - DPNI---DPBP | - | | - DPMAC | - | | - PHY ---------------+ - ============================================|======================== - -A brief description of each driver is provided below. - -MC-bus driver -------------- -The MC-bus driver is a platform driver and is probed from a -node in the device tree (compatible "fsl,qoriq-mc") passed in by boot -firmware. It is responsible for bootstrapping the DPAA2 kernel -infrastructure. -Key functions include: - -- registering a new bus type named "fsl-mc" with the kernel, - and implementing bus call-backs (e.g. match/uevent/dev_groups) -- implementing APIs for DPAA2 driver registration and for device - add/remove -- creates an MSI IRQ domain -- doing a 'device add' to expose the 'root' DPRC, in turn triggering - a bind of the root DPRC to the DPRC driver - -The binding for the MC-bus device-tree node can be consulted at -*Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/fsl,qoriq-mc.txt*. -The sysfs bind/unbind interfaces for the MC-bus can be consulted at -*Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fsl-mc*. - -DPRC driver ------------ -The DPRC driver is bound to DPRC objects and does runtime management -of a bus instance. It performs the initial bus scan of the DPRC -and handles interrupts for container events such as hot plug by -re-scanning the DPRC. - -Allocator ---------- -Certain objects such as DPMCP and DPBP are generic and fungible, -and are intended to be used by other drivers. For example, -the DPAA2 Ethernet driver needs: - -- DPMCPs to send MC commands, to configure network interfaces -- DPBPs for network buffer pools - -The allocator driver registers for these allocatable object types -and those objects are bound to the allocator when the bus is probed. -The allocator maintains a pool of objects that are available for -allocation by other DPAA2 drivers. - -DPIO driver ------------ -The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects and provides services that allow -other drivers such as the Ethernet driver to enqueue and dequeue data for -their respective objects. -Key services include: - -- data availability notifications -- hardware queuing operations (enqueue and dequeue of data) -- hardware buffer pool management - -To transmit a packet the Ethernet driver puts data on a queue and -invokes a DPIO API. For receive, the Ethernet driver registers -a data availability notification callback. To dequeue a packet -a DPIO API is used. -There is typically one DPIO object per physical CPU for optimum -performance, allowing different CPUs to simultaneously enqueue -and dequeue data. - -The DPIO driver operates on behalf of all DPAA2 drivers -active in the kernel-- Ethernet, crypto, compression, -etc. - -Ethernet driver ---------------- -The Ethernet driver is bound to a DPNI and implements the kernel -interfaces needed to connect the DPAA2 network interface to -the network stack. -Each DPNI corresponds to a Linux network interface. - -MAC driver ----------- -An Ethernet PHY is an off-chip, board specific component and is managed -by the appropriate PHY driver via an mdio bus. The MAC driver -plays a role of being a proxy between the PHY driver and the -MC. It does this proxy via the MC commands to a DPMAC object. -If the PHY driver signals a link change, the MAC driver notifies -the MC via a DPMAC command. If a network interface is brought -up or down, the MC notifies the DPMAC driver via an interrupt and -the driver can take appropriate action. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/gianfar.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/gianfar.txt deleted file mode 100644 index ba1daea7f2e4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/gianfar.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -The Gianfar Ethernet Driver - -Author: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com> -Updated: 2005-07-28 - - -CHECKSUM OFFLOADING - -The eTSEC controller (first included in parts from late 2005 like -the 8548) has the ability to perform TCP, UDP, and IP checksums -in hardware. The Linux kernel only offloads the TCP and UDP -checksums (and always performs the pseudo header checksums), so -the driver only supports checksumming for TCP/IP and UDP/IP -packets. Use ethtool to enable or disable this feature for RX -and TX. - -VLAN - -In order to use VLAN, please consult Linux documentation on -configuring VLANs. The gianfar driver supports hardware insertion and -extraction of VLAN headers, but not filtering. Filtering will be -done by the kernel. - -MULTICASTING - -The gianfar driver supports using the group hash table on the -TSEC (and the extended hash table on the eTSEC) for multicast -filtering. On the eTSEC, the exact-match MAC registers are used -before the hash tables. See Linux documentation on how to join -multicast groups. - -PADDING - -The gianfar driver supports padding received frames with 2 bytes -to align the IP header to a 16-byte boundary, when supported by -hardware. - -ETHTOOL - -The gianfar driver supports the use of ethtool for many -configuration options. You must run ethtool only on currently -open interfaces. See ethtool documentation for details. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/google/gve.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/google/gve.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 793693cef6e3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/google/gve.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ - -============================================================== -Linux kernel driver for Compute Engine Virtual Ethernet (gve): -============================================================== - -Supported Hardware -=================== -The GVE driver binds to a single PCI device id used by the virtual -Ethernet device found in some Compute Engine VMs. - -+--------------+----------+---------+ -|Field | Value | Comments| -+==============+==========+=========+ -|Vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google | -+--------------+----------+---------+ -|Device ID | `0x0042` | | -+--------------+----------+---------+ -|Sub-vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google | -+--------------+----------+---------+ -|Sub-device ID | `0x0058` | | -+--------------+----------+---------+ -|Revision ID | `0x0` | | -+--------------+----------+---------+ -|Device Class | `0x200` | Ethernet| -+--------------+----------+---------+ - -PCI Bars -======== -The gVNIC PCI device exposes three 32-bit memory BARS: -- Bar0 - Device configuration and status registers. -- Bar1 - MSI-X vector table -- Bar2 - IRQ, RX and TX doorbells - -Device Interactions -=================== -The driver interacts with the device in the following ways: - - Registers - - A block of MMIO registers - - See gve_register.h for more detail - - Admin Queue - - See description below - - Reset - - At any time the device can be reset - - Interrupts - - See supported interrupts below - - Transmit and Receive Queues - - See description below - -Registers ---------- -All registers are MMIO and big endian. - -The registers are used for initializing and configuring the device as well as -querying device status in response to management interrupts. - -Admin Queue (AQ) ----------------- -The Admin Queue is a PAGE_SIZE memory block, treated as an array of AQ -commands, used by the driver to issue commands to the device and set up -resources.The driver and the device maintain a count of how many commands -have been submitted and executed. To issue AQ commands, the driver must do -the following (with proper locking): - -1) Copy new commands into next available slots in the AQ array -2) Increment its counter by he number of new commands -3) Write the counter into the GVE_ADMIN_QUEUE_DOORBELL register -4) Poll the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register until it equals - the value written to the doorbell, or until a timeout. - -The device will update the status field in each AQ command reported as -executed through the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register. - -Device Resets -------------- -A device reset is triggered by writing 0x0 to the AQ PFN register. -This causes the device to release all resources allocated by the -driver, including the AQ itself. - -Interrupts ----------- -The following interrupts are supported by the driver: - -Management Interrupt -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -The management interrupt is used by the device to tell the driver to -look at the GVE_DEVICE_STATUS register. - -The handler for the management irq simply queues the service task in -the workqueue to check the register and acks the irq. - -Notification Block Interrupts -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -The notification block interrupts are used to tell the driver to poll -the queues associated with that interrupt. - -The handler for these irqs schedule the napi for that block to run -and poll the queues. - -Traffic Queues --------------- -gVNIC's queues are composed of a descriptor ring and a buffer and are -assigned to a notification block. - -The descriptor rings are power-of-two-sized ring buffers consisting of -fixed-size descriptors. They advance their head pointer using a __be32 -doorbell located in Bar2. The tail pointers are advanced by consuming -descriptors in-order and updating a __be32 counter. Both the doorbell -and the counter overflow to zero. - -Each queue's buffers must be registered in advance with the device as a -queue page list, and packet data can only be put in those pages. - -Transmit -~~~~~~~~ -gve maps the buffers for transmit rings into a FIFO and copies the packets -into the FIFO before sending them to the NIC. - -Receive -~~~~~~~ -The buffers for receive rings are put into a data ring that is the same -length as the descriptor ring and the head and tail pointers advance over -the rings together. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/baycom.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/baycom.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fe2d010f0e86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/baycom.rst @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=============================== +Linux Drivers for Baycom Modems +=============================== + +Thomas M. Sailer, HB9JNX/AE4WA, <sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch> + +The drivers for the baycom modems have been split into +separate drivers as they did not share any code, and the driver +and device names have changed. + +This document describes the Linux Kernel Drivers for simple Baycom style +amateur radio modems. + +The following drivers are available: +==================================== + +baycom_ser_fdx: + This driver supports the SER12 modems either full or half duplex. + Its baud rate may be changed via the ``baud`` module parameter, + therefore it supports just about every bit bang modem on a + serial port. Its devices are called bcsf0 through bcsf3. + This is the recommended driver for SER12 type modems, + however if you have a broken UART clone that does not have working + delta status bits, you may try baycom_ser_hdx. + +baycom_ser_hdx: + This is an alternative driver for SER12 type modems. + It only supports half duplex, and only 1200 baud. Its devices + are called bcsh0 through bcsh3. Use this driver only if baycom_ser_fdx + does not work with your UART. + +baycom_par: + This driver supports the par96 and picpar modems. + Its devices are called bcp0 through bcp3. + +baycom_epp: + This driver supports the EPP modem. + Its devices are called bce0 through bce3. + This driver is work-in-progress. + +The following modems are supported: + +======= ======================================================================== +ser12 This is a very simple 1200 baud AFSK modem. The modem consists only + of a modulator/demodulator chip, usually a TI TCM3105. The computer + is responsible for regenerating the receiver bit clock, as well as + for handling the HDLC protocol. The modem connects to a serial port, + hence the name. Since the serial port is not used as an async serial + port, the kernel driver for serial ports cannot be used, and this + driver only supports standard serial hardware (8250, 16450, 16550) + +par96 This is a modem for 9600 baud FSK compatible to the G3RUH standard. + The modem does all the filtering and regenerates the receiver clock. + Data is transferred from and to the PC via a shift register. + The shift register is filled with 16 bits and an interrupt is signalled. + The PC then empties the shift register in a burst. This modem connects + to the parallel port, hence the name. The modem leaves the + implementation of the HDLC protocol and the scrambler polynomial to + the PC. + +picpar This is a redesign of the par96 modem by Henning Rech, DF9IC. The modem + is protocol compatible to par96, but uses only three low power ICs + and can therefore be fed from the parallel port and does not require + an additional power supply. Furthermore, it incorporates a carrier + detect circuitry. + +EPP This is a high-speed modem adaptor that connects to an enhanced parallel + port. + + Its target audience is users working over a high speed hub (76.8kbit/s). + +eppfpga This is a redesign of the EPP adaptor. +======= ======================================================================== + +All of the above modems only support half duplex communications. However, +the driver supports the KISS (see below) fullduplex command. It then simply +starts to send as soon as there's a packet to transmit and does not care +about DCD, i.e. it starts to send even if there's someone else on the channel. +This command is required by some implementations of the DAMA channel +access protocol. + + +The Interface of the drivers +============================ + +Unlike previous drivers, these drivers are no longer character devices, +but they are now true kernel network interfaces. Installation is therefore +simple. Once installed, four interfaces named bc{sf,sh,p,e}[0-3] are available. +sethdlc from the ax25 utilities may be used to set driver states etc. +Users of userland AX.25 stacks may use the net2kiss utility (also available +in the ax25 utilities package) to convert packets of a network interface +to a KISS stream on a pseudo tty. There's also a patch available from +me for WAMPES which allows attaching a kernel network interface directly. + + +Configuring the driver +====================== + +Every time a driver is inserted into the kernel, it has to know which +modems it should access at which ports. This can be done with the setbaycom +utility. If you are only using one modem, you can also configure the +driver from the insmod command line (or by means of an option line in +``/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf``). + +Examples:: + + modprobe baycom_ser_fdx mode="ser12*" iobase=0x3f8 irq=4 + sethdlc -i bcsf0 -p mode "ser12*" io 0x3f8 irq 4 + +Both lines configure the first port to drive a ser12 modem at the first +serial port (COM1 under DOS). The * in the mode parameter instructs the driver +to use the software DCD algorithm (see below):: + + insmod baycom_par mode="picpar" iobase=0x378 + sethdlc -i bcp0 -p mode "picpar" io 0x378 + +Both lines configure the first port to drive a picpar modem at the +first parallel port (LPT1 under DOS). (Note: picpar implies +hardware DCD, par96 implies software DCD). + +The channel access parameters can be set with sethdlc -a or kissparms. +Note that both utilities interpret the values slightly differently. + + +Hardware DCD versus Software DCD +================================ + +To avoid collisions on the air, the driver must know when the channel is +busy. This is the task of the DCD circuitry/software. The driver may either +utilise a software DCD algorithm (options=1) or use a DCD signal from +the hardware (options=0). + +======= ================================================================= +ser12 if software DCD is utilised, the radio's squelch should always be + open. It is highly recommended to use the software DCD algorithm, + as it is much faster than most hardware squelch circuitry. The + disadvantage is a slightly higher load on the system. + +par96 the software DCD algorithm for this type of modem is rather poor. + The modem simply does not provide enough information to implement + a reasonable DCD algorithm in software. Therefore, if your radio + feeds the DCD input of the PAR96 modem, the use of the hardware + DCD circuitry is recommended. + +picpar the picpar modem features a builtin DCD hardware, which is highly + recommended. +======= ================================================================= + + + +Compatibility with the rest of the Linux kernel +=============================================== + +The serial driver and the baycom serial drivers compete +for the same hardware resources. Of course only one driver can access a given +interface at a time. The serial driver grabs all interfaces it can find at +startup time. Therefore the baycom drivers subsequently won't be able to +access a serial port. You might therefore find it necessary to release +a port owned by the serial driver with 'setserial /dev/ttyS# uart none', where +# is the number of the interface. The baycom drivers do not reserve any +ports at startup, unless one is specified on the 'insmod' command line. Another +method to solve the problem is to compile all drivers as modules and +leave it to kmod to load the correct driver depending on the application. + +The parallel port drivers (baycom_par, baycom_epp) now use the parport subsystem +to arbitrate the ports between different client drivers. + +vy 73s de + +Tom Sailer, sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch + +hb9jnx @ hb9w.ampr.org diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7e731732057b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Amateur Radio Device Drivers +============================ + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + baycom + z8530drv + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/z8530drv.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/z8530drv.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d2942760f167 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/z8530drv.rst @@ -0,0 +1,686 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +========================================================= +SCC.C - Linux driver for Z8530 based HDLC cards for AX.25 +========================================================= + + +This is a subset of the documentation. To use this driver you MUST have the +full package from: + +Internet: + + 1. ftp://ftp.ccac.rwth-aachen.de/pub/jr/z8530drv-utils_3.0-3.tar.gz + + 2. ftp://ftp.pspt.fi/pub/ham/linux/ax25/z8530drv-utils_3.0-3.tar.gz + +Please note that the information in this document may be hopelessly outdated. +A new version of the documentation, along with links to other important +Linux Kernel AX.25 documentation and programs, is available on +http://yaina.de/jreuter + +Copyright |copy| 1993,2000 by Joerg Reuter DL1BKE <jreuter@yaina.de> + +portions Copyright |copy| 1993 Guido ten Dolle PE1NNZ + +for the complete copyright notice see >> Copying.Z8530DRV << + +1. Initialization of the driver +=============================== + +To use the driver, 3 steps must be performed: + + 1. if compiled as module: loading the module + 2. Setup of hardware, MODEM and KISS parameters with sccinit + 3. Attach each channel to the Linux kernel AX.25 with "ifconfig" + +Unlike the versions below 2.4 this driver is a real network device +driver. If you want to run xNOS instead of our fine kernel AX.25 +use a 2.x version (available from above sites) or read the +AX.25-HOWTO on how to emulate a KISS TNC on network device drivers. + + +1.1 Loading the module +====================== + +(If you're going to compile the driver as a part of the kernel image, + skip this chapter and continue with 1.2) + +Before you can use a module, you'll have to load it with:: + + insmod scc.o + +please read 'man insmod' that comes with module-init-tools. + +You should include the insmod in one of the /etc/rc.d/rc.* files, +and don't forget to insert a call of sccinit after that. It +will read your /etc/z8530drv.conf. + +1.2. /etc/z8530drv.conf +======================= + +To setup all parameters you must run /sbin/sccinit from one +of your rc.*-files. This has to be done BEFORE you can +"ifconfig" an interface. Sccinit reads the file /etc/z8530drv.conf +and sets the hardware, MODEM and KISS parameters. A sample file is +delivered with this package. Change it to your needs. + +The file itself consists of two main sections. + +1.2.1 configuration of hardware parameters +========================================== + +The hardware setup section defines the following parameters for each +Z8530:: + + chip 1 + data_a 0x300 # data port A + ctrl_a 0x304 # control port A + data_b 0x301 # data port B + ctrl_b 0x305 # control port B + irq 5 # IRQ No. 5 + pclock 4915200 # clock + board BAYCOM # hardware type + escc no # enhanced SCC chip? (8580/85180/85280) + vector 0 # latch for interrupt vector + special no # address of special function register + option 0 # option to set via sfr + + +chip + - this is just a delimiter to make sccinit a bit simpler to + program. A parameter has no effect. + +data_a + - the address of the data port A of this Z8530 (needed) +ctrl_a + - the address of the control port A (needed) +data_b + - the address of the data port B (needed) +ctrl_b + - the address of the control port B (needed) + +irq + - the used IRQ for this chip. Different chips can use different + IRQs or the same. If they share an interrupt, it needs to be + specified within one chip-definition only. + +pclock - the clock at the PCLK pin of the Z8530 (option, 4915200 is + default), measured in Hertz + +board + - the "type" of the board: + + ======================= ======== + SCC type value + ======================= ======== + PA0HZP SCC card PA0HZP + EAGLE card EAGLE + PC100 card PC100 + PRIMUS-PC (DG9BL) card PRIMUS + BayCom (U)SCC card BAYCOM + ======================= ======== + +escc + - if you want support for ESCC chips (8580, 85180, 85280), set + this to "yes" (option, defaults to "no") + +vector + - address of the vector latch (aka "intack port") for PA0HZP + cards. There can be only one vector latch for all chips! + (option, defaults to 0) + +special + - address of the special function register on several cards. + (option, defaults to 0) + +option - The value you write into that register (option, default is 0) + +You can specify up to four chips (8 channels). If this is not enough, +just change:: + + #define MAXSCC 4 + +to a higher value. + +Example for the BAYCOM USCC: +---------------------------- + +:: + + chip 1 + data_a 0x300 # data port A + ctrl_a 0x304 # control port A + data_b 0x301 # data port B + ctrl_b 0x305 # control port B + irq 5 # IRQ No. 5 (#) + board BAYCOM # hardware type (*) + # + # SCC chip 2 + # + chip 2 + data_a 0x302 + ctrl_a 0x306 + data_b 0x303 + ctrl_b 0x307 + board BAYCOM + +An example for a PA0HZP card: +----------------------------- + +:: + + chip 1 + data_a 0x153 + data_b 0x151 + ctrl_a 0x152 + ctrl_b 0x150 + irq 9 + pclock 4915200 + board PA0HZP + vector 0x168 + escc no + # + # + # + chip 2 + data_a 0x157 + data_b 0x155 + ctrl_a 0x156 + ctrl_b 0x154 + irq 9 + pclock 4915200 + board PA0HZP + vector 0x168 + escc no + +A DRSI would should probably work with this: +-------------------------------------------- +(actually: two DRSI cards...) + +:: + + chip 1 + data_a 0x303 + data_b 0x301 + ctrl_a 0x302 + ctrl_b 0x300 + irq 7 + pclock 4915200 + board DRSI + escc no + # + # + # + chip 2 + data_a 0x313 + data_b 0x311 + ctrl_a 0x312 + ctrl_b 0x310 + irq 7 + pclock 4915200 + board DRSI + escc no + +Note that you cannot use the on-board baudrate generator off DRSI +cards. Use "mode dpll" for clock source (see below). + +This is based on information provided by Mike Bilow (and verified +by Paul Helay) + +The utility "gencfg" +-------------------- + +If you only know the parameters for the PE1CHL driver for DOS, +run gencfg. It will generate the correct port addresses (I hope). +Its parameters are exactly the same as the ones you use with +the "attach scc" command in net, except that the string "init" must +not appear. Example:: + + gencfg 2 0x150 4 2 0 1 0x168 9 4915200 + +will print a skeleton z8530drv.conf for the OptoSCC to stdout. + +:: + + gencfg 2 0x300 2 4 5 -4 0 7 4915200 0x10 + +does the same for the BAYCOM USCC card. In my opinion it is much easier +to edit scc_config.h... + + +1.2.2 channel configuration +=========================== + +The channel definition is divided into three sub sections for each +channel: + +An example for scc0:: + + # DEVICE + + device scc0 # the device for the following params + + # MODEM / BUFFERS + + speed 1200 # the default baudrate + clock dpll # clock source: + # dpll = normal half duplex operation + # external = MODEM provides own Rx/Tx clock + # divider = use full duplex divider if + # installed (1) + mode nrzi # HDLC encoding mode + # nrzi = 1k2 MODEM, G3RUH 9k6 MODEM + # nrz = DF9IC 9k6 MODEM + # + bufsize 384 # size of buffers. Note that this must include + # the AX.25 header, not only the data field! + # (optional, defaults to 384) + + # KISS (Layer 1) + + txdelay 36 # (see chapter 1.4) + persist 64 + slot 8 + tail 8 + fulldup 0 + wait 12 + min 3 + maxkey 7 + idle 3 + maxdef 120 + group 0 + txoff off + softdcd on + slip off + +The order WITHIN these sections is unimportant. The order OF these +sections IS important. The MODEM parameters are set with the first +recognized KISS parameter... + +Please note that you can initialize the board only once after boot +(or insmod). You can change all parameters but "mode" and "clock" +later with the Sccparam program or through KISS. Just to avoid +security holes... + +(1) this divider is usually mounted on the SCC-PBC (PA0HZP) or not + present at all (BayCom). It feeds back the output of the DPLL + (digital pll) as transmit clock. Using this mode without a divider + installed will normally result in keying the transceiver until + maxkey expires --- of course without sending anything (useful). + +2. Attachment of a channel by your AX.25 software +================================================= + +2.1 Kernel AX.25 +================ + +To set up an AX.25 device you can simply type:: + + ifconfig scc0 44.128.1.1 hw ax25 dl0tha-7 + +This will create a network interface with the IP number 44.128.20.107 +and the callsign "dl0tha". If you do not have any IP number (yet) you +can use any of the 44.128.0.0 network. Note that you do not need +axattach. The purpose of axattach (like slattach) is to create a KISS +network device linked to a TTY. Please read the documentation of the +ax25-utils and the AX.25-HOWTO to learn how to set the parameters of +the kernel AX.25. + +2.2 NOS, NET and TFKISS +======================= + +Since the TTY driver (aka KISS TNC emulation) is gone you need +to emulate the old behaviour. The cost of using these programs is +that you probably need to compile the kernel AX.25, regardless of whether +you actually use it or not. First setup your /etc/ax25/axports, +for example:: + + 9k6 dl0tha-9 9600 255 4 9600 baud port (scc3) + axlink dl0tha-15 38400 255 4 Link to NOS + +Now "ifconfig" the scc device:: + + ifconfig scc3 44.128.1.1 hw ax25 dl0tha-9 + +You can now axattach a pseudo-TTY:: + + axattach /dev/ptys0 axlink + +and start your NOS and attach /dev/ptys0 there. The problem is that +NOS is reachable only via digipeating through the kernel AX.25 +(disastrous on a DAMA controlled channel). To solve this problem, +configure "rxecho" to echo the incoming frames from "9k6" to "axlink" +and outgoing frames from "axlink" to "9k6" and start:: + + rxecho + +Or simply use "kissbridge" coming with z8530drv-utils:: + + ifconfig scc3 hw ax25 dl0tha-9 + kissbridge scc3 /dev/ptys0 + + +3. Adjustment and Display of parameters +======================================= + +3.1 Displaying SCC Parameters: +============================== + +Once a SCC channel has been attached, the parameter settings and +some statistic information can be shown using the param program:: + + dl1bke-u:~$ sccstat scc0 + + Parameters: + + speed : 1200 baud + txdelay : 36 + persist : 255 + slottime : 0 + txtail : 8 + fulldup : 1 + waittime : 12 + mintime : 3 sec + maxkeyup : 7 sec + idletime : 3 sec + maxdefer : 120 sec + group : 0x00 + txoff : off + softdcd : on + SLIP : off + + Status: + + HDLC Z8530 Interrupts Buffers + ----------------------------------------------------------------------- + Sent : 273 RxOver : 0 RxInts : 125074 Size : 384 + Received : 1095 TxUnder: 0 TxInts : 4684 NoSpace : 0 + RxErrors : 1591 ExInts : 11776 + TxErrors : 0 SpInts : 1503 + Tx State : idle + + +The status info shown is: + +============== ============================================================== +Sent number of frames transmitted +Received number of frames received +RxErrors number of receive errors (CRC, ABORT) +TxErrors number of discarded Tx frames (due to various reasons) +Tx State status of the Tx interrupt handler: idle/busy/active/tail (2) +RxOver number of receiver overruns +TxUnder number of transmitter underruns +RxInts number of receiver interrupts +TxInts number of transmitter interrupts +EpInts number of receiver special condition interrupts +SpInts number of external/status interrupts +Size maximum size of an AX.25 frame (*with* AX.25 headers!) +NoSpace number of times a buffer could not get allocated +============== ============================================================== + +An overrun is abnormal. If lots of these occur, the product of +baudrate and number of interfaces is too high for the processing +power of your computer. NoSpace errors are unlikely to be caused by the +driver or the kernel AX.25. + + +3.2 Setting Parameters +====================== + + +The setting of parameters of the emulated KISS TNC is done in the +same way in the SCC driver. You can change parameters by using +the kissparms program from the ax25-utils package or use the program +"sccparam":: + + sccparam <device> <paramname> <decimal-|hexadecimal value> + +You can change the following parameters: + +=========== ===== +param value +=========== ===== +speed 1200 +txdelay 36 +persist 255 +slottime 0 +txtail 8 +fulldup 1 +waittime 12 +mintime 3 +maxkeyup 7 +idletime 3 +maxdefer 120 +group 0x00 +txoff off +softdcd on +SLIP off +=========== ===== + + +The parameters have the following meaning: + +speed: + The baudrate on this channel in bits/sec + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc3 speed 9600 + +txdelay: + The delay (in units of 10 ms) after keying of the + transmitter, until the first byte is sent. This is usually + called "TXDELAY" in a TNC. When 0 is specified, the driver + will just wait until the CTS signal is asserted. This + assumes the presence of a timer or other circuitry in the + MODEM and/or transmitter, that asserts CTS when the + transmitter is ready for data. + A normal value of this parameter is 30-36. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 txd 20 + +persist: + This is the probability that the transmitter will be keyed + when the channel is found to be free. It is a value from 0 + to 255, and the probability is (value+1)/256. The value + should be somewhere near 50-60, and should be lowered when + the channel is used more heavily. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 persist 20 + +slottime: + This is the time between samples of the channel. It is + expressed in units of 10 ms. About 200-300 ms (value 20-30) + seems to be a good value. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 slot 20 + +tail: + The time the transmitter will remain keyed after the last + byte of a packet has been transferred to the SCC. This is + necessary because the CRC and a flag still have to leave the + SCC before the transmitter is keyed down. The value depends + on the baudrate selected. A few character times should be + sufficient, e.g. 40ms at 1200 baud. (value 4) + The value of this parameter is in 10 ms units. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 4 + +full: + The full-duplex mode switch. This can be one of the following + values: + + 0: The interface will operate in CSMA mode (the normal + half-duplex packet radio operation) + 1: Fullduplex mode, i.e. the transmitter will be keyed at + any time, without checking the received carrier. It + will be unkeyed when there are no packets to be sent. + 2: Like 1, but the transmitter will remain keyed, also + when there are no packets to be sent. Flags will be + sent in that case, until a timeout (parameter 10) + occurs. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 fulldup off + +wait: + The initial waittime before any transmit attempt, after the + frame has been queue for transmit. This is the length of + the first slot in CSMA mode. In full duplex modes it is + set to 0 for maximum performance. + The value of this parameter is in 10 ms units. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc1 wait 4 + +maxkey: + The maximal time the transmitter will be keyed to send + packets, in seconds. This can be useful on busy CSMA + channels, to avoid "getting a bad reputation" when you are + generating a lot of traffic. After the specified time has + elapsed, no new frame will be started. Instead, the trans- + mitter will be switched off for a specified time (parameter + min), and then the selected algorithm for keyup will be + started again. + The value 0 as well as "off" will disable this feature, + and allow infinite transmission time. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 maxk 20 + +min: + This is the time the transmitter will be switched off when + the maximum transmission time is exceeded. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc3 min 10 + +idle: + This parameter specifies the maximum idle time in full duplex + 2 mode, in seconds. When no frames have been sent for this + time, the transmitter will be keyed down. A value of 0 is + has same result as the fullduplex mode 1. This parameter + can be disabled. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 idle off # transmit forever + +maxdefer + This is the maximum time (in seconds) to wait for a free channel + to send. When this timer expires the transmitter will be keyed + IMMEDIATELY. If you love to get trouble with other users you + should set this to a very low value ;-) + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 maxdefer 240 # 2 minutes + + +txoff: + When this parameter has the value 0, the transmission of packets + is enable. Otherwise it is disabled. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 txoff on + +group: + It is possible to build special radio equipment to use more than + one frequency on the same band, e.g. using several receivers and + only one transmitter that can be switched between frequencies. + Also, you can connect several radios that are active on the same + band. In these cases, it is not possible, or not a good idea, to + transmit on more than one frequency. The SCC driver provides a + method to lock transmitters on different interfaces, using the + "param <interface> group <x>" command. This will only work when + you are using CSMA mode (parameter full = 0). + + The number <x> must be 0 if you want no group restrictions, and + can be computed as follows to create restricted groups: + <x> is the sum of some OCTAL numbers: + + + === ======================================================= + 200 This transmitter will only be keyed when all other + transmitters in the group are off. + 100 This transmitter will only be keyed when the carrier + detect of all other interfaces in the group is off. + 0xx A byte that can be used to define different groups. + Interfaces are in the same group, when the logical AND + between their xx values is nonzero. + === ======================================================= + + Examples: + + When 2 interfaces use group 201, their transmitters will never be + keyed at the same time. + + When 2 interfaces use group 101, the transmitters will only key + when both channels are clear at the same time. When group 301, + the transmitters will not be keyed at the same time. + + Don't forget to convert the octal numbers into decimal before + you set the parameter. + + Example: (to be written) + +softdcd: + use a software dcd instead of the real one... Useful for a very + slow squelch. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 soft on + + +4. Problems +=========== + +If you have tx-problems with your BayCom USCC card please check +the manufacturer of the 8530. SGS chips have a slightly +different timing. Try Zilog... A solution is to write to register 8 +instead to the data port, but this won't work with the ESCC chips. +*SIGH!* + +A very common problem is that the PTT locks until the maxkeyup timer +expires, although interrupts and clock source are correct. In most +cases compiling the driver with CONFIG_SCC_DELAY (set with +make config) solves the problems. For more hints read the (pseudo) FAQ +and the documentation coming with z8530drv-utils. + +I got reports that the driver has problems on some 386-based systems. +(i.e. Amstrad) Those systems have a bogus AT bus timing which will +lead to delayed answers on interrupts. You can recognize these +problems by looking at the output of Sccstat for the suspected +port. If it shows under- and overruns you own such a system. + +Delayed processing of received data: This depends on + +- the kernel version + +- kernel profiling compiled or not + +- a high interrupt load + +- a high load of the machine --- running X, Xmorph, XV and Povray, + while compiling the kernel... hmm ... even with 32 MB RAM ... ;-) + Or running a named for the whole .ampr.org domain on an 8 MB + box... + +- using information from rxecho or kissbridge. + +Kernel panics: please read /linux/README and find out if it +really occurred within the scc driver. + +If you cannot solve a problem, send me + +- a description of the problem, +- information on your hardware (computer system, scc board, modem) +- your kernel version +- the output of cat /proc/net/z8530 + +4. Thor RLC100 +============== + +Mysteriously this board seems not to work with the driver. Anyone +got it up-and-running? + + +Many thanks to Linus Torvalds and Alan Cox for including the driver +in the Linux standard distribution and their support. + +:: + + Joerg Reuter ampr-net: dl1bke@db0pra.ampr.org + AX-25 : DL1BKE @ DB0ABH.#BAY.DEU.EU + Internet: jreuter@yaina.de + WWW : http://yaina.de/jreuter diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst index a191faaf97de..601eacaf12f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst @@ -1,32 +1,24 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) -Vendor Device Drivers -===================== +Hardware Device Drivers +======================= Contents: .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 2 - freescale/dpaa2/index - intel/e100 - intel/e1000 - intel/e1000e - intel/fm10k - intel/igb - intel/igbvf - intel/ixgb - intel/ixgbe - intel/ixgbevf - intel/i40e - intel/iavf - intel/ice - google/gve - marvell/octeontx2 - mellanox/mlx5 - netronome/nfp - pensando/ionic - stmicro/stmmac + appletalk/index + atm/index + cable/index + can/index + cellular/index + ethernet/index + fddi/index + hamradio/index + qlogic/index + wifi/index + wwan/index .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst deleted file mode 100644 index ee43ea57d443..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ - -================================================================== -Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series -================================================================== - -Intel ice Linux driver. -Copyright(c) 2018 Intel Corporation. - -Contents -======== - -- Enabling the driver -- Support - -The driver in this release supports Intel's E800 Series of products. For -more information, visit Intel's support page at https://support.intel.com. - -Enabling the driver -=================== -The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system, -using the make command:: - - make oldconfig/menuconfig/etc. - -The driver is located in the menu structure at: - - -> Device Drivers - -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y]) - -> Ethernet driver support - -> Intel devices - -> Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series Support - -Support -======= -For general information, go to the Intel support website at: - -https://www.intel.com/support/ - -or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: - -https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 - -If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel -with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue -to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2100.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2100.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6f85e1d06031..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2100.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,293 +0,0 @@ - -Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Driver for Linux in support of: - -Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Network Connection - -Copyright (C) 2003-2006, Intel Corporation - -README.ipw2100 - -Version: git-1.1.5 -Date : January 25, 2006 - -Index ------------------------------------------------ -0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER -1. Introduction -2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Features -3. Command Line Parameters -4. Sysfs Helper Files -5. Radio Kill Switch -6. Dynamic Firmware -7. Power Management -8. Support -9. License - - -0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER ------------------------------------------------ - -Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!! - -Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and -quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and -governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they -are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are -generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, -satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes -necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid -interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to -provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and -governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the -product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and -software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect -radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These -parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, -channel scanning, and human exposure. - -For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties -of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN -adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any -patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that -have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, -utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have -not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for -ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear -no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated -with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under -the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and -(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing -support to any third parties for such modified products. - -Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be -modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval -upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and -system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be -non-compliant. - -The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a -part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory -requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As -such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of -solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please -obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at: - -http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/sb/CS-006408.htm - -1. Introduction ------------------------------------------------ - -This document provides a brief overview of the features supported by the -IPW2100 driver project. The main project website, where the latest -development version of the driver can be found, is: - - http://ipw2100.sourceforge.net - -There you can find the not only the latest releases, but also information about -potential fixes and patches, as well as links to the development mailing list -for the driver project. - - -2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Supported Features ------------------------------------------------ -- Managed (BSS) and Ad-Hoc (IBSS) -- WEP (shared key and open) -- Wireless Tools support -- 802.1x (tested with XSupplicant 1.0.1) - -Enabled (but not supported) features: -- Monitor/RFMon mode -- WPA/WPA2 - -The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection -on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been -performed on a given feature. - - -3. Command Line Parameters ------------------------------------------------ - -If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used -by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this -syntax: - - modprobe ipw2100 [<option>=<VAL1><,VAL2>...] - -For example, to disable the radio on driver loading, enter: - - modprobe ipw2100 disable=1 - -The ipw2100 driver supports the following module parameters: - -Name Value Example: -debug 0x0-0xffffffff debug=1024 -mode 0,1,2 mode=1 /* AdHoc */ -channel int channel=3 /* Only valid in AdHoc or Monitor */ -associate boolean associate=0 /* Do NOT auto associate */ -disable boolean disable=1 /* Do not power the HW */ - - -4. Sysfs Helper Files ---------------------------- ------------------------------------------------ - -There are several ways to control the behavior of the driver. Many of the -general capabilities are exposed through the Wireless Tools (iwconfig). There -are a few capabilities that are exposed through entries in the Linux Sysfs. - - ------ Driver Level ------ -For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/ - - debug_level - - This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter. For - information on the various debugging levels available, run the 'dvals' - script found in the driver source directory. - - NOTE: 'debug_level' is only enabled if CONFIG_IPW2100_DEBUG is turn - on. - ------ Device Level ------ -For the device level files look in - - /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/{PCI-ID}/ - -For example: - /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/0000:02:01.0 - -For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100: - - rf_kill - read - - 0 = RF kill not enabled (radio on) - 1 = SW based RF kill active (radio off) - 2 = HW based RF kill active (radio off) - 3 = Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off) - write - - 0 = If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on - 1 = If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill - - NOTE: If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW - based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on - - -5. Radio Kill Switch ------------------------------------------------ -Most laptops provide the ability for the user to physically disable the radio. -Some vendors have implemented this as a physical switch that requires no -software to turn the radio off and on. On other laptops, however, the switch -is controlled through a button being pressed and a software driver then making -calls to turn the radio off and on. This is referred to as a "software based -RF kill switch" - -See the Sysfs helper file 'rf_kill' for determining the state of the RF switch -on your system. - - -6. Dynamic Firmware ------------------------------------------------ -As the firmware is licensed under a restricted use license, it can not be -included within the kernel sources. To enable the IPW2100 you will need a -firmware image to load into the wireless NIC's processors. - -You can obtain these images from <http://ipw2100.sf.net/firmware.php>. - -See INSTALL for instructions on installing the firmware. - - -7. Power Management ------------------------------------------------ -The IPW2100 supports the configuration of the Power Save Protocol -through a private wireless extension interface. The IPW2100 supports -the following different modes: - - off No power management. Radio is always on. - on Automatic power management - 1-5 Different levels of power management. The higher the - number the greater the power savings, but with an impact to - packet latencies. - -Power management works by powering down the radio after a certain -interval of time has passed where no packets are passed through the -radio. Once powered down, the radio remains in that state for a given -period of time. For higher power savings, the interval between last -packet processed to sleep is shorter and the sleep period is longer. - -When the radio is asleep, the access point sending data to the station -must buffer packets at the AP until the station wakes up and requests -any buffered packets. If you have an AP that does not correctly support -the PSP protocol you may experience packet loss or very poor performance -while power management is enabled. If this is the case, you will need -to try and find a firmware update for your AP, or disable power -management (via `iwconfig eth1 power off`) - -To configure the power level on the IPW2100 you use a combination of -iwconfig and iwpriv. iwconfig is used to turn power management on, off, -and set it to auto. - - iwconfig eth1 power off Disables radio power down - iwconfig eth1 power on Enables radio power management to - last set level (defaults to AUTO) - iwpriv eth1 set_power 0 Sets power level to AUTO and enables - power management if not previously - enabled. - iwpriv eth1 set_power 1-5 Set the power level as specified, - enabling power management if not - previously enabled. - -You can view the current power level setting via: - - iwpriv eth1 get_power - -It will return the current period or timeout that is configured as a string -in the form of xxxx/yyyy (z) where xxxx is the timeout interval (amount of -time after packet processing), yyyy is the period to sleep (amount of time to -wait before powering the radio and querying the access point for buffered -packets), and z is the 'power level'. If power management is turned off the -xxxx/yyyy will be replaced with 'off' -- the level reported will be the active -level if `iwconfig eth1 power on` is invoked. - - -8. Support ------------------------------------------------ - -For general development information and support, -go to: - - http://ipw2100.sf.net/ - -The ipw2100 1.1.0 driver and firmware can be downloaded from: - - http://support.intel.com - -For installation support on the ipw2100 1.1.0 driver on Linux kernels -2.6.8 or greater, email support is available from: - - http://supportmail.intel.com - -9. License ------------------------------------------------ - - Copyright(c) 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it - under the terms of the GNU General Public License (version 2) as - published by the Free Software Foundation. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT - ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or - FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for - more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with - this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 - Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the - file called LICENSE. - - License Contact Information: - James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com> - Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2200.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2200.txt deleted file mode 100644 index b7658bed4906..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2200.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,472 +0,0 @@ - -Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux in support of: - -Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection -Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection - -Note: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux and Intel(R) -PRO/Wireless 2200BG Driver for Linux is a unified driver that works on -both hardware adapters listed above. In this document the Intel(R) -PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux will be used to reference the -unified driver. - -Copyright (C) 2004-2006, Intel Corporation - -README.ipw2200 - -Version: 1.1.2 -Date : March 30, 2006 - - -Index ------------------------------------------------ -0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER -1. Introduction -1.1. Overview of features -1.2. Module parameters -1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods -1.4. Sysfs Helper Files -1.5. Supported channels -2. Ad-Hoc Networking -3. Interacting with Wireless Tools -3.1. iwconfig mode -3.2. iwconfig sens -4. About the Version Numbers -5. Firmware installation -6. Support -7. License - - -0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER ------------------------------------------------ - -Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!! - -Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and -quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and -governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they -are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are -generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, -satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes -necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid -interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to -provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and -governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the -product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and -software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect -radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These -parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, -channel scanning, and human exposure. - -For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties -of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN -adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any -patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that -have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, -utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have -not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for -ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear -no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated -with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under -the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and -(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing -support to any third parties for such modified products. - -Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be -modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval -upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and -system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be -non-compliant. - -The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a -part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory -requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As -such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of -solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please -obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at: - -http://support.intel.com - - -1. Introduction ------------------------------------------------ -The following sections attempt to provide a brief introduction to using -the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux. - -This document is not meant to be a comprehensive manual on -understanding or using wireless technologies, but should be sufficient -to get you moving without wires on Linux. - -For information on building and installing the driver, see the INSTALL -file. - - -1.1. Overview of Features ------------------------------------------------ -The current release (1.1.2) supports the following features: - -+ BSS mode (Infrastructure, Managed) -+ IBSS mode (Ad-Hoc) -+ WEP (OPEN and SHARED KEY mode) -+ 802.1x EAP via wpa_supplicant and xsupplicant -+ Wireless Extension support -+ Full B and G rate support (2200 and 2915) -+ Full A rate support (2915 only) -+ Transmit power control -+ S state support (ACPI suspend/resume) - -The following features are currently enabled, but not officially -supported: - -+ WPA -+ long/short preamble support -+ Monitor mode (aka RFMon) - -The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection -on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been -performed on a given feature. - - - -1.2. Command Line Parameters ------------------------------------------------ - -Like many modules used in the Linux kernel, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless -2915ABG Driver for Linux allows configuration options to be provided -as module parameters. The most common way to specify a module parameter -is via the command line. - -The general form is: - -% modprobe ipw2200 parameter=value - -Where the supported parameter are: - - associate - Set to 0 to disable the auto scan-and-associate functionality of the - driver. If disabled, the driver will not attempt to scan - for and associate to a network until it has been configured with - one or more properties for the target network, for example configuring - the network SSID. Default is 0 (do not auto-associate) - - Example: % modprobe ipw2200 associate=0 - - auto_create - Set to 0 to disable the auto creation of an Ad-Hoc network - matching the channel and network name parameters provided. - Default is 1. - - channel - channel number for association. The normal method for setting - the channel would be to use the standard wireless tools - (i.e. `iwconfig eth1 channel 10`), but it is useful sometimes - to set this while debugging. Channel 0 means 'ANY' - - debug - If using a debug build, this is used to control the amount of debug - info is logged. See the 'dvals' and 'load' script for more info on - how to use this (the dvals and load scripts are provided as part - of the ipw2200 development snapshot releases available from the - SourceForge project at http://ipw2200.sf.net) - - led - Can be used to turn on experimental LED code. - 0 = Off, 1 = On. Default is 1. - - mode - Can be used to set the default mode of the adapter. - 0 = Managed, 1 = Ad-Hoc, 2 = Monitor - - -1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods ------------------------------------------------ - -As an interface designed to handle generic hardware, there are certain -capabilities not exposed through the normal Wireless Tool interface. As -such, a provision is provided for a driver to declare custom, or -private, methods. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux -defines several of these to configure various settings. - -The general form of using the private wireless methods is: - - % iwpriv $IFNAME method parameters - -Where $IFNAME is the interface name the device is registered with -(typically eth1, customized via one of the various network interface -name managers, such as ifrename) - -The supported private methods are: - - get_mode - Can be used to report out which IEEE mode the driver is - configured to support. Example: - - % iwpriv eth1 get_mode - eth1 get_mode:802.11bg (6) - - set_mode - Can be used to configure which IEEE mode the driver will - support. - - Usage: - % iwpriv eth1 set_mode {mode} - Where {mode} is a number in the range 1-7: - 1 802.11a (2915 only) - 2 802.11b - 3 802.11ab (2915 only) - 4 802.11g - 5 802.11ag (2915 only) - 6 802.11bg - 7 802.11abg (2915 only) - - get_preamble - Can be used to report configuration of preamble length. - - set_preamble - Can be used to set the configuration of preamble length: - - Usage: - % iwpriv eth1 set_preamble {mode} - Where {mode} is one of: - 1 Long preamble only - 0 Auto (long or short based on connection) - - -1.4. Sysfs Helper Files: ------------------------------------------------ - -The Linux kernel provides a pseudo file system that can be used to -access various components of the operating system. The Intel(R) -PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes several configuration -parameters through this mechanism. - -An entry in the sysfs can support reading and/or writing. You can -typically query the contents of a sysfs entry through the use of cat, -and can set the contents via echo. For example: - -% cat /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level - -Will report the current debug level of the driver's logging subsystem -(only available if CONFIG_IPW2200_DEBUG was configured when the driver -was built). - -You can set the debug level via: - -% echo $VALUE > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level - -Where $VALUE would be a number in the case of this sysfs entry. The -input to sysfs files does not have to be a number. For example, the -firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transferring -the firmware image from user space into the driver. - -The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes sysfs entries -at two levels -- driver level, which apply to all instances of the driver -(in the event that there are more than one device installed) and device -level, which applies only to the single specific instance. - - -1.4.1 Driver Level Sysfs Helper Files ------------------------------------------------ - -For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/ - - debug_level - - This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter - - - -1.4.2 Device Level Sysfs Helper Files ------------------------------------------------ - -For the device level files, look in - - /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/{PCI-ID}/ - -For example: - /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/0000:02:01.0 - -For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200: - - rf_kill - read - - 0 = RF kill not enabled (radio on) - 1 = SW based RF kill active (radio off) - 2 = HW based RF kill active (radio off) - 3 = Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off) - write - - 0 = If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on - 1 = If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill - - NOTE: If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW - based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on - - ucode - read-only access to the ucode version number - - led - read - - 0 = LED code disabled - 1 = LED code enabled - write - - 0 = Disable LED code - 1 = Enable LED code - - NOTE: The LED code has been reported to hang some systems when - running ifconfig and is therefore disabled by default. - - -1.5. Supported channels ------------------------------------------------ - -Upon loading the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux, a -message stating the detected geography code and the number of 802.11 -channels supported by the card will be displayed in the log. - -The geography code corresponds to a regulatory domain as shown in the -table below. - - Supported channels -Code Geography 802.11bg 802.11a - ---- Restricted 11 0 -ZZF Custom US/Canada 11 8 -ZZD Rest of World 13 0 -ZZA Custom USA & Europe & High 11 13 -ZZB Custom NA & Europe 11 13 -ZZC Custom Japan 11 4 -ZZM Custom 11 0 -ZZE Europe 13 19 -ZZJ Custom Japan 14 4 -ZZR Rest of World 14 0 -ZZH High Band 13 4 -ZZG Custom Europe 13 4 -ZZK Europe 13 24 -ZZL Europe 11 13 - - -2. Ad-Hoc Networking ------------------------------------------------ - -When using a device in an Ad-Hoc network, it is useful to understand the -sequence and requirements for the driver to be able to create, join, or -merge networks. - -The following attempts to provide enough information so that you can -have a consistent experience while using the driver as a member of an -Ad-Hoc network. - -2.1. Joining an Ad-Hoc Network ------------------------------------------------ - -The easiest way to get onto an Ad-Hoc network is to join one that -already exists. - -2.2. Creating an Ad-Hoc Network ------------------------------------------------ - -An Ad-Hoc networks is created using the syntax of the Wireless tool. - -For Example: -iwconfig eth1 mode ad-hoc essid testing channel 2 - -2.3. Merging Ad-Hoc Networks ------------------------------------------------ - - -3. Interaction with Wireless Tools ------------------------------------------------ - -3.1 iwconfig mode ------------------------------------------------ - -When configuring the mode of the adapter, all run-time configured parameters -are reset to the value used when the module was loaded. This includes -channels, rates, ESSID, etc. - -3.2 iwconfig sens ------------------------------------------------ - -The 'iwconfig ethX sens XX' command will not set the signal sensitivity -threshold, as described in iwconfig documentation, but rather the number -of consecutive missed beacons that will trigger handover, i.e. roaming -to another access point. At the same time, it will set the disassociation -threshold to 3 times the given value. - - -4. About the Version Numbers ------------------------------------------------ - -Due to the nature of open source development projects, there are -frequently changes being incorporated that have not gone through -a complete validation process. These changes are incorporated into -development snapshot releases. - -Releases are numbered with a three level scheme: - - major.minor.development - -Any version where the 'development' portion is 0 (for example -1.0.0, 1.1.0, etc.) indicates a stable version that will be made -available for kernel inclusion. - -Any version where the 'development' portion is not a 0 (for -example 1.0.1, 1.1.5, etc.) indicates a development version that is -being made available for testing and cutting edge users. The stability -and functionality of the development releases are not know. We make -efforts to try and keep all snapshots reasonably stable, but due to the -frequency of their release, and the desire to get those releases -available as quickly as possible, unknown anomalies should be expected. - -The major version number will be incremented when significant changes -are made to the driver. Currently, there are no major changes planned. - -5. Firmware installation ----------------------------------------------- - -The driver requires a firmware image, download it and extract the -files under /lib/firmware (or wherever your hotplug's firmware.agent -will look for firmware files) - -The firmware can be downloaded from the following URL: - - http://ipw2200.sf.net/ - - -6. Support ------------------------------------------------ - -For direct support of the 1.0.0 version, you can contact -http://supportmail.intel.com, or you can use the open source project -support. - -For general information and support, go to: - - http://ipw2200.sf.net/ - - -7. License ------------------------------------------------ - - Copyright(c) 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it - under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as - published by the Free Software Foundation. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT - ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or - FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for - more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with - this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 - Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the - file called LICENSE. - - Contact Information: - James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com> - Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/marvell/octeontx2.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/marvell/octeontx2.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 88f508338c5f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/marvell/octeontx2.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,159 +0,0 @@ -.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) - -==================================== -Marvell OcteonTx2 RVU Kernel Drivers -==================================== - -Copyright (c) 2020 Marvell International Ltd. - -Contents -======== - -- `Overview`_ -- `Drivers`_ -- `Basic packet flow`_ - -Overview -======== - -Resource virtualization unit (RVU) on Marvell's OcteonTX2 SOC maps HW -resources from the network, crypto and other functional blocks into -PCI-compatible physical and virtual functions. Each functional block -again has multiple local functions (LFs) for provisioning to PCI devices. -RVU supports multiple PCIe SRIOV physical functions (PFs) and virtual -functions (VFs). PF0 is called the administrative / admin function (AF) -and has privileges to provision RVU functional block's LFs to each of the -PF/VF. - -RVU managed networking functional blocks - - Network pool or buffer allocator (NPA) - - Network interface controller (NIX) - - Network parser CAM (NPC) - - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO) - - Loopback interface (LBK) - -RVU managed non-networking functional blocks - - Crypto accelerator (CPT) - - Scheduled timers unit (TIM) - - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO) - Used for both networking and non networking usecases - -Resource provisioning examples - - A PF/VF with NIX-LF & NPA-LF resources works as a pure network device - - A PF/VF with CPT-LF resource works as a pure crypto offload device. - -RVU functional blocks are highly configurable as per software requirements. - -Firmware setups following stuff before kernel boots - - Enables required number of RVU PFs based on number of physical links. - - Number of VFs per PF are either static or configurable at compile time. - Based on config, firmware assigns VFs to each of the PFs. - - Also assigns MSIX vectors to each of PF and VFs. - - These are not changed after kernel boot. - -Drivers -======= - -Linux kernel will have multiple drivers registering to different PF and VFs -of RVU. Wrt networking there will be 3 flavours of drivers. - -Admin Function driver ---------------------- - -As mentioned above RVU PF0 is called the admin function (AF), this driver -supports resource provisioning and configuration of functional blocks. -Doesn't handle any I/O. It sets up few basic stuff but most of the -funcionality is achieved via configuration requests from PFs and VFs. - -PF/VFs communicates with AF via a shared memory region (mailbox). Upon -receiving requests AF does resource provisioning and other HW configuration. -AF is always attached to host kernel, but PFs and their VFs may be used by host -kernel itself, or attached to VMs or to userspace applications like -DPDK etc. So AF has to handle provisioning/configuration requests sent -by any device from any domain. - -AF driver also interacts with underlying firmware to - - Manage physical ethernet links ie CGX LMACs. - - Retrieve information like speed, duplex, autoneg etc - - Retrieve PHY EEPROM and stats. - - Configure FEC, PAM modes - - etc - -From pure networking side AF driver supports following functionality. - - Map a physical link to a RVU PF to which a netdev is registered. - - Attach NIX and NPA block LFs to RVU PF/VF which provide buffer pools, RQs, SQs - for regular networking functionality. - - Flow control (pause frames) enable/disable/config. - - HW PTP timestamping related config. - - NPC parser profile config, basically how to parse pkt and what info to extract. - - NPC extract profile config, what to extract from the pkt to match data in MCAM entries. - - Manage NPC MCAM entries, upon request can frame and install requested packet forwarding rules. - - Defines receive side scaling (RSS) algorithms. - - Defines segmentation offload algorithms (eg TSO) - - VLAN stripping, capture and insertion config. - - SSO and TIM blocks config which provide packet scheduling support. - - Debugfs support, to check current resource provising, current status of - NPA pools, NIX RQ, SQ and CQs, various stats etc which helps in debugging issues. - - And many more. - -Physical Function driver ------------------------- - -This RVU PF handles IO, is mapped to a physical ethernet link and this -driver registers a netdev. This supports SR-IOV. As said above this driver -communicates with AF with a mailbox. To retrieve information from physical -links this driver talks to AF and AF gets that info from firmware and responds -back ie cannot talk to firmware directly. - -Supports ethtool for configuring links, RSS, queue count, queue size, -flow control, ntuple filters, dump PHY EEPROM, config FEC etc. - -Virtual Function driver ------------------------ - -There are two types VFs, VFs that share the physical link with their parent -SR-IOV PF and the VFs which work in pairs using internal HW loopback channels (LBK). - -Type1: - - These VFs and their parent PF share a physical link and used for outside communication. - - VFs cannot communicate with AF directly, they send mbox message to PF and PF - forwards that to AF. AF after processing, responds back to PF and PF forwards - the reply to VF. - - From functionality point of view there is no difference between PF and VF as same type - HW resources are attached to both. But user would be able to configure few stuff only - from PF as PF is treated as owner/admin of the link. - -Type2: - - RVU PF0 ie admin function creates these VFs and maps them to loopback block's channels. - - A set of two VFs (VF0 & VF1, VF2 & VF3 .. so on) works as a pair ie pkts sent out of - VF0 will be received by VF1 and viceversa. - - These VFs can be used by applications or virtual machines to communicate between them - without sending traffic outside. There is no switch present in HW, hence the support - for loopback VFs. - - These communicate directly with AF (PF0) via mbox. - -Except for the IO channels or links used for packet reception and transmission there is -no other difference between these VF types. AF driver takes care of IO channel mapping, -hence same VF driver works for both types of devices. - -Basic packet flow -================= - -Ingress -------- - -1. CGX LMAC receives packet. -2. Forwards the packet to the NIX block. -3. Then submitted to NPC block for parsing and then MCAM lookup to get the destination RVU device. -4. NIX LF attached to the destination RVU device allocates a buffer from RQ mapped buffer pool of NPA block LF. -5. RQ may be selected by RSS or by configuring MCAM rule with a RQ number. -6. Packet is DMA'ed and driver is notified. - -Egress ------- - -1. Driver prepares a send descriptor and submits to SQ for transmission. -2. The SQ is already configured (by AF) to transmit on a specific link/channel. -3. The SQ descriptor ring is maintained in buffers allocated from SQ mapped pool of NPA block LF. -4. NIX block transmits the pkt on the designated channel. -5. NPC MCAM entries can be installed to divert pkt onto a different channel. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/mellanox/mlx5.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/mellanox/mlx5.rst deleted file mode 100644 index f575a49790e8..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/mellanox/mlx5.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,321 +0,0 @@ -.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR Linux-OpenIB - -================================================= -Mellanox ConnectX(R) mlx5 core VPI Network Driver -================================================= - -Copyright (c) 2019, Mellanox Technologies LTD. - -Contents -======== - -- `Enabling the driver and kconfig options`_ -- `Devlink info`_ -- `Devlink parameters`_ -- `Devlink health reporters`_ -- `mlx5 tracepoints`_ - -Enabling the driver and kconfig options -================================================ - -| mlx5 core is modular and most of the major mlx5 core driver features can be selected (compiled in/out) -| at build time via kernel Kconfig flags. -| Basic features, ethernet net device rx/tx offloads and XDP, are available with the most basic flags -| CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m and CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=y. -| For the list of advanced features please see below. - -**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=(y/m/n)** (module mlx5_core.ko) - -| The driver can be enabled by choosing CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m in kernel config. -| This will provide mlx5 core driver for mlx5 ulps to interface with (mlx5e, mlx5_ib). - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=(y/n)** - -| Choosing this option will allow basic ethernet netdevice support with all of the standard rx/tx offloads. -| mlx5e is the mlx5 ulp driver which provides netdevice kernel interface, when chosen, mlx5e will be -| built-in into mlx5_core.ko. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_ARFS=(y/n)** - -| Enables Hardware-accelerated receive flow steering (arfs) support, and ntuple filtering. -| https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-arfs-on-connectx-4 - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_RXNFC=(y/n)** - -| Enables ethtool receive network flow classification, which allows user defined -| flow rules to direct traffic into arbitrary rx queue via ethtool set/get_rxnfc API. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN_DCB=(y/n)**: - -| Enables `Data Center Bridging (DCB) Support <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-auto-config-pfc-and-ets-on-connectx-4-via-lldp-dcbx>`_. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_MPFS=(y/n)** - -| Ethernet Multi-Physical Function Switch (MPFS) support in ConnectX NIC. -| MPFs is required for when `Multi-Host <http://www.mellanox.com/page/multihost>`_ configuration is enabled to allow passing -| user configured unicast MAC addresses to the requesting PF. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_ESWITCH=(y/n)** - -| Ethernet SRIOV E-Switch support in ConnectX NIC. E-Switch provides internal SRIOV packet steering -| and switching for the enabled VFs and PF in two available modes: -| 1) `Legacy SRIOV mode (L2 mac vlan steering based) <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-sr-iov-for-connectx-4-connectx-5-with-kvm--ethernet-x>`_. -| 2) `Switchdev mode (eswitch offloads) <https://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/ASAP2_Hardware_Offloading_for_vSwitches_User_Manual_v4.4.pdf>`_. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_IPOIB=(y/n)** - -| IPoIB offloads & acceleration support. -| Requires CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN to provide an accelerated interface for the rdma -| IPoIB ulp netdevice. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_FPGA=(y/n)** - -| Build support for the Innova family of network cards by Mellanox Technologies. -| Innova network cards are comprised of a ConnectX chip and an FPGA chip on one board. -| If you select this option, the mlx5_core driver will include the Innova FPGA core and allow -| building sandbox-specific client drivers. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_IPSEC=(y/n)** - -| Enables `IPSec XFRM cryptography-offload accelaration <http://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/Mellanox_Innova_IPsec_Ethernet_Adapter_Card_User_Manual.pdf>`_. - -**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_TLS=(y/n)** - -| TLS cryptography-offload accelaration. - - -**CONFIG_MLX5_INFINIBAND=(y/n/m)** (module mlx5_ib.ko) - -| Provides low-level InfiniBand/RDMA and `RoCE <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/recommended-network-configuration-examples-for-roce-deployment>`_ support. - - -**External options** ( Choose if the corresponding mlx5 feature is required ) - -- CONFIG_PTP_1588_CLOCK: When chosen, mlx5 ptp support will be enabled -- CONFIG_VXLAN: When chosen, mlx5 vxaln support will be enabled. -- CONFIG_MLXFW: When chosen, mlx5 firmware flashing support will be enabled (via devlink and ethtool). - -Devlink info -============ - -The devlink info reports the running and stored firmware versions on device. -It also prints the device PSID which represents the HCA board type ID. - -User command example:: - - $ devlink dev info pci/0000:00:06.0 - pci/0000:00:06.0: - driver mlx5_core - versions: - fixed: - fw.psid MT_0000000009 - running: - fw.version 16.26.0100 - stored: - fw.version 16.26.0100 - -Devlink parameters -================== - -flow_steering_mode: Device flow steering mode ---------------------------------------------- -The flow steering mode parameter controls the flow steering mode of the driver. -Two modes are supported: -1. 'dmfs' - Device managed flow steering. -2. 'smfs - Software/Driver managed flow steering. - -In DMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed through the -Firmware. -In SMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed though by -the driver directly into Hardware without firmware intervention. - -SMFS mode is faster and provides better rule inserstion rate compared to default DMFS mode. - -User command examples: - -- Set SMFS flow steering mode:: - - $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode value "smfs" cmode runtime - -- Read device flow steering mode:: - - $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode - pci/0000:06:00.0: - name flow_steering_mode type driver-specific - values: - cmode runtime value smfs - -enable_roce: RoCE enablement state ----------------------------------- -RoCE enablement state controls driver support for RoCE traffic. -When RoCE is disabled, there is no gid table, only raw ethernet QPs are supported and traffic on the well known UDP RoCE port is handled as raw ethernet traffic. - -To change RoCE enablement state a user must change the driverinit cmode value and run devlink reload. - -User command examples: - -- Disable RoCE:: - - $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce value false cmode driverinit - $ devlink dev reload pci/0000:06:00.0 - -- Read RoCE enablement state:: - - $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce - pci/0000:06:00.0: - name enable_roce type generic - values: - cmode driverinit value true - -Devlink health reporters -======================== - -tx reporter ------------ -The tx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios: - -- TX timeout - Report on kernel tx timeout detection. - Recover by searching lost interrupts. -- TX error completion - Report on error tx completion. - Recover by flushing the TX queue and reset it. - -TX reporter also support on demand diagnose callback, on which it provides -real time information of its send queues status. - -User commands examples: - -- Diagnose send queues status:: - - $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx - -NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output. - -- Show number of tx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully, - is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover:: - - $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx - -rx reporter ------------ -The rx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios: - -- RX queues initialization (population) timeout - RX queues descriptors population on ring initialization is done in - napi context via triggering an irq, in case of a failure to get - the minimum amount of descriptors, a timeout would occur and it - could be recoverable by polling the EQ (Event Queue). -- RX completions with errors (reported by HW on interrupt context) - Report on rx completion error. - Recover (if needed) by flushing the related queue and reset it. - -RX reporter also supports on demand diagnose callback, on which it -provides real time information of its receive queues status. - -- Diagnose rx queues status, and corresponding completion queue:: - - $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx - -NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output. - -- Show number of rx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully, - is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover:: - - $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx - -fw reporter ------------ -The fw reporter implements diagnose and dump callbacks. -It follows symptoms of fw error such as fw syndrome by triggering -fw core dump and storing it into the dump buffer. -The fw reporter diagnose command can be triggered any time by the user to check -current fw status. - -User commands examples: - -- Check fw heath status:: - - $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw - -- Read FW core dump if already stored or trigger new one:: - - $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw - -NOTE: This command can run only on the PF which has fw tracer ownership, -running it on other PF or any VF will return "Operation not permitted". - -fw fatal reporter ------------------ -The fw fatal reporter implements dump and recover callbacks. -It follows fatal errors indications by CR-space dump and recover flow. -The CR-space dump uses vsc interface which is valid even if the FW command -interface is not functional, which is the case in most FW fatal errors. -The recover function runs recover flow which reloads the driver and triggers fw -reset if needed. - -User commands examples: - -- Run fw recover flow manually:: - - $ devlink health recover pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw_fatal - -- Read FW CR-space dump if already strored or trigger new one:: - - $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.1 reporter fw_fatal - -NOTE: This command can run only on PF. - -mlx5 tracepoints -================ - -mlx5 driver provides internal trace points for tracking and debugging using -kernel tracepoints interfaces (refer to Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst). - -For the list of support mlx5 events check /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/mlx5/ - -tc and eswitch offloads tracepoints: - -- mlx5e_configure_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies offloaded to mlx5:: - - $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_configure_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event - $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace - ... - tc-6535 [019] ...1 2672.404466: mlx5e_configure_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= REDIRECT - -- mlx5e_delete_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies deleted from mlx5:: - - $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_delete_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event - $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace - ... - tc-6569 [010] .N.1 2686.379075: mlx5e_delete_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= NULL - -- mlx5e_stats_flower: trace flower stats request:: - - $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_stats_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event - $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace - ... - tc-6546 [010] ...1 2679.704889: mlx5e_stats_flower: cookie=0000000060eb3d6a bytes=0 packets=0 lastused=4295560217 - -- mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: trace tunnel rule neigh update value offloaded to mlx5:: - - $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event - $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace - ... - kworker/u48:4-8806 [009] ...1 55117.882428: mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: netdev: ens1f0 IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_used=1 - -- mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: trace neigh update tasks scheduled due to neigh state change events:: - - $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_rep_neigh_update >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event - $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace - ... - kworker/u48:7-2221 [009] ...1 1475.387435: mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: netdev: ens1f0 MAC: 24:8a:07:9a:17:9a IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_connected=1 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt deleted file mode 100644 index cd63556b27a0..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,105 +0,0 @@ -Hyper-V network driver -====================== - -Compatibility -============= - -This driver is compatible with Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 and -Windows 10. - -Features -======== - - Checksum offload - ---------------- - The netvsc driver supports checksum offload as long as the - Hyper-V host version does. Windows Server 2016 and Azure - support checksum offload for TCP and UDP for both IPv4 and - IPv6. Windows Server 2012 only supports checksum offload for TCP. - - Receive Side Scaling - -------------------- - Hyper-V supports receive side scaling. For TCP & UDP, packets can - be distributed among available queues based on IP address and port - number. - - For TCP & UDP, we can switch hash level between L3 and L4 by ethtool - command. TCP/UDP over IPv4 and v6 can be set differently. The default - hash level is L4. We currently only allow switching TX hash level - from within the guests. - - On Azure, fragmented UDP packets have high loss rate with L4 - hashing. Using L3 hashing is recommended in this case. - - For example, for UDP over IPv4 on eth0: - To include UDP port numbers in hashing: - ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sdfn - To exclude UDP port numbers in hashing: - ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sd - To show UDP hash level: - ethtool -n eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 - - Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO - -------------------------------- - The driver supports GRO and it is enabled by default. GRO coalesces - like packets and significantly reduces CPU usage under heavy Rx - load. - - Large Receive Offload (LRO), or Receive Side Coalescing (RSC) - ------------------------------------------------------------- - The driver supports LRO/RSC in the vSwitch feature. It reduces the per packet - processing overhead by coalescing multiple TCP segments when possible. The - feature is enabled by default on VMs running on Windows Server 2019 and - later. It may be changed by ethtool command: - ethtool -K eth0 lro on - ethtool -K eth0 lro off - - SR-IOV support - -------------- - Hyper-V supports SR-IOV as a hardware acceleration option. If SR-IOV - is enabled in both the vSwitch and the guest configuration, then the - Virtual Function (VF) device is passed to the guest as a PCI - device. In this case, both a synthetic (netvsc) and VF device are - visible in the guest OS and both NIC's have the same MAC address. - - The VF is enslaved by netvsc device. The netvsc driver will transparently - switch the data path to the VF when it is available and up. - Network state (addresses, firewall, etc) should be applied only to the - netvsc device; the slave device should not be accessed directly in - most cases. The exceptions are if some special queue discipline or - flow direction is desired, these should be applied directly to the - VF slave device. - - Receive Buffer - -------------- - Packets are received into a receive area which is created when device - is probed. The receive area is broken into MTU sized chunks and each may - contain one or more packets. The number of receive sections may be changed - via ethtool Rx ring parameters. - - There is a similar send buffer which is used to aggregate packets for sending. - The send area is broken into chunks of 6144 bytes, each of section may - contain one or more packets. The send buffer is an optimization, the driver - will use slower method to handle very large packets or if the send buffer - area is exhausted. - - XDP support - ----------- - XDP (eXpress Data Path) is a feature that runs eBPF bytecode at the early - stage when packets arrive at a NIC card. The goal is to increase performance - for packet processing, reducing the overhead of SKB allocation and other - upper network layers. - - hv_netvsc supports XDP in native mode, and transparently sets the XDP - program on the associated VF NIC as well. - - Setting / unsetting XDP program on synthetic NIC (netvsc) propagates to - VF NIC automatically. Setting / unsetting XDP program on VF NIC directly - is not recommended, also not propagated to synthetic NIC, and may be - overwritten by setting of synthetic NIC. - - XDP program cannot run with LRO (RSC) enabled, so you need to disable LRO - before running XDP: - ethtool -K eth0 lro off - - XDP_REDIRECT action is not yet supported. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/s2io.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/s2io.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 0362a42f7cf4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/s2io.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ -Release notes for Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver. - -Contents -======= -- 1. Introduction -- 2. Identifying the adapter/interface -- 3. Features supported -- 4. Command line parameters -- 5. Performance suggestions -- 6. Available Downloads - - -1. Introduction: -This Linux driver supports Neterion's Xframe I PCI-X 1.0 and -Xframe II PCI-X 2.0 adapters. It supports several features -such as jumbo frames, MSI/MSI-X, checksum offloads, TSO, UFO and so on. -See below for complete list of features. -All features are supported for both IPv4 and IPv6. - -2. Identifying the adapter/interface: -a. Insert the adapter(s) in your system. -b. Build and load driver -# insmod s2io.ko -c. View log messages -# dmesg | tail -40 -You will see messages similar to: -eth3: Neterion Xframe I 10GbE adapter (rev 3), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA -eth4: Neterion Xframe II 10GbE adapter (rev 2), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA -eth4: Device is on 64 bit 133MHz PCIX(M1) bus - -The above messages identify the adapter type(Xframe I/II), adapter revision, -driver version, interface name(eth3, eth4), Interrupt type(INTA, MSI, MSI-X). -In case of Xframe II, the PCI/PCI-X bus width and frequency are displayed -as well. - -To associate an interface with a physical adapter use "ethtool -p <ethX>". -The corresponding adapter's LED will blink multiple times. - -3. Features supported: -a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, -modifiable using ip command. - -b. Offloads. Supports checksum offload(TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit -and receive, TSO. - -c. Multi-buffer receive mode. Scattering of packet across multiple -buffers. Currently driver supports 2-buffer mode which yields -significant performance improvement on certain platforms(SGI Altix, -IBM xSeries). - -d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature -(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(up to 7% -on certain platforms). - -e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed -using "ethtool -S" option. - -f. Multi-FIFO/Ring. Supports up to 8 transmit queues and receive rings, -with multiple steering options. - -4. Command line parameters -a. tx_fifo_num -Number of transmit queues -Valid range: 1-8 -Default: 1 - -b. rx_ring_num -Number of receive rings -Valid range: 1-8 -Default: 1 - -c. tx_fifo_len -Size of each transmit queue -Valid range: Total length of all queues should not exceed 8192 -Default: 4096 - -d. rx_ring_sz -Size of each receive ring(in 4K blocks) -Valid range: Limited by memory on system -Default: 30 - -e. intr_type -Specifies interrupt type. Possible values 0(INTA), 2(MSI-X) -Valid values: 0, 2 -Default: 2 - -5. Performance suggestions -General: -a. Set MTU to maximum(9000 for switch setup, 9600 in back-to-back configuration) -b. Set TCP windows size to optimal value. -For instance, for MTU=1500 a value of 210K has been observed to result in -good performance. -# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="210000 210000 210000" -# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="210000 210000 210000" -For MTU=9000, TCP window size of 10 MB is recommended. -# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" -# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" - -Transmit performance: -a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters. -However, you may want to experiment with PCI bus parameters -max-split-transactions(MOST) and MMRBC (use setpci command). -A MOST value of 2 has been found optimal for Opterons and 3 for Itanium. -It could be different for your hardware. -Set MMRBC to 4K**. - -For example you can set -For opteron -#setpci -d 17d5:* 62=1d -For Itanium -#setpci -d 17d5:* 62=3d - -For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide. - -b. Ensure Transmit Checksum offload is enabled. Use ethtool to set/verify this -parameter. -c. Turn on TSO(using "ethtool -K") -# ethtool -K <ethX> tso on - -Receive performance: -a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters. -However, you may want to set PCI latency timer to 248. -#setpci -d 17d5:* LATENCY_TIMER=f8 -For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide. -b. Use 2-buffer mode. This results in large performance boost on -certain platforms(eg. SGI Altix, IBM xSeries). -c. Ensure Receive Checksum offload is enabled. Use "ethtool -K ethX" command to -set/verify this option. -d. Enable NAPI feature(in kernel configuration Device Drivers ---> Network -device support ---> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) ---> S2IO 10Gbe Xframe NIC) to -bring down CPU utilization. - -** For AMD opteron platforms with 8131 chipset, MMRBC=1 and MOST=1 are -recommended as safe parameters. -For more information, please review the AMD8131 errata at -http://vip.amd.com/us-en/assets/content_type/white_papers_and_tech_docs/ -26310_AMD-8131_HyperTransport_PCI-X_Tunnel_Revision_Guide_rev_3_18.pdf - -6. Support -For further support please contact either your 10GbE Xframe NIC vendor (IBM, -HP, SGI etc.) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/vxge.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/vxge.txt deleted file mode 100644 index abfec245f97c..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/vxge.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -Neterion's (Formerly S2io) X3100 Series 10GbE PCIe Server Adapter Linux driver -============================================================================== - -Contents --------- - -1) Introduction -2) Features supported -3) Configurable driver parameters -4) Troubleshooting - -1) Introduction: ----------------- -This Linux driver supports all Neterion's X3100 series 10 GbE PCIe I/O -Virtualized Server adapters. -The X3100 series supports four modes of operation, configurable via -firmware - - Single function mode - Multi function mode - SRIOV mode - MRIOV mode -The functions share a 10GbE link and the pci-e bus, but hardly anything else -inside the ASIC. Features like independent hw reset, statistics, bandwidth/ -priority allocation and guarantees, GRO, TSO, interrupt moderation etc are -supported independently on each function. - -(See below for a complete list of features supported for both IPv4 and IPv6) - -2) Features supported: ----------------------- - -i) Single function mode (up to 17 queues) - -ii) Multi function mode (up to 17 functions) - -iii) PCI-SIG's I/O Virtualization - - Single Root mode: v1.0 (up to 17 functions) - - Multi-Root mode: v1.0 (up to 17 functions) - -iv) Jumbo frames - X3100 Series supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, modifiable using - ip command. - -v) Offloads supported: (Enabled by default) - Checksum offload (TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit and receive paths - TCP Segmentation Offload (TSO) on transmit path - Generic Receive Offload (GRO) on receive path - -vi) MSI-X: (Enabled by default) - Resulting in noticeable performance improvement (up to 7% on certain - platforms). - -vii) NAPI: (Enabled by default) - For better Rx interrupt moderation. - -viii)RTH (Receive Traffic Hash): (Enabled by default) - Receive side steering for better scaling. - -ix) Statistics - Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed using - "ethtool -S" option. - -x) Multiple hardware queues: (Enabled by default) - Up to 17 hardware based transmit and receive data channels, with - multiple steering options (transmit multiqueue enabled by default). - -3) Configurable driver parameters: ----------------------------------- - -i) max_config_dev - Specifies maximum device functions to be enabled. - Valid range: 1-8 - -ii) max_config_port - Specifies number of ports to be enabled. - Valid range: 1,2 - Default: 1 - -iii)max_config_vpath - Specifies maximum VPATH(s) configured for each device function. - Valid range: 1-17 - -iv) vlan_tag_strip - Enables/disables vlan tag stripping from all received tagged frames that - are not replicated at the internal L2 switch. - Valid range: 0,1 (disabled, enabled respectively) - Default: 1 - -v) addr_learn_en - Enable learning the mac address of the guest OS interface in - virtualization environment. - Valid range: 0,1 (disabled, enabled respectively) - Default: 0 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/pensando/ionic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/pensando/ionic.rst deleted file mode 100644 index c17d680cf334..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/pensando/ionic.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ - -======================================================== -Linux Driver for the Pensando(R) Ethernet adapter family -======================================================== - -Pensando Linux Ethernet driver. -Copyright(c) 2019 Pensando Systems, Inc - -Contents -======== - -- Identifying the Adapter -- Support - -Identifying the Adapter -======================= - -To find if one or more Pensando PCI Ethernet devices are installed on the -host, check for the PCI devices:: - - $ lspci -d 1dd8: - b5:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002 - b6:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002 - -If such devices are listed as above, then the ionic.ko driver should find -and configure them for use. There should be log entries in the kernel -messages such as these:: - - $ dmesg | grep ionic - ionic Pensando Ethernet NIC Driver, ver 0.15.0-k - ionic 0000:b5:00.0 enp181s0: renamed from eth0 - ionic 0000:b6:00.0 enp182s0: renamed from eth0 - -Support -======= -For general Linux networking support, please use the netdev mailing -list, which is monitored by Pensando personnel:: - - netdev@vger.kernel.org - -For more specific support needs, please use the Pensando driver support -email:: - - drivers@pensando.io diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qla3xxx b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qla3xxx deleted file mode 100644 index 2f2077e34d81..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qla3xxx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -Copyright (c) 2003-2006 QLogic Corporation -QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver - -This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be -distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. -You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the -GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software -Foundation (version 2 or a later version). - -You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file -under the following terms: - - 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), - must retain the above copyright notice, this list of - conditions and the following disclaimer. - - 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above - copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - materials provided with the distribution. - - 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to - endorse or promote products derived from this software - without specific prior written permission - -REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, -THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY -EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE -IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A -PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR -BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, -EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED -TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, -DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON -ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, -OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY -OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - -USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT -CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR -OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, -TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN -ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN -COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlcnic deleted file mode 100644 index 2ae3b64983ab..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlcnic +++ /dev/null @@ -1,288 +0,0 @@ -Copyright (c) 2009-2013 QLogic Corporation -QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver - -You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the -GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as -Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). - - -EXHIBIT A - - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - Version 2, June 1991 - - Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies - of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - Preamble - - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your -freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public -License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free -software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This -General Public License applies to most of the Free Software -Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to -using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by -the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to -your programs, too. - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not -price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you -have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for -this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it -if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it -in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid -anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. -These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you -distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether -gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that -you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the -source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their -rights. - - We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and -(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, -distribute and/or modify the software. - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain -that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free -software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we -want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so -that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original -authors' reputations. - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software -patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free -program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the -program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any -patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and -modification follow. - - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - - 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains -a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed -under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, -refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" -means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: -that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, -either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another -language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in -the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". - -Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not -covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of -running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program -is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the -Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). -Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's -source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you -conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate -copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the -notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; -and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License -along with the Program. - -You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and -you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. - - 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion -of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and -distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 -above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: - - a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices - stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. - - b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in - whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any - part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third - parties under the terms of this License. - - c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively - when run, you must cause it, when started running for such - interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an - announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a - notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide - a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under - these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this - License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but - does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on - the Program is not required to print an announcement.) - -These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If -identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, -and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in -themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those -sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you -distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based -on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of -this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the -entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. - -Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest -your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to -exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or -collective works based on the Program. - -In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program -with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of -a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under -the scope of this License. - - 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, -under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of -Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: - - a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable - source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections - 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, - - b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three - years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your - cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete - machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be - distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium - customarily used for software interchange; or, - - c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer - to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is - allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you - received the program in object code or executable form with such - an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) - -The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for -making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source -code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any -associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to -control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a -special exception, the source code distributed need not include -anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary -form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the -operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component -itself accompanies the executable. - -If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering -access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent -access to copy the source code from the same place counts as -distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not -compelled to copy the source along with the object code. - - 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program -except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt -otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is -void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. -However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under -this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such -parties remain in full compliance. - - 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not -signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or -distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are -prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by -modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the -Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and -all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying -the Program or works based on it. - - 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the -Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the -original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to -these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further -restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. -You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to -this License. - - 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent -infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), -conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or -otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not -excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot -distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this -License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you -may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent -license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by -all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then -the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to -refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. - -If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under -any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to -apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other -circumstances. - -It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any -patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any -such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the -integrity of the free software distribution system, which is -implemented by public license practices. Many people have made -generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed -through that system in reliance on consistent application of that -system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing -to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot -impose that choice. - -This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to -be a consequence of the rest of this License. - - 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in -certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the -original copyright holder who places the Program under this License -may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding -those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among -countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates -the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - - 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions -of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will -be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to -address new problems or concerns. - -Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program -specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any -later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions -either of that version or of any later version published by the Free -Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of -this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software -Foundation. - - 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free -programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author -to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free -Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes -make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals -of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and -of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - - NO WARRANTY - - 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY -FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN -OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES -PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED -OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF -MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS -TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE -PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, -REPAIR OR CORRECTION. - - 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING -WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR -REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, -INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING -OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED -TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY -YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER -PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlge deleted file mode 100644 index ce64e4d15b21..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlge +++ /dev/null @@ -1,288 +0,0 @@ -Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation -QLogic Linux qlge NIC Driver - -You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the -GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as -Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). - - -EXHIBIT A - - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - Version 2, June 1991 - - Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies - of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - Preamble - - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your -freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public -License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free -software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This -General Public License applies to most of the Free Software -Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to -using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by -the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to -your programs, too. - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not -price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you -have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for -this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it -if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it -in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid -anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. -These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you -distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether -gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that -you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the -source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their -rights. - - We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and -(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, -distribute and/or modify the software. - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain -that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free -software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we -want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so -that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original -authors' reputations. - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software -patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free -program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the -program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any -patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and -modification follow. - - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - - 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains -a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed -under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, -refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" -means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: -that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, -either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another -language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in -the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". - -Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not -covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of -running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program -is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the -Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). -Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's -source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you -conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate -copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the -notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; -and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License -along with the Program. - -You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and -you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. - - 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion -of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and -distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 -above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: - - a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices - stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. - - b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in - whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any - part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third - parties under the terms of this License. - - c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively - when run, you must cause it, when started running for such - interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an - announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a - notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide - a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under - these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this - License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but - does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on - the Program is not required to print an announcement.) - -These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If -identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, -and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in -themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those -sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you -distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based -on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of -this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the -entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. - -Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest -your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to -exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or -collective works based on the Program. - -In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program -with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of -a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under -the scope of this License. - - 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, -under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of -Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: - - a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable - source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections - 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, - - b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three - years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your - cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete - machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be - distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium - customarily used for software interchange; or, - - c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer - to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is - allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you - received the program in object code or executable form with such - an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) - -The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for -making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source -code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any -associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to -control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a -special exception, the source code distributed need not include -anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary -form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the -operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component -itself accompanies the executable. - -If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering -access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent -access to copy the source code from the same place counts as -distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not -compelled to copy the source along with the object code. - - 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program -except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt -otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is -void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. -However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under -this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such -parties remain in full compliance. - - 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not -signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or -distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are -prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by -modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the -Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and -all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying -the Program or works based on it. - - 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the -Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the -original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to -these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further -restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. -You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to -this License. - - 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent -infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), -conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or -otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not -excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot -distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this -License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you -may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent -license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by -all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then -the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to -refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. - -If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under -any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to -apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other -circumstances. - -It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any -patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any -such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the -integrity of the free software distribution system, which is -implemented by public license practices. Many people have made -generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed -through that system in reliance on consistent application of that -system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing -to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot -impose that choice. - -This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to -be a consequence of the rest of this License. - - 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in -certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the -original copyright holder who places the Program under this License -may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding -those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among -countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates -the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - - 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions -of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will -be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to -address new problems or concerns. - -Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program -specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any -later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions -either of that version or of any later version published by the Free -Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of -this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software -Foundation. - - 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free -programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author -to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free -Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes -make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals -of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and -of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - - NO WARRANTY - - 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY -FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN -OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES -PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED -OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF -MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS -TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE -PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, -REPAIR OR CORRECTION. - - 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING -WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR -REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, -INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING -OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED -TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY -YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER -PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad05b04286e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +QLogic QLGE Device Drivers +=============================================== + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + qlge + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/qlge.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/qlge.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0b888253d152 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/qlge.rst @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======================================= +QLogic QLGE 10Gb Ethernet device driver +======================================= + +This driver use drgn and devlink for debugging. + +Dump kernel data structures in drgn +----------------------------------- + +To dump kernel data structures, the following Python script can be used +in drgn: + +.. code-block:: python + + def align(x, a): + """the alignment a should be a power of 2 + """ + mask = a - 1 + return (x+ mask) & ~mask + + def struct_size(struct_type): + struct_str = "struct {}".format(struct_type) + return sizeof(Object(prog, struct_str, address=0x0)) + + def netdev_priv(netdevice): + NETDEV_ALIGN = 32 + return netdevice.value_() + align(struct_size("net_device"), NETDEV_ALIGN) + + name = 'xxx' + qlge_device = None + netdevices = prog['init_net'].dev_base_head.address_of_() + for netdevice in list_for_each_entry("struct net_device", netdevices, "dev_list"): + if netdevice.name.string_().decode('ascii') == name: + print(netdevice.name) + + ql_adapter = Object(prog, "struct ql_adapter", address=netdev_priv(qlge_device)) + +The struct ql_adapter will be printed in drgn as follows, + + >>> ql_adapter + (struct ql_adapter){ + .ricb = (struct ricb){ + .base_cq = (u8)0, + .flags = (u8)120, + .mask = (__le16)26637, + .hash_cq_id = (u8 [1024]){ 172, 142, 255, 255 }, + .ipv6_hash_key = (__le32 [10]){}, + .ipv4_hash_key = (__le32 [4]){}, + }, + .flags = (unsigned long)0, + .wol = (u32)0, + .nic_stats = (struct nic_stats){ + .tx_pkts = (u64)0, + .tx_bytes = (u64)0, + .tx_mcast_pkts = (u64)0, + .tx_bcast_pkts = (u64)0, + .tx_ucast_pkts = (u64)0, + .tx_ctl_pkts = (u64)0, + .tx_pause_pkts = (u64)0, + ... + }, + .active_vlans = (unsigned long [64]){ + 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 52780853100545, 18446744073709551615, + 18446619461681283072, 0, 42949673024, 2147483647, + }, + .rx_ring = (struct rx_ring [17]){ + { + .cqicb = (struct cqicb){ + .msix_vect = (u8)0, + .reserved1 = (u8)0, + .reserved2 = (u8)0, + .flags = (u8)0, + .len = (__le16)0, + .rid = (__le16)0, + ... + }, + .cq_base = (void *)0x0, + .cq_base_dma = (dma_addr_t)0, + } + ... + } + } + +coredump via devlink +-------------------- + + +And the coredump obtained via devlink in json format looks like, + +.. code:: shell + + $ devlink health dump show DEVICE reporter coredump -p -j + { + "Core Registers": { + "segment": 1, + "values": [ 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 ] + }, + "Test Logic Regs": { + "segment": 2, + "values": [ 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 ] + }, + "RMII Registers": { + "segment": 3, + "values": [ 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 ] + }, + ... + "Sem Registers": { + "segment": 50, + "values": [ 0,0,0,0 ] + } + } + +When the module parameter qlge_force_coredump is set to be true, the MPI +RISC reset before coredumping. So coredumping will much longer since +devlink tool has to wait for 5 secs for the resetting to be +finished. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qualcomm/rmnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qualcomm/rmnet.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6b341eaf2062..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qualcomm/rmnet.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -1. Introduction - -rmnet driver is used for supporting the Multiplexing and aggregation -Protocol (MAP). This protocol is used by all recent chipsets using Qualcomm -Technologies, Inc. modems. - -This driver can be used to register onto any physical network device in -IP mode. Physical transports include USB, HSIC, PCIe and IP accelerator. - -Multiplexing allows for creation of logical netdevices (rmnet devices) to -handle multiple private data networks (PDN) like a default internet, tethering, -multimedia messaging service (MMS) or IP media subsystem (IMS). Hardware sends -packets with MAP headers to rmnet. Based on the multiplexer id, rmnet -routes to the appropriate PDN after removing the MAP header. - -Aggregation is required to achieve high data rates. This involves hardware -sending aggregated bunch of MAP frames. rmnet driver will de-aggregate -these MAP frames and send them to appropriate PDN's. - -2. Packet format - -a. MAP packet (data / control) - -MAP header has the same endianness of the IP packet. - -Packet format - - -Bit 0 1 2-7 8 - 15 16 - 31 -Function Command / Data Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length -Bit 32 - x -Function Raw Bytes - -Command (1)/ Data (0) bit value is to indicate if the packet is a MAP command -or data packet. Control packet is used for transport level flow control. Data -packets are standard IP packets. - -Reserved bits are usually zeroed out and to be ignored by receiver. - -Padding is number of bytes to be added for 4 byte alignment if required by -hardware. - -Multiplexer ID is to indicate the PDN on which data has to be sent. - -Payload length includes the padding length but does not include MAP header -length. - -b. MAP packet (command specific) - -Bit 0 1 2-7 8 - 15 16 - 31 -Function Command Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length -Bit 32 - 39 40 - 45 46 - 47 48 - 63 -Function Command name Reserved Command Type Reserved -Bit 64 - 95 -Function Transaction ID -Bit 96 - 127 -Function Command data - -Command 1 indicates disabling flow while 2 is enabling flow - -Command types - -0 for MAP command request -1 is to acknowledge the receipt of a command -2 is for unsupported commands -3 is for error during processing of commands - -c. Aggregation - -Aggregation is multiple MAP packets (can be data or command) delivered to -rmnet in a single linear skb. rmnet will process the individual -packets and either ACK the MAP command or deliver the IP packet to the -network stack as needed - -MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding.... -MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|Command Packet|Optional pad... - -3. Userspace configuration - -rmnet userspace configuration is done through netlink library librmnetctl -and command line utility rmnetcli. Utility is hosted in codeaurora forum git. -The driver uses rtnl_link_ops for communication. - -https://source.codeaurora.org/quic/la/platform/vendor/qcom-opensource/dataservices/tree/rmnetctl diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/sb1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/sb1000.txt deleted file mode 100644 index f92c2aac56a9..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/sb1000.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,207 +0,0 @@ -sb1000 is a module network device driver for the General Instrument (also known -as NextLevel) SURFboard1000 internal cable modem board. This is an ISA card -which is used by a number of cable TV companies to provide cable modem access. -It's a one-way downstream-only cable modem, meaning that your upstream net link -is provided by your regular phone modem. - -This driver was written by Franco Venturi <fventuri@mediaone.net>. He deserves -a great deal of thanks for this wonderful piece of code! - ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ - -Support for this device is now a part of the standard Linux kernel. The -driver source code file is drivers/net/sb1000.c. In addition to this -you will need: - -1.) The "cmconfig" program. This is a utility which supplements "ifconfig" -to configure the cable modem and network interface (usually called "cm0"); -and - -2.) Several PPP scripts which live in /etc/ppp to make connecting via your -cable modem easy. - - These utilities can be obtained from: - - http://www.jacksonville.net/~fventuri/ - - in Franco's original source code distribution .tar.gz file. Support for - the sb1000 driver can be found at: - - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://home.adelphia.net/~siglercm/sb1000.html - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://linuxpower.cx/~cable/ - - along with these utilities. - -3.) The standard isapnp tools. These are necessary to configure your SB1000 -card at boot time (or afterwards by hand) since it's a PnP card. - - If you don't have these installed as a standard part of your Linux - distribution, you can find them at: - - http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/ - - or check your Linux distribution binary CD or their web site. For help with - isapnp, pnpdump, or /etc/isapnp.conf, go to: - - http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/isapnpfaq.html - ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ - -To make the SB1000 card work, follow these steps: - -1.) Run `make config', or `make menuconfig', or `make xconfig', whichever -you prefer, in the top kernel tree directory to set up your kernel -configuration. Make sure to say "Y" to "Prompt for development drivers" -and to say "M" to the sb1000 driver. Also say "Y" or "M" to all the standard -networking questions to get TCP/IP and PPP networking support. - -2.) *BEFORE* you build the kernel, edit drivers/net/sb1000.c. Make sure -to redefine the value of READ_DATA_PORT to match the I/O address used -by isapnp to access your PnP cards. This is the value of READPORT in -/etc/isapnp.conf or given by the output of pnpdump. - -3.) Build and install the kernel and modules as usual. - -4.) Boot your new kernel following the usual procedures. - -5.) Set up to configure the new SB1000 PnP card by capturing the output -of "pnpdump" to a file and editing this file to set the correct I/O ports, -IRQ, and DMA settings for all your PnP cards. Make sure none of the settings -conflict with one another. Then test this configuration by running the -"isapnp" command with your new config file as the input. Check for -errors and fix as necessary. (As an aside, I use I/O ports 0x110 and -0x310 and IRQ 11 for my SB1000 card and these work well for me. YMMV.) -Then save the finished config file as /etc/isapnp.conf for proper configuration -on subsequent reboots. - -6.) Download the original file sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz from Franco's site or one of -the others referenced above. As root, unpack it into a temporary directory and -do a `make cmconfig' and then `install -c cmconfig /usr/local/sbin'. Don't do -`make install' because it expects to find all the utilities built and ready for -installation, not just cmconfig. - -7.) As root, copy all the files under the ppp/ subdirectory in Franco's -tar file into /etc/ppp, being careful not to overwrite any files that are -already in there. Then modify ppp@gi-on to set the correct login name, -phone number, and frequency for the cable modem. Also edit pap-secrets -to specify your login name and password and any site-specific information -you need. - -8.) Be sure to modify /etc/ppp/firewall to use ipchains instead of -the older ipfwadm commands from the 2.0.x kernels. There's a neat utility to -convert ipfwadm commands to ipchains commands: - - http://users.dhp.com/~whisper/ipfwadm2ipchains/ - -You may also wish to modify the firewall script to implement a different -firewalling scheme. - -9.) Start the PPP connection via the script /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on. You must be -root to do this. It's better to use a utility like sudo to execute -frequently used commands like this with root permissions if possible. If you -connect successfully the cable modem interface will come up and you'll see a -driver message like this at the console: - - cm0: sb1000 at (0x110,0x310), csn 1, S/N 0x2a0d16d8, IRQ 11. - sb1000.c:v1.1.2 6/01/98 (fventuri@mediaone.net) - -The "ifconfig" command should show two new interfaces, ppp0 and cm0. -The command "cmconfig cm0" will give you information about the cable modem -interface. - -10.) Try pinging a site via `ping -c 5 www.yahoo.com', for example. You should -see packets received. - -11.) If you can't get site names (like www.yahoo.com) to resolve into -IP addresses (like 204.71.200.67), be sure your /etc/resolv.conf file -has no syntax errors and has the right nameserver IP addresses in it. -If this doesn't help, try something like `ping -c 5 204.71.200.67' to -see if the networking is running but the DNS resolution is where the -problem lies. - -12.) If you still have problems, go to the support web sites mentioned above -and read the information and documentation there. - ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ - -Common problems: - -1.) Packets go out on the ppp0 interface but don't come back on the cm0 -interface. It looks like I'm connected but I can't even ping any -numerical IP addresses. (This happens predominantly on Debian systems due -to a default boot-time configuration script.) - -Solution -- As root `echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/cm0/rp_filter' so it -can share the same IP address as the ppp0 interface. Note that this -command should probably be added to the /etc/ppp/cablemodem script -*right*between* the "/sbin/ifconfig" and "/sbin/cmconfig" commands. -You may need to do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/ppp0/rp_filter as well. -If you do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/default/rp_filter on each reboot -(in rc.local or some such) then any interfaces can share the same IP -addresses. - -2.) I get "unresolved symbol" error messages on executing `insmod sb1000.o'. - -Solution -- You probably have a non-matching kernel source tree and -/usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm header files. Make sure you -install the correct versions of the header files in these two directories. -Then rebuild and reinstall the kernel. - -3.) When isapnp runs it reports an error, and my SB1000 card isn't working. - -Solution -- There's a problem with later versions of isapnp using the "(CHECK)" -option in the lines that allocate the two I/O addresses for the SB1000 card. -This first popped up on RH 6.0. Delete "(CHECK)" for the SB1000 I/O addresses. -Make sure they don't conflict with any other pieces of hardware first! Then -rerun isapnp and go from there. - -4.) I can't execute the /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on file. - -Solution -- As root do `chmod ug+x /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on'. - -5.) The firewall script isn't working (with 2.2.x and higher kernels). - -Solution -- Use the ipfwadm2ipchains script referenced above to convert the -/etc/ppp/firewall script from the deprecated ipfwadm commands to ipchains. - -6.) I'm getting *tons* of firewall deny messages in the /var/kern.log, -/var/messages, and/or /var/syslog files, and they're filling up my /var -partition!!! - -Solution -- First, tell your ISP that you're receiving DoS (Denial of Service) -and/or portscanning (UDP connection attempts) attacks! Look over the deny -messages to figure out what the attack is and where it's coming from. Next, -edit /etc/ppp/cablemodem and make sure the ",nobroadcast" option is turned on -to the "cmconfig" command (uncomment that line). If you're not receiving these -denied packets on your broadcast interface (IP address xxx.yyy.zzz.255 -typically), then someone is attacking your machine in particular. Be careful -out there.... - -7.) Everything seems to work fine but my computer locks up after a while -(and typically during a lengthy download through the cable modem)! - -Solution -- You may need to add a short delay in the driver to 'slow down' the -SURFboard because your PC might not be able to keep up with the transfer rate -of the SB1000. To do this, it's probably best to download Franco's -sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz archive and build and install sb1000.o manually. You'll -want to edit the 'Makefile' and look for the 'SB1000_DELAY' -define. Uncomment those 'CFLAGS' lines (and comment out the default ones) -and try setting the delay to something like 60 microseconds with: -'-DSB1000_DELAY=60'. Then do `make' and as root `make install' and try -it out. If it still doesn't work or you like playing with the driver, you may -try other numbers. Remember though that the higher the delay, the slower the -driver (which slows down the rest of the PC too when it is actively -used). Thanks to Ed Daiga for this tip! - ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ - -Credits: This README came from Franco Venturi's original README file which is -still supplied with his driver .tar.gz archive. I and all other sb1000 users -owe Franco a tremendous "Thank you!" Additional thanks goes to Carl Patten -and Ralph Bonnell who are now managing the Linux SB1000 web site, and to -the SB1000 users who reported and helped debug the common problems listed -above. - - - Clemmitt Sigler - csigler@vt.edu diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/smsc/smc9.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/smsc/smc9.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d1e15074e43d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/smsc/smc9.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ - -SMC 9xxxx Driver -Revision 0.12 -3/5/96 -Copyright 1996 Erik Stahlman -Released under terms of the GNU General Public License. - -This file contains the instructions and caveats for my SMC9xxx driver. You -should not be using the driver without reading this file. - -Things to note about installation: - - 1. The driver should work on all kernels from 1.2.13 until 1.3.71. - (A kernel patch is supplied for 1.3.71 ) - - 2. If you include this into the kernel, you might need to change some - options, such as for forcing IRQ. - - - 3. To compile as a module, run 'make' . - Make will give you the appropriate options for various kernel support. - - 4. Loading the driver as a module : - - use: insmod smc9194.o - optional parameters: - io=xxxx : your base address - irq=xx : your irq - ifport=x : 0 for whatever is default - 1 for twisted pair - 2 for AUI ( or BNC on some cards ) - -How to obtain the latest version? - -FTP: - ftp://fenris.campus.vt.edu/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz - ftp://sfbox.vt.edu/filebox/F/fenris/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz - - -Contacting me: - erik@mail.vt.edu - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d4d4c0751a09..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,541 +0,0 @@ -* Texas Instruments CPSW ethernet driver - -Multiqueue & CBS & MQPRIO -===================================================================== -===================================================================== - -The cpsw has 3 CBS shapers for each external ports. This document -describes MQPRIO and CBS Qdisc offload configuration for cpsw driver -based on examples. It potentially can be used in audio video bridging -(AVB) and time sensitive networking (TSN). - -The following examples were tested on AM572x EVM and BBB boards. - -Test setup -========== - -Under consideration two examples with AM572x EVM running cpsw driver -in dual_emac mode. - -Several prerequisites: -- TX queues must be rated starting from txq0 that has highest priority -- Traffic classes are used starting from 0, that has highest priority -- CBS shapers should be used with rated queues -- The bandwidth for CBS shapers has to be set a little bit more then - potential incoming rate, thus, rate of all incoming tx queues has - to be a little less -- Real rates can differ, due to discreetness -- Map skb-priority to txq is not enough, also skb-priority to l2 prio - map has to be created with ip or vconfig tool -- Any l2/socket prio (0 - 7) for classes can be used, but for - simplicity default values are used: 3 and 2 -- only 2 classes tested: A and B, but checked and can work with more, - maximum allowed 4, but only for 3 rate can be set. - -Test setup for examples -======================= - +-------------------------------+ - |--+ | - | | Workstation0 | - |E | MAC 18:03:73:66:87:42 | -+-----------------------------+ +--|t | | -| | 1 | E | | |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | -| Target board: | 0 | t |--+ |0 | 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0 \| -| AM572x EVM | 0 | h | | | -s 1500 | -| | 0 | 0 | |--+ | -| Only 2 classes: |Mb +---| +-------------------------------+ -| class A, class B | | -| | +---| +-------------------------------+ -| | 1 | E | |--+ | -| | 0 | t | | | Workstation1 | -| | 0 | h |--+ |E | MAC 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd | -| |Mb | 1 | +--|t | | -+-----------------------------+ |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | - |0 | 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth0 \| - | | -s 1500 | - |--+ | - +-------------------------------+ - -********************************************************************* -********************************************************************* -********************************************************************* -Example 1: One port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, applicable for single port boards) - -tc - traffic class -txq - transmit queue -p - priority -f - fifo (cpsw fifo) -S - shaper configured - -+------------------------------------------------------------------+ u -| +---------------+ +---------------+ +------+ +------+ | s -| | | | | | | | | | e -| | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | Apps | | r -| | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Rest | | -| | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth1 | | s -| | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | | | | p -| | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | | | | a -| | SO_PRIORITY=3 | | SO_PRIORITY=2 | | | | | | | | c -| | | | | | | | | | | | | | e -| +---|-----------+ +---|-----------+ +---|--+ +---|--+ | -+-----|------------------|------------------|--------|-------------+ - +-+ +------------+ | | - | | +-----------------+ +--+ - | | | | -+---|-------|-------------|-----------------------|----------------+ -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | -| | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | k -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r -| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n -| | | | | | e -| | | +-----+ | | l -| | | | | | -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s -| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc0 | | p -| \ / \ / \ / \ / | a -| \ / \ / \ / \ / | c -| \/ \/ \/ \/ | e -| | | +-----+ | | -| | | | | | | -| | | | | | | -| | | | | | | -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | -| |txq0| |txq1| |txq2| |txq3| |txq4| | -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | -| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | -| +-|------|------|------|--+ +--|--------------+ | -| | | | | | | Eth0.100 | | Eth1 | | -+---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ - | | | | | - p p p p | - 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <- L2 priority | - | | | | | - | | | | | -+---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ -| | | | | |----------+ | -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | -| |dma7| |dma6| |dma5| |dma4| |dma3| | -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c -| \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / | p -| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s -| | | | +----- | | w -| | | | | | | -| | | | | | | d -| +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ | r -| | | | | | |o o| | | i -| | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r r| f0 | | v -| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | | e -| \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / | r -| \S / \S / \ / \ / | -| \/ \/ \/ \/ | -+------------------------------------------------------------------+ -========================================Eth==========================> - -1) -// Add 4 tx queues, for interface Eth0, and 1 tx queue for Eth1 -$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 5 -rx unmodified, ignoring - -2) -// Check if num of queues is set correctly: -$ ethtool -l eth0 -Channel parameters for eth0: -Pre-set maximums: -RX: 8 -TX: 8 -Other: 0 -Combined: 0 -Current hardware settings: -RX: 1 -TX: 5 -Other: 0 -Combined: 0 - -3) -// TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 -// Set rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately. -// Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness. -// Leave last 2 tx queues not rated. -$ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate -$ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate - -4) -// Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: -$ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate -40 -20 -0 -0 -0 - -5) -// Map skb->priority to traffic class: -// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 -// Map traffic class to transmit queue: -// tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq2, txq3) -$ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ -map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@2 hw 1 - -5a) -// As two interface sharing same set of tx queues, assign all traffic -// coming to interface Eth1 to separate queue in order to not mix it -// with traffic from interface Eth0, so use separate txq to send -// packets to Eth1, so all prio -> tc0 and tc0 -> txq4 -// Here hw 0, so here still default configuration for eth1 in hw -$ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 1 \ -map 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 queues 1@4 hw 0 - -6) -// Check classes settings -$ tc -g class show dev eth0 -+---(100:ffe2) mqprio -| +---(100:3) mqprio -| +---(100:4) mqprio -| -+---(100:ffe1) mqprio -| +---(100:2) mqprio -| -+---(100:ffe0) mqprio - +---(100:1) mqprio - -$ tc -g class show dev eth1 -+---(100:ffe0) mqprio - +---(100:5) mqprio - -7) -// Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc -// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) -// here only idle slope is important, others arg are ignored -// Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness -$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1438 \ -hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 -net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 - -8) -// Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc: -// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) -$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1468 \ -hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 -net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 - -9) -// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos -$ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 -8021q: 802.1Q VLAN Support v1.8 -8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth0 -8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth1 -net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter - -10) -// Map skb->priority to L2 prio, 1 to 1 -$ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ -egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 - -11) -// Check egress map for vlan 100 -$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 -[...] -INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 -EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 - -12) -// Run your appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" -// to 3 for class A and/or to 2 for class B -// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) -./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& -./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& - -13) -// run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) -// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) -./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps - -14) -// Restore default configuration if needed -$ ip link del eth0.100 -$ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root -$ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root -net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped -net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 -net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 -$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 - -********************************************************************* -********************************************************************* -********************************************************************* -Example 2: Two port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, for dual emac boards only) - -+------------------------------------------------------------------+ u -| +----------+ +----------+ +------+ +----------+ +----------+ | s -| | | | | | | | | | | | e -| | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | App 3 | | App 4 | | r -| | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Class B | | Class A | | -| | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | | | | Eth1 | | Eth1 | | s -| | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | p -| | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | 10 Mb/s | | 30 Mb/s | | a -| | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | | | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | c -| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e -| +---|------+ +---|------+ +---|--+ +---|------+ +---|------+ | -+-----|-------------|-------------|---------|-------------|--------+ - +-+ +-------+ | +----------+ +----+ - | | +-------+------+ | | - | | | | | | -+---|-------|-------------|--------------|-------------|-------|---+ -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | -| | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | p1 | | p2 | | p3 | | k -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r -| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n -| | | | | | | | e -| | | +----+ +----+ | | | l -| | | | | | | | -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s -| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc2 | |tc1 | |tc0 | | p -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | a -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c -| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | e -| | | +-----+ +-----+ | | | -| | | | | | | | | | -| | | | | | | | | | -| | | | | E E | | | | | -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ t t +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | -| |txq0| |txq1| |txq4| |txq5| h h |txq6| |txq7| |txq3| |txq2| | -| \ / \ / \ / \ / 0 1 \ / \ / \ / \ / | -| \ / \ / \ / \ / . . \ / \ / \ / \ / | -| \/ \/ \/ \/ 1 1 \/ \/ \/ \/ | -| +-|------|------|------|--+ 0 0 +-|------|------|------|--+ | -| | | | | | | 0 0 | | | | | | | -+---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ - | | | | | | | | - p p p p p p p p - 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <-L2 pri-> 0-1, 4-7 2 3 - | | | | | | | | - | | | | | | | | -+---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ -| | | | | | | | | | -| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | -| |dma7| |dma6| |dma3| |dma2| |dma1| |dma0| |dma4| |dma5| | -| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c -| \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / \ / \S / \S / | p -| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s -| | | | +----- | | | | | w -| | | | | +----+ | | | | -| | | | | | | | | | d -| +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ +----+ +----+ | r -| | | | | | |o o| | | | | | | i -| | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r CPSW r| f3 | | f2 | | f0 | | v -| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | | e -| \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / \CBS / \CBS / | r -| \S / \S / \ / \S / \S / \ / | -| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | -+------------------------------------------------------------------+ -========================================Eth==========================> - -1) -// Add 8 tx queues, for interface Eth0, but they are common, so are accessed -// by two interfaces Eth0 and Eth1. -$ ethtool -L eth1 rx 1 tx 8 -rx unmodified, ignoring - -2) -// Check if num of queues is set correctly: -$ ethtool -l eth0 -Channel parameters for eth0: -Pre-set maximums: -RX: 8 -TX: 8 -Other: 0 -Combined: 0 -Current hardware settings: -RX: 1 -TX: 8 -Other: 0 -Combined: 0 - -3) -// TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 for Eth0 -// and for tx2 and tx3 for Eth1. That is, rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately -// for Eth0 and 30 and 10 Mb/s for Eth1. -// Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness -// Leave last 4 tx queues as not rated -$ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate -$ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate -$ echo 30 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-2/tx_maxrate -$ echo 10 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-3/tx_maxrate - -4) -// Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: -$ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate -40 -20 -30 -10 -0 -0 -0 -0 - -5) -// Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth0: -// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 -// Map traffic class to transmit queue: -// tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq4, txq5) -$ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ -map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@4 hw 1 - -6) -// Check classes settings -$ tc -g class show dev eth0 -+---(100:ffe2) mqprio -| +---(100:5) mqprio -| +---(100:6) mqprio -| -+---(100:ffe1) mqprio -| +---(100:2) mqprio -| -+---(100:ffe0) mqprio - +---(100:1) mqprio - -7) -// Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 -// here only idle slope is important, others ignored -// Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness -$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1470 \ -hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 -net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 - -8) -// Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 -$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1470 \ -hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 -net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 - -9) -// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth0 -$ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 -net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter - -10) -// Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth0.100, one to one -$ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ -egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 - -11) -// Check egress map for vlan 100 -$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 -[...] -INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 -EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 - -12) -// Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth1: -// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 -// Map traffic class to transmit queue: -// tc0 -> txq2, tc1 -> txq3, tc2 -> (txq6, txq7) -$ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ -map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@2 1@3 2@6 hw 1 - -13) -// Check classes settings -$ tc -g class show dev eth1 -+---(100:ffe2) mqprio -| +---(100:7) mqprio -| +---(100:8) mqprio -| -+---(100:ffe1) mqprio -| +---(100:4) mqprio -| -+---(100:ffe0) mqprio - +---(100:3) mqprio - -14) -// Set rate for class A - 31 Mbit (tc0, txq2) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 -// here only idle slope is important, others ignored, but calculated -// for interface speed - 100Mb for eth1 port. -// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) -$ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:3 cbs locredit -1035 \ -hicredit 465 sendslope -69000 idleslope 31000 offload 1 -net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 31 - -15) -// Set rate for class B - 11 Mbit (tc1, txq3) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 -// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) -$ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:4 cbs locredit -1335 \ -hicredit 405 sendslope -89000 idleslope 11000 offload 1 -net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 11 - -16) -// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth1 -$ ip link add link eth1 name eth1.100 type vlan id 100 -net eth1: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter - -17) -// Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth1.100, one to one -$ ip link set eth1.100 type vlan \ -egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 - -18) -// Check egress map for vlan 100 -$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth1.100 -[...] -INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 -EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 - -19) -// Run appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" to 3 -// for class A and to 2 for class B. For both interfaces -./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& -./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& -./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p2 -s 1500& -./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p3 -s 1500& - -20) -// run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) -// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) -./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps -Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps - -21) -// Restore default configuration if needed -$ ip link del eth1.100 -$ ip link del eth0.100 -$ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root -net eth1: Prev FIFO2 is shaped -net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 0 -net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 0 -$ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root -net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped -net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 -net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 -$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw_switchdev.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw_switchdev.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 12855ab268b8..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw_switchdev.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,209 +0,0 @@ -* Texas Instruments CPSW switchdev based ethernet driver 2.0 - -- Port renaming -On older udev versions renaming of ethX to swXpY will not be automatically -supported -In order to rename via udev: -ip -d link show dev sw0p1 | grep switchid - -SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", ATTR{phys_switch_id}==<switchid>, \ - ATTR{phys_port_name}!="", NAME="sw0$attr{phys_port_name}" - - -==================== -# Dual mac mode -==================== -- The new (cpsw_new.c) driver is operating in dual-emac mode by default, thus -working as 2 individual network interfaces. Main differences from legacy CPSW -driver are: - - optimized promiscuous mode: The P0_UNI_FLOOD (both ports) is enabled in -addition to ALLMULTI (current port) instead of ALE_BYPASS. -So, Ports in promiscuous mode will keep possibility of mcast and vlan filtering, -which is provides significant benefits when ports are joined to the same bridge, -but without enabling "switch" mode, or to different bridges. - - learning disabled on ports as it make not too much sense for - segregated ports - no forwarding in HW. - - enabled basic support for devlink. - - devlink dev show - platform/48484000.switch - - devlink dev param show - platform/48484000.switch: - name switch_mode type driver-specific - values: - cmode runtime value false - name ale_bypass type driver-specific - values: - cmode runtime value false - -Devlink configuration parameters -==================== -See Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst - -==================== -# Bridging in dual mac mode -==================== -The dual_mac mode requires two vids to be reserved for internal purposes, -which, by default, equal CPSW Port numbers. As result, bridge has to be -configured in vlan unaware mode or default_pvid has to be adjusted. - - ip link add name br0 type bridge - ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 - echo 0 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid - ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 - ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 - - or - - ip link add name br0 type bridge - ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 - echo 100 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid - ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 - ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 - ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 - -==================== -# Enabling "switch" -==================== -The Switch mode can be enabled by configuring devlink driver parameter -"switch_mode" to 1/true: - devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \ - name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime - -This can be done regardless of the state of Port's netdev devices - UP/DOWN, but -Port's netdev devices have to be in UP before joining to the bridge to avoid -overwriting of bridge configuration as CPSW switch driver copletly reloads its -configuration when first Port changes its state to UP. - -When the both interfaces joined the bridge - CPSW switch driver will enable -marking packets with offload_fwd_mark flag unless "ale_bypass=0" - -All configuration is implemented via switchdev API. - -==================== -# Bridge setup -==================== - devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \ - name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime - - ip link add name br0 type bridge - ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000 - ip link set dev sw0p1 up - ip link set dev sw0p2 up - ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 - ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 - [*] bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self - -[*] if vlan_filtering=1. where default_pvid=1 - -================= -# On/off STP -================= -ip link set dev BRDEV type bridge stp_state 1/0 - -Note. Steps [*] are mandatory. - -==================== -# VLAN configuration -==================== -bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self <---- add cpu port to VLAN 1 - -Note. This step is mandatory for bridge/default_pvid. - -================= -# Add extra VLANs -================= - 1. untagged: - bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master - bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 pvid untagged master - bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid untagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100 - - 2. tagged: - bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 master - bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master - bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid tagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100 - -==== -FDBs -==== -FDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection - -Manually adding FDBs: -bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff dev sw0p1 master vlan 100 -bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:fe dev sw0p2 master <---- Add on all VLANs - -==== -MDBs -==== -MDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection - -Manually adding MDBs: -bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent vid 100 -bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent <---- Add on all VLANs - -================== -Multicast flooding -================== -CPU port mcast_flooding is always on - -Turning flooding on/off on swithch ports: -bridge link set dev sw0p1 mcast_flood on/off - -================== -Access and Trunk port -================== - bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master - bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master - - - bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 self - ip link add link br0 name br0.100 type vlan id 100 - - Note. Setting PVID on Bridge device itself working only for - default VLAN (default_pvid). - -===================== - NFS -===================== -The only way for NFS to work is by chrooting to a minimal environment when -switch configuration that will affect connectivity is needed. -Assuming you are booting NFS with eth1 interface(the script is hacky and -it's just there to prove NFS is doable). - -setup.sh: -#!/bin/sh -mkdir proc -mount -t proc none /proc -ifconfig br0 > /dev/null -if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then - echo "Setting up bridge" - ip link add name br0 type bridge - ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000 - ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 - - ip link set eth1 down - ip link set eth1 name sw0p1 - ip link set dev sw0p1 up - ip link set dev sw0p2 up - ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0 - ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0 - bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self - ifconfig sw0p1 0.0.0.0 - udhchc -i br0 -fi -umount /proc - -run_nfs.sh: -#!/bin/sh -mkdir /tmp/root/bin -p -mkdir /tmp/root/lib -p - -cp -r /lib/ /tmp/root/ -cp -r /bin/ /tmp/root/ -cp /sbin/ip /tmp/root/bin -cp /sbin/bridge /tmp/root/bin -cp /sbin/ifconfig /tmp/root/bin -cp /sbin/udhcpc /tmp/root/bin -cp /path/to/setup.sh /tmp/root/bin -chroot /tmp/root/ busybox sh /bin/setup.sh - -run ./run_nfs.sh diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/tlan.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/tlan.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 34550dfcef74..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/tlan.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ -(C) 1997-1998 Caldera, Inc. -(C) 1998 James Banks -(C) 1999-2001 Torben Mathiasen <tmm@image.dk, torben.mathiasen@compaq.com> - -For driver information/updates visit http://www.compaq.com - - -TLAN driver for Linux, version 1.14a -README - - -I. Supported Devices. - - Only PCI devices will work with this driver. - - Supported: - Vendor ID Device ID Name - 0e11 ae32 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX PCI UTP - 0e11 ae34 Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP - 0e11 ae35 Compaq Integrated NetFlex 3/P - 0e11 ae40 Compaq Netelligent Dual 10/100 TX PCI UTP - 0e11 ae43 Compaq Netelligent Integrated 10/100 TX UTP - 0e11 b011 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX Embedded UTP - 0e11 b012 Compaq Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax - 0e11 b030 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX UTP - 0e11 f130 Compaq NetFlex 3/P - 0e11 f150 Compaq NetFlex 3/P - 108d 0012 Olicom OC-2325 - 108d 0013 Olicom OC-2183 - 108d 0014 Olicom OC-2326 - - - Caveats: - - I am not sure if 100BaseTX daughterboards (for those cards which - support such things) will work. I haven't had any solid evidence - either way. - - However, if a card supports 100BaseTx without requiring an add - on daughterboard, it should work with 100BaseTx. - - The "Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax" (b012) device is untested, - but I do not expect any problems. - - -II. Driver Options - 1. You can append debug=x to the end of the insmod line to get - debug messages, where x is a bit field where the bits mean - the following: - - 0x01 Turn on general debugging messages. - 0x02 Turn on receive debugging messages. - 0x04 Turn on transmit debugging messages. - 0x08 Turn on list debugging messages. - - 2. You can append aui=1 to the end of the insmod line to cause - the adapter to use the AUI interface instead of the 10 Base T - interface. This is also what to do if you want to use the BNC - connector on a TLAN based device. (Setting this option on a - device that does not have an AUI/BNC connector will probably - cause it to not function correctly.) - - 3. You can set duplex=1 to force half duplex, and duplex=2 to - force full duplex. - - 4. You can set speed=10 to force 10Mbs operation, and speed=100 - to force 100Mbs operation. (I'm not sure what will happen - if a card which only supports 10Mbs is forced into 100Mbs - mode.) - - 5. You have to use speed=X duplex=Y together now. If you just - do "insmod tlan.o speed=100" the driver will do Auto-Neg. - To force a 10Mbps Half-Duplex link do "insmod tlan.o speed=10 - duplex=1". - - 6. If the driver is built into the kernel, you can use the 3rd - and 4th parameters to set aui and debug respectively. For - example: - - ether=0,0,0x1,0x7,eth0 - - This sets aui to 0x1 and debug to 0x7, assuming eth0 is a - supported TLAN device. - - The bits in the third byte are assigned as follows: - - 0x01 = aui - 0x02 = use half duplex - 0x04 = use full duplex - 0x08 = use 10BaseT - 0x10 = use 100BaseTx - - You also need to set both speed and duplex settings when forcing - speeds with kernel-parameters. - ether=0,0,0x12,0,eth0 will force link to 100Mbps Half-Duplex. - - 7. If you have more than one tlan adapter in your system, you can - use the above options on a per adapter basis. To force a 100Mbit/HD - link with your eth1 adapter use: - - insmod tlan speed=0,100 duplex=0,1 - - Now eth0 will use auto-neg and eth1 will be forced to 100Mbit/HD. - Note that the tlan driver supports a maximum of 8 adapters. - - -III. Things to try if you have problems. - 1. Make sure your card's PCI id is among those listed in - section I, above. - 2. Make sure routing is correct. - 3. Try forcing different speed/duplex settings - - -There is also a tlan mailing list which you can join by sending "subscribe tlan" -in the body of an email to majordomo@vuser.vu.union.edu. -There is also a tlan website at http://www.compaq.com - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/toshiba/spider_net.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/toshiba/spider_net.txt deleted file mode 100644 index b0b75f8463b3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/toshiba/spider_net.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,204 +0,0 @@ - - The Spidernet Device Driver - =========================== - -Written by Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com> - -Version of 7 June 2007 - -Abstract -======== -This document sketches the structure of portions of the spidernet -device driver in the Linux kernel tree. The spidernet is a gigabit -ethernet device built into the Toshiba southbridge commonly used -in the SONY Playstation 3 and the IBM QS20 Cell blade. - -The Structure of the RX Ring. -============================= -The receive (RX) ring is a circular linked list of RX descriptors, -together with three pointers into the ring that are used to manage its -contents. - -The elements of the ring are called "descriptors" or "descrs"; they -describe the received data. This includes a pointer to a buffer -containing the received data, the buffer size, and various status bits. - -There are three primary states that a descriptor can be in: "empty", -"full" and "not-in-use". An "empty" or "ready" descriptor is ready -to receive data from the hardware. A "full" descriptor has data in it, -and is waiting to be emptied and processed by the OS. A "not-in-use" -descriptor is neither empty or full; it is simply not ready. It may -not even have a data buffer in it, or is otherwise unusable. - -During normal operation, on device startup, the OS (specifically, the -spidernet device driver) allocates a set of RX descriptors and RX -buffers. These are all marked "empty", ready to receive data. This -ring is handed off to the hardware, which sequentially fills in the -buffers, and marks them "full". The OS follows up, taking the full -buffers, processing them, and re-marking them empty. - -This filling and emptying is managed by three pointers, the "head" -and "tail" pointers, managed by the OS, and a hardware current -descriptor pointer (GDACTDPA). The GDACTDPA points at the descr -currently being filled. When this descr is filled, the hardware -marks it full, and advances the GDACTDPA by one. Thus, when there is -flowing RX traffic, every descr behind it should be marked "full", -and everything in front of it should be "empty". If the hardware -discovers that the current descr is not empty, it will signal an -interrupt, and halt processing. - -The tail pointer tails or trails the hardware pointer. When the -hardware is ahead, the tail pointer will be pointing at a "full" -descr. The OS will process this descr, and then mark it "not-in-use", -and advance the tail pointer. Thus, when there is flowing RX traffic, -all of the descrs in front of the tail pointer should be "full", and -all of those behind it should be "not-in-use". When RX traffic is not -flowing, then the tail pointer can catch up to the hardware pointer. -The OS will then note that the current tail is "empty", and halt -processing. - -The head pointer (somewhat mis-named) follows after the tail pointer. -When traffic is flowing, then the head pointer will be pointing at -a "not-in-use" descr. The OS will perform various housekeeping duties -on this descr. This includes allocating a new data buffer and -dma-mapping it so as to make it visible to the hardware. The OS will -then mark the descr as "empty", ready to receive data. Thus, when there -is flowing RX traffic, everything in front of the head pointer should -be "not-in-use", and everything behind it should be "empty". If no -RX traffic is flowing, then the head pointer can catch up to the tail -pointer, at which point the OS will notice that the head descr is -"empty", and it will halt processing. - -Thus, in an idle system, the GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers will -all be pointing at the same descr, which should be "empty". All of the -other descrs in the ring should be "empty" as well. - -The show_rx_chain() routine will print out the locations of the -GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers. It will also summarize the contents -of the ring, starting at the tail pointer, and listing the status -of the descrs that follow. - -A typical example of the output, for a nearly idle system, might be - -net eth1: Total number of descrs=256 -net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=20 -net eth1: Chain head is at 20 -net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 21 -net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800101 -net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 22 -net eth1: Last 255 descrs with stat=xa0800000 - -In the above, the hardware has filled in one descr, number 20. Both -head and tail are pointing at 20, because it has not yet been emptied. -Meanwhile, hw is pointing at 21, which is free. - -The "Have nnn decrs" refers to the descr starting at the tail: in this -case, nnn=1 descr, starting at descr 20. The "Last nnn descrs" refers -to all of the rest of the descrs, from the last status change. The "nnn" -is a count of how many descrs have exactly the same status. - -The status x4... corresponds to "full" and status xa... corresponds -to "empty". The actual value printed is RXCOMST_A. - -In the device driver source code, a different set of names are -used for these same concepts, so that - -"empty" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_CARDOWNED == 0xa -"full" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_FRAME_END == 0x4 -"not in use" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_NOT_IN_USE == 0xf - - -The RX RAM full bug/feature -=========================== - -As long as the OS can empty out the RX buffers at a rate faster than -the hardware can fill them, there is no problem. If, for some reason, -the OS fails to empty the RX ring fast enough, the hardware GDACTDPA -pointer will catch up to the head, notice the not-empty condition, -ad stop. However, RX packets may still continue arriving on the wire. -The spidernet chip can save some limited number of these in local RAM. -When this local ram fills up, the spider chip will issue an interrupt -indicating this (GHIINT0STS will show ERRINT, and the GRMFLLINT bit -will be set in GHIINT1STS). When the RX ram full condition occurs, -a certain bug/feature is triggered that has to be specially handled. -This section describes the special handling for this condition. - -When the OS finally has a chance to run, it will empty out the RX ring. -In particular, it will clear the descriptor on which the hardware had -stopped. However, once the hardware has decided that a certain -descriptor is invalid, it will not restart at that descriptor; instead -it will restart at the next descr. This potentially will lead to a -deadlock condition, as the tail pointer will be pointing at this descr, -which, from the OS point of view, is empty; the OS will be waiting for -this descr to be filled. However, the hardware has skipped this descr, -and is filling the next descrs. Since the OS doesn't see this, there -is a potential deadlock, with the OS waiting for one descr to fill, -while the hardware is waiting for a different set of descrs to become -empty. - -A call to show_rx_chain() at this point indicates the nature of the -problem. A typical print when the network is hung shows the following: - -net eth1: Spider RX RAM full, incoming packets might be discarded! -net eth1: Total number of descrs=256 -net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=255 -net eth1: Chain head is at 255 -net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 0 -net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000 -net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 1 -net eth1: Have 127 descrs with stat=x40800101 -net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800001 -net eth1: Have 126 descrs with stat=x40800101 -net eth1: Last 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000 - -Both the tail and head pointers are pointing at descr 255, which is -marked xa... which is "empty". Thus, from the OS point of view, there -is nothing to be done. In particular, there is the implicit assumption -that everything in front of the "empty" descr must surely also be empty, -as explained in the last section. The OS is waiting for descr 255 to -become non-empty, which, in this case, will never happen. - -The HW pointer is at descr 0. This descr is marked 0x4.. or "full". -Since its already full, the hardware can do nothing more, and thus has -halted processing. Notice that descrs 0 through 254 are all marked -"full", while descr 254 and 255 are empty. (The "Last 1 descrs" is -descr 254, since tail was at 255.) Thus, the system is deadlocked, -and there can be no forward progress; the OS thinks there's nothing -to do, and the hardware has nowhere to put incoming data. - -This bug/feature is worked around with the spider_net_resync_head_ptr() -routine. When the driver receives RX interrupts, but an examination -of the RX chain seems to show it is empty, then it is probable that -the hardware has skipped a descr or two (sometimes dozens under heavy -network conditions). The spider_net_resync_head_ptr() subroutine will -search the ring for the next full descr, and the driver will resume -operations there. Since this will leave "holes" in the ring, there -is also a spider_net_resync_tail_ptr() that will skip over such holes. - -As of this writing, the spider_net_resync() strategy seems to work very -well, even under heavy network loads. - - -The TX ring -=========== -The TX ring uses a low-watermark interrupt scheme to make sure that -the TX queue is appropriately serviced for large packet sizes. - -For packet sizes greater than about 1KBytes, the kernel can fill -the TX ring quicker than the device can drain it. Once the ring -is full, the netdev is stopped. When there is room in the ring, -the netdev needs to be reawakened, so that more TX packets are placed -in the ring. The hardware can empty the ring about four times per jiffy, -so its not appropriate to wait for the poll routine to refill, since -the poll routine runs only once per jiffy. The low-watermark mechanism -marks a descr about 1/4th of the way from the bottom of the queue, so -that an interrupt is generated when the descr is processed. This -interrupt wakes up the netdev, which can then refill the queue. -For large packets, this mechanism generates a relatively small number -of interrupts, about 1K/sec. For smaller packets, this will drop to zero -interrupts, as the hardware can empty the queue faster than the kernel -can fill it. - - - ======= END OF DOCUMENT ======== - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bf91a87c7acf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +Wi-Fi Device Drivers +==================== + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + intel/ipw2100 + intel/ipw2200 + ray_cs + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2100.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..883e96355799 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2100.rst @@ -0,0 +1,323 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +=========================================== +Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Driver for Linux +=========================================== + +Support for: + +- Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Network Connection + +Copyright |copy| 2003-2006, Intel Corporation + +README.ipw2100 + +:Version: git-1.1.5 +:Date: January 25, 2006 + +.. Index + + 0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER + 1. Introduction + 2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Features + 3. Command Line Parameters + 4. Sysfs Helper Files + 5. Radio Kill Switch + 6. Dynamic Firmware + 7. Power Management + 8. Support + 9. License + + +0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER +================================================= + +Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!! + +Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and +quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and +governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they +are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are +generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, +satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes +necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid +interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to +provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and +governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the +product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and +software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect +radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These +parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, +channel scanning, and human exposure. + +For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties +of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN +adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any +patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that +have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, +utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have +not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for +ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear +no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated +with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under +the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and +(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing +support to any third parties for such modified products. + +Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be +modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval +upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and +system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be +non-compliant. + +The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a +part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory +requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As +such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of +solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please +obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/wireless/sb/CS-006408.htm + +1. Introduction +=============== + +This document provides a brief overview of the features supported by the +IPW2100 driver project. The main project website, where the latest +development version of the driver can be found, is: + + http://ipw2100.sourceforge.net + +There you can find the not only the latest releases, but also information about +potential fixes and patches, as well as links to the development mailing list +for the driver project. + + +2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Supported Features +=============================================== + +- Managed (BSS) and Ad-Hoc (IBSS) +- WEP (shared key and open) +- Wireless Tools support +- 802.1x (tested with XSupplicant 1.0.1) + +Enabled (but not supported) features: +- Monitor/RFMon mode +- WPA/WPA2 + +The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection +on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been +performed on a given feature. + + +3. Command Line Parameters +========================== + +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used +by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this +syntax:: + + modprobe ipw2100 [<option>=<VAL1><,VAL2>...] + +For example, to disable the radio on driver loading, enter: + + modprobe ipw2100 disable=1 + +The ipw2100 driver supports the following module parameters: + +========= ============== ============ ============================== +Name Value Example Meaning +========= ============== ============ ============================== +debug 0x0-0xffffffff debug=1024 Debug level set to 1024 +mode 0,1,2 mode=1 AdHoc +channel int channel=3 Only valid in AdHoc or Monitor +associate boolean associate=0 Do NOT auto associate +disable boolean disable=1 Do not power the HW +========= ============== ============ ============================== + + +4. Sysfs Helper Files +===================== + +There are several ways to control the behavior of the driver. Many of the +general capabilities are exposed through the Wireless Tools (iwconfig). There +are a few capabilities that are exposed through entries in the Linux Sysfs. + + +**Driver Level** + +For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/ + + debug_level + This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter. For + information on the various debugging levels available, run the 'dvals' + script found in the driver source directory. + + .. note:: + + 'debug_level' is only enabled if CONFIG_IPW2100_DEBUG is turn on. + +**Device Level** + +For the device level files look in:: + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/{PCI-ID}/ + +For example:: + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/0000:02:01.0 + +For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100: + + rf_kill + read + + == ========================================= + 0 RF kill not enabled (radio on) + 1 SW based RF kill active (radio off) + 2 HW based RF kill active (radio off) + 3 Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off) + == ========================================= + + write + + == ================================================== + 0 If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on + 1 If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill + == ================================================== + + .. note:: + + If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW + based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on + + +5. Radio Kill Switch +==================== + +Most laptops provide the ability for the user to physically disable the radio. +Some vendors have implemented this as a physical switch that requires no +software to turn the radio off and on. On other laptops, however, the switch +is controlled through a button being pressed and a software driver then making +calls to turn the radio off and on. This is referred to as a "software based +RF kill switch" + +See the Sysfs helper file 'rf_kill' for determining the state of the RF switch +on your system. + + +6. Dynamic Firmware +=================== + +As the firmware is licensed under a restricted use license, it can not be +included within the kernel sources. To enable the IPW2100 you will need a +firmware image to load into the wireless NIC's processors. + +You can obtain these images from <http://ipw2100.sf.net/firmware.php>. + +See INSTALL for instructions on installing the firmware. + + +7. Power Management +=================== + +The IPW2100 supports the configuration of the Power Save Protocol +through a private wireless extension interface. The IPW2100 supports +the following different modes: + + === =========================================================== + off No power management. Radio is always on. + on Automatic power management + 1-5 Different levels of power management. The higher the + number the greater the power savings, but with an impact to + packet latencies. + === =========================================================== + +Power management works by powering down the radio after a certain +interval of time has passed where no packets are passed through the +radio. Once powered down, the radio remains in that state for a given +period of time. For higher power savings, the interval between last +packet processed to sleep is shorter and the sleep period is longer. + +When the radio is asleep, the access point sending data to the station +must buffer packets at the AP until the station wakes up and requests +any buffered packets. If you have an AP that does not correctly support +the PSP protocol you may experience packet loss or very poor performance +while power management is enabled. If this is the case, you will need +to try and find a firmware update for your AP, or disable power +management (via ``iwconfig eth1 power off``) + +To configure the power level on the IPW2100 you use a combination of +iwconfig and iwpriv. iwconfig is used to turn power management on, off, +and set it to auto. + + ========================= ==================================== + iwconfig eth1 power off Disables radio power down + iwconfig eth1 power on Enables radio power management to + last set level (defaults to AUTO) + iwpriv eth1 set_power 0 Sets power level to AUTO and enables + power management if not previously + enabled. + iwpriv eth1 set_power 1-5 Set the power level as specified, + enabling power management if not + previously enabled. + ========================= ==================================== + +You can view the current power level setting via:: + + iwpriv eth1 get_power + +It will return the current period or timeout that is configured as a string +in the form of xxxx/yyyy (z) where xxxx is the timeout interval (amount of +time after packet processing), yyyy is the period to sleep (amount of time to +wait before powering the radio and querying the access point for buffered +packets), and z is the 'power level'. If power management is turned off the +xxxx/yyyy will be replaced with 'off' -- the level reported will be the active +level if `iwconfig eth1 power on` is invoked. + + +8. Support +========== + +For general development information and support, +go to: + + http://ipw2100.sf.net/ + +The ipw2100 1.1.0 driver and firmware can be downloaded from: + + http://support.intel.com + +For installation support on the ipw2100 1.1.0 driver on Linux kernels +2.6.8 or greater, email support is available from: + + http://supportmail.intel.com + +9. License +========== + + Copyright |copy| 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it + under the terms of the GNU General Public License (version 2) as + published by the Free Software Foundation. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT + ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or + FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for + more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with + this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 + Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + + The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the + file called LICENSE. + + License Contact Information: + + James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com> + + Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2200.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2200.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0cb42d2fd7e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2200.rst @@ -0,0 +1,526 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +============================================== +Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux +============================================== + + +Support for: + +- Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection +- Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection + +Note: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux and Intel(R) +PRO/Wireless 2200BG Driver for Linux is a unified driver that works on +both hardware adapters listed above. In this document the Intel(R) +PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux will be used to reference the +unified driver. + +Copyright |copy| 2004-2006, Intel Corporation + +README.ipw2200 + +:Version: 1.1.2 +:Date: March 30, 2006 + + +.. Index + + 0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER + 1. Introduction + 1.1. Overview of features + 1.2. Module parameters + 1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods + 1.4. Sysfs Helper Files + 1.5. Supported channels + 2. Ad-Hoc Networking + 3. Interacting with Wireless Tools + 3.1. iwconfig mode + 3.2. iwconfig sens + 4. About the Version Numbers + 5. Firmware installation + 6. Support + 7. License + + +0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER +================================================= + +Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!! + +Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and +quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and +governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they +are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are +generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, +satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes +necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid +interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to +provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and +governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the +product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and +software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect +radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These +parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, +channel scanning, and human exposure. + +For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties +of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN +adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any +patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that +have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, +utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have +not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for +ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear +no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated +with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under +the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and +(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing +support to any third parties for such modified products. + +Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be +modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval +upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and +system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be +non-compliant. + +The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a +part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory +requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As +such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of +solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please +obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at: + +http://support.intel.com + + +1. Introduction +=============== + +The following sections attempt to provide a brief introduction to using +the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux. + +This document is not meant to be a comprehensive manual on +understanding or using wireless technologies, but should be sufficient +to get you moving without wires on Linux. + +For information on building and installing the driver, see the INSTALL +file. + + +1.1. Overview of Features +------------------------- +The current release (1.1.2) supports the following features: + ++ BSS mode (Infrastructure, Managed) ++ IBSS mode (Ad-Hoc) ++ WEP (OPEN and SHARED KEY mode) ++ 802.1x EAP via wpa_supplicant and xsupplicant ++ Wireless Extension support ++ Full B and G rate support (2200 and 2915) ++ Full A rate support (2915 only) ++ Transmit power control ++ S state support (ACPI suspend/resume) + +The following features are currently enabled, but not officially +supported: + ++ WPA ++ long/short preamble support ++ Monitor mode (aka RFMon) + +The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection +on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been +performed on a given feature. + + + +1.2. Command Line Parameters +---------------------------- + +Like many modules used in the Linux kernel, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless +2915ABG Driver for Linux allows configuration options to be provided +as module parameters. The most common way to specify a module parameter +is via the command line. + +The general form is:: + + % modprobe ipw2200 parameter=value + +Where the supported parameter are: + + associate + Set to 0 to disable the auto scan-and-associate functionality of the + driver. If disabled, the driver will not attempt to scan + for and associate to a network until it has been configured with + one or more properties for the target network, for example configuring + the network SSID. Default is 0 (do not auto-associate) + + Example: % modprobe ipw2200 associate=0 + + auto_create + Set to 0 to disable the auto creation of an Ad-Hoc network + matching the channel and network name parameters provided. + Default is 1. + + channel + channel number for association. The normal method for setting + the channel would be to use the standard wireless tools + (i.e. `iwconfig eth1 channel 10`), but it is useful sometimes + to set this while debugging. Channel 0 means 'ANY' + + debug + If using a debug build, this is used to control the amount of debug + info is logged. See the 'dvals' and 'load' script for more info on + how to use this (the dvals and load scripts are provided as part + of the ipw2200 development snapshot releases available from the + SourceForge project at http://ipw2200.sf.net) + + led + Can be used to turn on experimental LED code. + 0 = Off, 1 = On. Default is 1. + + mode + Can be used to set the default mode of the adapter. + 0 = Managed, 1 = Ad-Hoc, 2 = Monitor + + +1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods +--------------------------------------- + +As an interface designed to handle generic hardware, there are certain +capabilities not exposed through the normal Wireless Tool interface. As +such, a provision is provided for a driver to declare custom, or +private, methods. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux +defines several of these to configure various settings. + +The general form of using the private wireless methods is:: + + % iwpriv $IFNAME method parameters + +Where $IFNAME is the interface name the device is registered with +(typically eth1, customized via one of the various network interface +name managers, such as ifrename) + +The supported private methods are: + + get_mode + Can be used to report out which IEEE mode the driver is + configured to support. Example: + + % iwpriv eth1 get_mode + eth1 get_mode:802.11bg (6) + + set_mode + Can be used to configure which IEEE mode the driver will + support. + + Usage:: + + % iwpriv eth1 set_mode {mode} + + Where {mode} is a number in the range 1-7: + + == ===================== + 1 802.11a (2915 only) + 2 802.11b + 3 802.11ab (2915 only) + 4 802.11g + 5 802.11ag (2915 only) + 6 802.11bg + 7 802.11abg (2915 only) + == ===================== + + get_preamble + Can be used to report configuration of preamble length. + + set_preamble + Can be used to set the configuration of preamble length: + + Usage:: + + % iwpriv eth1 set_preamble {mode} + + Where {mode} is one of: + + == ======================================== + 1 Long preamble only + 0 Auto (long or short based on connection) + == ======================================== + + +1.4. Sysfs Helper Files +----------------------- + +The Linux kernel provides a pseudo file system that can be used to +access various components of the operating system. The Intel(R) +PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes several configuration +parameters through this mechanism. + +An entry in the sysfs can support reading and/or writing. You can +typically query the contents of a sysfs entry through the use of cat, +and can set the contents via echo. For example:: + + % cat /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level + +Will report the current debug level of the driver's logging subsystem +(only available if CONFIG_IPW2200_DEBUG was configured when the driver +was built). + +You can set the debug level via:: + + % echo $VALUE > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level + +Where $VALUE would be a number in the case of this sysfs entry. The +input to sysfs files does not have to be a number. For example, the +firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transferring +the firmware image from user space into the driver. + +The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes sysfs entries +at two levels -- driver level, which apply to all instances of the driver +(in the event that there are more than one device installed) and device +level, which applies only to the single specific instance. + + +1.4.1 Driver Level Sysfs Helper Files +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/ + + debug_level + This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter + + + +1.4.2 Device Level Sysfs Helper Files +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +For the device level files, look in:: + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/{PCI-ID}/ + +For example::: + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/0000:02:01.0 + +For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200: + + rf_kill + read - + + == ========================================= + 0 RF kill not enabled (radio on) + 1 SW based RF kill active (radio off) + 2 HW based RF kill active (radio off) + 3 Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off) + == ========================================= + + write - + + == ================================================== + 0 If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on + 1 If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill + == ================================================== + + .. note:: + + If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW + based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on + + ucode + read-only access to the ucode version number + + led + read - + + == ================= + 0 LED code disabled + 1 LED code enabled + == ================= + + write - + + == ================ + 0 Disable LED code + 1 Enable LED code + == ================ + + + .. note:: + + The LED code has been reported to hang some systems when + running ifconfig and is therefore disabled by default. + + +1.5. Supported channels +----------------------- + +Upon loading the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux, a +message stating the detected geography code and the number of 802.11 +channels supported by the card will be displayed in the log. + +The geography code corresponds to a regulatory domain as shown in the +table below. + + +------+----------------------------+--------------------+ + | | | Supported channels | + | Code | Geography +----------+---------+ + | | | 802.11bg | 802.11a | + +======+============================+==========+=========+ + | --- | Restricted | 11 | 0 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZF | Custom US/Canada | 11 | 8 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZD | Rest of World | 13 | 0 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZA | Custom USA & Europe & High | 11 | 13 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZB | Custom NA & Europe | 11 | 13 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZC | Custom Japan | 11 | 4 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZM | Custom | 11 | 0 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZE | Europe | 13 | 19 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZJ | Custom Japan | 14 | 4 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZR | Rest of World | 14 | 0 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZH | High Band | 13 | 4 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZG | Custom Europe | 13 | 4 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZK | Europe | 13 | 24 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + | ZZL | Europe | 11 | 13 | + +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+ + +2. Ad-Hoc Networking +===================== + +When using a device in an Ad-Hoc network, it is useful to understand the +sequence and requirements for the driver to be able to create, join, or +merge networks. + +The following attempts to provide enough information so that you can +have a consistent experience while using the driver as a member of an +Ad-Hoc network. + +2.1. Joining an Ad-Hoc Network +------------------------------ + +The easiest way to get onto an Ad-Hoc network is to join one that +already exists. + +2.2. Creating an Ad-Hoc Network +------------------------------- + +An Ad-Hoc networks is created using the syntax of the Wireless tool. + +For Example: +iwconfig eth1 mode ad-hoc essid testing channel 2 + +2.3. Merging Ad-Hoc Networks +---------------------------- + + +3. Interaction with Wireless Tools +================================== + +3.1 iwconfig mode +----------------- + +When configuring the mode of the adapter, all run-time configured parameters +are reset to the value used when the module was loaded. This includes +channels, rates, ESSID, etc. + +3.2 iwconfig sens +----------------- + +The 'iwconfig ethX sens XX' command will not set the signal sensitivity +threshold, as described in iwconfig documentation, but rather the number +of consecutive missed beacons that will trigger handover, i.e. roaming +to another access point. At the same time, it will set the disassociation +threshold to 3 times the given value. + + +4. About the Version Numbers +============================= + +Due to the nature of open source development projects, there are +frequently changes being incorporated that have not gone through +a complete validation process. These changes are incorporated into +development snapshot releases. + +Releases are numbered with a three level scheme: + + major.minor.development + +Any version where the 'development' portion is 0 (for example +1.0.0, 1.1.0, etc.) indicates a stable version that will be made +available for kernel inclusion. + +Any version where the 'development' portion is not a 0 (for +example 1.0.1, 1.1.5, etc.) indicates a development version that is +being made available for testing and cutting edge users. The stability +and functionality of the development releases are not know. We make +efforts to try and keep all snapshots reasonably stable, but due to the +frequency of their release, and the desire to get those releases +available as quickly as possible, unknown anomalies should be expected. + +The major version number will be incremented when significant changes +are made to the driver. Currently, there are no major changes planned. + +5. Firmware installation +======================== + +The driver requires a firmware image, download it and extract the +files under /lib/firmware (or wherever your hotplug's firmware.agent +will look for firmware files) + +The firmware can be downloaded from the following URL: + + http://ipw2200.sf.net/ + + +6. Support +========== + +For direct support of the 1.0.0 version, you can contact +http://supportmail.intel.com, or you can use the open source project +support. + +For general information and support, go to: + + http://ipw2200.sf.net/ + + +7. License +========== + + Copyright |copy| 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it + under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as + published by the Free Software Foundation. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT + ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or + FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for + more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with + this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 + Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + + The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the + file called LICENSE. + + Contact Information: + + James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com> + + Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/ray_cs.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/ray_cs.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9a46d1ae8f20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/ray_cs.rst @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +========================= +Raylink wireless LAN card +========================= + +September 21, 1999 + +Copyright |copy| 1998 Corey Thomas (corey@world.std.com) + +This file is the documentation for the Raylink Wireless LAN card driver for +Linux. The Raylink wireless LAN card is a PCMCIA card which provides IEEE +802.11 compatible wireless network connectivity at 1 and 2 megabits/second. +See http://www.raytheon.com/micro/raylink/ for more information on the Raylink +card. This driver is in early development and does have bugs. See the known +bugs and limitations at the end of this document for more information. +This driver also works with WebGear's Aviator 2.4 and Aviator Pro +wireless LAN cards. + +As of kernel 2.3.18, the ray_cs driver is part of the Linux kernel +source. My web page for the development of ray_cs is at +http://web.ralinktech.com/ralink/Home/Support/Linux.html +and I can be emailed at corey@world.std.com + +The kernel driver is based on ray_cs-1.62.tgz + +The driver at my web page is intended to be used as an add on to +David Hinds pcmcia package. All the command line parameters are +available when compiled as a module. When built into the kernel, only +the essid= string parameter is available via the kernel command line. +This will change after the method of sorting out parameters for all +the PCMCIA drivers is agreed upon. If you must have a built in driver +with nondefault parameters, they can be edited in +/usr/src/linux/drivers/net/pcmcia/ray_cs.c. Searching for module_param +will find them all. + +Information on card services is available at: + + http://pcmcia-cs.sourceforge.net/ + + +Card services user programs are still required for PCMCIA devices. +pcmcia-cs-3.1.1 or greater is required for the kernel version of +the driver. + +Currently, ray_cs is not part of David Hinds card services package, +so the following magic is required. + +At the end of the /etc/pcmcia/config.opts file, add the line: +source ./ray_cs.opts +This will make card services read the ray_cs.opts file +when starting. Create the file /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts containing the +following:: + + #### start of /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts ################### + # Configuration options for Raylink Wireless LAN PCMCIA card + device "ray_cs" + class "network" module "misc/ray_cs" + + card "RayLink PC Card WLAN Adapter" + manfid 0x01a6, 0x0000 + bind "ray_cs" + + module "misc/ray_cs" opts "" + #### end of /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts ##################### + + +To join an existing network with +different parameters, contact the network administrator for the +configuration information, and edit /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts. +Add the parameters below between the empty quotes. + +Parameters for ray_cs driver which may be specified in ray_cs.opts: + +=============== =============== ============================================= +bc integer 0 = normal mode (802.11 timing), + 1 = slow down inter frame timing to allow + operation with older breezecom access + points. + +beacon_period integer beacon period in Kilo-microseconds, + + legal values = must be integer multiple + of hop dwell + + default = 256 + +country integer 1 = USA (default), + 2 = Europe, + 3 = Japan, + 4 = Korea, + 5 = Spain, + 6 = France, + 7 = Israel, + 8 = Australia + +essid string ESS ID - network name to join + + string with maximum length of 32 chars + default value = "ADHOC_ESSID" + +hop_dwell integer hop dwell time in Kilo-microseconds + + legal values = 16,32,64,128(default),256 + +irq_mask integer linux standard 16 bit value 1bit/IRQ + + lsb is IRQ 0, bit 1 is IRQ 1 etc. + Used to restrict choice of IRQ's to use. + Recommended method for controlling + interrupts is in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts + +net_type integer 0 (default) = adhoc network, + 1 = infrastructure + +phy_addr string string containing new MAC address in + hex, must start with x eg + x00008f123456 + +psm integer 0 = continuously active, + 1 = power save mode (not useful yet) + +pc_debug integer (0-5) larger values for more verbose + logging. Replaces ray_debug. + +ray_debug integer Replaced with pc_debug + +ray_mem_speed integer defaults to 500 + +sniffer integer 0 = not sniffer (default), + 1 = sniffer which can be used to record all + network traffic using tcpdump or similar, + but no normal network use is allowed. + +translate integer 0 = no translation (encapsulate frames), + 1 = translation (RFC1042/802.1) +=============== =============== ============================================= + +More on sniffer mode: + +tcpdump does not understand 802.11 headers, so it can't +interpret the contents, but it can record to a file. This is only +useful for debugging 802.11 lowlevel protocols that are not visible to +linux. If you want to watch ftp xfers, or do similar things, you +don't need to use sniffer mode. Also, some packet types are never +sent up by the card, so you will never see them (ack, rts, cts, probe +etc.) There is a simple program (showcap) included in the ray_cs +package which parses the 802.11 headers. + +Known Problems and missing features + + Does not work with non x86 + + Does not work with SMP + + Support for defragmenting frames is not yet debugged, and in + fact is known to not work. I have never encountered a net set + up to fragment, but still, it should be fixed. + + The ioctl support is incomplete. The hardware address cannot be set + using ifconfig yet. If a different hardware address is needed, it may + be set using the phy_addr parameter in ray_cs.opts. This requires + a card insertion to take effect. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..370d8264d5dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only + +WWAN Device Drivers +=================== + +Contents: + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + iosm + t7xx + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/iosm.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/iosm.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aceb0223eb46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/iosm.rst @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only + +.. Copyright (C) 2020-21 Intel Corporation + +.. _iosm_driver_doc: + +=========================================== +IOSM Driver for Intel M.2 PCIe based Modems +=========================================== +The IOSM (IPC over Shared Memory) driver is a WWAN PCIe host driver developed +for linux or chrome platform for data exchange over PCIe interface between +Host platform & Intel M.2 Modem. The driver exposes interface conforming to the +MBIM protocol [1]. Any front end application ( eg: Modem Manager) could easily +manage the MBIM interface to enable data communication towards WWAN. + +Basic usage +=========== +MBIM functions are inactive when unmanaged. The IOSM driver only provides a +userspace interface MBIM "WWAN PORT" representing MBIM control channel and does +not play any role in managing the functionality. It is the job of a userspace +application to detect port enumeration and enable MBIM functionality. + +Examples of few such userspace application are: +- mbimcli (included with the libmbim [2] library), and +- Modem Manager [3] + +Management Applications to carry out below required actions for establishing +MBIM IP session: +- open the MBIM control channel +- configure network connection settings +- connect to network +- configure IP network interface + +Management application development +================================== +The driver and userspace interfaces are described below. The MBIM protocol is +described in [1] Mobile Broadband Interface Model v1.0 Errata-1. + +MBIM control channel userspace ABI +---------------------------------- + +/dev/wwan0mbim0 character device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The driver exposes an MBIM interface to the MBIM function by implementing +MBIM WWAN Port. The userspace end of the control channel pipe is a +/dev/wwan0mbim0 character device. Application shall use this interface for +MBIM protocol communication. + +Fragmentation +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The userspace application is responsible for all control message fragmentation +and defragmentation as per MBIM specification. + +/dev/wwan0mbim0 write() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The MBIM control messages from the management application must not exceed the +negotiated control message size. + +/dev/wwan0mbim0 read() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The management application must accept control messages of up the negotiated +control message size. + +MBIM data channel userspace ABI +------------------------------- + +wwan0-X network device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The IOSM driver exposes IP link interface "wwan0-X" of type "wwan" for IP +traffic. Iproute network utility is used for creating "wwan0-X" network +interface and for associating it with MBIM IP session. The Driver supports +upto 8 IP sessions for simultaneous IP communication. + +The userspace management application is responsible for creating new IP link +prior to establishing MBIM IP session where the SessionId is greater than 0. + +For example, creating new IP link for a MBIM IP session with SessionId 1: + + ip link add dev wwan0-1 parentdev-name wwan0 type wwan linkid 1 + +The driver will automatically map the "wwan0-1" network device to MBIM IP +session 1. + +References +========== +[1] "MBIM (Mobile Broadband Interface Model) Errata-1" + - https://www.usb.org/document-library/ + +[2] libmbim - "a glib-based library for talking to WWAN modems and + devices which speak the Mobile Interface Broadband Model (MBIM) + protocol" + - http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/libmbim/ + +[3] Modem Manager - "a DBus-activated daemon which controls mobile + broadband (2G/3G/4G) devices and connections" + - http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/ModemManager/ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/t7xx.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/t7xx.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dd5b731957ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wwan/t7xx.rst @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only + +.. Copyright (C) 2020-21 Intel Corporation + +.. _t7xx_driver_doc: + +============================================ +t7xx driver for MTK PCIe based T700 5G modem +============================================ +The t7xx driver is a WWAN PCIe host driver developed for linux or Chrome OS platforms +for data exchange over PCIe interface between Host platform & MediaTek's T700 5G modem. +The driver exposes an interface conforming to the MBIM protocol [1]. Any front end +application (e.g. Modem Manager) could easily manage the MBIM interface to enable +data communication towards WWAN. The driver also provides an interface to interact +with the MediaTek's modem via AT commands. + +Basic usage +=========== +MBIM & AT functions are inactive when unmanaged. The t7xx driver provides +WWAN port userspace interfaces representing MBIM & AT control channels and does +not play any role in managing their functionality. It is the job of a userspace +application to detect port enumeration and enable MBIM & AT functionalities. + +Examples of few such userspace applications are: + +- mbimcli (included with the libmbim [2] library), and +- Modem Manager [3] + +Management Applications to carry out below required actions for establishing +MBIM IP session: + +- open the MBIM control channel +- configure network connection settings +- connect to network +- configure IP network interface + +Management Applications to carry out below required actions for send an AT +command and receive response: + +- open the AT control channel using a UART tool or a special user tool + +Management application development +================================== +The driver and userspace interfaces are described below. The MBIM protocol is +described in [1] Mobile Broadband Interface Model v1.0 Errata-1. + +MBIM control channel userspace ABI +---------------------------------- + +/dev/wwan0mbim0 character device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The driver exposes an MBIM interface to the MBIM function by implementing +MBIM WWAN Port. The userspace end of the control channel pipe is a +/dev/wwan0mbim0 character device. Application shall use this interface for +MBIM protocol communication. + +Fragmentation +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The userspace application is responsible for all control message fragmentation +and defragmentation as per MBIM specification. + +/dev/wwan0mbim0 write() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The MBIM control messages from the management application must not exceed the +negotiated control message size. + +/dev/wwan0mbim0 read() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The management application must accept control messages of up the negotiated +control message size. + +MBIM data channel userspace ABI +------------------------------- + +wwan0-X network device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The t7xx driver exposes IP link interface "wwan0-X" of type "wwan" for IP +traffic. Iproute network utility is used for creating "wwan0-X" network +interface and for associating it with MBIM IP session. + +The userspace management application is responsible for creating new IP link +prior to establishing MBIM IP session where the SessionId is greater than 0. + +For example, creating new IP link for a MBIM IP session with SessionId 1: + + ip link add dev wwan0-1 parentdev wwan0 type wwan linkid 1 + +The driver will automatically map the "wwan0-1" network device to MBIM IP +session 1. + +AT port userspace ABI +---------------------------------- + +/dev/wwan0at0 character device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The driver exposes an AT port by implementing AT WWAN Port. +The userspace end of the control port is a /dev/wwan0at0 character +device. Application shall use this interface to issue AT commands. + +The MediaTek's T700 modem supports the 3GPP TS 27.007 [4] specification. + +References +========== +[1] *MBIM (Mobile Broadband Interface Model) Errata-1* + +- https://www.usb.org/document-library/ + +[2] *libmbim "a glib-based library for talking to WWAN modems and devices which +speak the Mobile Interface Broadband Model (MBIM) protocol"* + +- http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/libmbim/ + +[3] *Modem Manager "a DBus-activated daemon which controls mobile broadband +(2G/3G/4G/5G) devices and connections"* + +- http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/ModemManager/ + +[4] *Specification # 27.007 - 3GPP* + +- https://www.3gpp.org/DynaReport/27007.htm |
